349 55 2MB
English Pages 226 Year 2005
Video Art
Video Art A Guided Tour CATHERINE ELWES WITH A FOREWORD BY
SHIRIN NESHAT
in association with
Publishedin2005byI.B.Tauris&CoLtd 6SalemRoad,LondonW24BU 175FifthAvenue,NewYorkNY10010 www.ibtauris.com IntheUnitedStatesofAmericaandinCanadadistributedby PalgraveMacmillan,adivisionofStMartin’sPress 175FifthAvenue,NewYorkNY10010 Copyright©CatherineElwes,2005 TherightofCatherineElwestobeidentifiedastheauthorofthisworkhasbeen assertedbyherinaccordancewiththeCopyright,DesignsandPatentsAct1988. Allrightsreserved.Exceptforbriefquotationsinareview,thisbook,oranypart thereof,maynotbereproduced,storedinorintroducedintoaretrievalsystem,or transmitted,inanyformorbyanymeans,electronic,mechanical,photocopying, recordingorotherwise,withoutthepriorwrittenpermissionofthepublisher. ISBN1850435464 EAN9781850435464
AfullCIPrecordforthisbookisavailablefromtheBritishLibrary AfullCIPrecordforthisbookisavailablefromtheLibraryofCongress LibraryofCongresscatalogcard:available
TypesetinITCSlimbach PrintedandboundinGreatBritainbyMPGBooksLtd,Bodmin
Contents
ListofIllustrations
vi
ForewordbyShirinNeshat
ix
Acknowledgements
xi
1.Introduction:FromtheMarginstotheMainstream
1
2.TheModernistInheritance: TamperingwiththeTechnology,andOtherInterferences
21
3.DisruptingtheContent:Feminism
37
4.Masculinities:Class,GayandRacialEquality
59
5.Language:ItsDeconstructionandtheUKScene
76
6.TelevisionSpoofsandScratch:ParodyandOtherformsofSincereFlattery
96
7.VideoArtonTelevision
117
8.VideoSculpture
141
9.The1990sandtheNewMillennium
158
Notes
194
Bibliography
205
IndexandVideography
208
Illustrations
Cover:MickHartney,StateofDivision(1979),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
DavidHall,ThisisaTelevisionReceiver(1976).Commissionedby BBCTVastheunannouncedopeningpiecefortheirArenavideoart programme,firsttransmitted10March1976.Courtesyoftheartist.
32
SteinaVasulka,ViolinPower:ThePerformance(1992topresent), videoperformance.Courtesyoftheartist.
34
LisaSteele,TheBalladofDanPeoples(1976),videotape.Courtesy oftheartistandVtape,Toronto.
44
KatharineMeynell,Hannah’sSong(1986),withHannahKatesMorgan, videotape.Courtesyoftheartist.
46
VeraFrenkelasoneofseveralnarratorsinhervideoTheLastScreening Room:AValentine(1984,r.t.44minutes).Courtesyoftheartistand Vtape,Toronto.
56
6.
KeithPiper,TheNation’sFinest(1990),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. 60
7.
CerithWynEvans,KimWildeAuditions(1996),videotape.Courtesy oftheartist.
63
ColinCampbell,videotapefromtheseriesWomanfromMalibu(1976). CourtesyofVtape,Toronto.
65
StuartMarshall,OverOurDeadBodies(1991),televisionprogramme commissionedbyChannel4.ProducedbyRebeccaDoddsandMaya VisionProductions.
67
10. MichaelCurran,Amamisevuoi(1994),videotape.Courtesyofthe artistandDavidCurtisattheBritishArtists’FilmandVideoStudy Collection,UniversityoftheArts,London.
68
8. 9.
I l l u s t r a t i o n s • vii 11.
MickHartney,StateofDivision(1979),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. 70
12. SteveHawley,WehavefunDrawingConclusions(1981),videotape. Courtesyoftheartist.
71
13. DavidCritchley,PiecesINeverDid(1979),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. 85 14. CatherineElwes,KensingtonGore(1981),videotape.Courtesyoftheauthor.86 15. WilliamWegman,(SelectedWorks–Reel3)DeodorantCommercial (1972),videotape.CourtesyoftheartistandElectronicArtsIntermix (EAI),NewYork.
100
16. StanDouglas,I’mnotGary(1991),videotapefromtheseries Monodramas.Courtesyoftheartist.
103
17. IanBourn,SickasaDog(1989),videotapedescribedbytheartistas: Theopeningshot(Terrywiththestadiumasbackdrop)andtheshot ofTerryathislowestpoint(i.e.worryingaboutthe“legitimate”lifeof earningmoneyinordertopayitbackintaxes).’Courtesyoftheartist.
104
18. DaraBirnbaum,Technology/Transformation:WonderWoman (1978–1979),videotape.CourtesyoftheartistandElectronicArts Intermix(EAI),NewYork.
108
19. GorillaTapes,TheCommanderinChieffromDeathValleyDays(1984), videotape.CourtesyofJonathanDovey.
111
20. BillViola,TheReflectingPool(1980),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist.
127
21. GrahamYoung,AccidentsintheHomeno.17:GasFires(1984). CourtesyoftheartistandLUX,London.
133
22. NamJunePaik,FamilyofRobot:MotherandFather(1986),video sculpture,80x61.5x21inches.Photographer:CalKowal.Courtesy oftheartistandCarlSolwayGallery,Cincinnati,Ohio.
144
23. ChrisMeigh-Andrews,Eaud’Artifice(1991),videoinstallation. Courtesyoftheartist.
149
24. Ann-SofiSiden,WarteMal!(2002).Courtesyoftheartistandthe HaywardGallery,London.
156
25. PipilottiRist,I’mNotTheGirlWhoMissesMuch(1996),stillofsinglechannelvideotape,5’.Courtesyoftheartist,Hauser&Wirth,Zurich, LondonandLuhringAugustine,NewYork.
165
26. HarrisonandWood,SixBoxes(1997),videotape.Courtesyofthe artistsandtheUK/CanadianFilmandVideoExchange.
167
27. MarkLewis,PeepingTom(2000),35mmfilm(looped),transferred toDVD.Courtesyoftheartist.
169
viii • Video Art, A Guided Tour 28. ShirinNeshat,Tooba(2002).CourtesyoftheartistandBarbara GladstoneGallery,NewYork.
176
29. ZachariasKunuk,Nunavut(OurLand)(1994–1995),videotape. ©IgloolikIsumaProductions.
178
30. PortraitofAnnieSprinkle,fromthecoverofSlutsandGoddesses,Video Workshop(1994).ArtDirector:LeslieBarany.Photographer:AmyArdrey. CourtesyofAnnieSprinkle. 182 31. GillianWearing,2into1(1997),videobroadcastonChannel4. CourtesyofInterimArt,London.
186
32. StephanieSmithandEdwardStewart,MouthtoMouth(1996), videotape.Courtesyoftheartists.
187
33. TomSherman,SUB/EXTROS(2001),videotape,5min.30sec. Music:BernhardLoibner.Courtesyoftheartist.
190
Foreword
Overthepastfewdecadesthemovingimagehas,perhapsinevitably,become a crucial aspect of contemporary art. One could analyse artists’ initial draw tothemovingimageinmanydifferentways,butprimarily,Ithink,itreflects artists’collectiveresponsetotheirtime–tothepowerfulpresenceofmedia andtechnology,oftelevisionandcinemainmainstreamculture.Butperhaps thisdevelopmentequallyrepresentsartists’frustrationwiththeexclusivityof artanditsaudience;theirdesiretobringartclosertopopularcultureandto engagemorecloselywithrealsocialandpoliticalissues. Itisfairtosay,then,thatthegenerationofartistsfromthe1960sand1970s such as Nam June Paik, Vito Acconci and Bruce Nauman, and David Hall, TamaraKrikorianandStuartMarshallintheUK–amongstnumerousothers internationally–notonlychallengedtheartworldbybreakingitsconventions, but also succeeded in taking art outside of its normal perimeter, making art moreaccessibleandbringingitclosertothegeneralpublic. Thisfusionbetweenvisualart,newtechnologiesandthemovingimagehas beentransformedovertimebybothmovementswithinvideoartandindividual artists.Perhapsthebiggestdevelopmenthasbeenthatartistsarefinallyrelieved ofthetaskofmaking‘objects’,andcannowconceivetheirideasinawaythat becomes‘experiential’.IrememberthefirsttimeIexperiencedtheworkofBill Viola:Iwasmesmerizedbyhowhemanagedtoremainfaithfultothevocabulary ofvisualarts,ashisinstallationsbecamepainterlyandsculptural,yetretainthe magic,theintangibilityandthetransparency,ofthemovingimage. Naturally,asartistsexpandthevocabularyofart,theyredefinetherelationship of the spectator to the artwork. It appears that in such work the viewer is challengedtobean‘active’participant,nolongerthe‘passive’observer.We findvideoartistsfrequentlychoosingtoisolatetheirviewersinadarkroom, perhapspartiallytoavoiddistractionfromotherworksofart,andtodemand more in-depth attention (the same attention required of a feature film in a movietheatre),butmostimportantlytocreateenvironmentsinwhich,through
x • Video Art, A Guided Tour thecombineduseofimage,soundandphysicalelements,artcanimmersethe vieweronemotional,intellectualandphysicallevels. Whilstmuchearlyvideoworkwasprimarilymadeinrelationtothemedium oftelevisionandinresponsetoitsubiquity,asthisbookdemonstrates,since the1990s,manyartists,itseems,havebecomepreoccupiedwithacarefulstudy ofthelanguageofcinemaandhowitmightbeincorporatedintothevisualart vocabulary.Thegreatestdiscoveryforsomeofushasbeenthatcinemaisa ‘total’artform,simultaneouslyembodyingmediafromphotography,painting and sculpture to performance, theatre and music. The use of ‘narrative’ in videoarthasbeenofimmenseinterestandisstillindevelopment.Manyartists havegrownambitiousintheformulationoftheirconcepts,nolongersatisfied withexpressingtheirideasinasingleimage,butinagroupofimagesandin awaythatallowsthemtotella‘story’.Theincorporationofnarrativeintothe mediumofvideoartcanbetrickyasthereareimportantdistinctionsbetween thelanguageofcinemaoroftelevisionandthatofvisualart.Howeveritcan besuccessful,asthe‘NewNarrative’movementofthe1980shasshown,and Matthew Barney comes to mind as a contemporary artist who has uniquely crossedthatboundarywithouttakingtheriskofmimickingconventionalfilm. Finally,oneofthegreatestimpactsofthemovingimageinvisualartshas beentoencourageartiststobemoreambitious–byabandoning‘studioart’, by stepping into the world, by blurring boundaries between mediums and by working collaboratively. Video Art, A Guided Tour beautifully chronicles the evolution and development of the movement, showing how artists have ultimatelyestablishedanddefinedanunprecedentedconnectionbetweenthe experienceofthemovingimageandthatofvisualart. ShirinNeshat
Acknowledgements
Inthecourseofwritingthisbook,Ihaveconsultedmanyindividualsandthose who have patiently answered my questions include Rod Stoneman, David Curtis, John Wyver, Ben Cook and Gary Thomas. A.L. Rees, Laura Mulvey, JuliaKnight,MalcolmleGriceandMichaelNewmanhave,indifferentways, helped towards the AHRB research leave that gave me time to do the work. OrianaBaddeleyandtheresearchteamatCamberwellCollegeofArtsoffered invaluable advice and support throughout. Many artists contributed their memoriesandinsightstofillthegapsinmyown. I am particularly indebted to David Hall, David Critchley, Tom Sherman, SteveHawley,MikeStubbs,MickHartney,RolandDenning,KateMeynelland ChrisMeigh-Andrews,whoseownresearchinthefieldprovidedaninvaluable resource.KathyBattistaandJackieMorreaukeptmeintouchwithwhatwas going on outside my scholarly prison while Susan Lawson lent me all the difficultbooksandaskedthepertinentquestions.MikeStanfieldcookedabove andbeyondthecalloffriendshipwhileUweAckermannandBrunoMuellbauer allowedmetobecomeadrainonfamilypatienceandgoodwill.Iappreciatethe generosityofalltheartistswhohaveallowedmetoreproduceimagesoftheir workandIofferthisvolumeasatestamenttotheirvision,imaginationand determinedinterrogationoftheculture,theirpersistentworryingof‘theedges ofwhatisknown’. TheresearchforthisbookwascarriedoutwiththesupportoftheArts& HumanitiesResearchBoardandtheUniversityoftheArtsLondon.
1 Introduction From the Margins to the Mainstream
Perhaps, in some darkened viewing room somewhere, there exists an indefatigable art historian prepared to spend the four and twenty years of monitor watching necessary to emerge with a definitive overview of video art. Mick Hartney Videoisthedefaultmediumofthetwenty-firstcentury.Itiseverywhere,trapped onmonitorsandcomputerscreensandprojected,cinema-style,ontopristine gallerywalls,acrosspublicspacesandontothehallowedsurfacesofnational museums.Theprominenceofthemovingimageincontemporaryarthidesa forty-yearhistoryinwhichvideoplayedavitalroleonthemarginsoftheavantgarde.Itbeganlifeinthemid1960s,screeningtosmallgroupsofaficionadosin obscure,‘alternative’spaces.Then,inthe1990s,videoartbrokethroughinto themainstreamofthemuseumandgallerysystem,takingupacentralposition asthetwentiethcenturycametoaclose.Theearlyhistoryofthemediumis onlynowcomingtolightandthepresentvolumeisdevotedtoreintroducing theworkofpioneeringvideo-makerswhilepositioningtheirideasasaprism throughwhichtoofferanunderstandingofcontemporaryvideo.Ihopethatmy guidedtourofthemediumwillproveanappropriatetravellingcompanionto thereader’sowndiscoveryofvideoartanditssometimesbafflingbutalways intriguinghistory. The tour is, of necessity, a personal one. Dispassionate judgement is particularly difficult for me, given that I lived through and played a modest partinthatstoryasitmanifestedintheUK.EverythingIre-viewistoagreater or lesser extent filtered through my own political affiliations, my aesthetic preferencesandthepersonalandprofessionaltrajectoryIfollowedthroughout theperiodinwhichvideoartemergedandflowered.Ratherthanmanufacture
2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
somespuriousobjectivity,IhaveelectedtotellthestoryasIwitnessedit,read aboutit,gossipedaboutit,addedtoitand,inmycapacityasacritic,attempted tomakeitaccessibletoawideraudience.Althoughmyresearchhasthrown up many interesting discoveries, I also encountered certain difficulties along theway.Ihavenoticedstrikingsimilaritiesinworksoccurringsimultaneously indifferentpartsoftheworld.Mindfulofthefactthatgreatmindsoftenthink alike,Ihavechosenthosevideosthatbestilluminatethedistinctivechronology I have tried to represent. The modest length of this tour is disproportionate tothesizeoftheever-growingarchiveofvideoartandIhavebeenforcedto becomemoreselectivethanIwouldwishintheworksIdiscuss.Ioccasionally lapseintocontradiction,asIalwaysdowhenIcanseetwosidesofanargument. Forexample,Iwillneverreconcilethedesiretocritiquethemainstreamwith thetemptationtoreproducewhatonesetouttosubvert.Sometimes,Ispeak fromtheinsidewherethepassionsIfeltintheearlydaysarestillsimmering, sometimesIstepoutsideinsearchofabroaderpicturewithcontinuitiesofformal andtacticalstrategiestraceableacrossthegenerations.Mytourisnecessarily partial,analytical,engaged,informedandstillfiredbytheexcitementIfeltin 1978whenIproducedmyfirst,flickeringmonochromeimageofwhatIhad trappedinthe‘unblinkingstare’oftheviewfinder. The tour begins in the euphoric iconoclasm of the 1960s when, on both sides of the Atlantic, artists questioned social and political institutions as wellasthetraditionsoffineart,regardedasossifiedaroundthepracticesof painting and sculpture. Once the plastic arts had been reduced to the blank canvas and the minimalist slab of concrete, there seemed nothing more to be said. Video, along with performance and experimental film, offered a way out of the conceptual impasse of high art practices. As the newest technology, video was soon harnessed to the counter-cultural imperatives of the age. Although predominantly exploited as an agent of change, early video shared formal concerns with mainstream painting and sculpture, then dominatedbymodernismandminimalism.Broadlyspeaking,videoartinthe USAconcentratedonakindofpared-down,self-reflexiveinvestigationofthe technologyanditsfunctions.IntheUK,videoartistswerealsoembroiledin anexaminationofthespecificitiesoftheapparatus,orthetoolsoftheirtrade, butsawthemonolithoftelevisionastheirmainadversary.Theyconcentrated ondeconstructingtelevisualnarrativeconventionsthatwerefelttoproducea passive cultural consumer.1 The empowerment of that spectator and viewer involvementinthecreationofmeaningbecameakeyissueinbothmonitorbased,sculpturalworkandmulti-screeninstallationsandledtotheelectronic interactivitythatweseetoday.Almostwithoutexception,everygenerationand nationality has used video as a personal medium, an electronic mirror with which to investigate social identity – femininity, masculinity, ethnicity, and sexuality.Theformationofidentityhasbeenlinkedtotheinfluenceofsocial
INTRODUCTION • 3
stereotypespromotedbytelevision,printmediaandthecinema.Thesepopular cultural forms produced a narrowly defined human typology that promoted socialprejudice–racism,sexismandhomophobia.Videoartistsfromthe1980s onwards, appropriated and manipulated those same stereotypical images as adeconstructivestrategyforexposingthedistortionsandiniquitiesofmedia representations.Butinthe1990spopularculturalimagerywasintegratedinto videoartaspartofacelebrationofcontemporaryvisualcultureandsuperseded the traditional themes and preoccupations of fine art as well as the more political,deconstructiveapproachtothemovingimage. Theevolutionofvideotechnologyremainsthebackboneofthestory,with newdevelopmentssuchascolourprocessing,digitaleditingandimagelayering leading aesthetic and stylistic trends. From the beginning, video has been in dialoguewiththeinstitutionswithwhichitsharesitstechnology:television, surveillance,videogames,promotionalvideoand,latterly,theInternet.Inthis respect,thesocialdimensionisalwaysatplay,howeveraestheticisedthework mayhavebecome.Thisisthecaseeveninvideo’snewgallery-projectedform, whichrecreatesthespectacularandimmersiveexperienceofcinema.Withthe convergenceoffilmandvideoincontemporarygalleryart,itisinterestingtosee thatmanyofthecharacteristicsofvideohistorystillsurvive:theplayfulness, theirreverenceforarthistoryandthecommercialmainstream,thetechnical trickery as well as the social and political engagement. It has also preserved manyofitsearlierforms:theperformancedocumentary,theauto-portraitand thepolemicaltext.Thisvolumeisdesignedtoputcontemporaryworkintoits historicalcontext.Idoso,nottodenigratethenewerartistsinthefieldwith implications of plagiarism, but to show how continuities and commonalities existacrossthegenerations.Withthespeedoftechnologicaldevelopmentand achangingsocialandpoliticallandscape,videoasanartformanddiscursive arenaisconstantlybeingrenewed. I N T H E B E G I N N I N G • M A R K I N G O U T T H E T E R R I T O RY Likemanytechnologies,videowasbornofanalliancebetweenmilitaryand industrialconcernsintheWest.Thefirstportableequipmentwasdeveloped intheearly1960sbytheUSarmyforsurveillancepurposesinVietnam.The mediumalreadyexistedintheformofbroadcasttelevision,aninstitutionthat wasincreasinglydominatedbycommerceandsubjectedtopoliticalpressures. Shotthroughwiththinlydisguisedideologicalmessagessuchastheultimate desirabilityofconsumergoodsandthe‘natural’placeofwomeninthekitchen, thenew‘opiateofthepeople’waslookingmorelikeanagentofsocialcontrol thanaformoffamilyentertainment.Videoartcameintobeingdeeplyopposed tobothitsprogenitorsand,whenSonyPortapakswentonsaleinthemid1960s, artistsdecisivelyreclaimedvideoasacreativemediumcapableofchallenging
4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
the military, political and commercial interests from which it sprang.2 The aestheticpossibilitiesofthemediumwerecrucialtothedevelopmentofvideoas anartform,butliketheartistsoftheRussianRevolution,NorthAmericanand Europeanpractitionersinthe1960ssawthepotentialfortheirarttobecomean instrumentofsocialandpoliticaltransformation.Theytookupanoppositional stancevis-à-visthedominantculturesituatingvideoartintheswellofahighly politicisedavant-garde.Operatingontheradicalfringes,video-makerssought toexposenotonlythemanipulationsofmainstreamentertainmentbutalsothe definitionsandorthodoxiesoftraditionalfineartpracticestowhichvideowas nowuneasilyannexed. Nam June Paik can claim the distinction of being one of the first artists to acquire a Sony portable recorder and camera when they went on sale to thegeneralpublicin1965.3Paik’shistoricpurchasecoincidedwithPopePaul VI’svisittoNewYork.ArmedwithhisnewPortapak,theartistfollowedthe crowdsinataxiandwitnessedthepapalprocession,simultaneouslyrecording everythinghesaw.Sincethefirstrecorderswerereel-to-reelmachineswitha maximumrecordingtimeofonehourandnofacilityforediting,Paikjustleft themachinerunning.Theworkendedwhenheranoutoftape.Thatevening, attheCaféaGoGo,Paikscreenedtheuneditedblackandwhitevideoona monitor,alongsidethebroadcastTVversionofthesameevent. Paik’s video was a ‘real time’ work. It took the same stretch of time to view the Pope’s procession in the gallery as it took to record the original occasion. Where the television coverage was heavily mediated by broadcast conventions,Paik’stapeinvolvednoediting,nodramatisation,novoice-overs, studio discussions, flashbacks or commercial breaks. Neither was there any attempttodisguisethetechnologicalprocessthatwascreatingthisvidéovérité recordoftheprocession.Theworkwasdeterminedonlybytheartist’seyeand theserendipityoffindinghimselfintherightplaceattherighttimewiththe appropriateequipment. Paik worked deliberately outside the Hollywood-dominated film industry and independently of the television networks and, at least initially, without commercial funding. In contrast to the briefly credited but essentially anonymous cameraman of the television broadcast, Paik and his reputation as an avant-garde artist were important elements in the work. His status as anartistallowedhimtotakeastrongmoralandoppositionalstand,directly challenging the monopoly of mainstream media and what he saw to be the bourgeoisvaluesembeddedintheirprogramming.Paradoxically,hewasonly abletodothisbycallingontheprivilegedstatusoftheartistandthesingularity of vision, the lone voice of genius that was enshrined in post-war American art. In the context of fine art, he was able to lay claim to what his camera saw as an autonomous, creative agent in defiance of the invisible, corporate forcesthatsilencetheindividualwhilsthomogenisinghumanityintoanarrow
INTRODUCTION • 5
rangeofstereotypesforthetelevisionscreen.ThevideowasproofthatPaik, theirreducibleindividual,thefreecreativeagenthadbeenthereandmadean authenticrecordofwhathesaw.ThisKoreanartistdidsowhileusingthevery sametechnologythatwouldrenderhiminvisibleinbroadcastingowingtohis membershipofanethnicminority. THE SOCIAL CONTEXT Television has been attacking us all our lives, now we can attack it back. Nam June Paik Paik’sseminalworkwasperfectlyinkeepingwiththeinterventionistclimateof the1960swhenyoungpeopleacrossNorthAmericaandEuropebelievedthey could effectively oppose and transform existing social structures. The hippie generation rejected the narrow aspirations and middle-class values of their parents and refused to participate in the capitalist treadmill that condemned theboystowhite-andblue-collarservitudewhilethegirlsstayedathomein the prison of domestic drudgery and childcare. The liberation movements of the period gave us civil rights, black power, feminism and gay politics. The sexual revolution helped to cast off the social mores of the older generation andanewinterestineasternmysticismpromisedspiritualfulfilmentandselfimprovement. The most visible and unifying causes centred on the anti-war movement,withits‘BantheBomb’crusadeandrefusaltoendorsethewarin Vietnam. Environmental issues were soon as heatedly debated as militarism andwesternimperialism.The1960sbecametheeraofprotestandPaik’swork represented the first challenge to the hegemony of the mainstream media, controlled by its oligarchy of commercial, political and military interests. FollowingMarshalMacLuhan’svisionofglobalcommunication,Paikandhis contemporaries believed that they could harness the tools of mass media to awaken a new, alternative social and political consciousness. Video art was born at a time of high personal and political faith. Artists and activists alike believed that their actions could make a difference to society. Individual initiatives were framed by a recognition that everyone belonged to local and globalcommunities.Acollectiveidentificationwascoupledwithanindividual senseofresponsibilitytowardsthefutureshapeoftheworld,bothsocialand ecological. In the radical ferment of the avant-garde, individuals were more interested in revolutionising art and society than pursuing personal success. However,theromanceofpovertyhadatendencytowearoffintimeandmany artists,likePaikhimself,sawtheadvantagesofpromulgatingtheirviewsfrom apositionofhighvisibilityasopposedtocryinginthewildernessonthefringes oftheavant-garde.ButPaik’ssincerityisnotinquestionandtheearlypioneers
6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
ofvideoartwereintentontransformingbothsocietyandwhattheysawasthe outdatedconventionsofthehighartestablishment. T H E A R T C O N T E X T • T H E D E AT H O F T H E A R T O B J E C T Video has the unique potential of conveying the aesthetic aspirations of an entire generation. Willoughby Sharp Forneitherthefirstnorthelasttime,youngvoicesroseupandannouncedthat artwasdead.Easelart,thatis.Bythemid1960s,bothpaintingandsculpture in the grand manner appeared to have run their course. Artists rejected the mediating role of what they regarded as an obsolete art object. Being once removedfromtheartist–itsgeneratingsource–theconventionalworkofart was now accused of blocking the free flow of the artist’s creative intentions towards a newly receptive audience. It was time to jettison the ponderous demands of museum patronage for large-scale canvases and monumental bronzes,evenminimalistones.Artistswantedtocreateanencounterwiththe viewerthatwasasimmediateastheinter-personalandpoliticalupheavalgoing onoutsidethegalleries,asinstantaneousasPaik’sencounterwiththePope’s processioninNewYork.Thedematerialisationoftheartobjecthadbegunand artistslookedfornewformsofexpressionthatreflectedtheurgencyoftheir revolutionaryideasandthenewdirectrelationshiptheywereseekingwiththeir audiences.Theyfoundvideoandperformanceart. Performance art offered possibly the most perfect medium of artistic communionbecauselifeandartcametogetherinasharedeventorcollective ‘happening’.Inliveart,noartefactstoodbetweentheartistandaudienceand noobjectremainedaftertheeventtobecollected,sanctionedandsanctifiedby thecritics,historiansandcollectorscontrollingtheartestablishment.However, the cannier 1960s artists carefully kept the detritus of their live work whilst protestingtheirleftistdisinterestintheobjectsofperformance,whicharenow increasinglycollectable. Video was also approved as a suitably ephemeral medium, existing only when animated by an electric current and capable of being copied, recopied anddisseminatedlikeanyothermass-producedmerchandise.Inspiteofnow havingtonegotiatethemorerecenttraditionsofbroadcastmedia,videoartists felttheywereworkingonacleansheetofpaper.Filmtoowascaughtupinthe netofavant-gardeexperimentationalongwithdanceandmusic,whichwere similarlyappropriatedfrompopularcultureandreinventedas‘movement’and ‘sound’byanewgenerationofradicalartists.Theverycategoriesofthearts weredissolvingwiththecreationofhybridisedworksinvolvinganynumber
INTRODUCTION • 7
ofmedia,technologiesandperformancedisciplines.Aswellasevolvinginto an art form in its own right, video had the ability to pull together many of these disparate elements combining performance, sound and duration into documentary or fictionalised representations of artistic events. Video both crystallised and witnessed the proliferation of new ideas in the expanding landscape of cultural practice and reflected the revolutionary changes taking placeinsocietyatlarge.Initsroleasmonitortotheavant-garde,videohelped tofillthegapsleftbytheslow,butinexorableevictionofpaintingandsculpture fromtheirdominantpositionincontemporaryart. T H E N E W RO L E O F T H E V I E W E R … art that allows us to enact our own closures, and not an art that is closed upon arrival. Jeremy Millar Now that it was no longer possible to hide behind the reassuring buffer of the ‘dead’ art object, what did the living arts demand of the 1960s cultural consumer? Within the Enlightenment model, popularised in the eighteenth centurybyKantandsanctifiedinthetwentiethbymodernistcriticismunder ClementGreenbergandMichaelFried,theartobjectcontainedintrinsicaesthetic propertiesthatcouldonlybediscoveredbytherefinedsensibilitiesandtrained eyesoftheartcognoscenti.Artloverswouldenterthehallowedspaceofthe museumand,isolatedfromthemessysocialrealitiesoutside,attempttounlock the secrets of the art object. Once correctly tuned in, the viewer could use theworkofartasatalismanandbetransportedtohigherlevelsofaesthetic experience.Theperceptualprocessesandparticularisedinterpretationsofthe viewerbasedonindividualhistory,experience,genderandothervariableswere notpartofthepicture.Avisitortothegalleryneededtoleaveallidiosyncratic responses at the door and work towards a state of high cultural grace from whichitwaspossibletoaccesstheessentialmeaningandbeautylockedinside theuniqueartobject.Intheprocess,timelessanduniversalaestheticprinciples wouldbegraspedandthegalleryvisitorcouldgohomesafeintheknowledge of belonging to that section of the human race in which reason dominates andallbaseranimalimpulsesaresafelyundercontrol.Invariably,itwasthe collectors,critics,commentatorsandotherdoyensoftheartestablishmentwho determinedtheprecisenatureofthoseuniversalaestheticprinciplesandthe particularmeaningofawork.Thisestablishedasingle,authoritative,‘correct’ viewingandinterpretivepositionthatcouldbeusedasatouchstonetoseparate goodartfrombadandhighartfromlowlycraftsandpopularculture.Withina modernistconceptualframework,theartobjectwasheldtoembodynotonly
8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
higher,transcendentalmeaning,butalsotheintentionsoftheartist–whatthe culturaltheoristRolandBarthescalledthe‘theologicalmeanings’. AllthischangedwhenBarthespublishedhisinfluentialbookImage,Music, Textin1977.4Barthesarguedthatthemeaningofatextorimagelayasmuch withtheviewerasitdidwiththecreation,itscreatoranditsadvocates.The democratic principles underlying Barthes’ analysis encouraged performance andvideoartiststodispensewiththeuniqueartobjectandtransformtherole oftheviewerfrompassiverecipientofreceivedideastoactiveparticipantin thecreationofaestheticmeaning.However,ratherthanabdicateentirelythe activeroletotheviewer,1960sand1970stime-basedartistsworkinginfilm, videoandperformancerelocatedthemeaningofaworktothecreativespace opened up by the encounter between artist, technology, performance props andtheaudience.Thisconstitutedauniquesociallyandhistoricallycohesive moment.Nosingleelementorindividualheldthekeytothemeaningofthe ‘text’oroccupiedthedefinitivepointofview.Withinaliveperformance,there wereasmany‘true’interpretationsoftheworkastherewerewitnessesand participants.Anon-hierarchicalliveeventalwayscontainedthepossibilitythat an individual could override the artist’s intentions and directly influence the direction and outcome of the performance. In practice, this rarely happened although,intheory,artistsweregivinguptheirdirectorialpowersandenlisting theaudienceinfullparticipation.Inapeculiartwistoflogic,someperformance artiststookituponthemselvestodemocratiseallworksofartandspecialisedin hijackingotherartists’events.ThiswasperhapsaformofresistancetoBarthes’ notionthatthebirthoftheactivereader/viewercouldonlytakeplacepursuant tothedeathoftheauthor.Atleastwithinanewperformanceidiom,theartist couldstillbeanactiveparticipant.Invideo,anunconsciousfearofbecoming eclipsedbythenewlyemancipatedviewermayhavebeenresponsibleforthe widespreadpracticeoftheartistbecomingthesubjectofher/hisownwork. Whetherliterallyactiveoractiveinthecontributionofacreativeimagination, thenewroleoftheviewerintheproductionofmeaningexplodedthemodernist mythofuniversalityinaestheticappreciation.Theinterpretationofartwasnow seentobecontingentonsocial,politicalandhistoricalfactorsbeingbroughtto bearonindividualsatthemomentofreceptionaswellastheintrinsicqualities ofasetofobjectsorpictorialeffects.PeterKardiahasobservedthatthecentral problemofculturalproductionwasnow‘theinteractionbetweentheposition andplaceofthewitnessingsubjectandtheimaginativeprojectembodiedin the work’.5 The newly democratised space of art challenged the established authoritiesthathaddeterminedaestheticvalueinart.Atthesametime,dialogic practicesbroadenedtherangeofactivitiesthatcouldbeconsideredart.Video andperformancewerenowacceptedaslegitimateartforms. Withthepersonoftheviewernowinaconstitutiveposition,thecanonical edicts of art history might be banished forever and everyone could make
INTRODUCTION • 9
art,eachoneofusbecomeacritic.Atleastthatwasthetheory.Artistswere reluctant to give up their privileges and although they acknowledged the important role of the audience, they remained the principal instigators and directorsofartisticeventslayingclaimtoauthorshipoftheworkforthecultural record.Evenamongstthenewlyawakenedaudiences,someviewersremained moreequalthanothers–critics,curatorsandfunderstakingprecedenceover theordinarypunter.Thehegemonyoftheartmarshalscouldnotbebrokenso easily.Thenasnow,artistsneededtobesanctionedbyhistoriansandcritics to maintain visibility and ensure sponsorship, state, private and corporate. In spite of artist-run spaces and distribution networks offering alternatives to commercial galleries, performance and artists’ film and video were never able to escape entirely their dependence on the art establishment and some, like Paik, always courted wide recognition. In recent years, the picture has changedagainandtherelationshipbetweenartistandaudiencehasbecome morecomplexwithcommercialforcesandpopularcultureclaimingastakein artandofferinganothersourceoffunding.Inthenewcentury,thereislittle appetiteforsurvivaloutsidethevariousinstitutionsthatsupportthearts,but backinthe1960s,anhonestattemptwasmadetobreakfreeandamplifyingthe roleoftheordinaryviewerwasconsistentwithadeterminationtodemocratise art.6Inmanyofthestrategiesadoptedbyperformanceandvideoartists,the one-way flow of information in both fine art and broadcast television was reconstituted as a two-way process. The meaning of a work now lay in the creatively charged relationship between ‘witnessing subjects’, the materials inplayandtheimaginationoftheartist–thatself-appointedvisionarywho speaksthroughthemediumofart. I N V I D E O V E R I TA S • V I D E O A S A D O C U M E N T O F P E R F O R M A N C E Therecontinuestobeastronglinkbetweenperformanceartandvideo.Inthe earlydays,bothcourtedadirectanddemocraticencounterbetweentheartistand audienceandbothrejectedthematerialandinstitutionaltraditionsoffineart. Inspiteoftheirdisdainfortheartobject,performanceartistswerealsolooking forwaysofrecordingtheirworkforposterityandthemoreimmediateproblem of disseminating their ideas beyond the performance itself, not to mention collecting support material for the next funding application. Documentary photography is capable only of capturing a series of frozen moments and is inadequatetothetaskofrecreatingatime-basedeventthatisfoundedonflux, changeandmultiplepointsofview.Withitsabilitytorecordlongeventsandits statusasafactualmedium,videonowtookonthejoboffixingperformances that were, in essence, ephemeral. By the mid sixties, American artists like EleanorAntin,PeterCampus,LindaMontanoandTerryFoxbegantousevideo astheirchiefmediumofdocumentation.InCanada,IanBaxterandtheN.E.
1 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
ThingCo.,GerryGilbertandMichaelSnowweresimilarlyenshriningtheirlive workinmovingimagerecords.InformerYugoslavia,Abramovic´andUlaymade performances to camera and in the UK, Stuart Brisley, Rose Finn-Kelcey and GilbertandGeorgealltapedtheirwork. These early performance tapes would rarely be seen in public and were regardedasdocuments,residuesoftheliveevents,thoughtheywerebriefly collectedbygalleriesalongwithotherphotographicandmaterialby-products oflivework.7Theaestheticvaluewassecondarytothevideotape’sabilityto accuratelyrecordtheeventsinrealtime.CommentatorslikethehistorianAmelia Jones have argued that the meaning of live performance is retrospectively formedbythedocumentationandtheinterpretationsthathistoriansandcritics formulate.8 However, this view is contrary to the intentions of performance artistsworkinginthelate1960sandearly1970s.Forthem,theexperienceofthe eventwastheprimaryobjective,withitscatharticandtransformativepotential mobilised in a live confrontation between artist and audience. They chose to use video to document their work because it came closest to establishing thetime-basedfactsofanevent.However,videohaditsownlimitations.The picture quality was poor and with the technology pushed out of the way to avoidinterferingwiththeperformance,muchofthedetailwaslost.Tomake mattersworse,thecamerawasoftenrestrictedtoafixed,distantpositionand microphoneswereoftenplacedsofarawayfromtheactionthattheywereunable tofilteroutextraneoussounds.Theresultingsequencestookineverythingand yet conveyed little of the impact of the live event in which the senses could beselectivelytunedtoelementsthat,atagivenmoment,werechargedwith meaning.ItwastooeasyforwriterslikeAmeliaJonestomythologiseorimpose theirowninterpretationsoneventsthattheysometimeshadn’tseenandthat wereexperiencedquitedifferentlyattheirpointoforigin. Awareofthedistortinglensofavailablemethodsofdocumentationandits interpreters,manyartistsnowbegantocreateactionsandliveeventsspecificallyforthevideocameraandmonitor.ArtistslikeTinaKeaneandSoniaKnox intheUKandVitoAcconciandJoanJonasintheUSAbegantousethevideo technology as part of the performance itself. The discrepancies between the mediated video image and the live presence of the artist created what Jonas calleda‘parallelnarrative’.InGermany,UlrikeRosenbachmadeperformances inwhichthecamerawasstrappedtoherbody,theresultingimagerepresenting herpointofviewinwhatshecalled‘livevideoperformances’.InDynamicField Series Part 1 (1971), the American Peter Campus attached the camera to the ceilingbywayofapulley,sothathecouldmakehisimagerecedeandexpand bypullingorreleasingtherope.Campuscontrivedtobebothinfrontofand behind the camera simultaneously. These live video-performances combined the role of video as a recording device with its participation as an essential componentoftheworkitself.Themechanismofvideoimagegenerationand
I N T R O D U C T I O N • 11
theprocessofperformanceartdocumentationwerelaidbareandcontrasted withtheinvisibilityoftechnologyinmainstreambroadcasting. Manyoftheearlyperformance-to-cameraworkswereheldwithintheframe and three-dimensional container of a monitor, which served to heighten the senseofasharedvulnerabilitywiththeartist.Thescaled-downhumanform, theminiaturetheatreoftheboxandtheprisonofthetechnologyallservedto endowtheartistwiththepoignancyofatrappedanimal.Withoutthefilterof entertainment,characterandplot,thecompassionaterealismofperformance tocameraissurprisinglypowerful.Inspiteofthedegradedresolutionofearly video, and the often-visible charade of artists’ performances, it was possible foranemotional,corporealconnectiontobemadebetweentwosubjectivities acrossthetime-lapseseparatingrecordingandviewing. In1970,BruceNaumanmadethemostfamousandminimalperformance tocamera.Atfirstsight,StampingtheStudioisanuneditedrecordofNauman prowling his studio in a shuffling gait, a brooding evocation of the artist in the grip of creative frustration. Looking much like present day surveillance footage, the video (originally shot on film) is also a kind of mapping of the artist’s agency within his chosen environment, unadorned by narrative and otherformsoftelevisionfabulation.Hisneuroticallyrepetitiveactiondeviates substantiallyfromsociallyacceptedbehaviourandquestionsideasofmadness andnormality.Theseemingartlessnessoftheperformanceisdeceptive.The cameraiscarefullypositioned,andNauman’sactionspreciselyorchestratedso thatthepathhetreadsdelineatesboththespaceheoccupiedinthepastand thesquareboundaryofthevideomonitorwearelookingatinourpresent.In Wall-FloorPositions(1968),theartist’sbody,inmoredirectproportionstothe monitor,seeminglystrugglestomovearoundinsidethebox.Withthehelpof aninvisiblemonitor,Naumanmakessurethathedoesnotbreachtheedgesof thepictureframeandbreaktheillusionofhiscontainmentinitsactual,three dimensionalprison. Naumanusedtheauthenticityofapareddown,performativeactiontopoint uptheartificialityoftelevisionrealismbutalsotheconstructednatureofart –anyart.AnticipatingBillViola,andtheUKartist,SamTaylor-Wood’slater depictionsofartificialemotionprojectedbyactors,YugoslavartistsAbramovic´ andUlaymadeAAA-AAA(1978),atapeinwhichtheyscreamedateachother tothelimitsoftheirvocalendurance.TheAmericanTeddyDibbleproduceda persistentcoughthatneverseemedtosatisfyanoff-camerainstructorordoctor. In Cough (1986), we witness Dibble’s repeated failures to produce the ideal cough.Theartistlooksstraightintothecamerawhilstanoutofframedirectordoctorinsistentlycorrectshiscoughing:‘No,makeitharder.No,louder.Again. Again.’ Like Abramovic´ and Ulay’s vocal excesses, Dibble’s cough is clearly manufacturedbutthedurationofthepieceandtheobviousphysicaldiscomfort suffered by the artist, induce in the viewer a somatic empathy. Clearly, the
1 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
successofthisphysicalidentificationdependsonduration.Thecoughingand screamingareagonytolistentoonlyiftheydon’tstop.Ifthetapesareturned offorcanbewalkedawayfrombeforetheactionbuildsupsufficientempathetic agonyintheviewer,theworkscannotactuponthesenses.Wecouldnot,in thiscase,suspenddisbeliefsufficientlytointernalisetheplightoftheartists. Ioncemadeatapeaboutacryingbaby.9Itplayedonaloopedcompilation alongwithtapesbyotherartists.Eachtimemyworkcamearound,thegallery staffturneditdownbecausetheycouldn’tstandthecrying.Theygotthepoint of the work and nullified it. This use of performed, embodied experience to induceasomaticresponseintheviewerfindsanechotodayinarecentvideo fromCanada.InHeaven(2000),LloydBrandsonandJackLauderpointafixed cameraatanexpanseoffrozenlakeseparatedfromadullskybyathin,barely visiblehorizonline.ThisisLakeWinnipeggrippedbysub-zerotemperatures in the depths of winter. The two artists run past the camera, naked but for someroughlymadeboots.Theygraduallydisappearintothewhitehorizonand nothinghappensforanagonising60seconds.Justaswebecomeconvinced thattheyhavediedofexposure,thepainfullyvulnerablefiguresreappearand slowlygrowbackintomenwhohavesomehowsurvivedthecold. Theabilityoftheviewertobothimagineandenterthebodilypredicament oftheartistdependsonasharedtime-spaceandacommonphysiology.Itisthe recognitionofbothsimilarityandanarrowdifferencethatmakestheempathetic processpossible.Theartistisme,andnot-mesimultaneously.Withawidening ofthespeciesgap,theeffectdiminishes.Ifithadbeenananimalsufferingfrom thecoldinHeaven,wewouldhavefeltitlessexceptpossiblyinEnglandwhere animalsufferingofteninspiresgreaterfeelingthanhumandistress.Aninsect depicted as a shivering spot on the horizon would be unlikely to cause any realanxietyintheviewer.Throughasharedtime-space,itisaspecies-specific empathythatvideoiscapableofcreating. One could argue that, in its ability to conjure up another human being, videoseekstorestoretomechanicalreproductionwhatWalterBenjamincalled thelost‘aura’oftheuniqueartobject.Invideo,theauthenticatingimprintof theartist’shandisevidentandreferstotheoriginatingmomentinwhichthe subjectinteractedwiththetechnology.Inspiteofbeingonlyaghostlyreplica ofwhatwasoncethere,initsorganisationaroundrealism,videobetraysthe artist’sandindeedtheviewer’sneedtoretrievetheseveredconnectionwith ‘theabsolutelyuniqueandevenmagicalquality…ofhissubject’.10Invideos like Heaven and Stamping the Studio, the artist and the subject are one and the same, the artist’s uniqueness embodied in his electronic mark making. Morethanwithanyothermedium,wearemomentarilyconvincedthatweare witnessingthemomentofcreation.Andyet,videoisthemostduplicitousofall themediaofmechanicalreproduction.
I N T R O D U C T I O N • 13
WORKING WITH THE TECHNOLOGY • FICTION AND THE SUSPENSION OF DISBELIEF In terms of single-screen, pre-recorded sit-and-watch video art, this sense of auratic presentness and direct involvement are, of course, an optical illusion. Thereisnoreal-time,face-to-faceencounterwiththeartistnorcantheviewer physicallyaccesstheworldtheartistisrevealingthroughthevideoimage.Infact, neithertheartist,northeillusoryworlds/heinhabitsexistsatallinanyconcrete sense.Thevideoimageisasimpleconfidencetrick.Formanyartistsworkingat thedawnofvideoart,thefundamentalillusionismoftheimagebecameasource ofscrutiny,fascinationand,intheUKinparticular,ofpoliticalanalysis. Allpre-recordedmovingimagedependsonviewersactivatinganirrational denialofabsence.Theysuppresstheobviousfactthattheapparentpresence ofapersononthescreenisnothingbutanelectronicfabrication.Inspiteof theclevermimesis,thereisclearlynobodythere.Throughthesuspensionof disbelief, viewers ignore the apparatus that creates the illusion and, instead, imaginativelyreadtheflickeringscreenasafaithfulrepresentationofreality. Theaudienceandartistenterintoakindofcredulitypact.Theartistpretendsto speakdirectlytotheviewerfromanotherspaceandtimeandtheviewertacitly agreestoacceptthemessageasaconcretemanifestationinthehereandnow. Itissometimesashocktodiscovertowhatextentweenterintothisgameof fake-for-real.Wehavebeendoingitsincechildhoodwhenfairystoriesallowed ustotakeimaginativeflightintofablesthatgaveformtothechaosoffeelings andconflictsthatmaturationblowsin.AsthepsychologistBrunoBettleheim pointedout,wehavelittleneedformore‘usefulinformationabouttheexternal world’butrespondinsteadtoimaginativeequivalentsfor‘theinnerprocesses taking place in an individual’.11 As Bettleheim observed, children generally knowthedifferencebetweenwhatisrealandwhatisanillusion.Theyenter intotheworldoftheimaginationwithoutlettinggoofreality.Theprocesswas onceperfectlydemonstratedtomewhenIspentsometimeattheBBCworking asamake-upartist.ThepopularpuppetcharacterBasilBrushwasavailableto meethisaudienceinhisdressingroomaftertheshow.Thepuppeteergreeted thechildreninhisshirtsleeveswiththeclothfoxsheathingtheendofhisarm. Making no attempt to throw his voice, the puppeteer slipped into character andanimatedthepuppettomatchhisspeech.Thechildrenignoredtheman andspoketotheersatzfox.Itisafeatureofourcommunicationagethatour abilitytotellthedifferencebetweenfictionandrealitydeteriorateswithage. Withintheconceptualfermentofthe1970s,thecredulitypactweenterinto both as children and as adults was itself interrogated by artists just as the verisimilitudeofvideowassystematicallyundermined.Aswehaveseen,artists attemptingtorecreatewithvideotheimmediacyofperformancearthavenot been shy to exploit the credulity pact we make with the small screen. They tookadvantageofourgullibilityevenwhentheiraimwastodeconstructour
1 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
notionsoftelevisualauthenticity.Performativeartistshavealwayscapitalised onvideo’sabilitytoimaginativelyre-createtheone-to-oneencounterbetween an individual artist and a viewer who tacitly agrees to be truly foxed by an electronicopticalillusion. T H E S P E C I F I C I T I E S O F T H E M E D I U M • L I V E R E L AY You can take a picture and put it through a wire and send it to another place… Woody Vasulka Iftheverisimilitudeofearlypre-recordedvideowasnotaltogetherconvincing, thenitscredibilitywasdramaticallyenhancedbythemedium’suniqueability todelivertoanaudiencealive-relayimageofaneventhappeningelsewhere. Thepoweroftelevisiontoconvincewasbasedpartlyonthetransmissionof liveimagesacrossgreatdistancestomillionsofpeoplesimultaneously.Bythe mid 1960s, the technology became available to artists who could now make directcontactwithviewersovershortdistanceswithcameraslinkedtomonitors bylongcablesandeventuallyovergreaterdistanceswithsmalltransmitters. Today, this function of video technology has expanded exponentially on the Internetgivingartistsinstantvisualandauditoryaccesstoallfourcornersof theearth. Thefirstadventureswithlivetransmissionweremoremodest.Oneofthe earliest examples is Yoko Ono’s Sky TV (1966) in which she confronted the audience,notwithherownbodyassheoftendidinherperformances,butwith thevastnessoftheskyabovethemuseum.Fromacameramountedontheroof ofthebuilding,aliveimageoftheheavenswascontinuouslybeameddown toamonitorinthegallery.Viewersenjoyedthesenseofbeingsimultaneously inside and outside the space and the novel experience of contemplating an imagethatrarelyemergedfromitsroleasabackdroptoconventionalnarratives. Simultaneityhadarrivedinvideobringingitevenclosertoperformanceartand thepresenceoftheartistorthenaturalphenomenonbeingtransmittedtothe gallerywasalmost,butnotquite,palpable. THE TIME FRAME In live relay, the image and the audience occupy the same time frame, and unlessthevideocomponentisbeingrecorded,neitherwouldmateriallysurvive theeventotherthaninindividualmemoriesandotherdocumentationofthe event.Inthecontextofliverelay,videoisasephemeralasperformance.Buta pre-recordedtapeaspirestotheconditionofpermanence.Howeverevanescent itisinitselectronicspecificity,thevideoimagerepresentsamomentofhistory frozenintheaspicoftheoxidecoatingonthesurfaceofthetape.Itexistsin
I N T R O D U C T I O N • 15
suspended animation, in a continuous present that can be retrieved at any pointinthefutureforthelifeofthetapeorinreducedform,fromcopies.Like photography,butwiththeaddedverisimilitudeprovidedbysoundandmotion, videoactsasatimemachinegivingthepastlifeinthepresentandallowing thoseoccupyingthepresenttotravelbacktorecentandmoredistanthistorical moments. For the image of the artist, early video recording also offered a modestimmortality–about20yearsdependingonthequalityofthetapeand theconditionsinwhichitwaskept.NamJunePaikbelievedthatvideomost resembled life in its material mortality: ‘Video art imitates nature, not in its appearanceormass,butinitsintimate“time-structure”…whichistheprocess ofAGING(acertainkindofirreversibility)’.12 Videohastheabilitytotravelacrossspaceandtimeaswellasofferinga short-term,anti-ageingaidtovanity.Itcanalsobringspaceandtimetogether. In 1980, the American artist Ira Schneider showed 24 tapes on a circle of monitors.Eachtapewasshotinadifferentlocationinthe24timezonesthat makeupthegeographicaltimeframeoftheearth.Wherebroadcasttelevision has the capability of sending a single image to destinations throughout the world,TimeZoneanticipatedtheabilityoftheInternettodotheopposite,that is,bringtogetherlivesthatareseparatednationallyandgeographicallybut,in ignoranceofeachother,areexperiencedsimultaneouslyacrosstheglobe.The CanadianLawrenceSperodecidedtowitnessthedawnofthenewmillennium as a continuous Internet present by visiting a succession of webcam-linked citiesaroundtheworldaseachtimezonehitmidnight.Trappedinakindof groundhogdaynewyear,ittookSperotwenty-fourhourstoexperiencethefirst secondofthenewmillenniumwitheveryoneonearth. Before the advent of the Internet, both television and early video were able to link geographically disparate representations of the present in simultaneous recordings and live broadcasts. The present could be launched intoaprojectedfuturethroughrecordingwhatthecamerasawontotape.With later technological advances, video matched the ability of film to speed up apparenttimeandslowitdownalmosttothepointofadreamlikestasis.Then itbecamepossibletocombineimagesshotatdifferenttimesandplacesinto a montage of simultaneously experienced realities on one screen. Even with oldandnewvariationsonsimultaneity,themostconsistentlycaptivatingtrick oftimethatbothfilmandvideocanplayisundoubtedlytheirabilitytoplay back,tosummonthepastintothepresentwiththeapparenteffortlessnessof acrystalball. However,inthecrystaldepthsofvideomagic,thingsarenotalwayswhat they seem. Since the medium was invented, it has been difficult to tell the differencebetweenapre-recordedtapeandanimagerelayedlivefromanother space.Inthe1970s,timehadnotyeterodedthequalityofthetapenoragedthe peopleandplacesdepicted.Videohistorywasveryrecent.TheAmericanartist
1 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
VitoAcconcicleverlyplayedonthealmostidenticalqualityofpre-recordedand livevideo.InClaimExcerpts(1971),Acconcimountedamonitoratthetopof aspiralstaircase.Onit,viewerscouldseetheartistclimbingthestairs,cursing and brandishing an iron bar. An instantaneous judgement had to be made. WasAcconcireallyapproachingorwasthisapre-recordedjokeontheviewer? Records suggest that most people erred on the side of caution and fled. The work exposed our unquestioning belief in the veracity of media information and the psychological process that enables audiences to routinely suspend disbelief before the flickering falsehoods of the video monitor. In Acconci’s cleverdeception,thelinebetweentherealandthesimulatedbecamefrayed, oursenseoftimepastandpresentwasunsettled.Believingoneseyesnolonger seemedareliablestrategyforsurvival. I N S TA N T F E E D B A C K I N T H E P R I VA C Y O F Y O U R O W N S T U D I O Video was a medium for rehearsal. Vito Acconci, 2003 Intermsofaudiencereceptionandmanipulation,videoofferedbothadvantages anddisadvantages.Asfarastheworkingpracticesofmovingimageartistswere concerned, the most revolutionary aspect of the technology was the instant access it provided to the image – something that film could not do. With the camera hooked up to a monitor and feeding back what it saw, an artist could work directly with the image, arranging elements in the picture frame to satisfaction before committing anything to tape. The American-born artist DanReevesstillcelebratestheplasticityandspontaneityofthemedium,‘and theverysmallishgapbetweeninspirationandexecution’thatvideoallows.13 WritinginarecentissueoftheUKjournalFilmwaves,theartistMartySt.James vividlydescribeshowhecouldnevergiveuptheimmediacyofvideoinfavour oftheuncertaintiesoffilm:‘Itwouldbelikemakingasculptureinabucket, sendingitofftothefoundryandwaitingforittocomebackalreadyfixedto the floor.’14 St. James further emphasises the existential experience of video: ‘Withvideo,thereisnodelay.Asinaperformance,youworkinthepresent… Withfilm,youwaitforthepostmantobringyousomethingyoumadeinthe past,somethingyouhaven’tseenfortwoweeks,somethingthat’sdead.’AsSt. Jamestestifies,performancelivesinthepresent,butatthemomentofcreation, itisaone-off,one-shotenterprise.Ifyougetitwrongonthenight,youcan’t pressrewindandstartagain.Thebeautyofthefirstvideorecordingswasthat theycoulddisappearwithoutatrace,discretelydisposingofmanyfalsestarts. Sequencescouldbediscardedbyrecordingoverthemwithanewversionor erasingthemwithcontinuousblack–‘blackingthetape’.Itwaslikeworking
I N T R O D U C T I O N • 17
withapencilandrubberwherefilmandperformancedemandedthecourage tocreatewithindelibleink.Oncetheperformancehadtakenplaceorthefilm exposed,theworkwassetandtookonacertainmaterialpermanence.Evenifit hadbeenburiedatthebottomofthegarden,afilmconstitutedevidenceofthe artist’sactivitiesthatcouldnotbedeniedinacourtoflaw.Anartisticstatement thatinSt.James’termswouldbenailedtothefloor. Like many of the plastic arts, pre-recorded video could be continually deferred. It was the ideal medium for the indecisive, the perfectionist and those who favoured the slow materialisation of an idea in the privacy of a paintingorsculpturestudio.Thetraditionallyspontaneousmediumcouldbe highlyrehearsedandconstructed.Videowasalsotheperfectmediumofselfcontemplationandofferedviewsofthebodythatwerenormallyinaccessible, suchasthebackofthehead.ThisprovedparticularlyusefultoVitoAcconci who,inCorrections(1970),wasabletoburnawayunwantedhairsontheback ofhisneckwiththehelpofanoff-screenmonitor.Thevideoalsoallowedthe artisttostareintohisownface,watchhisowngestures,hearhisownvoice andobservethoseindefinablemessagesweallunwittinglytransmitwithour bodies. By means of live feedback, the video artist was able to see the self asitappearedtoothers.Gazingintothemirrorofthefeedbackloopallowed entryintoalocked-inworldofselfandselfasotherinthereflectingpoolof thetechnology.Noothercrewormachinerywasneededtocreatetheimage andnaturallightwassufficienttoilluminateascene.Thecamerawouldthen recordtheencounterwiththeselfwithoutthepressuresofhavingtonegotiate theexpectationsandinputofcollaboratorsorthereactionsofaliveaudience. AswewillseeinChapter3,feministslaterexploitedtheabilityofthevideo closed-circuit system to act as mirror-confessor in the autobiographical work theymadeundertheprinciplethatthePersonalwasPolitical.Other‘minority’ groups,particularlygaymen,foundtheintimacyanddomesticnatureofvideo theidealvehiclefortheexplorationofsocial,racialandsexualidentity. THE ELUSIVE MEDIUM Analoguevideoiscapableofanapparentlyunassailablerealisminspiteofthe crudityoftheimageintheearlydays,itsharshcontrastsanditsmyopic,poor depthoffield.However,thisfugitiveimagedoesn’tmateriallyexistotherthan asaseriesofinvisibleelectronicimpulsesencodedonamagnetictapethatwill disintegratewithin20yearsorless.Itsmaterialbasebearsnoresemblanceto theimageitproducesanditdependsforitsexistenceonthesmoothrunningof machinesandelectricity.Intheearlydaysofvideoart,theunreliabilityofvideo equipment gave the medium the reputation of being the only art form that wastrulydematerialised.Owingtorepeatedtechnicalbreakdown,itfrequently failedtomaterialiseatall.Whenitdid,itssensitivitytomisalignmentmeant thatitwasoftenreducedtopulsatingabstractionsandvisual‘noise’.
1 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
Inspiteoftheclevertricksitcanplay,videohasalwaysbeenanephemeral anddelicatemedium,susceptibletobeingwiped,destroyedbyheat,moisture, traumaandvibration.Althoughitcanbemanipulatedinthepresentthrough theclosed-circuitsystem,videoisessentiallyahands-offmedium.Videotape cannotbehelduptothelightlikefilm,orpaintedandscratchedtoproduce animage.Nothingislearnedfromhandlingvideotape;infact,itcanonlybe damaged by touch. It is even susceptible to magnetic forces including those createdonelectricsubwaytrains,orsoweweretold.WhenIwasastudentin London,MikeStubbs,afellowstudentattheRoyalCollegeofArt,failedtocome upwithanyworkforatutorialandclaimedthathistapeshadbeendestroyed bythemagneticforcespursuingthetubetraintoKensington.Whetherornot the underground was capable of wiping tapes, the vulnerability of the video image to magnetic forces was not in doubt and was perfectly demonstrated byNamJunePaikin1965.MagnetTVconsistedofablackandwhitemonitor crownedbyapowerfulhorseshoemagnet.Theforcefieldcreatedbythemagnet derailed the image from its scan lines and drew it towards the top turning a representational image into sweeping, veil-like abstractions. If the magnet wasmoved,thepatternsflowedintonewconfigurationsfollowingtheshifting magneticfield. Paik’sMagnetTVdemonstratedthevulnerabilityofthevideoimagetooutside interference.Paik,amongothers,wastoprovethatthevideosignalcouldbe accessed and transformed at the point of manufacture. For other artists, the remotenessoftheimageistheveryqualitytowhichtheyareattracted.Marty St. James finds video an ideal form of expression for an abstract mind that doesn’twanttodealwiththephysicalityoftheworld.Videooffersapointof convergencewherehisthoughtsandideascanfindimmediateexpressionand berelayedtoalocal,thenlaterwiththedevelopmentoftheInternet,toaglobal audience.AsHervéFisherwrote,‘athoughtlaiduponavideotapeisathought capableofbeingbroadcasteverywhereatonceinnakedcommunication.’15This sense of the unpolluted artistic concept embodied in the ephemeral medium ofvideohasbeenreiteratedthroughoutitshistory.Likeathought,thevideo imageisessentiallyanabstraction,amiragethatcannotbecapturedandheld to account. Its workings are underground, transatlantic, global, unbounded. Contemporary Meme theory comes close to describing the elusive power of thoughtcommunicatedinelectronicphantasms.Theypassthroughelectronic systems and are replicated the way Meme theory describes cultural ideas spreadinglikeforestfiresfromindividualtoindividualacrosstimeandspace. Incommonwiththought,videoisfreeofapermanentmaterialhost.Andthis senseofimpermanence,ofthefleeting,butoccasionallyprofoundeffectofthe videoimageiswhatdrewthe1960sgenerationtothemedium.Inspiteoftheir attemptstocapturetheimageinshort-livedrecordings,thetransitorynatureof videoreflectedtheirphilosophiesofthehereandnow,theexistentialmoment
I N T R O D U C T I O N • 19
ofchangeandthespreadingresistancetothecertaintiesandgrandnarratives thatart,religionandsciencehadusedtoconstructthenarrowworld-viewof theirparents’generation. THE MILLION-DOLLAR PAINTBRUSH • A NOTE ON THE TECHNOLOGY Apartfromthephilosophicalappealofthisillusivemedium,theeasyappearance andsometimes-convenientdisappearanceofvideohaditspracticaladvantages. Unlikefilm,tapescouldberecycledandwithsmallorone-personcrews,video hadrelativelylowproductioncosts.Relativetofilm,thatis.Eveninthelate 1970s,thebasicvideoequipmentwasstillveryexpensivefortheaverageartist tobuyandmostpeoplereliedoncollegesandartist-runproductioncentresto lendorrentthemtheequipmentatfavourablerates.In1981,withthehelpof severalgrants,DanReevesspent$100,000(US)onatopoftherangethree-tube cameraandrecorder.Intheensuingdecade,withrapidimprovementsinthe technology,hewentontospendasmallfortuneonthenewestmachines,each itemvirtuallyobsoletebythetimeitreachedhim.16In1982,myownbottom oftherangeSonycameracost£1,000,thePortapak,afurther£2,000.Editing equipmentwasbeyondmybudget.But16mmfilmwasalsoveryexpensivein the1960sand1970sandmostartistsworkedwithcheaper,andlighter,super8 equipment.Thedisadvantageofsuper8wasthatitallowedonlythreeminutes ofcontinuousrecordingtime,wherevideoextendedthescopeto20minutes in a portable system and an hour for the desktop variety. The technology has now evolved to the point of general affordability. Extended battery life, miniaturisationandportabilityhavemeantthatvideohasovertakensuper8as thepreferredhome-moviemedium.Intheincreasinglypopularrealmofreality TV,subjectsarenowgivensmalldigitalcamerastoreinventtheirlifestoriesfor publicconsumption. Those early black and white recorders may have offered considerable advantagesforreal-timerecording,butthemachinesthemselveswerenotas portable as they are now. The combined weight of a Portapak recorder and camerawasover18lb.ThenowfamiliarimageofBillViolafacingthedesertlike sometechno-cowboy,theequipmentcasuallyslungacrosshisshoulders,was magnificent,butunrealisticforthoseofusblessedwithfemalemusculature. Evenrelativelystrongmenneededassistantstorunwiththeequipmentand, asaresult,manypioneersofvideoeithercollaboratedorchosetoworkwitha tripodfromstaticpositionsinacontrolledstudioenvironment. E N T E R T H E I M A G I N A RY • T H E I M PAC T O F V I D E O E D I T I N G Nam June Paik’s recording of the Pope’s cavalcade was made in real time, partlybecausenoeditingwasavailabletotheartistatthatstage.Later,inthe
2 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
1970s,simpleassemble-editingbecameaccessibleandvideochangedfroma raw,performance-basedmediumtoavehicleofpsychologicalandimaginative play.Editingalsomadepossibleexperimentsinfractured,non-linearnarratives, compressingorextendingtimeatwill.Themoreaccuratetheediting,thefaster theeditsbecameandwiththeadventofdigitalediting,artistsexperimented with rapid-fire cutting that tested the edges of perceptual coherence. Slow motion heralded contemplative works aspiring to a spiritual dimension that intheworkofBillViolawasalsoameditationonthecycleoflifeanddeath. Whenanarrayofspecialeffectswasintroducedinthe1980s,thereemerged a new painterly tendency that was built on early experiments with image processing that Paik and others had pioneered in the 1960s. Images became layered,surrealandthefocusshiftedtothetactileandmesmericqualitiesof abstractionandsurfacepatterning.Thetechnologyavailabletoartistsbecame progressively more sophisticated and production values soared in the late 1980sandearly1990s.ArtistslikeSamTaylor-WoodandMatthewBarneynow usedigitalvideoandcreateworksthatdeliberatelyreproducethehighgloss and shallow ennui of adverts and fashion photographs. But there have been frequentnostalgicreturnstothegrungeaesthetics,therawimmediacyofearly video. In the late 1980s, the American artist Sadie Benning chose a FisherPricetoyvideocameratorecordthetrialsandtribulationsofayounglesbian growingupinmiddleAmerica,whileinthelate1990stheUKartistRichard Billingham used a light-weight digital camera to produce subjective, fly-onthe wall portraits of his dysfunctional, alcoholic family. The brief, forty-year history of video can be written in terms of the rapidly evolving technology availabletoartistsand,later,tothegeneralpublic.Videoartistshaveexploited each technological development and many of the aesthetic, political and philosophicalideasunderpinningtheirworksawthelightbecause,atagiven moment,thetechnologymadeitpossible. In the following chapters, we will look in more detail at the various tendencies and movements that make up the story of video art. Woven into thenarrativewillbetheprogressionofvideofromanunwieldyone-take,black andwhiterecordingmedium,toaninfinitelyflexiblemeansofsocial,political andpersonaldocumentation.Video,withitsincreasinglysophisticateddigital manipulations,hasalsoevolvedintothevehicleforthemostelaborateflightsof theartisticimagination.Asthestoryunfolds,wewillseeashiftawayfromthe counter-culturalaspirationsofpoliticalworkintheearlyyearstowardsamore complexrelationshiptopopularculturecoincidingwitharenewedinvolvement inthecommercialgallerysystem.
2 The Modernist Inheritance Tampering with the Technology, and Other Interferences
Some day artists will work with capacitors, resistors and semi-conductors as they work today with brushes, violins and junk. Nam June Paik Artistsemergingfromtherevolutionaryfermentofthelate1960swerequick to explore the potential of portable video technology, the first new moving image format to emerge since the invention of film. Over the years, this flexibleandenduringmediumwastobeusedbyartistsforarangeofsocial, politicalandaestheticpractices.Althoughdrivenbyrevolutionarypoliticsand a determination to dissolve established categories and definitions of art, at the point of conception, video art was profoundly marked by the modernist aesthetic concerns that dominated post-war American and later European paintingandsculpture. W H AT H A P P E N E D T O PA I N T I N G A N D S C U L P T U R E ? Once the nineteenth-century French Impressionists and their epigones had disruptedthesmoothsurfaceofrepresentationalpaintingandPicasso,Braqueand theSurrealistsdefiedtheconventionsofpictorialrealism,artistsbegantoexplore theintrinsicqualitiesoftraditionalartmaterialsandbecamelessconcernedwith transformingpaint,woodandbronzeintofaithfulcopiesoftheexternalworld. Bythemid1950s,realisminartcameunderrenewedattackandamodernist campaignfor‘truthtomaterials’waslaunched–withanemphasisonsurface, textureandtheopticaleffectsofpurepigment.Marble,woodandpaintwereno
2 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
longerrequiredtorepresentanythingotherthananontologicaldeclarationofself orinthecaseofExpressionistpainting,thephenomenological,gesturalresultsof theartist’shandscatteringcolouredfluidsontovirgincanvas.Insteadofpursuing universal aesthetic principles in a Kantian appreciation of art, the discerning gallery-goer was now to be immersed in the phenomenology of material and discoveritsessenceinanalmosttranscendentalcommunionwithwoodaswood andpaintaspaint.Formany,thisderivedasmuchfromeasternmysticismas fromamodernistinsistenceontruthtomaterials.Thesetwoideologiescould becombinedandartreconfiguredasastripped-downevocationofmaterialas being-in-itself.Beyondthematerialanditsimaginativetranscendence,themost minimalofmodernistartalsocontainedelementsthataspiredtotheconditionof purethought,ofthoughtinaclosedcircuitofself-contemplation. Althoughindividually,post-warartists–Americansinparticular–enjoyed considerablenotorietyandsuccess,withintheirworktheypursuedanonymity, or a generalised, archetypal human presence in deference to the new ascendancy of material as the subject of art. Even the neurotic gesturing of Jackson Pollock and his fellow abstract expressionists offered a pared-down visionofcreativity,anexplosivemeetingofwordlessangstandpaint.Inthree dimensions, minimalism also came to dominate as Carl Andre invited us to contemplate the dumb regularity of bricks arranged as a shallow platform. DonaldJuddcreatedimmaculate,butnon-functionalmetalboxesandRichard Serrainstalledprecariouslybalancedslabsofsteelinpublicspaces.Incolour fieldandminimalistpainting,anyevidenceoftheartist’shandwasconsidered adistractionfromthepureappreciationofcolourandsurfaceandthehighly tuned sense of essential presence a purely abstract painting could evoke. As minimalistabstractionheadedforitslogicalconclusion,thetraditionalfinearts seemedtobesetonacourseofauto-destruction.Bythemid1950s,Ellsworth Kelly had produced the ‘Black Square’ canvases, nothing but expanses of dusty grey paint. The works, in a gesture of ultimate self-exposure, referred only to themselves, narrowing the viewer’s attention to minute traces of the artist’shandintheunwittingbleedingofonecolourintoanotherorbroadening readingsintometaphysicalspeculations.Intermsofthelanguageofart,these endgameminimalistselaboratedwhatStuartMarshalldescribedas‘theplayof puresignifiersfreeofanysignifiedsbeyondtherealmofaestheticsitself’.1 Thus,videoemergedatatimewhenmodernismdecreedthatthematerial specificitiesofpaint,wood,metalandlaterfilmweretobeexploredfortheir ownsake.Wheremodernistsculptureandeaselartunveiledthematerialbase oftheplasticarts,filmandvideoaddedapreoccupationwithprocessalready evidentinthe‘action’paintingsoftheabstractexpressionist,JacksonPollock. Filmlentitselfwelltothisprojectowingtothedifferentstagesthatneededto becompletedtocreatetheimage–performing,lighting,filming,developing, printing, editing and projecting the result. Across the duration of the film,
T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I T A N C E • 23
themeansofproductioncouldberevealedwithintheimageitself.2Filmalso offered a surface to be painted, scratched and otherwise tampered with in a gameofdoubleexposure.Inthiswayitcould,evenasaprojected,illusional image,constantlyinsistonitsnon-representational,materialcondition.Stuart Marshallhassuggestedthatthisself-reflexivitywasmoredifficulttoachieve withearlyvideotechnology.AlthoughartistslikeNamJunePaiklaterinvented machines that interfered with the mechanical and electronic processes that create the video image, the medium offered no surface to work on directly. Thebirthoftheimagetookplacedeepinthetechnologywheretheartistcould not gain access without breaking the machine and extinguishing the signal. Marshallfurthersuggestedthattheoverridingrealismoftheimagemeantthat videoartiststendedtoworkwithissuesofrepresentationandnarrativitywhere film-makers, painters and sculptors were able to pursue abstraction and the modernistengagementwithmaterial. Here it might be legitimate to claim for video another antecedent in the linguistic investigations of conceptual art. Once Marcel Duchamps had successfully convinced the 1917 art world that a urinal was art, conceptual artists could turn their attention to the representational systems that classify objects,peopleandplacesandfixtheirmeaning,useandvalue.Theyshowed howthesecategoriestranslatedintotherealmofaestheticsandrevealedthe culturaltaxonomythatdefinedwhatwasartandwhatwasnot.Intheirown practices,conceptualartistssoughttounsettletheapparentlynaturalmarriage ofmeaningandmaterialespeciallywhentheresultwaselevatedtothestatus ofart.Muchconceptualartdelightedinabsurdismandillogicaljuxtapositions and transpositions of materials, precipitating in their objects a glorious obsolescence.Inthe1930s,MeretOppenheimhadexhibitedanunusablefurry teacupwhilethe1960ssawtheAmericanClaesOldenburgconstructingagiant MickeyMouse.Bythe1980s,intheUK,AmikamTorenwasmakingpaintings of chairs with pigment made from those same chairs ground down. Art and Language marked the logical endgame of conceptual art by replacing the art objectwithelaborateandlargelyincomprehensibletheoreticalpropositions. As we will see later, this concern to unravel linguistic conventions rather thancommunewithprocessandmaterialwasmoreafeatureofvideointheUK thanelsewhere.Infact,allvideoinvolvedarelationshipwithasetofmachines andprocesses,regardlessofthemaker’sstatedobjectives.Theimageitselfhad tobecreatedelectronically,atadistanceasasetofmechanicalandelectronic instructions. Like film, the material specificity of early video technology did,infact,offermanypointsofaccessandinterference,andmanymoreas knowledgeofthemediumgrew.InthesamewaythatthephilosopherMichel Foucaultrecommendedexaminingcriminalsinordertounderstandbetterthe workingsofthelaw,earlyvideoartiststriggeredmalfunctionsinthetechnology toexploreitsfundamentalnature.Intheprocess,theydiscoveredsomeofthe
2 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
medium’sexpressivepotentialonceitwasliberatedfromtherealistimperatives ofbroadcasttelevision. THE SPECIFICITIES OF THE MEDIUM In1962,theFrenchartistCésarexhibitedanoperatingTVmountedonapedestal andthreateneditwithagun.Thismemorablegesturemarkedthefirstassault on the technology of television and its popular offspring, portable video. A growingunderstandingofthetechnicalpropertiesofthetelevisualimagesoon allowedartiststolaunchattacksonthedeliveryofitsflickeringrealismatits pointofreception,onthetelevisionsetandlateratthemomentofitscreation inthecamera.Thosewhoacquiredtherequisitetechnicalexpertisewereable to dismantle and adapt the apparatus itself. A brief look at how television technology worked in the mid 1960s will help locate the points of entry that artists discovered. It was by interfering with those bewildering networks of cables,wiresandcomponentsthatartistsbegantheirsearchforthetruthofthe materialsandthekeytothemimeticliesthattele-visionmagicallyconjuresup. TELEVISIONS Early television sets contained a vidicom tube onto which an image was scanned through 525 lines in the USA and 625 lines in Europe and the UK. The‘tube’wasaglassenvelopetheinsideofwhichwascoatedwithtightly packedclustersofphosphor.Thepicturewasactivatedbyanelectrongunthat bombardedthephosphorclusterswithelectronsinacontrolledsequence.The picturewasmadeupoftwo‘fields’createdbytheelectronbeamscanningfirst the odd, then the even lines on the screen in quick succession. These were calibratedtocreate24framespersecond,eachonemadeupoftwointerlocking fields.Thesewerenottrueframesinthefilmicsensesincethescanningprocess wascontinuous,morefluidthanmechanical. Earlytelevisionsdeliveredablackandwhiteimagesynchronisedtomono sound. In spite of the initial crudity of the result, they created sufficiently compelling visions to hold their viewers’ collective attention and confirm a new social role for the TV set within suburban family life. Television design soonabandonedanypretencetobeconcealinganamusingnewgadgetinan itemofelegantfurniture.Instead,televisionsbrazenlyflauntedsleekindustrial casingsthathelpedestablishtheuptodatemodernityofthefamiliestowhich theybelonged. Theblandnarrativesandestablishmentviewsofbroadcastersnowreplaced thecohesivefunctionoffamilyinteractionsandstorytelling.Thisdisplacement offeredartiststhefirstpointofexposureanddisruption.In1962,theGerman artistWolfVostellcalledonaudiencestohijacktheevening’sTVentertainment
T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I T A N C E • 25
byrepeatedlychangingchannels,wrappingtheTVinbarbedwire,buryingitor eatingitasanindigestible‘TVDinner’.Throughhisinstructiontochannel-hop continuously,Vostellwasshatteringthepervasivenarrativesoftelevisionand hisabsurdinjunctiontodestroywhatwerethenveryexpensivesetshighlighted the consumerism that dominated cultural production and reception. He was also taking a swipe at the cupidity of individuals whose seemingly limitless appetitefornoveltywasbeginningtofeedtheburgeoningtelevisionindustry. If viewers were foolish enough to follow Vostell’s instructions, the logistical problemsinvolvedinwrappingtheTVinbarbedwiredandfindingawayof convertingitintoanedibleform,wouldcertainlyreinstatefamilycooperation, ifnotlaughterandconversation. Like a child dismantling a new toy, Vostell began to interfere with the television set itself. He invented his TV Decollages in which he used the verticalandhorizontalholdadjustmentstothrowthepictureoutofkilterand distortthebroadcastimagetothepointofincoherence.Inthisway,theartist interrupted the continuous flow of mass, one-way cultural production. By artificiallycreatingfaultsintheimagereception,Vostellrevealedtheelectronic sourceofthetelevisualillusion.Theseworkswereoftheirtechnologicaltime. Contemporary television sets have dispensed with the need for vertical or horizontalholdadjustmentstherebyclosinganavenueofinterventioninthe image.Artistssoonexhaustedtheavailableopportunitiestointerveneprovided bytelevisionmanufacturersontheoutsideofthesetandembarkedonmore invasivesurgery. WehavealreadyseenhowNamJunePaikusedpowerfulmagnetstocreate distortionsofthetelevisionimage.Paikalsobegantotamperwiththeinternal workingsoftheTVset.Followingthetraditionofmodifiedinstrumentsthathad beenpioneeredbythecontemporarycomposerJohnCage,Paikbeganadapting TVsetstocreatewhathecalled‘ElectronicTelevision’,anewvisualequivalent ofElectronicMusic.HisfirstexperimentsshowedthemarkoftheZenBuddhism thathadtriggeredJohnCage’spursuitofsilenceandchance.WhereCagehad reducedtheaudiencetolisteningtotheirownbreathing,Paikemptiedoutthe televisionimageintomeditative,minimalistabstractions.3In1963,hecreated ZenforTV,atelevisionsetonwhichonlyasinglelineoflightappeared.He achievedthisbymodifyingthescannerinsuchawayastopreventtheelectron beam from scanning the lines above and below the visible line of light. The slenderelectronichorizonlinedemonstratedatechnologicalprocessbutalso invitedtheviewertoabandontheshallowpleasuresoftelevisionconsumerism and embark on a process of transcendental meditation. The line suggested deeperinterpretationsofinfinity,ofthedivisionbetweenskyandland,heaven andhellaswellasthenaturalandtheman-madeandwhatevermeaningsare promptedintheindividualwhengazingatahorizon.Thesimpledivisionofthe picturesurfaceintotwoequalpartsalsoemphasisedthegeometryofthethree-
2 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
dimensionalboxthatisatelevisionset,anobjectthatviewersquicklyforgetas theyaredrawnintotheillusionisticscenesplayingonitsglassysurface. InMoonistheOldestTV(1965),oneofhismostpoetic‘prepared’television works, Paik modified a series of TV monitors to produce another minimalist shape, a circle of white light. By moving the scanner further back into the televisionhousing,thepooloflightthatwasvisibleonthescreenwasreduced insizeandwithitsbluishtint,tookontheeerieaspectofthemoon.Inlater versionsofthework,Paikusedaseriesofmagnetsfixedtothenecksofeach tubetodistortthemoon-shapeintoitsvariousphasesfromfulltocrescentto virtualobliterationwiththenewmoon.Thetwelvemonitorsrepresentedeach monthoftheyear,althoughstrictlyspeakingthereshouldhavebeenthirteen sincetherewerethirteenlunarmonthsintheyearwhenthemoonwasfirstused asameasureoftime.Paikreinstatedthemoonasoneoftheoriginalsourcesof light,asanavigationalaidandobjectofreligiouscontemplation.Atthesame time,hedeconstructedthetechnology,notsimplyasadryreminderofhow thetricksoftheeyefoolusintoacceptingatelevisualimageasreality,butas ameansofcreatinganewaestheticwithwidersocialandculturalmeanings. Aboveall,Paikwantedto‘gettheaudienceinaonenessofconsciousness,so theycouldperceivemore’.4 Uptothispoint,artistshadmadephysicalinterventionsintothetechnology byretuning,misaligningandderailingthenormalfunctioningoftelevisionsand monitors.ButPaiksoondiscoveredthathecouldadapttheoutputofatelevision setbyinterveninginthesignalatthepointofinput.Backinthe1950s,Ben Laposky had produced his Oscillons, elaborate, filmy abstractions created by distortingsoundwaveswithdeflectorplatesattachedtoanoscilloscope.Like atelevisionset,theoscilloscopeusedacathoderaytubetovisualiseelectrical signals and was susceptible to magnetic interference. In 1963, Paik adapted thistechniquebyfeedingtheoutputofaradiointoatelevisionsetwhichthen interpreted the audio signal as a single point of light. When the volume on theradiowasturnedup,thepointoflightexpanded.Turningthesounddown againcausedthelighttorecedeinthesamewaythatearlytelevisionimages vanishedintoapointoflightwhenthesetwasswitchedoff.AsinPaik’swork withexternalmagnets,PointofLightincorporatedtheinteractiveprinciplethat characterisedcontemporaryperformanceart,bydependingonthecooperation oftheaudiencetoturntheknobonthesetanddemonstrateitspotential.This embracedthealeatoryprinciple,theelementofchancethatwascentraltoJohn Cage’s musical experiments and Paik’s own commitment to indeterminacy. Eachnewmanipulationbyamemberoftheaudienceremainedunpredictable, uniqueandunrepeatable. Themodernistimperativetodismantletheimagesofculturalproductionand reveal their component parts remained a strong element in Paik’s early work. As well as making visible the internal workings of the technology, Paik was
T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I T A N C E • 27
executingagestureofdefianceatthemonolithicomnipresenceoftelevision.Inhis terms,broadcastmediaweremountingaconstantonslaughtontheiraudience’s sensibilitiesandhehadtakenituponhimselftolaunchacounter-offensive.But hisworkwasalsoreflectiveofthedomesticsettinginwhichtelevisionweavesits spell.Thereisaplayfulelementinhispreparedsets.Likeaprecocioussonofthe household,Paikpullstheboxapartandtakesacertaindelightinspoilingitfor everyoneelse.Heevenoffershisaudienceachancetotakepartinhissubversive play,defyingboththenewconventionsofsuburbandomesticityandthemedia monsterthatwasinfiltratingeveryaspectofprivateandpubliclife. CAMERAS Once artists gained access to affordable and portable cameras and recorders inthemidsixties,theysoonsubjectedthemtothesamemodernisttampering thatPaikandVostellhadinflictedontelevisionsets.Thecameradidnotescape their forensic curiosity and in parallel with Vostell’s treatment of television sets,DouglasDavisburiedacamera,thensmasheditintoamirrorandfinally lowereditoutofawindow,withthemachinebeingforcedtorecorditsownfate. Moresubtleformsoftortureweredevisedoncearudimentaryunderstandingof theinternalworkingsofthecamerawasacquired. Thetechnicalmakeupofearlyvideocamerasreversedtheprocesswhereby a television receiver decoded broadcast signals into a scanned image. Light focusedthroughalensfellonthecameratubeandtheinformationwasencoded into a set of electronic pulses that were routed to a television or monitor, decodedandreconstitutedasanimage.Artistsdiscoveredthatthephosphor coatinginearlycameratubeshadamemoryandmanufacturerswarnedthat itwasinadvisabletopointthecameraatintensesourcesoflightforextended periods. ‘Hot spots’ in the image would ‘burn’ onto the tube and remain as indelibleghoststobesuperimposedonanysubsequentfootagerecordedwith thesamecamera. In1975,theUSartistMaryLucierusedthispropertyofthetechnologyto make Dawn Burn. Pointing the camera directly at the sun, she exposed the tube to its concentrated rays of light as it rose over the East River in New York.Thepassageofthesunwasthusburntintothetubeasanarcingtrace creatingaperfectrecordofthesunrisebutruiningthecameraforotherusers. InGermany,JochenGerzdemonstratedthesensitivityofthetubetolightin Prometheus.GreekPieceno.3(1975).Forthedurationofthetwenty-minutetape, Gerzreflectedsunlightbackintothelensofthecamerawithasmallmirror. Standingsomefiftymetersaway,thefigureoftheartistgraduallydisappeared underthespreadingburnmarksofthesun. Byintensifyingandconcentratingtheinputoflight,theseworkscreateda faultthatexposedaflawinthetechnology.Theyalsodemonstratedtheseries ofalchemicaltransformationsthatbeginwiththenaturalphenomenonoflight
2 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
falling on the lens, its conversion to an analogue signal that subsequently metamorphoses into visual information emitted by the luminous phosphor hiddeninthemonitor.Gerzmadetheprocessstarklyvisiblebycreatingthen destroying the mimetic illusion in which the artist was illuminated and then effacedbythelightthatfirstrevealedhim.Thiscouldbeseenasacautionary taleabouttechnology,naturetakingitsrevengewhenlefttoitsowndevices, oritcouldbeameditationontheephemeralnatureofhumanlife.However, Prometheus.GreekPieceno.3isprimarilyamodernistconceitinwhichtelevision technologyisthwartedinitsaimtofaithfullyreplicatetheworld. C A M E R A T O M O N I T O R , V I D E O F E E D B AC K Artistssoonpouncedonanotherfaultlineinthetechnology,onethatcontinues to fascinate art students to this day. By pointing a camera directly at the monitortowhichitisconnected,artistslikeBillandLouiseEtraandBenTatti discoveredthatvideofeedbackcreatestheperfectclosed-circuitmanifestation ofthevideoprocess.Theimagerepeatsanddisappearsintoavortexofeverreceding replicas of itself. It continually feeds upon itself like a ravenous mythological creature consuming its own tail. In its self-contemplation, the videoimagesymbolicallyinterruptsthecontinuousone-wayflowofbroadcast information. Looped back, the signal finds no destination and disrupts the forwardpropulsionofnarrativetimeonwhichtelevisiondepends.Anyobject placedbetweenthecameraanditsmultiplemirrorbecomessubjecttothesame distortionsandissuckedintotheoublietteofthetechnologicalmalfunction. Thedistinctionbetweenobjectandgroundislostasistheseparationofdiscrete objects.Foregroundandbackgrounddissolveintovertiginoussurfacepatterns. Theelectro-visualacrobaticsthatvideofeedbackperformswerepopularatthe timeoftheirdiscovery.Althoughitwasinitiallyregardedasadeconstructive device,feedbackcapturedsomethingofthedrug-induced‘trips’ofthe1960s, thehallucinogenicblurringofsensesandboundariesthatLSDcouldcause. Notwithstandingitspsychedelicpotential,videofeedbackwasexploitedforits abilitytodramatisetheimagingfunctionofthecameraaswellastheperceptual processesoftheartist.StephenPartridgeintheUKusedfeedbackandtimedelay tocreateathree-dimensionaldominoeffectofmonitorsbeingturnedbyhand. Monitor 1 (1974) shows a tiny monitor within a slightly larger monitor within another larger monitor, increasing in size until the monitor on which the tape isplayingisreached.EachmonitorturnsasecondaftertheotherinaRussian Doll demonstration of video feedback. In 1971, the Canadian Michael Snow developedhisinstallationDeLainwhichavideocameramountedonanelaborate mechanical tripod scanned its environment through 360 degrees at variable speeds. The image was delivered to two monitors and as the camera swung past,theinfiniterecessionofvideofeedbackfilledthescreens.PierreThéberge
T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I T A N C E • 29
observedthat,‘althoughitcanpointatthetelevisionscreensandmultiplytheir images indefinitely, the machine (camera) itself, is absent from all the images itcanproduce.’5Thefeedbackloopbeingproducedbythecameraandmonitor maynotreproducetheexternalappearanceofthemachines,butitisanaccurate visualisationoftheinternalworkingsofbothandtheirstructuralinteraction. S O U N D F E E D B AC K The American artist Richard Serra made it possible for an audience to experience the physiological equivalent to what Ernest Gusella described as ‘tape echo’. Boomerang (1974) recorded on video the reactions of Nancy Holt speaking into a microphone whilst hearing her words fed back through headphones and subject to a slight delay. This phenomenon also pertained to long distance telephone calls and occasionally still happens with mobile phonescausing,inthiswriteratleast,aslightfeelingofnausea.Serraobserved that in this situation, speakers became conscious of the processes whereby thoughts are formed, translated into words, uttered and apprehended by a listener,butinBoomerangtheparticipantwasboththesourceanddestination ofthevocalisation.Attemptingtoreactappropriatelytoeachphase,thework provoked a ‘revolving, involuting experience, because parts of the words comingbackinonthemselvesstimulatedanewdirectionforthoughts’.6Inmy experiencethosenewdirectionstaketheformofanalarmingawarenessofthe externalsocialmarkersthatarecontainedinmyownvoice.Icanhearmyselfas othershearmeatthemomentofmyownutterance.Theintendedeffectsofmy wordsdonotmatchmyjudgementoftheresultandIfranticallyrealignmytone toproducethepublicimageIfondlyimagineIprojectthroughmyvoice.Like thevisualdeliriumofvideofeedback,theauditoryfeedbackofBoomerangcan produceinthespeaker/listeneraninstantpsychosis.AsNancyHoltdescribesit inthetape,‘IamsurroundedbyMe,mymindsurroundsme,goesoutintothe world,thencomesbackinsideme…noescape.’Thereisaretreatfromreality becausetherealityofbeingconsciouslytrappedinrepresentationproducesa functionalandsensoryoverloadthatbecomesquicklyunbearable. SYNCH SOUND For its participants, one of the many disturbing aspects of Richard Serra’s Boomerang was the disruption of the synchronisation of sound to visual events within the picture frame. Words have to match lip movements in orderfortelevisionrealismtofunctioneffectively.Thisrealismreplicatesour understandingofcauseandeffect,andconfirmsthehealthofourperceptual systems. To disrupt the logic of spoken language is profoundly damaging to both conventional narrative structures and the position of the individual withinasystemofcommunicationthathethoughtheunderstood.In1969,the
3 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
American artist Bruce Nauman slowly separated speech from lip movement inhishypnotictapeLipSync.Byturningthecameraupsidedown,hecreated aninvertedcloseupofhischinandlips.Inthetape,herepeatstheterm‘lip sync’ for the duration, the words gradually slipping out of sync with his lip movements and just as gradually falling back into step with the image. As I have mentioned, in Stamping the Studio (1968), Nauman is seen shuffling around his studio and, once again, the sound of his footsteps drifts out of syncandslowlyreturnstomakesenseoftheimage.Invideo,soundisalways recordedsimultaneouslywiththeimageandNauman’sabilitytoachievethe separationwasdependentonasmalltechnicaladvanceinPortapakstowards theendofthe1960s.Therecordersnowofferedtwochannelsofsound,thefirst ofwhichwassynchronisedtothepicturewhilethesecondcouldberecorded independentlyasanaudiodubsuperimposedontheoriginalrecording.Artists couldnowplaywithavoice-overcommentaryaftertheeventor,asinNauman’s case,usethesecondchannelofsoundtosubvertthefirst. Some years later the logical relationship between sound and picture was disruptedfurtherbytheAmericanartistGaryHillwhosetapeWhydothings getinamuddle?(1984)contrivedtomakespeechandpictureruninopposite directions.TwoactorsplayingalearnedacademicandquestioningAlicefigure learnt their lines backwards and when the tape was itself played in reverse motion,thewords,comingoutbreathyandsyncopated,madesyntacticalsense buttheactionranbackwards.Theprocesswasmostobviouswhenthebearded academic appeared to ingest and blow smoke into his pipe while his speech remainedcoherent,ifalittlestrange.Thisdisjunctureofwordsandtheperceived forward march of time created an unsettling spectacle and drew attention to thefamiliarmatchofsound,pictureandtemporaldirectionthattelevisionand filmrelyon.Onceagain,thetransparencyofthemediumwaschallengedbya modernisttamperingwiththeconventionalassociationofwordandpictureand acuriousdream-likediscursiveworldroseupinthelinguisticgaps. FURTHER MALFUNCTIONS Themostfamousworkofearlymodernistvideoexploitedafamiliartelevision malfunction of the period. The first television sets were prone to lose the synchronisation of the picture scanning and begin to drift between frames with the usually invisible black band marking the transition from one frame to another scrolling through the picture. Vertical and horizontal roll buttons werehelpfullyprovidedonoldsetstosteadythepicture.TheNewYorkartist Joan Jonas deliberately misaligned the vertical roll so that the black band rhythmically scrolled through the picture. In Vertical Roll (1972) she made a recording of her hand repeatedly slamming down on a table and played it throughthefaultymonitor.Theunevennessofheractionmeantthat,fromtime
T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I T A N C E • 31
totime,herhandappearedtohittheblackbarandpushittothebottomofthe frame.Itlookedasthoughtheself-styled‘electronicsorceress’wasachieving the impossible, that is, reversing the immateriality of the video image by climbinginsidethetechnologyandtouchingaphysicalcomponent.However, both the black band and the artist’s hand were clearly illusions created by electronicsignals.Togetherwiththecomponentsfacilitatingtheirmovements, they constituted the only material dimensions of the work. The video image anditsartfuldeconstructionexistedinthisandanyotherworkinvideoonlyas achangeinelectricalpotential,entirelydependentonthesupplyofelectricity tothesystemforittoexist. SCRAMBLING THE MESSAGE The credulity of early television and video audiences, their willingness to suspenddisbeliefandreadahazyblackandwhiteorwashedoutcolourimage asaformofrealitybecametheconcernofmanyBritishvideo-makersinthe early1970s.DavidHall,apioneerofUKvideo,wasdeterminedtoexposethe lie and destabilised the codes of television realism by illuminating another defect of the technology thereby creating what is probably the definitive television deconstruction. This is a Television Receiver (1971–1976) featured the well-known newsreader Richard Baker facing the camera in a steady, if tight,frame.Thisfamiliarfigurebegantospeak,deliveringnottheprescribed eveningbulletinpackagedforthedelicatepalateoftheBritishviewingpublic, but a self-reflexive statement that fractured the credulity pact, then as now voluntarilyenteredintowithbroadcasters.‘Thisisatelevisionreceiver,’Baker begins,‘whichisaboxmadeofwood,metalorplastic.Ononeside,mostlikely theoneyouarelookingat,thereisalargerectangularopeningthatisfilledwith acurvedglasssurfacethatisemittinglight…inavarietyofshadesorhues… theseformshapesthatoftenappearasimages,inthiscasetheimageofaman, butitisnotaman.’Bakergoesontodescribethemechanismbywhichsound iscreatedmatchingtheman’slipmovements,‘butitisnotaman’svoice’.Hall isusingtheverisimilitudeoftelevisiontodeclareitsfraudulenceandcallinto questiontheofficialviewoftheworldthatBaker’scalmandauthoritativeBBC voicetransmittedtomillionseverynightoftheweekinthe1970s.Butincase weshouldbeinanydoubtthatboththeimageandthetextsoftelevisionare artfulconstructs,theartistgoesontoprovehispointbycopyingandreplaying thesequenceseveraltimes,bringingintoplayadefectthathasonlynowbeen solvedbytheadventofdigitalvideo.Eventoday,analoguevideostillexistsin theformofdomesticVHSandweallknowthatcopyingvideotapesinvolves adeteriorationofthesignal.InHall’stape,theimageofthenewsreadergoes downthroughthegenerations,copiesaremadeofcopiesuntilBakerandhis voicehavedisintegratedbeyondrecognition.Allweareleftwithisthebox,the
3 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
1. David Hall, This is a Television Receiver (1976). CommissionedbyBBCTV astheunannouncedopening piece for their Arena videoartprogramme,first transmitted10March1976. Courtesyoftheartist.
three-dimensionalobjectthatwesoreadilyignoreinfavouroftheflickering illusionsplayingnightlyonitsdeceptivesurface.Clearly,inthedigitalage,it wouldbepossibletomakeperfectreplicasoftheoriginalandnodeterioration wouldtakeplace.Butintheeraofanaloguevideo,ThisisaTelevisionReceiver demonstrated the illusionism at the heart of cultural production and, by exploitingafundamentalflawinthetechnology,Hallrevealedthematerialbase ofthatelectronictrompel’oeiltowhichsomanyofusareaddicted. COMPUTERS In the early days of video, the technology was adapted and dismantled to malfunction(Paik,Jonas,Hall),tofunctionwithoutsynchronisation(Nauman), independently of a recording process (Paik, Lucier) and free of a camera (Vostell). Video artists now attempted to create images without recourse to broadcast television or indeed the observable world. With the advent of
T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I T A N C E • 33
computers,videobrokeitsdependenceonexternalrealitytocreateanimage andevolvedavisuallanguagegeneratedentirelyfromtheinternalworkingsof thetechnology.StephenBeckandEricSiegelbuiltthefirstvideosynthesizer with which they created slowly moving colour abstractions that flowed and merged as pleasingly as Rothko’s oceanic colour field paintings. As in video feedback,theresultswereclosertothedruginducedpsychedelicabstractions belovedofcontemporaneoushippiesanddiscothequelightshows:‘Watchthe colours,man…’AsMickHartneyhaspointedout,thesenon-narrativeretinal feastswerequicklytakenupbytherockindustry,bypromotionalvideo-makers and,morerecently,byyouthTV.7 Today’scomputershavemadethegenerationofelectronicabstractionmore complex and faster-paced, with a high turnover of visual stimuli taking the spectatoruptoandbeyondthepointofsensoryoverload.Manyartistshave seencomputerspaceasavalue-free,transparentelectronicdomaininwhich their creativity might expand without the baggage of artistic traditions that burden painting, sculpture and even televisual imagery. By the late 1980s, artists like William Latham were exploiting the benefits of high resolution, creatingdisquietingabstractmutationsandsurrealanimations.Likecomputer animation and Hollywood special effects, these works were the result of functioninganddiscreettechnologiesanddidnotseektoindicatethemeansof productionbeyondtheimage. Other artists used computers and simple homemade or commercially available vision mixers and switchers to intervene in the smooth passage of the signal from camera to monitor. Through these devices, the image could be hijacked and superimposed or juxtaposed or mixed with other images or replacedaltogetherwithvideosourcesfromothercameras.Off-airbroadcast material could be altered or combined with images generated by the artist. Withtheadventofcomputerimageprocessing,thepossibilitiesforaesthetic andconceptualinterventionroseexponentiallyandtechnologicalwizardrywill emergeatvariouspointsasthisaccountofvideounfolds. Nam June Paik built a computer that could mix images, and he used Chromakeytechniques(colourseparationoverlay)tosuperimposepartsofone imageoveranothercreatingbizarremontages.Chromakeyworksbyselectinga colourfromthefirstimage,usuallyblue,thatisthenreplacedbyanimagefrom anothersource.Thisprocessisfamiliartousontelevisionwhentheweather reporterstandsinfrontofacomputer-generatedgraphicandpointstodifferent areasofthecountrythatmagicallysproutcloudsandsunstoillustratethestory. Theweatherreporterisinfactstandinginfrontofabluescreen.Intheearly 1970s,theUKartistPeterDonebauerbuiltwhatheconsideredtobea‘video instrument’, in its commercial form a Videokalos Colour Synthesizer. With some experience behind him in creatively realigning studio cameras within a multi-camera set up at the Royal College of Art, Donebauer developed the
3 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
Videokalosasanelectronicpainter’spalette.Aswellasofferingfivepossible layers of images, the video instrument separated the colour elements of a broadcastcompositesignalintoitsconstituentred,greenandblue.Inthisway, theartistcouldworkwiththecoloursdirectlyandcombinethemwithimages generatedbycamerasandothersources.ForDonebauer,themachinewaslike aninstrumentandneededtobeportablesothathecoulduseittoperformlive withmusiciansanddancers. Theperformativepotentialofvideosynthesizerswasalsoexploredbythe CzechartistsSteinaandWoodyVasulkawhoworkedinbothEuropeandthe USA.Theybecamefascinatedwiththemagicoftheinvisibleelectronicsignal andbeganworkingwithaudio,thenvideotape,inthelate1960s.Atfirst,the VasulkassharedPaik’sdesiretoobviatetheneedforacameratoproducean image by feeding an audio signal directly into the video recorder. Once they began to mix the sound-generated patterns with another originating from a camera,itbecamehardtodefinethepointatwhichthesoundendedandthe picturebegan.TheVasulkascontrivedtochannelthesoundofSteina’sviolin directlyintothevideosignalsothateachtimeherbowcameintocontactwith thestrings,thenotessheplayedinteractedwithanddistortedtheimageofher
2.SteinaVasulka,ViolinPower:ThePerformance(1992topresent),video performance.Courtesyoftheartist.
T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I T A N C E • 35
performanceonthescreen.LikeBruceNauman,theVasulkaswerereminding usthatunlikemostfilm,videocomeswithabuilt-insynchronisedsoundtrack. Theydevisedanewrelationshipbetweensoundandimage,oneinwhichthe soundwecouldhearandseebeingproducedbytheperformertookonavisual formofitsownanddisturbedthelogicoftherepresentationalimage. Inlaterworks,withtheaidofcomputers,theVasulkaswereabletoemploy Steina’s violin to manipulate video images more precisely. Taking the role of both editor and vision mixer, Steina could use her bow to scroll forwards and backwards and repeat pre-recorded sequences at will. At times Steina performedretrospectivelywithdancers,musiciansandactors,controllingtheir music, speech and movements from her instrument. Like a puppeteer with invisiblestrings,Steinadirectedhercollaboratorsfromtheviolinnowrigged up in such a way that certain strings controlled the speed of the sequence whilstindividualnotescalledupspecificimages.Vasulkahadbothpeopleand machinesdancingtohertuneandwasperformingasmuchinthetechnology aswithit.Theseworksbecameamodelformuchsubsequentcomputer-based music/video performance and the Vasulkas have made the transition into popularculturebydesigningsoftwarethatisusedbythecurrentgenerationof VJs(videojockeys). It is clear from these accounts that modernist interventions into video technologydependedontheimagesurvivinglongenoughforthedefectsand distortions to make their deconstructive points. A simple break at any point inthecircuitrywouldeasilyeclipseavideoimagealtogether,whereasastrip offilmcouldsurviveafairbitofsurfacedamageaslongasitcouldstillpass thoughthegateoftheprojector.Whilemodernistvideoattemptedtoprecipitate thefaultsthattelevisionwascarefultoconceal,itstillhadtoavoidtotalloss ofthepicture–theblankscreenthatwould,infact,betheultimatemodernist statement, but was actually the nightmare of every artist who depended on unreliablevideoequipmentintheearlyyears.Paintersandsculptors,feeling threatenedbythenewmedia,likedtotauntvideo-makerswiththejokethat whattheyenjoyedmostabouttheirscreeningswasthatnothingeverhappened. Early video-makers had to perfect a delicate balancing act between sabotage andrescueinordertocommunicatetheirradicalmessagesandthesometimesincidentalpoetryoftheirdeconstructions. … A N D, F I N A L LY I use technology in order to hate it more properly. Nam June Paik Aspicturequalityhasimprovedovertheforty-oddyearsofvideo’sexistence, most of the technical anomalies in both cameras and monitors have been
3 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
ironedout.Today’stelevisionsandvideorecordersofferfewpointsofentryor opportunitiestoactdirectlyupontheimageotherthanbyemployingthelimited pre-seteffectsprovidedbythemanufacturers.Therehasbeenaconcomitant weakeningofinterestinthetechnologyitselfandwithsomenotableexceptions, fewcontemporaryartistsmaintainthemodernistimpulsetotakethemachines apart.8 Nowadays the focus has shifted to what computers can do with the imageandprogrammingknowledgehastakenoverfromtheearliertrainingin basicelectronicandengineeringsabotage.Inspiteofthevideotrickerynowat ourdisposal,thelanguageofthemovingimagehasrevertedtoitspre-modernist transparencyandonthewhole,themachineswork. Intheearlyyears,PaikandHallwereclearintheirobjectiveofdisruptingthe smoothsurfaceoftelevisualillusionism.Wheremodernistpaintersandsculptors searchedforessencesandnoumenaltruthsintheircommunionwithmaterials, pioneersofmodernistvideoappearedtocourtthefailureofthetechnologyasan endinitself.EdithDecker-PhillipshasnotedadistinctionbetweenJohnCage’s intentionstoliberatesoundandNamJunePaik’smoreradicalgoal,whichwas to‘eliminatetraditionalmusicandperformancepracticesaltogether’.9Themost radicalartisticambitionscannotprogresswithoutthetechnologyandinspiteof Paik’sclaimtohatemachines,modernistvideowasbasedonanintimacywith theapparatusthatwaspromptedasmuchbyenchantmentwithtechnological toys as by political analysis. Such fascination with technology has become a featureofourage. Aswellasofferingachallengetobroadcastmediaandartisticconvention, modernist video-makers like Jonas and the Vasulkas colonised video as a habitable physical and psychological space for creative individuals. They also symbolically returned to a mimetic medium the mark of the individual, bestowingonartists’videoWalterBenjamin’s‘aura’,thattalismanicessenceof theuniqueobjectthatreproductivemediahavebanished.Lateron,postmodern thinking would erode the notion of both the individual and the primacy of the art object. It would also challenge the pursuit of originality in a world dominated by networks of interchangeable information, circulating in prepackagedforms.However,initsearliestmanifestations,videoartwasmarked by a counter-cultural impulse, an insistence on the agency of the individual asanantidotetothehegemonyoftelevision.Itofferedanindependentvision againsttelevision’stendencytohomogeniseandpackagehumansubjectivities intoablandpabulumofpick’n’mixstereotypes.
3 Disrupting the Content Feminism
Video is a bullet in the landscape. Anne Course T E L E V I S I O N , T H E A L T E R N AT I V E V I E W Deconstructingtelevisualverisimilituderepresentedoneoppositionalstrategy; another was to attack television at the level of content. On the strength of camera-credible news-gathering, networks have always claimed a privileged relationship with reality and objective truth. However, their impartiality has proved elastic, mediated as it is by the political and commercial interests of theirpaymasters.Therepresentationandinterpretationofeventsontelevision is,infact,severalstepsremovedfromlivedreality.Thepackagingdevicesthat include judicious editing, cosy voice-overs and commercial breaks have the effect of normalising official news coverage for mass audiences. In spite of theoccasionalhard-hittingbroadcastsbyinvestigativejournalistsliketheUK’s JohnPilger,thecontrolsonreportingremainstringent.Theyareenforcedin peacetimeasintimesofwarandwithgoodreason.DuringtheVietnamWar inthe1960s,televisionlearnedthattherealismfromwhichitdrewitspowers ofpersuasioncouldalsoworkagainstestablishmentinterestscharacterisedas ‘nationalinterest’.Vietnamwasthefirstwartoenteroursittingroomsviaa television screen. Politicians were unable to counter the effects of exposing thehorrorsofmilitaryconflicttoordinaryAmericancitizenswhoincreasingly doubtedthemoraljustificationforsacrificingtheirsonstoanebulouscause, milesfromhome.ThenegativeoutcomesofthisinadvertentTVexposurewere compoundedbythealternativeviewsoftheconflictthattheanti-warmovement wassuccessfullydisseminatingthroughliterature,song,massdemonstrations
3 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
andart.Eventoday,werarelyseethehumancostsofUSorUKforeignpolicy on our television screens. We mainly witness the horrors perpetrated by the currentenemiesofthestate. Since the Vietnam War, the reporting of world affairs on television has remainedasmuchamatterofpoliticalexpediencyasoffact.Tobalancethe unitaryworld-viewpromulgatedbythenetworks,artistshaveusedthecredibility ofvideoasafactualmediumtopresenttheirown,alternativeexperiencesof reality,theirversionofhistory.InChapter7wewillseehowgroupsofartists and activists produced campaign tapes to counter what they saw to be the misrepresentationofeventsontelevision.Forthemoment,Iwillconcentrate on the singular point of view that individuals contributed to problematising thenarrowunderstandingoftheworldcreatedbycorporatebroadcasting.The VietnamWarwastheinspirationforoneoftheearliestexamplesinwhichan artistundertooktotellhistruth,someyearsaftertheevent.DanReevesdrew onhisownexperiencesasaconscriptinVietnamtocreateamovingaccount ofthedeathsofhiscompatriots,anaspectofthewarthemediacametoplay down.SmotheringDreams(1981)wasadramatisedreconstructionofanambush inwhichmanyofReeves’fellowmarinesweretrapped,woundedandkilled. Thescenesofconfusion,bloodanddespairareinterspersedwithmemoriesof childhoodgames,ofCowboysandIndiansteachingtheboystoacceptviolent conflictasagivenoftheirmasculinecondition.Reevesappropriatedanarrative structureandtherealismofHollywoodcinematoexposetherealitiesofwarfree fromthejingoisticcommentarieswithwhichtelevisionattemptedtosanitise thisepisodeinAmericanhistory. IntheUK,warwasbothclosetohomeinNorthernIrelandanddistantin partsoftheworldwherehostilitiesdroveasylumseekerstoothershores.Mona Hatoum’sMeasuresofDistance(1988)recordedonewoman’sexperiencesofthe ArabicDiaspora,madeallthemoredistressingbyseparationfromherparents whowerelefttosurvivethedangersofwar-tornBeirutwhileshesoughtrefuge inLondon.Thetaperevolvesaroundlettersfromhomethatformadensemesh ofArabicscriptsuperimposedonimagesofhermother’snakedbodywhilethe measuredvoicesofmotheranddaughterspeakthewordsinbothArabicand English.Theminutiaeofdailylifeundersiege,themaritaltensionsandniggling worriesamotherhasforherdaughterformamatrixofanxietiesintowhich historiceventsintrude.Thismother,likehundredsofothers,wasindangerof beingreducedtoacoldstatisticbydestructiveforcesbeyondhercontrol.Her deathwouldconstituteabarelyperceptibleblipinthefiguresthatmayormay notbedeemednewsworthythatweek.Throughtheuniquepatternanddetail of her mother’s embattled existence, Hatoum insisted on the importance of individuallivescaughtupinarmedconflicts.Thespecificitiesofherstoryrose abovethebabbleoftendentiousgeneralisationsandpropagandathathavelong marredreportingfromtheMiddleEast.
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 39
Tosomeextent,theimpactofReeves’andHatoum’sverypersonalaccounts of war depended on their contrast with television equivalents in the 1970s and 1980s in which individual, non-professional voices were largely absent. Upuntilthe1990s,televisiongenerallyexcludedtheexperiencesofordinary soldiers or citizens and certainly had little truck with artists. The notion of realityTVdidnotexistandsuchrepresentationsofhumanityasreachedthe screens took the form of celebrity personae or fictional characters reflecting theexperience,aspirationsanddesiresofthewhite,heterosexualmiddle-class males that ran the networks. Women, ethnic minorities, gays and ordinary folk were reduced to stereotypes or simply did not appear. The liberation movementsofthe1960sand1970smadewhatDavidRosscalled‘thepersonal attitude’apotentcounter-culturalweapon.Rossobservedthattelevision,asan institutionandagrammar,waswellestablishedbythetimeartistsgotholdof videocamerasandcontendedthatthepersonalattitudewastheonethingthat artistscouldusefullycontribute.1Videoauto-portraiture,theartist’sindividual perceptions resisting the hegemony of broadcast television, found its natural homeinfeministvideo. FEMINISM – THE PERSONAL IS POLITICAL Overthecenturies,mostwesternsocietiesandvirtuallyallthird-worldcountries havebeenpatriarchalinstructure,thatis,organisedaroundsocialandpolitical institutions dominated by men serving the interests of men. The ‘stronger’ sexhaswieldedpowerinthepublicarenawhilewomen’ssphereofinfluence has been restricted to the domestic domain. In spite of the activities of the Suffragettesearlyinthetwentiethcenturyandtheadventofuniversalsuffrage, womeninthe1960sand1970swerestillunder-representedinalmostallwalks oflife,includingtheartworld.Feministsnowchallengedthewholegamutof genderinequalitiesthathadpersistedontheshakygroundsofsexualdifference, onmenandwomen’sdivergentprocreativeroles,onbiologyasdestiny.Politics in general and Patriarchy in particular were seen to have infiltrated, indeed created,theprivaterealm,aboundedterritorywherethemajorityofwomen lived out their lives. The film-maker Sally Potter expressed it in these terms: ‘Ideologyisnotmerelyreflectedbutproducedinthecontextofthefamilyand inpersonalrelationships…politicalstructuresarenotjust“outthere”butare manifest in the most seemingly insignificant actions, words and conditions.’2 In order to mobilise women to rise out of oppression and win equality in publiclife,feministsemployedamethodthatpoliticisedwomenintheheartof theirdomesticconfinement,inthefamilyhome.Fromthe1960stothe1980s, consciousness-raising as a non-hierarchical process brought women together, ofteninoneanothers’kitchens,toexchangestoriesoftheirlivesandre-interpret them,notasaproductoftheirindividualfailingsorneuroses,butasafunction
4 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
ofcollectiveoppressionunderPatriarchy.Thiswasthe‘PersonalasPolitical’,a sloganthatbecameafeministrallying-cryforactivistsandartistsalike. Womenartistsbegantousethe‘private’narrativesofconsciousness-raising asmaterialintheirwork.Thehiddenexperiencesthatwomenhadsuppressed now entered the public realm of art and these stories were offered, not as monumentstoindividualartisticegos,butinthehopethatotherwomenwould be inspired to add their own accounts and promote the process of political awakening. However, it was not enough simply to raise consciousness and enjoythecomradeshipofotheroppressedwomeninpublicorinprivate.The stories were told for a political purpose that is significantly absent from the personal outpourings we now witness every day on afternoon TV. Within feminist art, as in the wider movement of women’s liberation, the aggregate ofthesemyriadvoicesenabledacommonfeministanalysistobemadefrom whichpoliticalinitiativeswereforgedonissuesrangingfromabortiontoequal pay,domesticviolencetochildcare,nucleardisarmamenttofamilyplanning. In contemporary terms, a consciousness-raising collective could be seen as an early form of focus group, but with political rather than commercial objectives. In contrast to the communion with materials and processes that was required of a modernist audience, feminist art was designed to promote politicalenlightenmentandinspireactivismthatmighteventuallyleadtosocial change.Feministsnolongerconceivedoftheaudienceasheterogeneousand aimedthethrustoftheirargumentsprincipallyatotherwomen.Intermsofa subterraneanfemaleculturerunningalongsideapatriarchalmainstream,this wasnothingnew.Womenhadalwaysengagedinmulti-layeredconversations, one-to-oneexchangesinwhichideastravelledlaterally,byosmosis,periodically crystallisingintooralhistoriesthathavebeenpasseddownthroughtheages frommothertodaughter.Buttheseexchangesnolongertookplaceunderground andcametolightwithinthevisualartsingeneralandvideoinparticular,where theinvestigationofpersonalidentitywasfastbecomingakeyconcern. Feministarturgedactivisminthewiderworld,butitalsoembarkedona redefinitionoffemininityitselfatthelevelofrepresentation.UnderPatriarchy, imagesofwomenwerelimitedtoarangeofstereotypesclassifiableaseither negativelyorpositivelychargederoticobjects–desirableorundesirable.This systemofclassificationwascomplementedbythevirgin-whoredichotomywith thesexuallyvoraciouswomanopposedtotheubiquitousimageofmaternaland domestic devotion on which society turned and reproduced. With television now one of the major vehicles for the dissemination of cultural images of women, video was an obvious medium with which to begin dismantling stereotypical representations and assert the political, psychic and aesthetic evolutionofwomen’snewlyraisedconsciousness.Withgrowingaudiencesand a cultural environment conducive to liberation politics, women could begin to use the association of video with facticity to develop political campaigns.
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 41
Videofacilitatedtheexplorationofnewterritoriesinfeminineexperienceand mobilisedthefeedbackmirrorofthetechnologytosearchforaviableidentity aswellasalternativewaysofappearingandactingintheworld. F E M I N I S T V I D E O – I N S TA N TA N E I T Y Aswithanyemergentpoliticalmovement,feminismwasmarkedbyasenseof urgencybornofcenturiesofrelativesilence.Womenwereimpatienttospeak, tovisualiseandtobecomevisible.Theygravitatedtowardsperformanceand video because of their confrontational nature and their ability to deliver an immediatemessagetoanaudience.Withthesedirectformsofaddress,women were able to convey, almost instantly, the various doctrines of feminism. Followingthepracticeofconsciousness-raising,womenwereinitiallyconcerned with speaking directly to other women as they had always done on a oneto-one basis – what men liked to call gossip. In this respect, video already carriedthepossibilityofthisformofexchangewithinitsinheritedvocabulary. Televisionestablishedthedeviceofeye-to-eyecontactwiththeviewerthrough theubiquitouspresenterandnewsreader.Themanufacturedintimacyofthis direct address to an audience was a useful precedent, but in the context of avant-garde practices, video as a medium was wide open. The writer David Ross pointed out that video was born of the pre-existing disciplines of film, theatreandtelevision.However,therulesofperformanceandvideowerestill being hammered out; in fact their only convention was that there were no conventions.Forwomendevelopinganewtaxonomyoffemininesubjectivity, anascentvideolanguage,unburdenedbycenturiesofpatriarchalprecedents, seemedtoofferrelativelyvirginterritoryfortheexplorationofthefeminine. As we have seen, the instantaneity of video was attractive to those who favoured a representational language of wide currency, but it was video’s uniqueabilitytomirrorbacktheimageoftheartisttoherselfthatmostattracted feministartistsworkingwithautobiographicalmaterial.Avideoimagecouldbe workedondirectlyintheprivacyofhomeorstudiowiththemonitorasaguide. Theresultscouldbemadepublicordeletedatwill.Inspiteofbeingheavyand cumbersome,portablevideoequipmentwasrelativelyeasytooperate.Women couldquicklymasterthetechnologyandembarkonthedifficultbusinessof introspection and experimentation without the intrusive presence of camera crewsandgenerallymaletechnicians.Witherasureaseasyasmakingamark, themediumallowedartistsunprecedentedcontroloverboththesubstanceand thetermsoftheirvisibility. The instantaneity of video was a feature of its production, but also of its dissemination. With the advent of the VHS format, large numbers of copies could be made from the master tape and distributed cheaply to groups and individualsthroughartist-runorganisations,alternativeviewingspaces,media
4 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
festivals and community groups. The possibility of mass communication through broadcast was also of considerable interest for the campaigning purposes of feminism, but the early days of video were characterised by an understandablesuspicionofmassmediaandartistspreferredtousealternative artandcommunity-baseddistributionnetworks. D O M E S T I C I T Y A N D FA M I LY R E L AT I O N S Intermsofcontent,manyartistsbeganwiththetraditionalarenaofwomen’s privatelives.AsSallyPotterimplied,domesticlifeandpersonalrelationships have long formed the foundation of women’s identities. The images of domesticity promoted by television in the late 1960s and 1970s reflected the post-SecondWorldWarcampaigntopressurewomenbackintothehometo makewayforthereturningsoldierswhowantedtheirjobsback.Childrearing and domestic work were reinvented as women’s destiny and advertising betweentelevisionshowsportrayedasmilinghomemakerwhosesoleaimin lifewastobringupbabyandachievethebrightestwash.Intheearlydaysof feminism,manywomenartistsdeconstructedthisimageofdomesticdrudgery. One of the most incisive was Bobby Baker whose entertaining performances inLondonproducedcookingasartandelevatedtheproductsofaseemingly worthlessfemaleactivity,‘thebudgetmealfortwo,thesupperpartyforfour’ intomarketablehighart.MarthaRosler’sclassicvideoSemioticsoftheKitchen (1975)recreatedacookeryprogramme,butmadenoattempttoentertain.In thetape,theapronedartiststandsbehindatableonwhichanarrayofkitchen utensilsislaidout.Sheselectseachoneinturn,holdingthemuptothecamera and dully speaking their name. Dish, tenderiser and plate are enumerated likeaschoolrollcallwhilsttheirfunctionisbrieflydemonstratedbutwithout ingredients. When it comes to knife, fork and ice pick, Rosler turns these familiar objects into domestic weapons and beats the air like a cool-headed murderess dispatching an invisible victim. When it is the turn of the ladle, sheflingsasidetheimaginarycontentscreatinganightmaremessthatwould markherasafailedhousewife.TheunderlyingthreatofFreudiancastration,of losingboththesymbolandmemberofmanhood,isgrimlylabouredasRosler hacksouttheinventoryofwomen’srepetitivedomesticslaveryservingupher angerincarefullymeasuredculinarygestures. Some years later, Vivienne Dick made a wry, one-minute protest at the entrapment of women in the home and the unforeseen selflessness that maternalandwifelydutydemands.It’s3a.m.(1991,BBCtelevision)reveals theartistsmokinganddrinkingintheearlyhoursbecausethebabyisawake andcrying–again.Asshelightsupanothercigarette,hervoice-overbemoans hercondition.Tiedtothebottomlesspitofneedthatisaninfant,allshereally wantstodois‘smokeanddrinkandstayoutlatewithmen’.Thedisappearance
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 43
of generations of young women into motherhood and domestic servitude remainsthegreatestbraindrainofWesternEurope,eveninthesesupposedly post-feminist days when women have become superwomen and maintain a careeraswellasrunahome.Thesearerelativelyrecentdevelopmentsandin theearlydaysoffeminismanduptothelate1980s,themajorityofwomenstill vanished into the phantom army of unpaid mothers and housekeepers who tradedtheirfreedomforaman’snameandthepromiseoffinancialsecurity. FAT H E R S, H U S B A N D S, L OV E R S, S T R A N G E R S Traditionally, women were expected to find fulfilment in domestic roles and gainstatusinthepublicrealmbyassociationwiththeirmalerelatives,trading ontheachievementsoftheirfathers,husbands,brothersandsons.Withinthe newtermsofapubliclydeclaredpersonal,everyfamilyrelationshipwasnow opentoexamination.Often,thepowerlessnessandabusethatwomensuffered at the hands of men behind closed doors was exposed, as in the UK artist Louise Forshaw’s Hammer and Knife (1987). The tape opens with the artist standinginthemiddleofafield.Shequietlydescribestherapethatresultedin her,thereafter,sleepingwithahammerandaknifeunderherpillow.Attimes, sexualabusewasovertakenbyevengreaterviolenceaswasrevealedbyPratibha Parmar’sSariRed(1988).Usingthedirectvocabularyofdocumentaryoverlaid byarichtapestryofcolour,ParmarchartsthebrutalmurderofKalbinderKaut HayrebywhiteyouthsinanorthernEnglishtown.Theexposureofviolence againstwomeninthesetapescoincidedwithapoliticalcampaigninEngland resultinginthecreationofwomen’ssheltersthatalsoarrangedlegalprotection andrepresentationforbatteredwives. Itwascertainlyimportanttoexposetheviolenceofaculturethatsofrequently breaks out in individual acts of violence against women and children. But women’srelationshipswiththeirmalerelativeswereoftencomplexandledto lessManicheanevocationsoffemaleidentitythatweredefinedbyproximityto menwithwhomtheysharedageneticinheritance.Withinafamily,difference and sameness can constitute shifting polarities even when subject to the gendering forces of the external cultural order. In The Ballad of Dan Peoples (1976),theCanadianLisaSteelesitsonastoolwiththephotographofanold man on her lap. In a lilting chant, Steele takes on the character of the oldtimer, and sings his oft-repeated stories of a country childhood. Anticipating GillianWearing’stranspositionofvoicesfromchildrentoadults,Steeleadopts thememoriesandthustheidentityoftheoldman.Heprovestobeakeyto herownidentity–themanwhosevoiceshethrowsisthatofhergrandfather, hisperceptionsandprejudicesinternalisedasherown.Thesharpdistinction between male and female is also dissolved in a vocal transposition that the performance artist Laurie Anderson affected around this time. By means of
4 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
3.LisaSteele,TheBalladofDanPeoples(1976),videotape.Courtesyofthe artistandVtape,Toronto. a vocoder, Anderson was able to change the pitch of her voice during her performancessothatsheintermittentlyspokeasaman.Inappropriatingmen’s voices,Andersonembodiedthemasculineattributesandtraditionsthatwould normallybecreditedonlytothemeninherfamily.Thetakingonofmasculine garb and masculine identity by women artists has a long history and many haveusedtheperformativepotentialofvideotoannexotherpowerfulcultural identities.EleanorAntinimpersonatedakingand,throughactors,MaxAlmy exploredtheimageofthecontemporary‘PerfectLeader’–themalepolitician. Others have worked closely with male artists, often blurring the distinctions betweentheiridentities.Abramovic´andUlay,KatharinaSieverdingand,inthe 1990s, Smith and Stewart have explored interdependent but often combative relationshipswithmalerelatives,loversandcollaborators.Suchrelationships have formed the basis of many works investigating femininity through the prismofmasculinity,bothexternalandinternalised. Womenoftenintrojecttherepressedemotionsofmenandthroughouthistory havebeenlefttomourntheconsequencesofmaleviolenceonthosetheylove, whethercriminal,militaryorinstitutional.Occasionally,theyarelefttogrieve theviolencethatmendotothemselves.TheimageoftheMaterDolorosawas
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 45
invokedbytheAmericanLindaMontanoinhervideoMitchell’sDeath(1976). Shrouded in deep chiaroscuro, Montano’s face embodies the trauma of loss as she chants the story of her husband’s suicide while acupuncture needles hangfromhercheeksinlieuoftears.Theartistcreatesadeliberatelyartificial representation of grieving with these ersatz tears and fake Gregorian chant and she heightens the effect with a shift in synchronisation that dislocates thewordsfromherlipmovements.Inthisway,theemotionsareshowntobe borrowed,herhusband’sdespairinternalisedandreproduced,whileherown griefisexpressedinthecontentofherchanting:areconstructionofthebanal detailsofthedayhedied.Herlamentchartsherownattempttonormalisethe unthinkable. DAU G H T E R S A N D S O N S SteeleandMontanonegotiatedthetroubledpsychicandsocialterritorybetween selfandamaleotherwithwhomonesharesacommonhumanity,emotionalties and/orageneticinheritance.Thebondingbetweenmotheranddaughter,united notonlygenetically,butalsobyasharedculturalandbiologicalgender,isjust asfraughtwithconflict.Thematernalbondisnonethelesscapableofoperating outsideculturalnormsaswellaswithinthedictatesofthesocialorder.TheUK artistTinaKeanehasexaminedtheoralhistoriesinwhich,overthecenturies, mothershavepassedonknowledgeandher-storiestosuccessivegenerations. Working with her own daughter, Emily, Keane has created films, videos and installationsthatexplorethemarginalbutfertilediscoursesofchildhoodsongs andgames.Overthecenturies,therelationshipbetweenmotheranddaughter hasbeentroubledbythemother’sconflictingdesirestoprotectherchildfrom thebrutalitiesofPatriarchywhilstsuccumbingtothepressuretogroomherfor asecondaryroleinthesocialorder.Thedaughterforherparthassoughtfrom hermothercluesforhowtobreaktheruleswhilstcondemningherforbeing instrumental in imposing them. Tina Keane’s work in the 1970s and beyond was an attempt to break the cycle of learned subservience and rebellion by reinstatingtheunauthorised,marginalformsofexpression:thesongs,rhymes, gamesandnonsensethatallowwhatHélèneCixouscalledthe‘single-grooved mothertongue’totellanotherstory.Itisthissupplementarynarrativethathas unitedmothersanddaughtersacrossthecenturies. The work of UK artist Katharine Meynell, made in collaboration with her daughter Hannah Kates Morgan, similarly emphasises the symbiotic relationshipbetweenmotheranddaughter.Hannah’sSong(1986)isasensual portrait of the infant Hannah that begins with the evocation of a mother’s gazeandendswiththechild’sdiscoveryofherownimageinamirror.What Meynell describes as the ‘slippage of roles’ constitutes a fusion of identities, themotherheraldingherdaughter’sfutureandthechildechoinghermother’s
4 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
4.KatharineMeynell,Hannah’sSong(1986),withHannahKatesMorgan, videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. past. Theirs is a continuum and continually interchangeable experience of femininityseeminglysidesteppingthepsychoanalystJacquesLacan’stheoryof themirrorphaseinwhichtheselfissplitintosubjectiveknowledgeofitselfand theimageitpresentstotheworld.Thepre-linguisticsensualitythatMeynell exploresseemstoquestionthenecessityforeitherthetraumaofseparationin languageortheintrusionofthe‘thirdterm’,thephallicregulatoryprinciplethat underliestheorganisationofbothlanguageandindividualsocialpositioning. InHannah’sSong,motheranddaughterseemoblivioustothefactthatthey lackthemagicwandofmasculinepower.Theyluxuriateintheirownclosed circuit of identification, sensuality and emotion that offers respite from the divisivephallicorganisationofthepsycheandoflanguage. Thetransgressivesensualityofa‘polymorphousandperverse’infancywas exploredinmyownworkThereisaMyth(1984).Asthetapeopens,theimage of an engorged breast fills the screen and an infant’s hand, that of my son Bruno,repeatedlypummelsthebreasteventuallyteasingastreamofmilkfrom thenipple.Themaleisdepictedhere,notinhismasterfulroleasthesignifying
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 47
principleofpatriarchalculture,butinhismosthelplessstate,whollydependent ontheKleinianbreasttofulfilhisneedsandconfirmhisagencyintheworld. What was a simple involuntary action common to all mammals took on the symbolicaggressionthatinfectsthepsyche,particularlythemalepsyche,when confronted by difference and the enforced separation from undifferentiated communionwiththemother.Formen,thisseparationisanecessarycaesura thatguaranteesentryintothesymbolicorder,intomasculinityandsocietyat large.InThereisaMyth,thebodyofthemother,sooftenreducedtoanimage ofsentimentalandselflessbountyinthecanonofwesternart,isreclaimedasa sourceofdesireandfear.Itisaplacedominatedbythepoweroffemalebiology anditsabilitytowithholdaswellassatisfycreatesinthemaleimaginationa fearthat,oneday,womanwilltakerevengeforhersubjugation. W O M E N I N L OV E Thereissurprisinglylittleworkfromtheearlydaysoffeminismthattackles heterosexual eroticism, perhaps because, for many, that would have been tantamount to sleeping with the enemy. The eroticism women explored was more likely to follow a divergent path. Where Kate Meynell and Tina Keane celebratedthesensualityoftheirdaughters’bodies,otherwomenhaveattempted toexcludetheconstitutiveforceofmalesexualitybytakingastheirownobjects of desire a body like their own. Over the years, lesbian erotica has explored every permutation of woman-to-woman interaction from sadomasochism to tender meditations on spiritual union through poetry, music and dance. The AmericanSadieBenningusedaFisher-Pricetoyvideocameratocreategrainy soapoperasofadolescentloveonthefringesoftherockculture.InCanada, DaraGellmanshowedgirlskissingandkissingasifanylossofbodycontact would break the spell of ‘doubling, queer readings and other strolls through thewoodsoflastingpleasures’.3OverontheWestCoast,theCreeartistThirza Cuthand spun wry anecdotes about a young lesbian subjected to the desires andprojectionsofolderwomen.Whetherwomencametogetherasmothers, daughters or lovers, their exclusion of any image of the ‘third term’, what psychoanalysis likes to call the dominant male principle, created a physical anddiscursivespacethataboundedwithconflicts,butofferedresistancetothe monolithofaman-madeculture. T H E B O DY I N P ROX I M I T Y The works of Kate Meynell, Linda Montano and Thirza Cuthand have all renegotiatedthecultural,emotionalandpoliticalterritoryofpersonalrelations. Theyalsostandasexamplesofthewaysinwhichfeministssetouttorescuethe bodyofwoman,ofthemother,frombeingmappedandmarkedasre-productive, sexual,andideologicalterritorybyamasculinistculture.Inthenewiconography
4 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
offeministart,thesalvagingofthefemalebodyasacreativedomain,aswhat BarbaraFisherdubbedthe‘speakingbody’,tookplaceatthelevelofexperience aswellasatthelevelofrepresentation.Somewomencelebratedtheliberation of women’s sexuality. The unleashing of women’s repressed desire ignited videosthatechoedCaroleeSchneemann’snowiconicperformancesofphysical excess,‘hippy’eventsinvolvingnakedbodies,animalsandthevisceralpanoply of nature’s products. In keeping with the sexual revolution of the times, the liberationofthebodyintheseworksconcentratedonfreeingwomen’ssexual energyinconcertwiththeircreativeenergies.Therewereartistswhoplaced thebodybeyondtheconfinesofassimilableexperience,beyondthelinguistic termsofreferencethatpertainedintheearly1960s.ThroughDionysianexcess andextremesofpainandendurance,thelanguageofwomen’sbodiescouldno longerbecontainedbywhatwasknown,whatwasalreadymapped. IntheUK,feministartwasdividedbetweentheunbridledcelebrationsand reclamationsthatSchneemannpioneeredintheUSAandamorecircumspect approachthatregardedlanguage,visualaswellastextual,asfundamentally resilienttofeministtakeover.Beingoneofthemosthighlychargedandoverdeterminedimagesinourculture,awoman’sbodywasseentobeparticularly hardtoreturntoitsowner.Manyfeministcommentatorswarnedofthedangers inherent in creating images that emphasised women’s sexuality and biology. AsRozsikaParkerandGriseldaPollockpointedout,theseimages‘areeasily retrievedandco-optedbyamaleculturebecausetheydonotruptureradically meaningsandconnotationsofwomaninartasbody,assexual,asnature,as objectformalepossession’.4FormanywomenworkinginEngland,eventhe slightest glimpse of a feminine presence in moving image art was rife with thedangeroffallingintoreiterativepatternsofsexualobjectification.Thisled manytoabandontheimageofwomanaltogether.Theseartistswereconvinced that the gaze and, by extension, the film or video camera were constructed toreflectonlyamasculinesubjectivity.Allthatpassedbeforethelenswould necessarily fall into its rightful place within patterns of desire that conferred onmentheprivilegeoflookingwhilewomenwouldalwaysremaintheobject of the gaze.5 Peggy Phelan later recycled this view and advocated an ‘active vanishing’toavoidpatriarchalrecuperation.However,neitherofthesepositions was appropriate to performance and video artists’ work, which was largely dependentonseeingandbeingseen.Unwillingtoreturntoobscurity,butaware ofthepitfallsofsexualrepresentation,womenthissideoftheAtlanticlooked forwaysofproblematisingtheappearanceofthefemalebodywhilstnegotiating newformsofvisibility.Thefirstthingtheyobservedwasthatthefemaleform, whether seen in its totality or in join-up-the-parts fragments, needed to be graspedasawholeinordertocreatethenarrowlyeroticisedreadingsthatwere requiredbymaleculture.Notonlythis,butthemalegazewouldonlyappearto workwithinaverycircumscribedperceptualband.Objectificationisdependent
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 49
ondistancecuesapproximatingnormalsight,whichrecognisesthesexedbody asfemaleeitherasawholeoranimaginarysumofdiscernibleparts.Thedegree oferoticisationdepends,ofcourse,onthenatureandbehaviourofthatbody, butonceitistakenoutsidethelimitsoftheeroticvisualfield,conventional readingsbegintobreakdown. The body in proximity, the close-up, may well suggest the entitlement of the viewer, as Peggy Phelan has suggested, but when abstracted in extreme close-upitbecomesindecipherableandismorelikelytoestablishownership bythewomanwhoexaminesherselfratherthantherightsofhermaleviewers. In Holland, from the mid 1970s, Nan Hoover took advantage of the built-in close-uplensofthevideocameratodisrupttheunityofthefemalebody.She madeblackandwhitevideotapesofherownbodysubjecttoamagnification such that the usual signifiers of gender and age dissolved and transformed her body into the primordial landscape of recesses, creases and forests that we all consist of at a microscopic level. InLandscape (1983), the occasional eyelashslammingdownonanexpanseoffleshnonethelessmarksHooveras female,butagigantesquefeminine,abstractedandalarminglyprimal,thestuff ofinfantilenightmaresratherthanthereducedperformancesofsexualitythat establishmen’smasteryovertheir‘livingdolls’intheiradultyears. My own There is a Myth (1984) was an attempt to unfix conventional structuresoferoticmeaningbyisolatingthebreastfromitshostbodywhilst stillcreatingsensualimagesofthefemalebody.Women’sbreastsarerarelyseen astheoriginalobjectofdesire,sustenanceandcomforttotheinfant.Inmost westerncountries,itisnotacceptableforwomentobreastfeedinpublicplaces, imagesofthebreastbeingrestrictedtosexualhotspotsintheiconographyof men’smagazines,advertisingandfashion.ThebreastinMythwas,toadegree, abstracted,offeringaperfecttargetforthegazeandinitsreferencetoJasper Johns’targetpaintings,partofanexistingmodernistaesthetic.Iftheseworks closedinonthebodyandthroughvariouslevelsofabstractionoccludedthe establishedreferentsofsexualidentity,thenMonaHatoumwentastepfurther tenyearslater.Exploitingthedevelopmentofvideotechnologyinthemedical field,HatoumusedanendoscopiccamerainCorpsEtranger(1994)toslideaway fromthebody’sexternalcasingandtaketheviewerinsidethebodytravelling through its labyrinthine passages and organs, which were, at this range, so indefinableastobeany-body’s.CorpsEtrangerwasafundamentalassertionof ourcommonphysiologysubvertinganyattempttonameandcodifytheartist’s genderandsocietalpositionintermsofperceivedbiologywhilstre-asserting heridentityas,bythen,asuccessfulwomanartist. All these works sidestep conventional sexual marking by subjecting the bodytometaphoricaltransformation,fromwomanintolandscape,breastinto minimalist target, outside into universal, visceral interior. This is achieved whilstretainingasenseoffemalepresencenotleastbecauseoftheculturally
5 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
establishedauthorshipoftheeyethatpropelsthecameraintounknownterritory. Itisperhapsthedisembodiedeyeofthevideoartistthatmostradicallydeparts fromtheconfinesofthegenderedbody.Video–‘Isee’–anthropomorphisesthe eyeofthecameraintothatoftheartistandintheprocessofself-examination reconfigures the body she/it sees as the object of constitutive feminine subjectivity,thefruitofcreativeenergiesemanatingfromthatsamebiological conglomerationthat,forwantofabetterword,wecallfemale. T H E B O DY D I S TA N T A N D S T I L L Thebodycanbegintospeakanothermeaningwhenitbecomesuncomfortably close and abstracted, but it can also block erotic retrieval when it is placed at a distance, not invisible, but beyond the range of the desiring eye, the prurient gaze of the camera. As I mentioned, in Hammer and Knife (1987) Louise Forshaw delivers her account of her rape as a small figure standing immobileinthemiddledistancesurroundedbyafieldofcorn.Asshespeaks, thecameraslowlyzoomsintoaclose-up,theimageofwomanasany-woman emerging into the light of an individual’s controlled anger confronting the camera. Forshaw maintains her stillness both as a distant image and as an imageinproximity.SherefusestoperformtheFeminine,shemakesnoattempt toseducethecameraandthespectatorbeyond.Instead,herstoryimplicates everymanintheaudience,everyspectatorintheirvoyeuristicexpectationsof luridreconstructionsoftheviolationshesuffered. Therefusaltoperformtomaledesirewasshowntobealmostasdisruptive asremovingthebodyofwomanfromthenormalfocalrangeofvision.Martha Roslershowedthateventhewholeimageofanakedwomanwhenstrippedof allmovementandsubjectedtothedeadeningeffectofcontinualscrutiny,can bedrainedofmuchofhersexualcharge.VitalStatisticsoftheAverageCitizen Simply Obtained (1977) is a videotape in which the artist is seen standing nakedamongstateamofwhite-coatedofficialswhomeasureandrecordher vitalstatisticsincludingthelengthofhervagina.Althoughthesedimensions are what qualify her as a desirable object within male culture, the clinical anddeadpanmanneroftheircollectionturnstheimageoftheartistintoan ironicallypassiveandviolatedgeneratorofnumbersthatadduptoawoman andyetsignallyfailtorepresenther. TheUKartistJayneParkercleverlyunderminedthereductiveeroticgrading system applied to women’s bodies through a combination of duration and carefuldisclosureofpersonalinformation.AlmostOut(1984)isatfirstsighta crueldisplayofmaternalabuse.Parker’smotherisseennakedandexposed,her middleageweighingheavyonabodylongpastitsprime.ThehumiliationofMrs Parker’sphysicalexposureiscompoundedbyincreasinglyintimatequestioning that her daughter subjects her to, off-screen. These painful sequences are
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 51
interspersed with equivalent scenes of the naked artist-daughter, young and sleek and as desirable to men as her mother is degraded in the heterosexist valuesystem.Anunseenmalequestionstheartistandtheinterrogationsofthe twowomenalternateforthe90-minutedurationofthetape.Andtheduration is key to the extraordinary transformation of language that takes place. The mother,unattractiveandageingbyanystandard,slowlyemergesasthemore beautifulofthetwo,herstrengthandgenerositycontrastingwithherdaughter’s manipulative peevishness that eventually dissolves any sense of beauty the youngerwoman’sbodymayhaveatfirstprojected.Thisprocessonlyworks whenthetapeisviewedinitsfull90minutes.Anyextractswouldsimplyleave intacttheinitialculturalreadingsofthetwowomen. V I D E O, P U S H P U L L O F T H E M E D I U M Ihavealreadylookedatanumberofstrategiesfeministartistsadoptedinan attempttocircumnavigatethemostbrandedofallpatriarchalproducts,butit mightwellbethattheseeffortstoobscure,abstractorshrinkthebodywere notasurgentinvideoastheywereinfilm.Tosomeextent,earlyvideoimages of women were already deconstructed owing to their very visible means of construction.Comparedtothehighdefinitionrealismoffilm,earlyanalogue videoproducedlow-grade,unstableblackandwhiteimages.AsEricCameron has observed, ‘a view on a television screen implies that a camera did, at sometimeconfrontjustsuchasituation,butitsreductiontoascanofshifting tonesacrossaveryvisiblematrixofhorizontalbandsleavesampleroomfor subjective interpretation.’6 The small scale of the monitor did not help and videostruggledtocreatetheimmersiveexperienceofprojectedfilm.Thegrey, colourlessimageofthebodywastrappedinaboxthatitclearlycouldnever physically occupy. In early video, the instability of the image meant that it periodicallydisappearedintoagitatedabstractpatternssothattheimagination requiredtoreadthevideoimageasrealwasoftenmorealeapoffaiththana suspensionofdisbelief.Inspiteofthematerialnakednessofearlyvideo,both filmandvideoconstitutedasimulatedencounterwiththeother.Thebodyin movingpictureswasvividlyconjuredupasitspoke,movedandbreathedin concertwiththeviewer.Asinthephotographicimage,thewomanrepresented remained tantalisingly suggested, but manifestly absent. Union with her – sexual, intellectual or spiritual – was and still is forever out of reach. The movingimagebothinspiresanddeniesdesireforthefemaleother,whetherthe longingbeeroticorlinkedtoprimalurgestorecreateasymbioticunionwith thematernalbody. Forsomewomenthevisualteaseandmaterialistdistantiationinvideowere seenasanadvantage,asafewayofbecomingvisible,lessriskythanphysical confrontationwithanaudience.Aswehaveseen,videoandperformanceartists
5 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
dependedontheirpublicpersonaetomaketheirartandvisibilityremaineda basicrightthatneededprotectinginspiteofastuteobservationsofcriticslike LucyLippardwhofirstidentifiedthe‘subtleabyss’thatseparated‘men’suse of women for sexual titillation from women’s use of women to expose that insult’.7 As I stated earlier, UK critics and historians were similarly wary of theentrapmentsofvisuality,notablyGriseldaPollockandLisaTicknerinthe earlydaysand,andinmorerecenttimes,PeggyPhelanintheUSA.However, theveilwasnotanoptionformostwesternwomenandmanystillregarded theimageoftheirbodiesasasourceofpower.AsJayneParkerhaswritten,‘I wantpower.Tobeseen,tobedesiredandtoremainuntouchableistohave power.’8ThisattitudewasunusualinEnglandintheearlyyearsoffeminism andhasbeenmorecommonamongwomenartistsofthe1990swhorejected feminism’s censorship of the female body. Most feminist artists of the 1970s and 1980s would have regarded Parker’s approach as falling head first into the subtle abyss, but women performance artists had been operating in the dangerzonesincethe1960sandvideo-makerstookupthechallengeoffemale representationforthesmallscreen. T H E B O DY M U L T I P L I E D In the USA in particular, video-makers remained undeterred by the overdeterminacyofthefemalebodyandreturnedtotheculturalimagesthatthe Britishwomenhadtakensuchpainstodeconstructoravoid.Buttheydidnot uncritically reproduce them. Where artists like Rosler, Forshaw, Hatoum and Hooverwerefreezing,fragmentingorabstractingthefemalebodyinextreme close-up or rendering it non-specific with distance, a parallel group sought to confuse the representational issue through doubling, multiplication and disguise,elaboratingthevariousmasksoffemininitythathavebeenavailable towomenwithinwesternculture.Here,theuseofironyandparodyledthem towardsnarrativeformatsborrowedfromtelevision.Wheretelevisionsought toreinforcethecurrencyofthestereotypesitpromoted,feministartistswere dedicatedtoexposingthemassocialconstructs.Attherootofthisprocesswas thebeliefthattherewas,infact,noessentialfemininetobeuncoveredonce theshacklesofculturalfemininitywerecastoff,onlyfurtherlayersofsocially constructedfemininities.Culturecouldnotbeescaped. UsingalightertouchthanCindySherman’smultiplephotographicdisguises asafilmstilldiva,AnnMagnusonplayed20separatecharactersinMadeforTV (1984withTomRubnitz).Mimickingthepervasivechannel-hoppingrestlessness of daytime TV, Magnuson scrambled together fragments of programmes in whichshewasalwaysthestar.Adamagedhousewifeinadressinggownlaid out the sorry details of her dead-end marriage interrupted by snippets of a filmnoirfemmefataleweavinghernefariousmagiconsomehaplessvictim.
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 53
Thesewereinturninterruptedbyaperoxidebible-basherofferingsalvationin exchangeforgenerousdonations.Magnusoninyetanotherguise–thistimea brightleotard-cladgymnast–advocatedthejoysofphysicalself-improvement. Anticipating postmodern theories of the decentred subject, of cultural replicationandmimesis,theseperformancesoffemininitydeconstructedwhat wealreadyknew,butofferedlittleinthewayofreconstruction.Theelaboration ofthesurface,sofashionableamongstartistslaterinthe1990s,sawwomen disappearing beneath a series of disguises amounting to what Peggy Phelan has called ‘a retreat from the gaze of the other’.9 Paradoxically, such surface displaycourtedattention,betrayinganarcissisticneedtoshowhowwellthe stereotypicalpartscouldbeplayed.Asinanyformofmimicry,therewaswhat Phelancalled‘anunavoidablecomplicity’inthereiterationofsocietalnorms. WheneverIhaveseenworkofthiskind,Ihavebeenleftwiththefeelingthat,in thesefemaleimpressions,anambivalenceormutedhostilityexiststowardsthe rolesthattheartists’mothersoccupiedandtriedtomaketheirown.Ananger, too,thatthesesamemothersoncewieldedsuchpowerovertheirdaughters. However,astacticsofexposure,multiplyingandquickchangingthemasksof femininityhelpedtodispelanyassociationofparticularbehavioursandsocial roleswitha‘natural’,predestinedfemalesubject.Italsoshowedthatcontrary topopularbelief,feministshadasenseofhumour. T H E B O DY H E A R D B U T N O T S E E N In many of the works so far discussed, the voices of the women carry both the meaning of the work and the key to unseating conventional readings of the bodies from which they are derived. If the image of the body is excised fromthework,butthevoiceremains,itconstitutesapowerfulreferenttothe absentbody,butavoidsthepitfallsofvisualrepresentationsforwomenina masculinistculture.AsJeanFisherhassuggested,thevoicenotonlyreasserts the physical body but also returns us to pre-lingual utterance as a form of pureexpression,richinthenuancesoftimbreandintonation,butfreefrom the organising constraints of verbal language and the allotted cultural place towhichitconsignsindividuals.10Thereturntoaprimaluseofthevoicehas resultedinmanyvocalexperimentsfeaturedinpurelyaudioworks.Interms ofvideo,ithasincludedthemimicryofanimalutteranceitselfreminiscentof ancientandprimitivereligionsinwhichthefemininewasvaluedifnotrevered. InDuet(1972),theAmericanartistJoanJonasbringsherfaceintoatightcloseup while she howls like a dog at her own image on a monitor. Descending into lunacy while howling at the moon, at the governess of menstrual tides, celebratesthedarkerartssuchaswitchcraftandotheroutlawedpracticesinto which women’s traditional skills were relegated under Patriarchy. In recent years, we have seen Lucy Gunning renew our membership of the animal
5 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
kingdom by advertising for women who could imitate horses. She recorded their performances in Horses (1994) and although the result is comical and clearlydesignedtoexposetheeccentricitiesoftheaverageEnglishwoman,the effectistocreatearupturebetweenthebodyandtheculturalconstructionof womanthatthisaberrantbehavioursubstantiallyundermines. When women use their disembodied/re-embodied voices in video, they disruptnotonlythesexualexpectationsofanaudience,butalsoinhibitone ofthefundamentalinternalrelationshipsofthetechnology.Aswesawearlier, primitivevideoequipmenthadtheuniqueabilitytosynchronisevoicetoimage instantaneously, sound in film being recorded separately and bonded to the imageonlyinthepost-productionstage.Thevoiceinvideothereforeimpliesa unifiedbodysynchronisedintherecordingprocesstothecontiguoussoundand pictureproducedbytheelectronicsignals.Atthemomentofrecording,image, soundandtheindividualdepictedoccupythesametime-space.Notonlyare voiceandtheimageofthebodysynchronouswithinvideo,buttherecording itselfcanalsotrackthebodyinrealtimeoverlongperiods,uptothreehours withacontemporaryVHSrecorderandnowadaysindefinitelywiththeadvent of webcams on the Internet. Video can fall into step with our physiological rhythms and more than any other representational form comes close to the actual confrontation with an-other body experienced in synchrony with our own. Where modernist video rent the voice from its temporal relationship with the movements of the body to deconstruct televisual realism, feminist video first exploited the veracity implied in the uncompromising video eye/I and then similarly disrupted the body-video continuity by splitting the voice fromtheover-determinedimageofitssource.Thebodywasthenimaginatively reconstructedinthepre-linguisticspacestowhichonlythevoiceiscapableof transportingus. W I T N E S S I N G, T H E V O I C E - OV E R A N D T H E P O W E R O F S P E E C H Atapsychiclevel,thevoiceofwomaniscapableofconjuringuppre-lingual forms of communication, particularly since we all at one time read the tone of our mother’s voice long before we understood the verbal content of her speech.Butwithinthevocabularyoftelevisionandvideo,voice-overtakeson aparticularauthority,makingsenseofwhatweseeanddirectinginterpretation inthesamewaythatacaptiondeterminesthereadingofaphotograph.Forthis reason,ithasbeenrareforwomentonarratefactualprogrammesontelevision, especiallyintheearlydaysofbroadcasting.Themoreseriousthesubject,the deeper and more dramatic were the apparently ‘objective’ masculine tones employedtointerpretevents–agoodexamplebeingLaurenceOlivier’snarration of the marathon BBC series The World at War, a series that was re-run, yet again,in2003asBushandBlairsquareduptoinvadeaforeigncountry.Within
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 55
thetraditionaldocumentaryformat,nodivergenceofsubjectivityandworldviewwasimpliedbetweenthevoice-overandtheaudience.However,parallel traditionsofethnographicdocumentaryoftenimpliedasocial,genderedand/or racialdivisionbetweenthevoiceanditssubjects.Themaincross-identification oscillatedbetweenthenarratorandthewhite,heterosexualmaleviewerswith the‘otherness’ofthefilm’ssubjectmarkingtheculturallyoppositeposition. Butinfeministandlaterethnicandgayvideo,thecommentatorandthesubject werefrequentlyoneandthesamepersoncreatingadoublepresencebeforeand behind the camera. One might think that this would unite the commentator andtheviewedinthe‘other’,negativespacewithinthesymbolicordersafely confirming the audience’s own central, masculinist position. However, this cannotbeastableconfigurationbecausevideoinparticularisstillinscribedas adocumentarymediumoftruth,ofconstitutionallyratifiedfact,ofsurveillance, news and intelligence gathering. The voice-over, even when appropriated by a marginalised subjectivity is, within the taxonomy of televisual vocabulary, endowed with the ability to create meaning. The utterances of woman, historicallytiedtoanimageofsocialandpsychicdifferencecannowoccupy the didactic, constitutive position of the voice-over and demote at least half theaudiencetothemorepassivepositionoflistenerfromwhereitmightbe compelledtoseetheworldfromthespeaker’s‘other’pointofview. Thevoice-overnotonlytakesontheauthorityofthetelevisioncommentator, butitalsosuggeststheauthenticityofawitnessandwithin‘thepersonalas political’praxisoffeminisminthe1960s,1970sandearly1980s,thevoiceand the newly feminised witnessing eye of the camera repositioned the woman artistasawitnessofherownlife.Awitnessnotonlycorroboratestheveracity ofwhatasubjectavers,butherjudgementisfoundedontheassumedreliability of her own powers of observation. Within feminist autobiography, the artist is both witness and subject of authentication and undergoes a physical and conceptual doubling, speaking simultaneously from the determining position ofthevideo-I/eyeandvoice-over,andastheobjectofscrutinyinfrontofthe lens.Theendorsementofthewoman’ssubjectivitywasthusappliedtoherin bothroles.Byelevatingautobiographyintotherealmsofart,thewomangains additionalauthorialstatusandthroughthedisseminationandre-interpretation oftheworkinreviewsandhistories,theverificationofherstoryisreinforced. Asshegainsapositioninthepantheonofculturalengineers,shebendsthe languageofPatriarchytoincludethefeminineinallitsguises. Many of the works I have already described employ the device of the witnessing voice-over. Jayne Parker combined it with the function of the off-camera interrogator, Mona Hatoum shared the position with her mother while Louise Forshaw spoke alone, only gradually returning her voice to its synchronised body image as the camera slowly zoomed in to the lonely figurestandinginher(visual)field.Canadianvideoartistsperhapsmorethan
5 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
anyothershaveexploitedthepowerofwhattheycallthevoicetrack.Their predispositiontonarrativisemayarisefromtheirexperiencesoftheDiaspora– almosteveryoneinCanadaisanimmigrant.Whateverthereason,thevoice-over isubiquitousinCanadianvideo,mostpotentlyinthecaseofVeraFrenkel.The LastScreeningRoom:AValentine(1984)turnsonthepoweranduniquequality oftheartist’svoiceandthewrydescriptionofaworldinwhichstorytelling, women’s traditional mode of speech, has been banned. The work takes ‘as pointofdepartureforacycleofnarrativestouchingonissuesofcensorship, privacy, national celebrations and government control, The Tale Told by the Prisoner that introduces a woman arrested for storytelling who breaks the lawagainfromherprisoncell,whichishowwelearnofherfate’.11Frenkel’s mellifluous tones describe the plight of such itinerant storytellers who, like the‘canteurs’oftheDordogne,travelledfromvillagetovillagerecountingthe unofficialhistoriesoftheirtimes.InFrenkel’svideo,theauthoritiestakepains tosuppressthetransgressivetestamentsofthestorytellerswho,‘travellingso much’become‘elusiveandthereforedangerous’.12Likethediegeticstorytellers, theartisthasprovedelusivetothevisualdesiresoftheaudience.Sheachieves a transmigration of the feminine from the ocular battlefield marked out by
5.VeraFrenkelasoneofseveralnarratorsinhervideoTheLastScreeningRoom: AValentine(1984,r.t.44minutes).CourtesyoftheartistandVtape,Toronto.
D I S R U P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T • 57
the camera, to an out-of-body vocal presence behind and beyond the video apparatus. From there, she is re-embodied through the traditional organising principleofthevoice-over. T H E A B S E N T B O DY In looking for new forms of narrativity in the 1980s, many women videomakers in the UK took evasive action. Long before cyber-feminists proposed the cyborgian body as the ultimate escape from culturally determined social identities,videoartistsshiftedthefemalebodyoutofsightandreplaceditwith theaestheticsensibilityoftheartist.ElsaStansfieldandMadeleineHooykaas, working between Holland and the UK, began a series of land and seascape videosthatreducedtheimageofwomantoashadow,whichinFlyingTime (1982)iswashedbythegentlelapofwavesontheincomingtide.LikeMary LucierintheUSA,StansfieldandHooykaasequatedthelandscapewithinternal psychicstatesandlinkedittothepursuitofamoreprimalrelationshipwith nature.FlyingTimedescribesajourneyfromAmsterdamtoAustraliaandback andappropriatesthecodesofthetraveldocumentary.However,theimagesof wavesandfishesswimmingrandomlythroughthewaterdenyourappetitefor picturesquescenesandwerealisethatthejourneyisundertakenmoreforthe processoftransformationandemotionaldisplacementitrepresentsthanforthe goalofreachingadestination. TamaraKrikorian’svideotapesfromthelate1970sandearly1980ssimilarly problematisetelevisualformatsandconventionalrepresentationsoffemininity. Krikorian introduces a spare form of visual poetry, harnessing duration and cultural references to both disrupt and re-position the image of woman in representation.IncommonwithNanHoover,StansfieldandHooykaas,Krikorian deniestheaudienceherbodyasatotalimageandexcludesdetailsthatwould re-mark her within conventional femininity. In Unassembled Information (1977)sheusesamirrortorevealsuccessivefragmentsofherface,thebulk of the frame being filled with the anonymous mass constituting the back of herhead.Theaudiotrackfeaturesextractsfromradiobroadcaststhatappear to be linked to the movements of the mirror. Culture in some garbled and fracturedformimpingesonthiselusive‘antithesistothevideoportrait’13 and itsqualityasaconstructedrealityfeedsbackintotheimageofwoman,itself themostsyntheticofconstructions.Andyetthetapestryofradiofragmentson thesoundtrackandtheslow,meditativepaceofthetapesuggestanaesthetic retrievalofself-imagejustasitexposesthealienationofwomenfromtheirown natureswithinrepresentation. Theshiftinemphasisfromtheartist’sbodystillhard-wiredwithmasculine codesandconventionstoherperceptionsandviewsoftheworldreintroducedthe possibilityofnarrativeagencywithoutrecoursetoconventionalrepresentations.
5 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
Theseremained,asitwere,justoutofshot,hangingonourexpectationsand prurientcuriosityabouthowthewomenmightlook:preferablynaked.Butthe worksonlyrevealwhatthewomansees,whathercamerarecords.Theimage createdisnotonlythatofalandscapeorinteriorcapturedbythelens,butit alsorepresentsthewoman’slooking,hersteadygaze.Thisapproachchallenged Laura Mulvey’s characterisation of the film camera as intrinsically male and incapable of returning a feminine subjectivity to the viewer. Video, with its structuralaffinitywithhumantemporalexistence,itsdurationalsynchronicity withthehumanpredilectionforsustainedobservation,enabledwomenvideomakerstoshifttheirconventionalpositionasobjectofthegaze,tobearersof thelook,oftheunblinkingstareandorderingeyeofthebeholder. Whether uncovering essential, uniquely female social and biological experiences or denying essentialism and dispelling myths of female ‘nature’ throughparody,feministartistsworkingwithvideodisplacedthedistortinglens ofpatriarchalcultureexemplifiedbytelevisionandHollywoodfilm.Atthelevel ofcontent,theyofferedthefruitsofasubjectivityandcreativeimaginationthat waseitherdistortedbyorabsentfromtelevisualrepresentation.Therhetoric offeminismwastoleadothergroupstoquestionthereceivedidentitiesthat seemedtospringnaturallyfromtheirgender,raceorethnicorigins.
4 Masculinities Class, Gay and Racial Equality
How are we perceived, if we are to be perceived at all? For the most part we are invisible. Derek Jarman THE COLOUR OF SKIN Where feminists challenged the determinations of gender embedded in the content of mainstream media, work addressing issues of class, race, homosexuality and other ‘deviant’ masculinities soon joined the fray. Like feministvideo,‘minority’workswereoftenalliedtocampaignsseekingsocial and political equality for disenfranchised groups. I have already described a tapebyPratibhaParmarinwhichsheexposedthebrutalmurderofayoung Asianwomanbywhiteyouths;aworkthatnotonlydemandedjustice,butalso offeredalternativecontenttothemainstreamthathadbarelyacknowledgedthe crime.SariRed(1988)alsochallengedwesternculturalhegemonybyproposing analternativeaestheticthroughtheuseoftraditionalAsianfabricsandcolours combinedwiththerecentlyavailablevideotechniqueofmixinganddissolving. Parmarbuiltuptransparentlayersofcolourtoreflectthediaphanouslayering ofAsianclothingandcreateametaphorforthefragilityofthelifethatwasso carelesslyextinguished. In the 1990s, another UK artist used more advanced video techniques to createarichmixofvisualmaterial,thistimeasaparadigmforthelayersof history he peeled away in order to reveal the full horror of the British slave trade.InKeithPiper’sTradeWinds(1992),theartistweavestogetherarchival imagesofslaveships,texts,maps,statistics,colourfulgraphicrepresentations anddramatisedreconstructionstoexposeoneofthemostshamefulepisodes ofourcolonialpast.Inotherworks,Piperhasappropriatedtelevisionsports
6 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
6.KeithPiper,TheNation’sFinest(1990),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. coveragetore-examinethewesternfetishisationofblackathletes’bodies.In The Nation’s Finest (1990), he skilfully employs the television vernacular – slowmotion,actionreplayandlingeringclose-ups.Thesedevicesactasafoil toasearingcritiqueonthesoundtrackcondemningawhiteculturethatdeifies blackprowessonthetrack,whilstequatingtheathletes’physicalsuperiority withacloserandmoreprimitiverelationshiptoouranimalnatures.Thiskind ofethnicexoticismreinforcestheimageofthewhitemanasthehigherbeingin contrasttotheblackathlete’sstatusof‘noblesavage’.White-controlledathletics camouflage with fulsome praise the discrimination that ethnic communities sufferinwesterncountriesinspiteoftheirathletesfrequentlybeingcalledupon torepresentpredominantlywhitenations.Byimplication,Nation’sFinestalso decriestheparallelsilenceonthediscriminatorytreatmentofblackathleteslike theOlympianJesseOwensinthe1930s. WorkingatthesametimeasPiperandalsointheUK,AmandaHolidaymade ManaoTupapau(1990),aone-minutetapeinwhichsheturnsthecameraona Polynesianwomanlyingnakedbehindadiaphanousveil.Theposesimulatesa portraitGauguinpaintedofoneofhisTahitianmistresses.Thelingeringcamera workcelebratesthedarkbeautyofthewomanwhileavoice-overdeconstructs theraciallyprivilegedwesterngazethat,inourcomplicitvoyeurism,weshare with the painter. A brief treatise on racial and sexual power relations scores through the sensuality of the image while historical references to colonial
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 61
consumerism and the syphilis Gauguin spread around his island paradise destabilise,ifnottotallyeradicate,theappropriatinggazeoftheviewer. Inthelastfewyears,thevideoworksofartistslikeIsaacJulienandSteve McQueen in the UK have also tackled issues of post-colonial ethnic identity. Here the consequences of the Diasporas are combined with a celebration of male-identified desire. Their work negotiates the charged intersection of two ideologically marked representations of ‘otherness’. Through the reciprocal agencies of homosexual desire and a contemporary validation of diasporic cultures, they re-inscribe the black body with constitutive meaning. Their work suggests that culture is not only played out on the body of the ‘other’ but that it can be transformed by the ‘speaking body’ of the artist. It now becomes a site of resistance to the onslaught of cultural inscription with its narrowdefinitionsofidentityhingedonexternalappearanceandskincolour. LikeKeithPiper,SteveMcQueenisdrawntotheathleticbody,tothatoftwo black wrestlers in Bear (1993). Their almost balletic bouts are slowed down to reveal the grace and strength they have achieved through rigorous and disciplinedtraining–theirbodiesrepresentingtheirowncreativeachievement. The fighting also carries overtones of sexual play and display, revealing the suppressedhomoeroticsubtextofmanymalesportingactivities.Thescalethat McQueenusesintheinstalledversionoftheworkliftstheseAfricanatebodies tomonumentalproportions,closertoheroicrepresentationsofOlympianGods inancientGreeceorCretethanfetishisticreproductionsofblackexoticismin westernvisualculture. T H E V I D E O ‘ T H AT DA R E N O T S P E A K I T S N A M E ’ Isaac Julien has located many of his film and video works in the recovered historiesofcolonialismandimmigrationandhasdrawnonwesternimaging traditionstoproducehybridworkscentredonaredefinitionofblackidentity. He theorises the black body as a social and historical construct, while simultaneouslyproposingitasanagentofsocialandculturaltransformation. The contributions of African-Europeans to western culture are frequently highlighted in his work. Julien also locates the male body – both black and white – in the mimetic play of camp and female impersonation – a form of expressionthatiscross-culturalandtrans-historic.FollowingalatetwentiethcenturytraditionofgayfilmmakingintheUKcentringontheworkofthelate DerekJarman,Julien’svideosunmaskmasculinityand,indeed,heterosexuality forthenarrowrangeofperformedidentitiestowhichtheyarerestricted.Ina recentwork,TheLongRoadtoMatalan(1999),Juliendrawsonthebaroque iconography of gay subcultures to tell a love story of sorts. The retrieval of theWesternmovieandothercinematicgenresfortheelaborationof‘deviant’ desireinexperimentalfilmhasbecomewell-establishedandsuggestsnotonly
6 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
therangeofmasqueradesthatmenchooseorresist,butalsothesurvivalof homoeroticexpressioninmainstreammedia.Sometimesitisthinlydisguised, atothertimescloakedinthecodesofacommunitythat,untilrelativelyrecently, darednotspeakitsnameforfearofimprisonment. Theruleofpatriarchallawhoundedthemonsterthatitmadeofhomosexual desireuntilthe1960swhenreformistsintheUSAandUKbegantolobbytheir respectivegovernmentstolegalisehomosexualactsbetweenconsentingadults. Butthisdidnotamounttoapprobationandconstitutionalhomophobiasurvived wellintothe1980swhentheBritishGovernmentintroducedClause28,alawthat madeitillegaltopromotehomosexualityinanyeducationalenvironment.This preposterouslegislationbecamethetargetofStuartMarshall’swryPedagogue (1988),aworkthathingedonato-cameraperformancebyNeilBartlett.The tape opens with the performer posing in the 1980s uniform of the gay man –leatherjacket,tightjeansandmoustache.Heinnocentlydescribesthevideo coursehehasrecentlydeliveredtoMarshall’sstudents.Thestudentsarethen interviewedonebyone,eachdeclaringthatuntiltheymetBartlett,nodeviant desirehadeverrisenintheirtenderbreasts.Underhisinfluence,however,they have now seen the light and embraced homosexuality and lesbianism. The absurdityofthisscenarioenvelopedthemoresinisterimplicationsofalawthat succeededininstitutionalisinghomophobicprejudice. T H E M A L E B O DY O B J E C T I F I E D Like many feminist and ethnic videos, Pedagogue was made in the context ofapoliticalmovementcampaigningforchange.Otherworksexploredsocial situationsinwhichboththeviewersofthetapeandtheobjectifyingpractices ofpopularculturefeminisethebodyofthemalesubject.CerithWynEvans’ KimWildeAuditions(1996)isadisturbingrecordofscreentestscarriedoutto selectyoungmaleactorssuitabletoperforminthesingerKimWilde’snewest promotionalvideo.Twoconventionallyhandsomemenareaskedtorespond to the instructions of an off-screen director. They take up poses, follow the absentsingerwiththeireyes,peelofftheirshirtsandwalkthesetinanuneasy crossbetweenamasculinestrideandasexuallyprovocativecatwalkshimmy. The obvious nervousness of the actors, the trembling of their lips and their contorted attempts to become desirable as well as maintain some degree of dignityispainfultowatchandindicativeofhowcontemporarycultureisas capable of commodifying male beauty and sexuality as that of their female counterparts.WynEvans’ownsexualityisatplayandthetapedemonstrates thedoubleappropriationthattheactors’bodiesundergo,oncebyKimWilde’s assumedheterosexualdesireandbytheobvioushomoeroticchargetheartist injects into his selection of subjects. (Of course, the absent singer is herself the object of subsequent sexual objectification.) Overlaying both projections
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 63
7.CerithWynEvans,KimWildeAuditions(1996),videotape.Courtesyofthe artist. of desire onto the male body is the commercial transaction subtending the promodirector’sunctuousinstructionsonbehalfoftherecordcompany.Iam always surprised by the laughter that this tape engenders in audiences and canonlyassumethatthisisduetobothempatheticdiscomfortandtheguilty pleasure we take in our natural desire to look at beautiful individuals. The powerrelationsunderlyingtheexerciseofthatdesireishereexposedbutwedo notlookawayhowevermuchtheyoungmenmaybedemonstrablysuffering fromourgazeandhowevermuchthe‘fascism’ofyouthandbeautyinpopular cultureconsistentlyunderminesourownself-esteem. F E M A L E I M P E R S O N AT I O N Manymaleartistshavegonebeyondtheexposureofthemalebodyinaposition that is, within representation, traditionally female and have adopted female dressandbehaviours.Femaleimpersonationgivesrisetoamorecomplexset ofsocialandculturalrelationships.Leavingasidethepsychosexualformation
6 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
ofpassiveandactiveroleswithinhomosexualencounters,thedesiretoexplore the feminine in men would appear to constitute a refusal to conform to the sociallysanctionednormsofmalebehaviour.Thedoubleexposuresofcrossdressingencompassingbothconventionalmasculinityandexaggeratedfemale masquerade are seen to be arbitrary and interchangeable. Nevertheless, the repertoires of male and female identities do not spring from an equal social footing and vestiges of hostility towards women underlie many female impersonations.Theimagesofwomenthatmenusuallychoosetoparodyare overblown,petty,vainandthemselvesconventionalintheirseductivedisplay originallydevelopedtoreflectthecrudepalateofheterosexualdesire.1Peggy Phelanascribesthisunderlyinghostilitytotheunbreachabledistancebetween theimpersonatorandhiscostumeaswellasthefrustrationgeneratedbythe literalinabilityofmenevertointernalisewomenwherethewomancanboth takeinandexpelthemalewithinherprocreativerole.Perhapsitissimplythat themediahavefetishisedthetrappingsofwomentotheextentthat,however repressive the cultural construct of femininity, it does allow girls to express emotionsandwearprettyclothes.Bigboysstilldon’thavepermissiontocry ordressup.MarilynFryetakesaharderlineandseesfemaleimpersonation as‘acynicalmockeryofwomen’2andmanyhaveexpressedtheviewthatby formingyetanothermen-onlyclub,homosexualityreinventswhatPhelancalls the‘malehomosocialculture’.3 Whatever unresolved feelings men harbour towards the symbolic mother orwomeningeneral,theworkofvideoartistslikeColinCampbellinCanada nonetheless attempts to validate emotions and desires that heterosexual formation denies men and belittles in women. In this, Campbell is prepared toforgotheinstitutionalisedpoweroftheheterosexualmaleandpursuewhat BruceW.Fergusonhasidentifiedasacertainincoherenceinworkthathas‘no willtopowerofitsown’.4Aseeminglackoflinearmasteryandthefeminine talent for intuitive means of progressing whilst digressing is played out in the many female characters Campbell inhabited from the early 1970s to his deathin2002.Inworksthatcrossmelodramawiththepoliticsofthepersonal confession, Campbell’s video personae: the Woman from Malibu, Robin the punk star and Anna the Belgian art critic all represent aspects of his own nature and imagination that cannot be accommodated within the normative behavioursofaheterosexualmale.TheProteanCampbellneverlingerslongin anyoneofhiscastoffemalecharacters.Asaresult,Campbellthemalesubject under disguise remains the one constant and is therefore never occluded by his female Doppelgängerin. He avoids being snared into ‘the illusion of (a) completeidentity’,5constructedasafemale‘other’.Likethefloatingfemininities employed by feminist artists, Campbell finds a provisional sense of self in whatFergusondescribesas‘amarginalrealism’madeupofpartiallytrueand physiologicallyfalsefragments.Inspiteofhisapparentwillingnesstogiveup
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 65
8.ColinCampbell,videotapefromtheseriesWomanfromMalibu(1976). CourtesyofVtape,Toronto. theauthorityofamasculineidentity,Campbellexploitsthetraditionalagency ofthemaleartistalbeitindisguiseinordertoavoidbeingfixedaseitherone orthe‘other’topatriarchalnorms.Throughhismultifariousfemalepersonae, he pursues a radical self-estrangement turning on the impossibility of either escaping into the female artifice or resting in the embodied masculinity that would,withgoodbehaviour,confirmhismembershipofthepatriarchalorder. HisworkstandsasaprotestagainstthenecessityforCampbelltotemporarily foregohisprivilegesasamaleinordertoexplorethoseculturallyfeminised aspectsofhispsycheanddesirethat,intheeyesofpolitesociety,turnhiminto amonster. A I D S, T H E ‘ G AY P L A G U E ’ Inrecentyears,themonstrousotherhasfounditsultimateembodimentinthe AIDSsufferer.TheAIDScrisis,quicklydubbedthe‘gayplague’bysocialand politicalcommentatorsinthe1980s,inspiredadirectformofartisticexpression thatrevisitsmanyofthestrategiesofprotestusedbyfeministsandactivistsin the1960sandearly1970s.Combiningpersonalandpoliticalanalysis,works
6 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
prompted by AIDS explore the experiences of individuals while revealing the ways in which entrenched cultural, theological and medical attitudes to homosexuality affect medical treatment and influence the way gay men experience their illnesses. This battleground of representation has produced much-needededucationalandcampaigntapes,andartistshavealsoattempted toexpresstheirfracturedexperienceoftheillnessinahostilesociety.InPositiv (1997),theCanadianartistMikeHoolboomdividesthescreenintoagrid-like montageofmedicalimagery–representationsofwhatisgoingoninsidehisbody –andfoundfootageofmoviesandTVprogrammesthatwereinstrumentalin fashioninghisidentityasagayman.Theartistspeaksofan‘identityclingingto numbersthatcontinuetobetrayyou’aswellasthecontrastbetweentheunity ofhisbodybeforetheonsetofthediseaseandthesubsequentsplitofbodyand selfthatgiveshimasensethathis‘realbodyissomewhereelsehavingagood time’.IntheUK,DerekJarmanechoedthedislocationofmindandbodyinhis videoBlue(1993).Hismind,hesaid,wasas‘brightasabutton,butmybody isfallingapart–anakedlightbulbinadarkandruinedroom’.AlsointheUK, StuartMarshallobservedthat,evenbeforeAIDS,thisexperienceofaruptured identityseemedtocomewiththesexualterritory.Amanisanindividualwith full civic rights until he is recognised as a homosexual, a dangerous ‘other’ tomanlynorms.Onceheisillwiththe‘gayplague’,heisquicklyreducedto ‘acasehistoryofapathologicalillness’.6 Marshalldedicatedmuchofhislater worktopromotingthecivicandmedicalrightsofhomosexualswithAIDSand wasoneofthefirstartiststomaketelevisionprogrammesaboutthediseasein theUK.ThroughworkslikeAJournalofthePlagueYears(1984)andOverOur DeadBodies(1991),MarshallcelebratedtheactivismofAIDSsupportgroups anddecriedthehomophobiaconflating‘deviance’withanillnessthatwas,in somequarters,welcomedasdivineretribution.Towardstheendofhislife,he abandonedtelevisionandreturnedtotheartisticcontextofvideowithafinal work, Robert Marshall (1991). The tape records a nostalgic journey Marshall madetotheplaceinIrelandwherehisfatherhaddiedwhenhewashimself only a child. Marshall makes peace with the shadowy figure of his father reanimatedbythememoriesoffamilymemberswhodeclaretheartisttobe thespittingimageofthedeadman.Thepictureslowlysharpensofapaternal presencethatplayeditspartinshapingMarshall’sidentityevenfrombeyond thegrave.Theartiststrugglestocometotermswiththeearlylossofhisfather aswellashisowntenuousholdonlife.Theprogressivelydesperatetreatments towhichhesubmitsfailtosavehimfromthediseasethatalreadyhadclaimed somanyofhisfriends. In both North America and Europe, there was a defiant reaction to the puritanical backlash that the gay community suffered in the wake of the AIDS crisis in the 1980s. Much public broadcasting emphasised preventative measures, with an emphasis on abstention from gay sex which was, by
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 67
9. Stuart Marshall, Over Our Dead Bodies (1991), television programme commissioned by Channel 4. Produced by Rebecca Dodds and Maya Vision Productions. implication,heldresponsibleforendangeringthehealthofordinarycitizensas wellascorruptingpublicmorals.In1988,theUSpublicaccesschannelDeep DishbroadcastatapebyJohnGreysonexposingtheattemptedcensorshipofan explicithealtheducationcomicaimedatthegaycommunity.Inthesameyear, acollectiveofgayartistsandactivistsinTorontocounteredthedemonisingof gaysexualitywiththevideoAmsterdam,thecentralmessageofwhichwasto havesex,‘useacondom…useyourimagination’.WorkingintheUK,Michael Curran exercised his imagination in a series of equally subversive tapes that exploredgayeroticismandcelebratedthemalebody.Markedbyarecognisable Englisheccentricityandaloveofpopularculturalformsofdisplay,thetapes areextravagantandplayfulperformancestocamera.Curranfrequentlyoffers uphisgyrating,nakedbodytothecameraagainstabackdropofmuteinteriors or, as in L’Heure Autosexuelle (1994), against an uninterested female figure curled up in an armchair. These comedic attempts to subvert the anti-sex campaignsmadewayforamoreuncompromisingapproachinAmamisevuoi (1994).EnvelopedinthestrainsofthesentimentalItalianballadofthetitle, Curran lies naked on a table while a long-haired youth bends over him and repeatedlyspitsintotheartist’sgaping,welcomingmouth.Thisexchangeof bodilyfluidsbecomessexuallychargedasCurranopenshismoutheverwider andstrainstowardshiscompanionwhilstremainingprone.Whatwouldmore
6 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
10.MichaelCurran,Amamisevuoi(1994),videotape.Courtesyoftheartistand DavidCurtisattheBritishArtists’FilmandVideoStudyCollection,University oftheArts,London. usually be read as a gesture of abuse becomes aggressively eroticised whilst thedangerofinfectionfromtheexchangeofbodilyfluidsisbothsatirisedand blatantlydisregarded.Inamoreinnocentage,aworkbytheCanadiansPaul WongandKennethFletcherhadalsofeaturedanexchangeofbodilyfluids.60 Unit:Bruise(1976)involvedtakingbloodfromthearmofoneandinjectingit intotheother’sbackcausinglittlemorethanabruise.LikeAmamisevuoi,the worktreadsaknife-edgebetweenabjectbadtaste,andapowerfulaffirmation ofhomosexualdesire,inrepresentationasinlife.Inacontemporarycontext, theseworksproclaimtherightsofmenwithorwithoutAIDStospeakoutin whatJohnGreysoncalledoneofthe‘mostcontestedsitesinsociety,inthearea ofsexualpolitics’.7 THE COST OF ‘FEMINEITY’ A redefinition of masculinity has not been restricted to artists working with issuesaroundAIDSorcelebratinggaysexuality.Influencedbytheexplorations offemaleidentitywithinfeminism,heterosexualmenhavealsoquestionedthe social and psychic divisions that have conferred on them political power, but
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 69
robbedthemofaspectsoftheirhumanity.Itisbynomeansunusualforstraight men to explore speculatively their ‘feminine’ side and promote their ‘negative capability’intheinterestsofartandliterature.8 However,thecriticalcultureof videoarthasprovidedadiscursivespaceinwhichtoquestiontheconstructionof masculinityanditsrelationtostructuresofprivilege,socialpowerandinfluence. AsBruceW.FergusonsuggestedinrelationtotheworkofColinCampbell,an analysis of conventional masculinity necessitates a surrendering of power and phallicagencyinordertofindoutwhat,ifanything,liesbeneath.Fewmenare willing to pay the price. Even an artist like Matthew Barney never renounced hiscoremasculinitywhenhescaledthewallsoftheGuggenheimdressedinan exotickiltaspartofhisCremasterseries. Mostheterosexualmenfindthedeconstructionofmasculinityanimpossible task.Thesexualurgetoenterthebodyofawomanwithitsimpliedreturntothe maternalbodyisalreadyfraughtwithdangers,principalamongwhichissexual inadequacy. Vito Acconci, whose tapes often betray considerable aggression towardswomen,explainshisdespairofeverknowingthefeminine:‘Icouldgo throughtheprocessofwantingmybodytochangetofemale…theactionwas futile,thechangecouldneverhappen.OrIcouldliveuptomaleness,playout maleness.’9ForAcconci,itwaseasiertofosteranexaggeratedmasculinitythan explorethefeminineaspectsofhispsyche.Psychoanalytictheoryhasargued that,atadeeperlevel,menexperienceasubconsciousfearofcastrationthat FreudlinkedtotheimaginedpunishmentbythefatheroftheOedipalinfant’s desireforthemother.Althoughmenpursuewomentoprovetheirmanhood, losing oneself in the feminine, in whatever form, entails a potential loss of genderidentityforthosewhosemasculinityisnotsecure.Inhispsychotherapy practice,theAmericantherapistTomRyanhasobservedthatmen’scommon fearofcommitmentis‘amorebasicfearaboutthedisintegrationorlossoftheir senseofmaleness’.10Ryancontendsthatinhisadultrelationswithwomen,a heterosexualmaleisalwaysdeeplyconflictedbecause‘anyexpressionofneed ordesirecarrieswithitthethreatofsuccumbingtoawishtobeunitedwith, orthesameas,thewoman.’11Withinapatriarchalorder,beingthesameasa womanmeansexistingwithoutpower.However,therehavebeenmaleartists whowerewillingtotaketheriskandwithamorehumanistapproach,look beneaththemachomasqueradeinterpretingwhattheyfoundasevidenceofa truer,moreequitablemasculineidentitywaitingtobereleased. BE A MAN InStateofDivision(1979),anearlyblackandwhitevideo,theUKartistMick Hartneyexploredthepsychologicalconsequencesofthepressuresonmento replicatethemasculineideal.Thetapeisdominatedbyanimageoftheartistin aheadandshouldersshot,driftinginandoutofframewhilstspeakingdirectly
7 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
11.MickHartney,StateofDivision(1979),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. to his audience. The work was originally shown on a monitor, so the sense oftheartistbeingtrappedbyculturalmasculinitywasallthemorepoignant forthethree-dimensionalprisonheseemedtobetryingtoescape.Hartney’s commentary is self-reflexive. He describes the distress he experiences when facedwithourunspokendemandsthatheshoulddemonstratealltheattributes of male mastery: ‘The audience is waiting for me to do something, to say somethingsothattheycananalyseit,criticiseit,takeitapart.’Here,Hartney refusestoconformtotheiconicimageofthemaleartistendowedwithwhat LindaNochlincalledhis‘goldennuggetofgenius’.12Insteadhelaysbarethe fearanduncertaintythatdestabilisesmen’spublicroleandacknowledgesthat mostmenfailtomastermasculinity.Mostmenbarelylearntoputontheshow Hartneycannotbringhimselftoperform. The social inscription of male or female identity onto the individual was neatly demonstrated by the UK artist Steve Hawley in 1981. We have fun Drawing Conclusions appropriates the words and pictures of the Ladybird children’sseriesPeterandJane,booksthatwerewidelyreadinthe1950sand 1960s. Using only the lightest hint of irony, Hawley reads the text over the originalillustrationsoftheeponymousbrotherandsisterwhosedutiesinthe homereflecttherolestheywillplaylaterinlife.Peterhelpsdaddytowashthe
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 71
carwhileJaneismakingteawithmummyinthekitchen.Whenthetapewas firstshown,audienceswerewellabletolaughattheabsurdityofLadybird’s transparentattempttomanufacturecomplementarymaleandfemalesubjects. However,therealityforcountlessindividualswhowereexposedtothisformof brainwashingatanearlyagewasthattheywouldneverentirelyshakeoffthe culturalghostsofPeterandJane. The American Bill Viola has never been shy of investigating masculine identitythroughhisrelationshipstohismother,hiswifeandhischildren.It ismoreusuallywomenwhodefinethemselvesintermsoftheirrelationships with others, while men establish their credibility through what they achieve inthepublicarena.Violatookthestepoflocatinghisidentityatleastinpart withinhisdomesticrelationshipsthroughworksthatobservedhisfamilyinlife andindeath.Thesecontemplativevideoportraitsarecombinedwithanalmost transcendental sensibility, a product of the West Coast immersion in eastern mysticismthatwascharacteristicofthe1960sand1970s.Violaseeshisown familialrelationshipsaspartofawideruniversalconsciousness.Hislifeistied
12.SteveHawley,WehavefunDrawingConclusions(1981),videotape.Courtesy oftheartist.
7 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
tosacredcyclesoflifeanddeaththatgobeyondthecrudesocialconditioninto whichindividualsareborn.Viola’smost‘eternal’familygroupingtakesplace intheNantesTriptych(1992).Installedasadramaticvideotriptych,thework features slow motion footage of a woman giving birth and his mother dying flankingacentrepieceinwhichtheartistfallsnakedthroughwaterinasimilar timelessslowmotion.Hisidentificationofwomanascentraltofertilityandthe processesoflifeanddeatharefundamentaltoallcultures,whetherasapositive or negative configuration. The work aspires to a trans-historical condition of unity,aonenesswithnatureasitismanifestinViola’simmediatefamily.At firstglance,Viola’shelplesssuspensioninanexcessofamnioticfluidplacesthe artistinapassiverelationshiptohiswomenfolkandthemysteriesoflifeand deaththeyembody.However,thisignorestherelativepositionsofpublicpower occupiedbythosemonumentalwomen,particularlyinrelationtotheirfamous husband/son. The personal and social reality in which the performers exist militates against the full achievement of the transcendental reading, the two heldintensioninartastheyareinlife.Theworkalsomakesreferencetothe dominantwesternreligionofChristianityinwhichtheabjectnakedfigureon thecross(whichViolasocloselyresembles)symbolisesamaleGod’sdominion overallwomenandindeedallotherreligions.Thepatriarchalovertonesofthis virtuoso video work do not nullify Viola’s radical identification with aspects oflifethatwouldbeanathematotheconventionalmale.Hisstruggleiswith thecultureitselfthat,likeitornot,continuestobelargelymaledominated. A female image, even when dying or giving birth, is always marked by her secondary social position. The image of the male artist, meanwhile, retains the status of western masculinity albeit in a state of agonised resistance to itsemotionalandspirituallimitations.AsRozsikaParkerandGriseldaPollock haveargued:‘Amancanbeplacedinafeminineposition,butwillnotbecome feminine.Becauseofthesocialpowerofmeninoursociety,nomancaneverbe reducedtoacrumpledheapofmalefleshinthedarkcornerofsomewoman’s studio.’13Viola’sappropriationoftraditionalChristianiconographywillalways set up a tension between what he makes in the name of the father and the radicalnewmasculinityhehaschampionedinthetwenty-firstcentury. Backinthetwentiethcentury,theUKvideoartistJeremyWelshturnedto imagesofhismalelineagetoreconfiguremasculinitybothinsideandoutside theprivatearenaofhearthandhome.Immemorial(1989)isavideoinstallation thateschewstheperilousterrainofmalegodsandfemalerelativesinextremis. Instead it features images of a dead father and a newly born son whilst the artist,himselfinmid-life,looksbackaswellasforwardalongthepatrilineal continuum to which he belongs. Welsh attempts to synthesise a provisional masculinity from men’s public role, which is represented by his father’s uniformandtheprivateattachmenttohissonthatdemandsofhimnurturing skillsthathisownfatherwouldneverhaveallowedhimselftopractice.Asmen
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 73
werediscoveringthat‘BigBoys’docryafterall,Welshwasinjectinghiswork withequalmeasuresoflossandhope,interestingly,withoutturningtoimages of women to carry the meanings. Chris Meigh-Andrews, working in the UK, hasalsoattemptedtoredefinemasculinitybyexaminingsociallyunacceptable emotions. Like Welsh and Viola, Meigh-Andrews forges his identity partly through his personal relationships. In Domestic Landscapes (1992–1994), he introducesthegeographicallocationsinwhichtheserelationshipstookplace asananchortothefeelingstheyevoke.Ratherthanfixedthroughbloodties ormaritalbonds,theserelationshipschangeandevolve,asdoesthenomadic artistmovingfromonelandscapetoanother.LikeViola,Meigh-Andrewsalso seeshislifeaspartofacontinuum,aninfinitehumandramaplayingamodest partintheinexorableworkingsofMotherNature.However,asthetitleofhis worksuggests,hisfluid,shiftingsenseofidentitytakesonthemoremodest proportionsofadomesticlifeplayedoutinatamed,contemporarylandscape. Hisisavisionofmasculinityboundedbysocialandhistoricalrealitiesasmuch asbybloodtiesandthetimelesslawsofnature. Sociallygenderedidentityismostclearlyestablishedinwhatpeoplewear. Thesuit,themostemblematicofmasculinetrademarks,hasbeenappropriated byanumberofartists,butperhapsmosteffectivelybyUKvideo-makerMike Stubbs.Heforgedtheultimatedeconstructionofthedouble-breastedcorporate automaton in Sweatlodge (1991), a choreography of masculine mannerisms featuring the performance group, Man Act. With and without jacket, the performers walk and talk, shake hands and slap each other on the back in gesturesdesignedtosignalstrengthandefficiencywhileestablishingthemale peckingorder.Throughtheclassicbodylanguageofthecorporatemale,Man Actrecreatethecorridorsofpower,butjustasthewell-oiledarmyofsuitsseem mostcoollyincharge,littledemonstrationsofaffectionareintroducedaswell asafemininegracethatbegintounsettlethesupremacyoftheMaster-Race. Thecynicalalliancesforgedbetweenindividualsvyingforpositionnowlook more like new forms of male bonding in the boardroom. Co-operation, coordinationandinter-maleaffectionaretheunlikelyoutcomeofthisapposite parodyof‘thesuit’. THE CLASS DIVIDE The suit is not only an indicator of gender, it is also a marker of class, a hierarchicalsocialinstitutionofextraordinarycomplexityintheUK.Curiously, outside campaign or ‘agit prop’ tapes, few video artists have addressed the problemsofclassprejudicedirectly.ItcouldbearguedthatallUKworkinthe last40yearsisinescapablyclass-bound,becauseclassisinscribedinBritish accents and patterns of speech. Scratch video in the 1980s was said to be a working-class movement but was soon gentrified as it became part of the
7 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
repertoireofUKvideoanditsproponentsmovedintoestablishmentjobs.Artists suchasJohnCarson,SimonRobertshawandIanBournhaveaddressedclassin theirwork,albeitobliquely.InBourn’scase,classfeaturedmoreprominently because of his declared ambition to shake off his working-class origins.14 In TheCoverUp(1986),PictorialHeroesgavevoicetothedisenfranchisedworker throughacharacterwhowanderedamongtheruinsofanabandonedfactory railingagainsttheThatcheritepoliciesthathadrobbedhimofhislivelihood. AndrewStonescombinedvideowithslideprojectioninClass(1990),awork that argued the tenacity of the archaic class system. Projected images of the Queen were bisected by ladders as a metaphor for a society still determined bysocialinclusionandexclusionwiththeobligatorysocialclimberstryingto beatthesystem.Middle-andupper-classvideo,ifthereissuchathing,remains mute on the subject of class, as privilege usually does (and here, I include myself).Inasubtletwist,MikeStubbsmadeContortions(1983),asympathetic portrait of an unemployed youth. However, Mike was himself a middle-class boyandIamtemptedtointerpretthevideoasareflectionofhisambitionto escapehis‘soft’bourgeoisbackgroundaswellasasinceregestureofsolidarity with the working classes. When we were all radicals in the late 1970s and early1980s,itwasnotfashionabletobemiddleorupperclass.Working-class credibilitywasassociatedwith‘righton’leftwingaffiliations.Masculinitywas alsoimplicatedintheaggressiveworking-classstanceofradicals,particularly iftheyweresculptors.Asastudent,Ifeltcompelledtodropthe‘Cary’partof mydouble-barrelledsurnameanddidmybesttoCockneyfymypublic-school accent.Nowadays,classdistinctionshaveblurredunderestuaryEnglishand thesupremacyofcommercialsuccessover‘background’.However,residuesof classprejudicecanstillbefoundinallwalksoflife,andarenowcomplicated by issues of race and socio-economic status overlaid with notions of ‘hard’ masculinityleftoverfromtraditionalworking-classenvironments. TheworksofViola,Welsh,Hartney,BournandStubbsaregenuineattempts todiscoverandrecoverqualitiesofexistencethataredeniedwithinmasculinist andclassistacculturation.However,mostoftheseartistsbetraythedifficulty ofbecomingvulnerableandadmittingtodoubtandpersonalweaknessinan art arena where mastery and virtuosity are a measure of success and a sign ofmasculinity.ItistemptingtointerpretmanyofVitoAcconci’searlyworks as an elaborate strategy to stave off the potential objectification of his male bodywithinthevideoimage.Manyofhistapesfeaturetheartistharanguing theaudienceor,asinPryings(1971),abusingafemalecompanionbytrying topriseopenhereyeshavinginstructedhertokeepthemtightlyshut–asif herlookcouldkill.ManyoftheworksIhavecitedinthischapterareisolated examples of heterosexual men investigating masculinity and class in a body of work that is dominated by other concerns. I find it hard to believe that they exhausted their search for a new masculinity after one or two videos,
M A S C U L I N I T I E S • 75
butsuchistheholdofthedominantcultureandsorealisthethreattostatus andheterosexualorientationthatmostofthemquicklyabandonedthisform of investigation. However, together with the work of gay, black and feminist artists,thesevideosmarkanupsurgeofcontent-basedworkinthe1970sand 1980sthatquestionedtheidentitieswewereallocatedbybirth,geographyor gender. In their determination to interrogate conventional masculinity, male artistsjoinedinawidespreadattempttorupturethesupremacyofmainstream ideologies.Beyondthat,manyofthemsubscribedtotherevolutionaryzeitgeist thatdecreedweshouldshakethefoundationsofadividedandunequalsociety. Briefly,theywereasignofthetimes.
5 Language Its Deconstruction and the UK Scene
These works are all difficult (in the sense that a child is said to be difficult) in that they seek to resist or stand apart from dominant ideological practices. Stuart Marshall P RO B L E M S O F L A N G U A G E , S U B J E C T I V I T Y AND THE UNIFIED SUBJECT Intheearlydaysofvideo,artistsattemptedtodefineacreativespaceindependent of broadcast television. As was particularly the case in the UK, many also determined to develop an oppositional practice with an underlying critique not only of television but also of existing social and political structures. We haveseenhowthemodernistapproachtackledtheproblembydeconstructing the illusion of the televisual image revealing the mechanical and electronic mechanisms responsible for creating the smooth face of television. Others worked at the level of content and made visible what was absent from our TV screens. The silent majorities that we more usually think of as minority interestsinwesterncivilisation–women,ethnicgroups,gays,lesbiansand,to someextent,theworkingclassesmadethemselvesheardthroughtheworkof avant-gardeartists. Forthoseattemptingtoofferalternativecontent,difficultiesarosewhenthey claimed to access definitive truths about individual subjectivities. Postmodern thinkers including Jacques Derrida have argued that identity is constructed by unstable systems of interrelated cultural meanings or ‘texts’ leading to an individualwhoisinternallyfracturedandexternallydetermined.Personaltruths canonlybepartial,distortedastheyarebythefictionalisationofexperiencethat constitutes remembering, the inassimilable nature of extreme experience and whatthefilm-makerAbigailChildcalls‘theconceptualandsocialprismsthrough whichweattempttoapprehend’.1Allvideobasedonself-representationfacesthe
L A N G U A G E • 77
difficultyofevertrulyknowingthatselfwhenitisasmuchaproductofsocial andpoliticalconditioningasofnature,nurtureandthatindeterminateforce,free will.Onthisbasis,weareleftwiththeproblematicquestforself-knowledgeand ‘theimpossibilityofsecuringtheauthenticviewofanyoneoranything’.2 The postmodern view of identity has challenged the concept of the individual as a unified, autonomous subject. According to the recent Meme theoryImentionedearlier,individualsaresimplytemporarystagingpostsfor ideasandideologiescirculatingintheuniverseundertheirownsteam.3The oldinjunctionto‘knowthyself’hasbecomeanimpossibleproject.Backinthe 1970s and 1980s, those of us who still felt it was legitimate, indeed vital, to speakfromanindividualpositionhadaproblem:howtopursuetheslippery concept of the real within a matrix of languages that necessarily limits and delimitswhatweareabletosay? FEMINISM AND LANGUAGE Therealisationthatsignsorimagesareneitherstablenorever‘fullymeaningful’ andcometouspre-stampedbyculture,meantthatfeministsinparticularnever tooklanguageforgranted.4Womencouldnotassumethattheavailablelinguistic vehicleswouldtransmitthemeaningstheyweretryingtoimpart.Verballanguage wasunderstoodtobeintrinsicallymale–whatthefeministwriterDaleSpender called‘man-madelanguage’withitsdualistic,positive(masterful)andnegative (effeminate), gendered positions already firmly fixed within its structures.5 Both polarities were seen to be syntactically and ideologically dependent on theother.Onceweenterintoadualisticsymbolicorder,andmasterthecurrent forms of communication, we do not speak with language, but rather, as the saying went, ‘language speaks us’. Historically, representations of femininity, ethnicityandgaysexualityinvisualculturewereallseentooccupythe‘other’, negativepolarityagainstwhichthecentralpositionofthewhite,heterosexual malewasconfirmed.Inthelate1970s,FrenchfeministslikeLuceIrigarayand HélèneCixoushadurgedwomentodevelopwhatIrigaraytermedanecriture feminine,afemininewritingcentredonthedeviantlanguagesofneurosisas well as the utterings of infancy, witchcraft and the body in extremis. Cixous alsourgedwomento‘writethroughtheirbodies’6andsawasimilarfreedom in the expressive potential of embodied experience that, like the ravings of themad,couldescapetheconstitutivestructuresofthemalesymbolicorder. Although these ideas later gained greater currency, many 1980s feminists in the UK followed the more widely read Spender and believed that current languages,bothverbalandvisual,wereinescapablymasculineandpatriarchal, anddecidedtoworkwithwhattheyhad.Ihavealreadydescribedexamples ofvideosthatusedthesametaintedsystemsofrepresentationtodeconstruct socialstereotypesandbuildalternativemodelsof‘minority’subjectivities.In
7 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
theUKitwasnotonlyliterarytheoryandfeminismthatplacedtheproblemsof languageandsubjectivityatthecentreoftheculturaldebate.Bythemid1960s, therhetoricofstructuralistfilmhadalreadysettheagendawithacritiqueof Hollywood narrative that found echoes in the later work of new narrativist video-makersintheUK. S T RU C T U R A L I S T F I L M Englishavant-gardefilm-makersanalysedthelanguageofHollywoodcinema and,justasSpender,IrigarayandCixoushaddiscoveredinspokenlanguage, theyfounditriddledwithnegativerolemodelsforanyonewhowasn’twhite, heterosexual,middleclassandmale.Drawingontheargumentsofpsychoanalysis andSaussure’sstructurallinguistics,artistslikePeterGidal,LauraMulveyand Malcolm le Grice examined narrative structures in film and by extension in television,andidentifiedthemasthevehiclethroughwhichtheserepressive culturalideologieswerebeingdisseminated.Theyobservedthatthemechanism thatenables‘familyentertainment’tobecomesuchdangerouspropagandawas rootedinthepsychosocialpleasuresofspectatorshipandvoyeurism.7Cocooned inthedarknessofacinema,spectatorsweara‘cloakofinvisibility’thatgives theillusionthat‘theycan’tseeus,butwecanseethem’.Thuscamouflaged, viewerslookthroughawindowontoanimaginaryworldthatpretendstobe unawareoftheirvoyeuristicgaze.Thetheorywentthatwhilstharbouringan infantile illusion of omnipotence spectators are, in fact, passively identifying withoneorothercharacteronthescreen.Theyaredrawnintothestoryunaware thattheyaresimultaneouslyinternalisingideologicalmessageshiddeninthe narrativeandthefabricofthespectacle.Forinstance,withinthediegeticspace, withinthestoryitself,womeninclassicHollywoodfilmaretheretobelooked atand,asLauraMulveyobserved,theyprovideamotiveforthementoactand movethestoryon.Thisreflectsandreinforcestheirrelativepassiveandactive positionswithinaphallocentricsocietyoutsidethecinema.Accordingtothe structuralists,thegazeinscribedinthecamera’seyeisfundamentallymaleand western–whatGidalcalled‘theIinendlesspower’.8 In the early 1970s, structural materialist film-makers in the UK like Peter Gidal,consideredanyformofnarrativetobedeterminedbypowerrelationsthat areembeddedinafixedstructureofsignificationbasedondifference–black vs.white,malevs.female,etc.Astheirnamesuggests,structuralmaterialist film-makers avoided the ideological pitfalls of narrative by emphasising the structureandstuffoffilm,sharingwiththemodernistsaninterestinmaterials and processes – celluloid, light, duration, camera moves, cuts and dissolves. In this way, structuralists turned film into a kind of a stripped-down optical phenomenon.InNorthAmerica,MichaelSnowhadmadetheclassicstructural film based on a 45-minute zoom into a photograph of a wave pinned to his studiowall.ThefilmhistorianA.L.ReesidentifiedWavelength(1967)asafilm
L A N G U A G E • 79
inwhich‘formbecomescontent.’9IntheUK,Gidal,ahard-linematerialistfilmmaker,consideredeventhephotographofthewavetoconstitutetoomuchrealist contentandinhisownworkavoidedallstorylinesandmostrepresentations. Whatlittleyousawwasoutoffocusandhardtomakeout.In1973,hecreated Room Film in which the camera drifts apparently aimlessly around his room constantlyshiftingfocussothatnospecificobject(anditsculturalmeaning) canbeidentified.AsthecriticStephenHeathhascommented,thematerialist project,exemplifiedbyGidal,concentratedon‘thespecificpropertiesoffilmin relationtoaviewingandlisteningsituation’.10Spectatorswerenowcompelled to concentrate on the effects of optical printing, repetition and ambiguous imageryandintheabsenceofanystorylinewouldfrequentlybecomeasaware oftheirownbreathingandtheproximityoftheirneighboursaswhatwas(not) happeningonthescreen. Structuralistsbelievedthatattentiontomaterialandprocessintherecording, printing, projection and consumption of the image was the way to avoid the sins of narrativity and voyeurism. These non-narrative films were often hypnotic,visuallycompellingandevidentofapainterlysensibilityoperating behindthelens.Therigorousculturalcritiquebeingproposedthroughthework was tempered by what Rod Stoneman called ‘the aesthetic compensation of structuralistfilm’11andwasmostevidentinthecaptivatinglandscapefilmsof WilliamRabanandChrisWelsby.Whateverthefurtivevisualpleasuresoffered byexperimentalfilmintheUK,thecentralaimwastorefusetheaudiences’ narrative expectations and thereby open their eyes to the politics they were beingfedalongwiththeirStarWars.Thetheorywasthatoncethescaleshad fallen from their eyes, spectators would question all voices of authority and becomeactiveindismantlinganoppressivesocialorder.Howeverutopianthis may seem, the idea that we are formed by the cultural images to which we areexposedisstillcurrentandformsthebasisofcensorshipinbothfilmand television.Thedenialofnarrativepleasuresbroughtstructuralistsdangerously closetoconservativevoiceswhoblamedKojakfortheactionsofpsychopathic murderersinthe1980sand,nowadays,pointtoGangstaRapasthecauseof urbanviolenceamongadolescents.Althoughspectatorshipwaslaterrecognised tocontainactiveelementsandnarrativestrategieswerereintroducedinfilmto moresubversiveendsthansimpleentertainment,structuralmaterialistsintheir rigorousanalysisofnarrativeandvoyeurismshowedushowthepackagingof ideologyworksinboththeartandtheentertainmentindustries. T H E S T RU C T U R A L I S T I N H E R I TA N C E IntheUK,independentfilmdevelopedasaseparateanddistinctpracticeand, intheearly1970s,primarilyconcentratedonacritiqueofmainstreamfilm.For videoartists,televisionwasthemainadversary.However,therewascommon
8 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
theoretical ground between them in their analyses of popular culture and, in educational institutions where both film and video were taught, a crossfertilisationofideastookplace.Filmtheoristshadampleopportunitytoapply – or sometimes misapply – their critique to what video-makers were doing. Structural materialismposed problems for video artists in the UK in its total rejection of narrative, even ‘good’ narrative in which minority voices could nowbeheard.Forfeministswhohadbasedtheirstrategiesonareconfiguration of the personal as political and for ethnic minorities and gays who needed visibility in order to pursue liberation campaigns, the disappearance of the artistintograinyviewsoftheirbedroomwallswasnotaviableproposition.In theearly1970s,anyoneattemptingtobuildacareerinmovingimagewhilst conformingtothevisualpoliticsofthedaywouldstartfromapositionofbeing neitherseennorheard. Thereisnodoubtthatweneededtolearnthecentrallessonofstructuralism, that the language of the moving image is not transparent but loaded with ideological precedents. However, the evacuation of meaning advocated by the structuralists was unsustainable. The second generation of independent film-makerssoondefiedthereductiveprohibitionsoftheireldersandlyricism, poetic manipulations of narrative, fantasy and what Nina Danino calls ‘the intense subject’12 soon returned to artists’ film. The younger generation of film and video-makers also challenged the concepts of the passive cinemagoer and the couch potato television consumer indiscriminately soaking up ideologicallymarkedentertainment.Theaudiencewasnowrecognisedtobe heterogeneous, made up of gendered individuals of different ages, colours and creeds whose reading of images was determined largely by their own histories and the historical moment in which they encountered the work. LauraMulvey’scharacterisationofthefemalespectatorasoscillatingbetween passivelyidentifyingwiththeobjectifiedwomanonthescreenandabdicating hergendertotakeuptheconsumingmasculinepositionwaschallenged,not leastbyMulveyherself.13JackieStaceyidentifiedafascinationbetweenwomen in cinema that excluded the male gaze. Richard Dyer proposed the male as eroticobjectforbothgaymenandheterosexualwomenandDavidRodowicz insisted on the existence of a desiring woman spectator, capable of herself becomingthe‘bearerofthelook’.FeministcommentatorssuchasJackieByars andJeanneAllenhaveproposedthatwomen’sdiscoursesexistassubtextsin mainstreamfilmalongsidethoseoftheirmalecreatorsandthat,givenanactive spectator,thesesubtextscanberecognisedandconsumedbythewomeninthe audience.14 Creating meaning from a range of gendered and ethnic spectator positions,thisnewly‘performative’15viewerhassincebeenencouragedtoplay anactivepartinthecreationofmeaninginart.Thelanguagesofartarenow viewednotasfixed,butfluid,layeredandinaconstantstateofbecomingin thechargedspacesbetweenmaker,viewerandobject/video.
L A N G U A G E • 81
Formanyartists,thesesemioticargumentslosttheirusefulnessinthebusiness of making art. Such hardy souls subscribed to Eric Cameron’s cautiously empiricistviewthat,inspiteofthewobblybusinessofrepresentationandthe conceptualinadequacyofassumingaunifiedsubject,somethingorsomeone did,atonetime,standbeforethecamerawiththecapacitytospeakinacommon, communicablelanguage.Thisapproachalsoassumedthatasocialindividual, sometimesoneandthesamepersonasthesubjectofthework,thenmadethe decisiontorecordtheeventandlatereditanddisseminatetheresultstoother socialindividuals.Howeverdistortingthemirrorofthesensesandloadedthe vehicleofrepresentation,artistsexperiencetheirbodiesandthespecificitiesof livingasaquotidianseriesofquantifiablefluctuations.Thesearepepperedwith elementsoflivedexperiencederivedfromtheenvironmentliketherain,wind andsky,whatLevineplacesbeyondthedistortinglensoflanguageandendows with‘qualia’,theineffable,phenomenologicalexperienceoftheworld.Within the context of moving image art, this embodied subjectivity of the moment can be extended to embrace experiences of the body over time and indeed, whenrootedinaspecifichistoricaltimeandplace,tosocialexperience,itself apprehendedthroughthesenses. Thelegitimacyofrepresentingandbearingwitnesstoexperiencewithinthe realmsofartingeneralandthefactualmediumofvideoinparticular,found furthersupportintherealworldbycontiguousgainsbeingmadebyactivists inpolitics,education,employmentandhealth.Thelatetwentiethcenturysaw politicalchangesthatwereslowlyintroducingtheidealofsocialequalityinto westernsociety.Ifvideoartistsneededanotionoftherealonwhichtoanchor theirperceptions,theyonlyhadtolookaroundthem.Thetransformativepower oflanguagewaseverywhereinevidence;inpolitics,literature,theoryandthe visualarts.Ironically,structuralism,oneofthemostradicalanalysesoffilmic language,hadthreatenedtorobartistsofthegreatestinstrumentsofchange –narrativity. N E W N A R R AT I V E I N T H E U K A N D P O S T- S T RU C T U R A L I S M AmongstUKvideo-makersfewdid,infact,adoptthemodernist-structuralist position in its total rejection of realism and narrative. Stuart Marshall has pointedoutthatalthoughUKvideo-makersdrewattentiontothemechanisms thatcreatedtheillusionofthevideoimage,thetapeitselfcouldnotbeworked upon directly and, as a result, their critique became necessarily ‘embroiled in the practices of signification’.16 In Chapter 2, I have argued the opposite positionandshowedthemanywaysinwhichartistsdidopenupthemedium asamedium.Nevertheless,intheUKamodernistapproachwaslessprevalent and,asMarshallobserved,artiststendedtodeconstructthecodesoftelevision realism rather than the mechanisms that produce the televisual image itself.
8 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
Video artists did not deny representation as the structural materialists had done,butneitherdidtheygototheoppositeextremeandattempttoreinstate thenarrativeregimesofrealism.TheprojectofnewnarrativeintheUKwas moreinlinewiththedeconstructivestrategiesofJacquesDerridawhoargued thatthroughacriticalinvestigationoflinguisticstructures,ideological‘norms’ wouldbedisruptedmakingwayforchange.Videoartistsre-introducedwhat was signified along with its sign. Thus, a table was once more linked to the image of a table, but in such a way as to call into question the natural associationofonewiththeotherandsodevelopabetterunderstandingofthe ‘ideologicaleffectsofdominanttelevisualforms’.17Itwasnotonlyaquestionof understandingthestatusquo,but,accordingtonewnarrativists,therewasa needtoforgearadicalreconstructionoutoftheashesofdeconstruction.Armed withanotionoflanguageasfluidandmalleable,theyfoundawayoutofthe nihilisticrefusalofcontentthathadboggeddownthemoreextremeexponents ofstructuralistfilm. New narrative was careful not to replace the old order of hierarchical representation with new truths that could become just as dogmatic and entrenched as the old ‘Master Narratives’. In order to avoid this pitfall, artists developed narrative forms that took something from the distantiation techniques of the playwright Bertolt Brecht. In the political ferment of the 1930s,Brechtemphasisedtheartificeofstageperformanceswithwhathecalled ‘Verfremdungseffekt’or‘alienationeffect’.Hisactorschangedgender,frequently burstintosongand,inthetraditionofmusichallandpantomime,addressed theaudiencedirectlyasShakespeariancharactershaddoneseveralcenturies before.Brechtusedthesedistancingtechniquestocounterthemanipulationsof ‘emotionaltheatre’andrequiredfromhisaudienceanintellectualengagement with the wider social and historical picture. The aim was to induce an imaginativeengagementintheviewerwhilstsimultaneouslymaintainingwhat Barthes called a ‘pure spectatorial consciousness’. New narrative developed similar techniques for telling stories whilst making the mode of storytelling visible,theartificeofnarrativelaidbareasitweavesitsspell.Thepoliticalaim was clearly expressed by Maggie Warwick when she wrote that artists must ‘constructfictionsaboutexistingfictionsinordertogainabetterunderstanding ofhowandinwhoseintereststhosefictionsoperate’.18 V E R B A L A N D V I S U A L AC RO B AT I C S Thesenewnarrativestookmanyforms.Onestrategyinvolvedashiftawayfrom usinglanguageinitsroleasaneutralcipherforhumanexperiencetowardsa deconstructiveplaywiththeverbalandvisualcodesweusetodrawourinternal mapsoftheworld.IdescribedearlierhowSteveHawleyunpickedthePeterand Janechildren’sbookstoexposethedidacticismofthegenderedrole-playingin
L A N G U A G E • 83
whichwell-behavedcharactersengage.Hawleywentontounsettlefurtherthe arbitraryunionofwordsandmeaninginaseriesofvideotapesthatinvestigated whathecalled‘thespecificgravityofmeaning’.19InTroutDescendingaStaircase (1987), Hawley attempted to reinstate the limnal delights of the painterly gesturebyharnessingPaintboxtechnologytocreateaseriesofanimatedstill lifes.Atthetime,thePaintboxcouldgenerateatracereffectthatresembledthe decayingrepeatpatternsinDuchamps’paintingNudeDescendingaStaircase No.2.Hawleydevisedamethodwherebyhecouldkeyintoanornategiltframe aseriesofclassicstill-lifesubjects–flowers,bananas,leeksand,mostabsurdly, atrout.Whenheheldthevariousobjectsofnaturemorteuptotheframe,their images became magically imprinted on the electronic canvas. They repeated inmeanderingandoverlappingtrailsashemovedcarnationandtroutaround theframe.Hawleyeven‘painted’multiplepaintbrusheswithapaintbrushthus completingthecycleofreferenceswhilstadmittingtotheenduringneedofthe artisticegotomakeitsmark. These instant Futurist paintings not only exposed the workings of video effects within a modernist framework, but also mocked the march of art historical progress, which at one time endowed similar daubings with deep culturalsignificance.Hawleyseemedtobeagreeingwiththeclassicphilistine positionthat‘evenachildcoulddothat’especiallywithaccesstothelatest 1990s Paintbox trickery that could now reproduce historical art forms at the flick of a switch.At the same time, his work reintroduced a narrative – that oftheartistintheactofmakingimages–whilecontinuallyemphasisingthe constructednatureofwhathewascreating. Hawley’s finest ludic exploration of cultural and linguistic conventions tackled our fundamental mode of communication – verbal language itself. Language Lessons (1994 with Tony Steyger) is a long documentary video chartingthedevelopmentofinventedlanguagesfromEsperantototheabsurdly namedVolapuk,alanguagethatisspokenbyonly30peopleworldwide.Oneof themanyexpertsHawleyinterviewsremindsusthattheoriginallinguafranca wasLatinandallsubsequentattemptstocreateinternationallanguageshadat theirheartthebeliefthatthesewouldcreateacommonalitypromotingworld peaceandunity.Inaddition,theseaficionadosofinternationallanguagesdecry thelinguisticimperialismofaglobalisedEnglish,alanguagebasednotonthe supposedpurityofourmothertongue,butonabastardmixofAnglo-Saxon, LatinandFrenchspicedwiththeoddNordicandOrientalinfluences.Language Lessons provides a delightful insight into the more eccentric pastimes of the averageEnglishmanaswellastherealisationthatalllanguagesareconstructed and,asonelearnedintervieweeaverred,speakingEnglishnow‘tiesyoutoa world-viewofdominantAmericanculture’.Withtheacquisitionoflanguage,a socialorderisenteredandourplaceinsocietyandtheworldatlargeissetin semioticstone.
8 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
LANGUAGE SPEAKS WITH FORKED TONGUE TheduplicityoflanguagewasfurtherdemonstratedbyDavidCritchley’sDave inAmerica(1981)inwhichhedescribesexcitingtripstotheUSAhetookonly inhisimaginationandlaterbyJohnCarsonwhosimilarlydreamedof‘Going BacktoSanFrancisco’inAmericanMedley(1988).SteveHawleywentonto tellelegantliestocamerainAPropositionisaPicture(1992),aworkbased onphotographicimagesthatheactuallyborrowedfromhiswife.Thecreeping implausibilityofhistalemakesussuspicious,althoughIonlydiscoveredthe extent of the lie by asking the artist himself. The tape never descends into incoherenceandthefabricatedjourneytellsapoignantstoryofason’squestto findhisabsentfather,astorythatmightevenbebasedonelementsofthetruth. ItisperhapshardtofabulateaselegantlyasdoesHawleywithoutdrawingon personalexperience.Thedoubtsthatthetapesetsupintheviewer’smindbring intorelieftheneedwehavetosurrendertotheevocativepowersofnarrative. Atthesametime,theartistdeliverstousastory,aquestforthefather,thatis asinconclusiveasourattemptstopindowntheprecisemeaningofthetape. DavidCritchley,alsoworkingintheUKinthelate1970sandearly1980s, likedtounderminelinguisticconventionsbycontradictinghimselfasthework progressed.Hisvideotapesmadeitdifficulttobelieveoureyesandearsorsettle onanyoneversionofthe‘truth’,howeverconvincinghesounded.PiecesINever Did(1979)isacombinationofrawperformancestocameraandviewsofthe artistathisdesktalkingcalmlyaboutideasandconceptshehasforgedforhis work,andthenrejected.Thesetwonarrativestrandsareconstantlydisrupted by fragments of a sequence in which the artist, naked this time, repeatedly screams ‘shut up’ to the camera. In these angry outbursts, the continuity of theworkisestablishedbyCritchley’svoiceslowlyfailingacrosstheduration ofthetape.Each‘piece’isdescribedverballybytheartistinhiscalm,reporter mode, then disowned – ‘I wanted to do a piece about sweeping, sweeping uprubbish…butIdidn’tdothatone’.Hethenproceedstoactoutwhathe apparentlydecidednottodoandsincehisactionswereprecededbyhisverbal description,thereisnoaudienceanticipation.Theworkisdeconstructedbefore ittakesplace.Weareleftwiththeconundrumofthedemonstrableliethathe didn’tdothework,orthepossibilityofhavinggotourwirescrossed–didhe meanthathewouldn’tdotheworklive?Therearenoclearanswers,theartist’s artistryitselfisshowntobeafabricationrifewithclichésandconformitytothe fashionableideasandphrasesofthetime:‘processpieces’,‘endurancepieces’, ‘oppositional pieces’, ‘transformative pieces’. It’s all there in the art-speak of the1980s. AlthoughCritchleyhadhistonguefirmlyinhischeek,healsosubscribed totheseriousagendaofthenewnarrativemovementintheUK.Artistswere determined to find politically acceptable ways of reintroducing content, humourandpleasureintoindependentworkaftertheanti-narrativeperiodof
L A N G U A G E • 85
13.DavidCritchley,PiecesINeverDid(1979),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. structuralfilm.Tomymind,newnarrativecannotbereducedtothesurface playofpostmodernismthat,likemuchearliertheoryderivedfromsemiotics, deniedthepossibilityofauthenticspeechwithinexistinglinguisticstructures. Althoughaself-referentialplaywithlinguisticcodesiscommontoboth,post modernismhastakenonanihilismthatwasnotsharedbythenewnarrativists in the UK. Postmodernism proposes artistic expression as individual, but arbitrary and interchangeable, divorced from any social or historical context andthereforepoliticallyineffective.Newnarrativistsinthe1980sbelievedthat they could speak, although they were aware that their speech was mediated by precedents in the history of art, in the vernacular of Hollywood film and in contemporary mainstream media. What new narrativists struggled to say wasdesignedtomaintainpoliticalawarenessinanaudience,aconsciousness that might ultimately lead to activism and greater political freedom. In this they shared the utopian aims of the structuralists, but within a postmodern scenariotheywouldbedismissedasnaïvehumanists.20Innewnarrativethe new fictions challenged the old and, in their opacity, created the possibility forotherfictionstodisplacetheminturn.Akaleidoscopicandfluidvisionof realitytakesshapethatnonethelessispropelledtowardsanapproximationof anattainableandobservabletruth. SPEAKING IN (MANY) TONGUES Forsometime,theculturaltheoriesofthe1970sand1980shadbeeneroding theimportanceoftheroleofboththeauthorandtheartist.Althoughsomenew narrativistsmighthavesubscribedtoBarthes’notionofthedeathoftheauthor andtheascendancyoftheviewer’ssubjectivityinthecreationofmeaning,it wasintheproliferationofvoicesthattheysoughttodisplaceGidal’s‘Iinendless power’.Bymultiplyingvoicesandpointsofview,anarrativewouldnolonger beattributabletoasingleoriginatingsource.Theworksbecamepolyphonous,
8 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
therebysuggestingthatnoonepositionwasthecorrectviewingposition,no oneversionofthetruthimmutableanddefinitive,butthetruepicturefloating somewhere between and within all declared positions. The later conception of the individual as merely a gathering point of cultural influences had not yettakenhold.Theindividualwasstillregardedasanindependentlocusof consciousnesscapableofCartesianintrospectionandjudgement.Withinnew narrative,theconceptionofselfwasmorefluid,takingondifferentvoicesand modesofspeech.Thiscreatedarangeofidentitiesattributabletoagenerictype oremanatingatdifferenttimesfromthesameindividual. A good example is my own video, Kensington Gore (1981), a work that proliferatesvocalsourcesandnarrativemodesbytellingastoryinasmanyways asIcouldthinkof.Thebloodyincidentonafilmsetisrecreatedasmime,asa newsreportreadinBBCtones–doubledbyadifferentvoicereadingthesame textandasa‘spontaneous’interview.Italsoincludesademonstrationofhow tocreateatheatricalwoundonaneck–sorealisticallythatonememberofan audiencedraggedherchildawayevenasheprotested,‘butMum,it’sonlywax andpaint!’Thevariousvoicesandactionsdescribetheperceptualdisruption
14.CatherineElwes,KensingtonGore(1981),videotape.Courtesyoftheauthor.
L A N G U A G E • 87
thatarosewhenIwasworkingonlocationasaBBCmake-upartist.Overthe imageofmortician’swaxbeingsmoothedintotheactor’sneck,wehearhow myabsorptioninthefakewoundsIwascreatingwithwaxandKensingtonGore (theatricalblood)preventedmefromswitchingoffmyprofessionaleyewhen amemberofthecrewwashitinthefacebyahorse’shoof.Itwasonlywhen thedirectorfaintedthatIsawtheincidentasrealandstoppedmakingmental notesabouttheangleofimpactandtheflowofblood.Thedifferentmodesof representationIusedwereintendedtorevealtheslipperyrelationshipbetween fantasy and fiction, between what we know to be simulated and what we nonethelessacceptasreal.Inthefracturingofthenarrative,Iofferedmultiple pointsofviewaddinguptoaprovisionalrepresentationofanevent. T H E D I V I D E D S E L F, D I V I D E D A G A I N Otherartistsachievedthesame‘open’narrativebyrestagingorproliferatingthe individualvoicesthattoldthestory,likeagameofConsequences,21eachperson addinganotherpieceofthenarrative,withnoonecharacterorindividualor pointofviewlayingclaimtothe‘real’story.Backin1975,theGermanartist DieterFroeserpresentedhisRe-stageseriesinNewYorkinwhichconversations in German were re-enactedin English and shown togetherwith other media representationsthatcomparedandanalysedtheoriginalconversation.Thiskind of pass-the-parcel narrative structure finds echoes today in Kutlug Ataman’s workinwhichtheTurkishtransvestiteCeyanFiratperformstoherownscript basedonaninterviewshegavetheartistatanearlierdate.Inthe1990sGillian Wearinghasalsoconfusedidentitiesbyputtingwordsintomouthsfromwhich theydidnotoriginateandBruceNaumanfracturedatensedinnerpartyacross ninescreensandasmanyparticipants.Thenewnarrativestrategyofwearing atextlikeanyotheraccoutrementofidentityhashadanenduringappealfor artistsarguinganewdecentredsubjectorsimplycourting‘negativecapability’, thechameleonnatureofthecreativeimagination. The proliferation of voices and points of view within new narrative video inthe1980sofferedacritiqueoftelevisionnaturalism,itselfbuiltonanotion of the unified subject, notwithstanding the split personality often suggested inJekyllandHyde-stylescenarios.Manyartistsdestabilisedthefictiveunity of a character by fracturing its image through the polysemic devices I have describedaboveandthroughmirroringanddoublingofthesubject.MaxAlmy in the USA divided the image of a woman into four physically identical but emotionallycontradictorypartsusingthesimpledeviceofbuildingastackof fourblackandwhitemonitorsandre-recordingfoursequencesofthesamepair oflipsgivingfourdifferentperspectivesonastoryoflove.ILoveYou(1983) describestheprogressivewithdrawalofawomanfromaloveentanglement, each time reinventing her position to suit the current state of her mind and
8 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
heart.Wherethefirstpasstellshowshecan’tlivewithoutherpartner,thelast repeatshercommitmentbutjustifiesherwithdrawalwiththewell-wornclichés ofneedingtimeandspacetogrowasaperson.Notonlyistheindividualwoman fragmentedbutthereisalsoasensethatherclichéddialogueiscobbledtogether fromhalf-rememberedHollywoodscripts.Andyet,wehaveasensethatallof herstatementsaretrueatthetimeoftelling,eachprojectedpersonalitypartof thewhole,awholethatcanneverbereducedtoanyonedominantpart.Inthe UK,MarcelineMoriusedevensimplermeanstofractureherself-imageinthe twoworks2ndand3rdIdentity(1977).Withasmallgridofmirrorsattachedto amonitorandanidenticalmonitorpositionedopposite,Mori’sfacebreaksup intomultiplereflections,layersofmirroredimagesashervoicedescribesthe fragilityandfugitivenatureofhersubjectivity. U N H O LY C O U P L I N G With the new techniques of montage that video keying and mixing later allowedandwhichhadlongbeenpossibleinfilm,thevisualatomisationof the individual became more sophisticated. Figures and faces were doubled, mirroredanddispersed,ormergedwithotherbodiescombiningintohominid hybrids,sometimesgrotesque,sometimesevocativeofpsychicstates.InJudith Goddard’sCelestialLight/MonstrousRaces(1985),awoman’seyeiskeyedinto the belly of a man like a misplaced Cyclops or an evil eye with malignant intentions. For me, the image suggests something of the anxiety women can feelinthefaceofoverwhelmingmalephysicality.Later,inScotland,LeiCox usedthenewdigitaltechnologiestoflickerbetweenthenakedbodyofaman andawomancreatingahermaphroditewithoutquitelosingtrackofthetwo gendered positions from which it was born. The Sufferance (1993) creates a hybridofferingofwhatJoanKeydescribedas‘aspaceofrestfromtheendless vying for position of male/female cultural organisation’.22 Cox himself sees the work as a technological metaphor for the fusing of physical and psychic boundariesthattakesplaceinheterosexualintercourseandthe‘mirroringand narcissismofromanticlove’.23Exploitinganothertechnologicaldevelopment, theAmericanartistDanReevesusedmorphingtechniquestomergeoneperson into another as if speeding up the evolutionary process. Obsessive Becoming (1995)isthestoryofReeves’familytoldbyindividualswhothenappeareither toregressintotheirancestorsormutateintotheirownchildren,theirindividual identitiesblurringacrossthegendersandthegenerations. Fromthenewnarrativistsonwards,thisneedtointernalisecontradictionand reconcilepsychicoppositionshasbeenmuchinevidenceinvideoart.Inthe earlydays,theseattemptssimultaneouslytoreiterateandsuturethedividedself foundechoesincontemporarypsychotherapeuticpractices.Freudhadobserved howthehumanmindisdividedbetweentheconsciousandtheunconscious;
L A N G U A G E • 89
the child is alienated from the adult; the past subsumed into the symptoms of the present. From gestalt to primal therapy and psychodrama, regressive journeysintochildhoodwereusedinthe1980storeconnectpatientswiththe exiled parts of their psyche. Perhaps because video artists have traditionally usedthemediumasamirror,theyfoundmoresignificanceinLacan’stheoryof apsychicsplit,the‘spaltung’representedbythemirrorphase.AsImentioned inChapter3,Lacancharacterisedthedefiningmomentfortheinfantwhenit firstrecognisesitsownimageinthemirror.Theembodiedknowledgeofself is projected into an external entity existing in language and representation, forevercausallyconnected,butpsychicallyseparatefromsubjectiveexperience. Entryintothesymbolicorderofhumandiscourseandsocietynecessitatesthis alienationofselffromimageofself.Paradoxically,thisdevelopmentalmoment alsoofferstheindividualanidealisedimageofunity,ofabounded,socialself, achievingmasteryandself-determinationwheretheinfantisfragmentedand dispersed in a sea of bodily sensations. The struggle of culture to reunite the disparateselvesthatconstituteanindividualwasthepreoccupationofmuchnew narrativeandpostmodernartinthe1980sandbeyond.TheculturaltheoristSean Cubitttakesasociologicalviewwhenhehailsvideoasthemediumbestsuited to‘reorganisethischaoticchorusofsubjectpositionsintosomethingthatwillfit intothelarge-scaleorganisationofsociety’.24Video,hebelieves,cantakeonthis taskbecauseit‘beginsitsworkpreciselyintheheartoftheregimeoflooking’.25 Itbeginsinthemirrorphase. Ifhumancreativityanddesirescanbeunderstoodintermsoftheneedto reconcilethesepsychicsplits,thenthenewnarrativistsintheUKwereintent onexploringbothinternalfragmentationandtherupturesinherentinlanguage. Theybeganbysplittingthesignifierfromthesignified,thespeakerfromthe signintelevisuallanguagetherebyevokingouressentialseparatenessfromthe imagesthatrepresentus.Atthesametime,theyre-introducedthepossibility of narrative communication and visual pleasure, healing the alienation of subjectivityundertheacademicstricturesofstructuralmaterialism.Thesubject couldnowbeconceivedasacontinuum,afluidentitymanoeuvringthecultural precedentsitsetsouttodismantle,butcontainingwithinitacoreresistance thatcannotbeexplainedasaproductofsocialconditioningorbereducedto asymptomofinternaldivisions.Thenewnarrativistswerenotlookingfora closed,settledunity,butaninternalco-existenceofafracturedsubjectivity.As SeanCubittremarksinhisdiscussionofMaxAlmy’stapes:‘It’satthispoint thatitbecomespossibletothinkaboutthepoliticsofanewsocialitybasedin unstableidentities.’26 Whenexaminedupclose,thedistinctionsbetweenthedifferenttendenciescan becomeveryfine.Inspiteoftheirtamperingswiththetechnology,structuralist film-makers never entirely eradicated representation and a narrative of sorts alwaysemergedintheirworkasakindofreturnoftherepressed,individual
9 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
humanitythatnarrativeembodies.Newnarrativistsfortheirpartwereintenton re-introducingnarrativecontentinvideo,butsimultaneouslytookamodernist andtosomeextentamaterialistpositioninrelationtotelevisualrepresentation. Theymadevisiblethematerialcodes,conventionsandstructuresoftelevision naturalism, the panoply of entertainment formats that, as Marshall pointed out,pre-existedartists’involvementinthemedium.Throughouttheirlinguistic explorations, new narrativists believed in the transformative potential of art, the possibility of raising consciousness, and indeed the capacity of artists to speakfromanauthenticpositionthroughthecomplexandever-shiftingmesh oflinguisticconventions. F U R T H E R TA M P E R I N G W I T H N A R R AT I V E C O D E S As we have seen, the early grammatical rules of television and cinema required that their codes and procedures remained, if not invisible, then largely unconscious to the viewer. Artists showed that excising the storyline ordisruptingthesynchronisationofsoundandimagecouldeasilyundermine televisionrealism.Linearnarrativealsoprovedvulnerabletothediscontinuities, misrepresentations and multiple performance modes that new narrativists introducedintotheirwork.Suchdevicesnotonlydisruptedtheinternallogicof narrativestructures,buttheyhadtheaddedbonusofunderminingtheveracity oftheideologicaldoctrinespromulgatedbybroadcasttelevision. Televisionrealismalsodependsontheinvisibilityofedits,soprogrammemakersusedissolvesandothertransitionstoeaseusfromonescenetoanother. Wherestructuralistfilm-makersoftenslowedsequencesdowntovirtualstasis in order to evacuate meaning and avoid narrative fixture, new narrativist video-makers fractured, multiplied and speeded up the editing process to bring into relief the montage of discontinuous images that are the substrate ofconventionalfilmandtelevision.Thefast-pacededitingachievedbythese artistswasmadepossiblewiththeadventofanalogueeditinginthelate1970s and the development of the Series 5 Sony edit suite that could edit down to five frames. In the 1980s, more complex two- and three-machine editing became generally available in the UK and artists like Dara Birnbaum in the USA and Klaus Blume in Germany were already experimenting with editing asastructuringdevice.Withthebenefitoffive-frameaccuracyitwaspossible endlessly to repeat sequences, copying from the same original source and editing rapidly, almost reaching the speed levels of film animation. We were toseethejoinsinpost-productionaswellasintheproductionphase.Works likeSteveLittman’sCrisps(1980)didjustthat.Theartistisseenseatedinfront ofthecamerastaringintothelenswithalistlessair.Hethencramsasmany crispsintohismouthashecanwhilsttheeditingjump-cutsbackandforthin rapid-firerepeatsorchestratedintoafreneticexhibitionofcompulsiveeating.
L A N G U A G E • 91
JeremyWelshintheUKandSandbornandFitzgeraldintheUSAalsobeganto explorethevisualdisruptionthatrapid-fireeditingcouldproduce,takingthe imagetotheedgeofcoherenceandlegibility.Ononelevelthiscouldbereadas analogoustothehighturnoverofimagesthattheincreasinglyjadedpalateof televisionviewersdemandedthroughoutthe1980sand1990s.Comingacross likeGeneralHospitalonacid,theseparodiesofinformationoverloadexposed ourneedtoconsumemindlesstelevisionentertainment.Onanotherlevel,rapid editing could represent the descent into incoherence, the senselessness that Baudrillardseesastheonlydefenceagainsttheinvasionofthesocialmachine ofculture.27Eitherway,theemphasisontheedithadacompensatoryvisual appeal.Thefreneticcuttingcreatedsemi-abstractandpainterlypatternsthatonce againtunedintothehallucinogenicexperimentationthatwasstillpartofyouth cultureintheearly1980s.Theprincipalaimofnewnarrativevideoremained thedeconstructionoftelevisualsignifyingpracticesandthereconstitutionofthe artist’ssubjectivity,albeitasashiftingpatternofself-reflexivefragments. Thepreviouslywell-hiddensubstrateofeditingthatsupportedlinearnarrative inmainstreamnarrativeswasnowexposedandbecameamajorelementinthe creativeenterpriseofnewnarrative.Thetemporaltamperingsmadepossible byeditingrupturednarrativecontinuityandtheinternalcoherenceonwhich televisiondepends.Italsoofferednewwaysofthinkingabouttime,perception and,inthecaseofworkslikeCrisps,ofpsychologicalstatesanalogoustothe visualandconceptualdisturbancethatcanbeinducedbyrepeatediting.The sustained reiteration of a sequence in film loops or repeat-edited videos has thecapacitytodisruptanddrainmeaningfromtheimage,andsimultaneously create a new entity, what Vito Acconci called ‘the replicating aspect’. When somethingisrepeated,saysAcconci,‘itbecomesmatter,itbecomesfact’.28In dismantlingthecodesofconventionaltelevisuallanguage,newnarrativebegan toreconstructalanguageoftheimagination,askewedvisionoftheworldthat slidbetweenthecracksandfissuresofwhatisknown. O U T O F S H O T, R E V E A L E D Thewholerangeoftelevisualandcinematicconventionscameunderscrutiny withinnewnarrative,includingtheorganisationofthestudio.Televisiondrama requires that the crew behind the camera remains unseen and unheard. The directorandtechniciansarealsokeptoutofshot.Cameraoperatorsmustnot allowthecameratostraytotherawedgesofthesetandgivethegameaway.The lights,microphonesandcables–alltheparaphernaliaofthetelevisionstudio– aresimilarlyputbeyondthevisualrangeofthecamera.Longbeforetheadvent ofbreakfastTV,artistsbegantodefycinematicrulessuchas‘crossingtheline’. Thiswasadelineatedborderbeyondwhichacamerashouldnotstraybecause, duringediting,itwouldunseatthelogicalorientationofthegazewithinthe
9 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
geographicalspaceoftheset.Artistsallowedthecameratocrossthelineand confusetheillusionalspaceordriftawayfromtheactorsontotheset,revealing thepre-fabricatedinteriorsthatreplicateadomesticenvironment.Inthelate 1970sandearly1980s,StuartMarshallmadeaseriesofvideoexperimentsthat included the deliberate exposure of the set as a simulated construction. He didthis,notbyshowingtheedgesoftheset,asdidmanyotherartists,butby tiltingthesetinsuchawaythattheactorswereobligedtostaggertooneend onlytobepitchedtheotherwayasthesetswungback.Watchingtheactors struggletosaytheirlineswhilstmaintainingtheirbalancewasbothcomical andinstructive.Notonlywasthesetrevealedasacriticallyboundedspacebut thescriptwasalsodeclaredtheinventionoftheartist,oneamongthemyriad televisualfabulationsthatwesowillinglyacceptasfact. Marshall developed a form of anti-acting that was very different from the intimate, naturalistic style of other artists. Participants in Marshall’s tapes delivered their lines in an emphatic monotone, often speaking directly to camera. These declamations were not unlike the theatrical tradition of epilogues addressed to the audience at the end of a play. As I mentioned, they also borrowed from the exaggerated tones and asides of pantomime, a mainstream form that acknowledges both the artificiality of the performance andthecredulitypactbetweenaudienceandperformersacrosstheproscenium arch of the theatre. Marshall liked to frame his performers awkwardly and, in common with Critchley, he often drove them to the limits of their vocal capacity.Heonceaskedmetoactinoneofhisvideosandmyrolewastoread thewitches’speechfromMacbethlyingonmybackwiththescriptjustoutof shotabovemysomewhatforbiddingprofile.Ihadtoshriekthetextasloudlyas possibleuntilImadeamistakeormyvoicecracked,thenIwastostartagain. Themistakesalwayscamefirst,buteventuallymyvoicegaveoutandwithit anypretenceatnaturalism. AlthoughMarshallwentontomakesignificanttelevisionprogrammesaround gayissues,hemaintainedhisexperimentswithtelevisualforms.Heconcentrated ontextualdeliveryinfluencedbylinguistictheoriesof‘intertextuality’inwhich thesubstanceofaculturaltextisseentoexistonlyinrelationtoothertextsand isaproductoftextualcomminglingratherthantheindividualcreativityofits author.Whiledemonstrablycommittedtocommunicatingthroughthemoving imageMarshallalwaysmaintainedthat‘themeaningofaworkispreciselya socialconstruction.’29 C A S T R AT I N G T H E G A Z E StuartMarshallunderminedtherealismofactingbymakingitdifficultforhis performerstodelivertheirlines.Othernewnarrativistsannouncedtheirwork asculturalconstructsbyrevealingthecables,microphonesandallthetechnical
L A N G U A G E • 93
miscellany of video recording. Yet another group of artists began to declare themselvesasauthor/directors,deliberatelyfailingtoeditouttheirdirectionsto theperformers.AswesawinTheCough(1985)bytheAmericansTerryDibble andPeterKeenan,anoff-screendirectorinstructstheperformertocough,and cough again, saying ‘next time with more feeling’. The agony of witnessing therackingsoundsoftheartist’scoughisallthemoredisturbingforthefact thattheperformerisstaringstraightintothecamera.Thiswasastandardnew narrative device that breaks one of the cardinal rules of television and film drama,nevertolookatthecamera.Bydoingso,theperformerwasdeemed tohave‘castratedthegaze’asfilmtheorywouldcharacteriseit.Beyondthe Freudianimplicationofdeflatedmastery,thismeansthattheperformermakes theviewerawareofhis/herownvoyeurismbyreturningthegaze.Thespectator is caught looking and the gaze becomes an active element in the work. The cloakofinvisibilityispulledawayands/heiscompelledtotakeresponsibility forscopophilicdesires.Thisstrategywaswidelyusedbythefirstgenerationof post-structuralfilm-makersaswellasbyvideoartistslikeMarshall,Critchley andDibble,notforgettingthemanywomenartistsforwhomthe‘male’gaze hadlongpresenteddifficulties. Myownattemptstoproblematisethemalegazeconsistedofstaringhard at the viewer through a pair of thick glasses whilst eight months pregnant. With Child (1983) appropriates the cinematic convention of blocking the eroticism of a woman’s face with the sign of her intellect, the thick glasses oftheconventional‘bluestocking’.Inthemovies,whenthespectaclesfinally comeoffandthehairtumblesdown,thewomanisreturnedtoherdesignated positionasobjectofmaledesire.InWithChild,afterbriefinterludesofmyopic andself-inducedemotionalupheaval,theglassesalwaysgobackon.Iintended to create a subjective position behind the lenses (replicating the objectifying lensofthecamera)asafoiltotheplenitudeofbiologicalmeaningintheimage ofmyswollenbelly.Althoughthecreationofanimageoffecunditywasrarely seenatthetimeandwentsomewaytodisruptingtheconventionaleroticism ofawoman’sbody,therecurringimageoftheglassesperpetuatedthedeferred momentoferoticrevelationthatisalwaysimpliedbythebespectacledfrump. Thenewnarrativealwaysreferencestheold.30 S T E P P I N G O U T O F C H A R AC T E R ThedirectgazeofWithChilddepartedfromdramaticconventionsthatrequired actors not only to keep their eyes averted from the camera’s line of vision, but also to remain in character and in costume. Mark Wilcox was another artistwhounravelleddramatictelevisualforms,notbyabandoningscriptsor forced ‘acting’ but through reconstruction and subsequent deconstruction of familiartelevisualandcinematicscenarios.InCallingtheShots(1984),Wilcox
9 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
createsnarrativeexpectationswithactorssettingthesceneforawell-known Hollywood drama – a re-staging technique that became popular with artists in the late 1990s. Just as the viewer settles into the cosy irresponsibility of spectatorship,Wilcox’sactresstakesoffherwig,pullsawayherfalseeyelashes andspeaksdirectlytothecamera.Theset,techniciansandapparatusofvideo recordingaresimilarlyrevealedand,asWilcoxputit,‘Reconstructionbecomes Deconstruction.’31Thefollowingyear,thecultAmericanTVshowMoonlighting waslaunchedanddisplayedelementsofself-reflexivity–thesetwasstashed away at the end of each episode and the series’ TV ratings were discussed to camera. However, the basic realism of the show was not fundamentally challenged whereas Wilcox’s performers created an unbridgeable distance between themselves and the parts they were playing by stepping out of the scenario and insisting on their identities as actors. Not only was the fictive natureof‘acting’declared,buttheunderlyingideologiesembeddedintheroles the players embodied were also exposed. Wilcox insisted that in Calling the Shotshecreated‘apieceofsubliminalagit-propfortheliberationofwomen andmenfromstiflingsocialroles’.32 THEN AS NOW In spite of their efforts to reinvent language as a demotic vehicle for artistic expression, new narrativists and early postmodernists might appear to have been trapped in a confrontational relationship with dominant forms of representation. However, in their efforts to wrong-foot the ‘loaded’ forms of speech developed by the institutions of television and mainstream film, new narrativevideoartistsdisplayedconsiderableinventivenessaswellascountercultural commitment. New aesthetic forms emerged from the project of linguisticdeconstructionthatcouldnotbereducedeithertotheobjectsoftheir critique or, indeed, to the critique itself. The artists were quick to recognise that in deconstructing language they had reinvented it and opened it to the intrusion of experiences and perspectives that had, as yet, not found a form withindominantrepresentation. Itisnowhardtoimaginetheimpactofnewnarrativestrategiesonaudiences in the 1970s and 1980s. Up until the 1990s, broadcasting was a very formal affair.Greatpainsweretakentodisguisethemechanismsthatcreatedrama, currentaffairs,thenewsandevengameshows.Thecontinuityofanevening’s viewing was hard to maintain because of the disruption of advertising, live news programmes and announcements between shows. It was necessary to holdthefracturedscheduleofviewingtogetherbynotdeviatingoneiotafrom the golden rules of television realism. Video artists broke every rule in the book, and, as has happened with most other innovative art movements, the mainstream was quick to appropriate devices that were originally devised to
L A N G U A G E • 95
attackthem.Discontinuitysoonbecamefashionableinpoppromos,thecamera tookflightfromthetripod,editingbecamefaster,lightingbothmorenaturalistic and more deliberately artificial. The long-hidden technicians, directors and technicalparaphernaliaoftelevisionstudioscameintoviewandprogrammes likeTheBigBreakfastandTFIFridayontheUK’sChannel4madeavirtueof continuallyreferringtothemeansoftelevisionproduction.Thislooseningof stylistic modes coincided with a reduction of the content of what was being communicatedtosafedepthsofbanality.Itissoberingtoobservethatmany of the techniques of contemporary broadcasting originate in often-forgotten artists’culturalinterventions,thenewnarrativistsnotableamongstthem.Their influencestandsasatestamenttothecriticalandinventivenatureoftheartists’ initiativeswhilstdemonstratingthepowerofmassmediatorecoup,consume anddefusethemostradicalofartisticinnovations.Thisstoryofrepossessionby themainstreamisonethatIshallexpandinthenexttwochaptersofthisbook.
6 Television Spoofs and Scratch Parody and Other Forms of Sincere Flattery
Unlike earlier work, they do not construct dominant television as an irredeemably ‘bad object’, but rather attempt to rework modes of representation such as soap opera to their own advantage. Stuart Marshall NewnarrativeheraldedalesscombativephaseinBritishvideoart,producing aparodicstrainthathadlongexistedintheUSAwherestructuralmaterialist philosophies had much less of an impact. Although it was still important to deconstructtheintrinsiccodesandimpliedvaluesystemsinmainstreamformats, amoreplayfulandinteractiverelationshipwithtelevisionwasconsolidatedin themid1980s,anticipatingtheconvergenceofhighandpopularcultureweare witnessingtoday. Mainstreamtelevisioninthe1970salreadycontainedelementsofself-parody mostobviouslyincomedyprogramming.Inthepreviousdecade,theAmerican show,RowanandMartin’sLaugh-Insatirisedregularprogrammeswithspoof interviews,ongoingsoapmelodramasandfeaturedGoldieHawnperfectinga dramaticself-reflexivitybyrepeatedlyfluffingherlines.OverintheUK,Monty Python’s Flying Circus plundered established television formats, one of their mostmemorableparodiesbeingthefragmented‘AlanWhicker’commentaries. EachmemberofthePythonteamappearedwearingtheblack-rimmedglasses andmoustachethatweresocharacteristicofthewell-knownTVpresenter,but onlydeliveredtwoorthreeofhislinesbeforeanother‘Whicker’appearedto takeupthenarrative.AlsointheUK,TheMorecambeandWiseShowspecialised inhumiliatingwillingcelebritieslikeGlendaJacksonandVanessaRedgrave.In fact,aninvitationtostarinoneofErnieWise’s‘plays’inthe1980swasasign
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 97
that you had arrived as a performer.1 Television comedians operated like the courtjestersofold,blurtingoutwhatordinarycitizenscouldnotsaywithout losingtheirheads.AsFreudobserved,suchjokestersareabletocriticisethe establishment only obliquely along the ‘circuitous paths’ of humour when directattacksareimpossible.2Small-screenparodyexemplifiedbyMorecambe and Wise and the Python and Laugh-In teams was certainly irreverent and allowed viewers to experience vicariously what John Ellis has called ‘orders ofdiscoursepresentedindisorder’.3However,theirparodicsubversionswere well contained by the structure of the scheduling that surrounded them and bythepredictabilityoftherunninggagsandhumoroussituationstheycreated weekly. The comedies themselves were based on an affectionate familiarity withtelevisiongrammarandservedtoreinforcetheprogrammingconventions theysentup.Theyalsoconfirmedthecelebritystatusofthosetheylampooned ordrewintotheirsatiricalcaprices.Althoughrootedinconventionalnarrative structures, television comedy in the 1970s developed techniques – including thefragmentationofidentityemployedintheWhickersketch–thatarevery close to the deconstructive strategies of new narrativists in video and later postmodernistsinthewiderreachesoffineartpractice. Bythe1980s,theBrechtianacknowledgementofthegapbetweenperformer and performance was well established in new narrative video as we saw in Mark Wilcox’s Calling the Shots (1984) in which the actress stepped out of character,removedherwigandfalseeyelashesandspokedirectlytocamera. Wecannowrecogniseaparallelbetweenthesedeconstructivestrategiesand the play within the play that Morecambe and Wise so cleverly manipulated for television audiences. There are convergences between video art and the style,contentandcounter-culturalimpetusoftelevisionsatire,buttheaimof self-parodyintelevisionwasnotsomuchtoraisethepoliticalconsciousness ofaudiences,buttoentertainand,asAndyLipmanputit,togently‘prickthe bubbleofTV’sself-importance’.4 NOT THE NEWS Intheearly1980s,Wilcoxwasnotaloneinappropriatingfilmandtelevision formatstouncouplethefalseunityofsimulationandtruth.ABritishcompatriot, Ian Breakwell, tackled the idiom of television news in a spoof bulletin and, byimplication,raisedquestionsabouttheveracityofnewsreporting.Where OrsonWelles’famous1938‘MarsInvasion’radiobroadcastwentformaximum dramaticimpact,Breakwell’sTheNews(1980)deliberatelyharnessedthebanal.5 Theworkfeaturesabland-lookingnewsreaderframedintheusualheadand shouldersshot,trappedbehindadeskwithrelevantimageskeyedontoascreen above his head. The only difference here is that the news he reads consists of minute, fictional events occurring in the local community and becoming
9 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
progressivelymoreabsurdasagroupofpensionerspersistentlydisruptpublic events. The tape is slow and tedious and delivers its gentle punch over an extendedperiod.ItissalutarytoobservehowBreakwell’selevationofthebanal tothestatusofarthasbeenadoptedasagoverningprincipleofmuchreality TV. We sit through hours of domestic revelations, shopping trips and house renovationsandfewpeoplenowconsideritaradicalformofspectatorship. In the context of 1980s broadcasting, Breakwell was able to draw on the everydaytosatirisethebreathlessstyleinwhichworldeventsaremadetoseem likeaninternationalsoapopera–nonemoresothaninthe2003‘RealityWar’ thatwasbeamedtoourhomesfromthefrontlineinIraq.Theinterminable news reports were artfully packaged by intervals of ‘regular’ programming thatfeatureddocumentariesorHollywoodreconstructionsofearlierconflicts andmadedelicatedistinctionsbetweenjustifiablewesternaggressionandthe reprehensible, evil intentions of foreigners. In The News, Breakwell gave us nothingtopackageotherthanthecolourlessexistenceofordinaryfolk,which inpre-realityTVdayswouldneverhavemadeittothesmallscreen.6 O N R E P R E S E N TAT I O N Breakwell belonged to a new generation of parodic artists who freely appropriatedtheidiomsofbroadcasting,importingthemwholesaleintotheir workandplayingwiththeirconventions.Newnarrativistsaspiredtothesame degreeofverisimilitudeofwhichtelevisionwascapable–evenDavidHall’s ThisisaTelevisionReceiver(1971–1976)dependedontheinitialestablishment ofarecognisableimageofanewsreaderagainstwhichthegradualbreak-up of the sound and picture made its impact. Where the early modernist video artists dismantled the image to the point of abstraction, new narrative and laterpostmodernartistswhoquotedpopularculture,employedhigh-definition realismtoachievetheirtelevisualsimulations.Theycreatedsatirical,absurdist or self-reflexive black comedies – within the declared fictional space of new narrative. Althoughitembracedabroadcastinglanguagethatmodernistshadrejected, thenewnarrative,parodicphaseofvideoartharnessedtelevisualrealismto make the same point as the modernists made before them – that television reality,whetherhighdefinitionstudio-litinterviews,dramatisedreconstructions orlow-grade,subjectivereportsfromextremeenvironmentsareallmanipulated tonormaliseandpromotetheinterestsofthepowersthatbe.Inspiteofvaliant efforts on the part of national networks to remain independent, broadly speaking,thejoboftelevisionistowintheheartsandmindsoftheviewing publicandbringthemtothe‘correct’pointofview.Thejobofartistsinthe 1970sand1980swastointerruptthatprocessbywhatevertacticalmeansthey hadattheirdisposal.
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 99
TELEVISION DELIVERS PEOPLE Artists like Marty St. James and Anne Wilson in the UK and the Americans TomRubnitzandAnnMagnuson,createdhymnstoculturalconsumption,to theviewingprocessitself.St.JamesandWilsondelightedinproducingpseudoAmerican soaps, complete with stilettos and swimming pools. As we saw in Chapter3,Magnusonparodiedtheexperienceoftherestlessviewer,channelhopping through daytime TV in search of meaning. In Made for TV (1984), Magnuson’scastofmediacharactersareinterchangeable,fromtheheroineof afilmnoirtothePlayschoolpresenter–allperformedbytheartistherself.The meaningoftheworkliesnotsomuchintheovertcontentofthepiece,butin the image of Magnuson as viewer of her own goal-less meandering through thenumerousTVchannelsalreadyavailableintheUSA.Sheturnsawayfrom lifeandembarksonafruitlesssearchforherownidentityinthenarcissistic hallofmirrorsthatistelevision.Hereshewillfindonlystereotypesbecause ‘acceptable entertainment has to flatter and exploit the cultural and political assumptionsofthelandofitsorigins.’7Byextension,itmustpromotetheinterests of the oligarchy governing that land and not those of alienated individuals representedbyMagnuson.ThefactthatMagnusononlyfindsherownimagein variousguisesatteststothewidespreadviewamongartiststhatthemediawere increasingly determining experience – I am what I watch. In the 1960s, the culturaltheoristMarshallMcLuhanpointedtothesocialconsequencesofnew communicationsystems.Heobservedthatthecontentofatelevisionbroadcast waslessimportantthanthenewviewinghabitsitengendered,‘thechangeof scaleorpaceorpatternthatitintroducesintohumanaffairs’–thiswasthereal ‘message’ofanymediumortechnology.8Televisiondictatesbehaviour. Iftelevisionentertainmentcontributestomaintainingourconformitytothe statusquoandfixingourplaceinthematrixofpowerrelationsdefiningthe socialorder,thefunctionofcommercialtelevisionistocontrolourbehaviour asconsumers.Backin1973,theAmericanartistRichardSerramadeoneofthe firstdirectcritiquesofTVinadeclamatoryvideoentitledTelevisionDelivers People.Thetapeconsistsofaseriesofcaptionsinwhichtheartistpromulgates theviewthattheprimaryroleoftelevisionentertainment,of‘softpropaganda’, istodeliverviewerstothe‘corporateoligarchy’.Acommercialtransactiontakes placeinwhichtheviewerissoldtotheadvertiserbythenetworks.And,as Serraobserves,‘theviewerpaysfortheprivilegeofhavinghimselfsold.’Not only is the viewer as consumer controlled by advertising, but, according to Serra’s captions, television information is ‘the basis on WHICH YOU MAKE JUDGEMENTS.Bywhichyouthink.’InTelevisionDeliversPeople,Serrapaints a picture of the western world in which its peoples are at the mercy of the NEWMEDIASTATE.Onceagain,weseepoliticsdominatedbymultinational corporationsconspiringwiththeentertainmentindustrytoexertunprecedented socialcontrolforthebenefitandprofitofthoseinthedrivingseat.
1 0 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
C O M M E RC I A L B R E A K S As we have seen, the overall narrative continuity of commercial television is vulnerable to disruption – first by domestic events in the nation’s living rooms, but more importantly by the advertisements themselves and those transitionalmomentsontelevisioninwhichprogramme‘links’createahiatus beforethenextscheduleditementhralsusonceagain.Inspiteoftherecent adoptionofbusygraphicsandsurrealjuxtapositionsofimages,advertisingis stillheavilydependentontelevisionrealismandconventionalnarrativeforms togetitsmessageacross.Theunderlyingdiscourseextollingthebenefitsofa particularproductmustremainclearinordertocontrolviewers’buyinghabits successfully. Like his counterparts in television advertising, the American videoartistWilliamWegmanusedrealismandenactmenttocommunicatehis message.Incontrasttoadvertisers,whoseektocommunicatethedesirabilityof consumergoods,Wegman’snowclassicDeodorantCommercial(1972)extracts and amplifies the narrative caesurae of advertisement breaks. Wegman’s ad begins with a familiar product theme, personal hygiene. The half-naked artist,standinginprofile,sprayshisarmpitwithanaerosoldeodorant.Asthe scentedmistbuildsuponhisskin,hedeliversaramblingmonologueonthe
15.WilliamWegman,(SelectedWorks–Reel3)DeodorantCommercial(1972), videotape.CourtesyoftheartistandElectronicArtsIntermix(EAI),NewYork.
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 101
efficacyoftheproduct:‘Withthisdeodorant,Idon’thavetoworryaboutsocial nervousness…itkeepsmedryallday.’Bytheendofhisverylongspeech,60 secondsisalongtimeinad-land,thenowliquiddeodorantisdrippingdown hisbody,signallyfailingtokeephimdry.Inthiswork,Wegmanneatlyfuses theabsurdityofhisfauxnaivetyinabusinghischosenconsumerproductwith acritiqueofthecommercialexploitationofsocialconventionsthatdemanda bodysanitisedofallitsnaturalodours. Wegman’s anarchic brand of pseudo-advertising anticipated television’s subsequentdevelopmentofapostmodernintertextualitythatemploysreferences tofamiliarpopularculturalmodes.InEnglandwewitnessedrecentlyaseriesof ‘Mini-Drama’commercialsthataccompaniedthere-launchoftheMinicar.The heroicMinistarsin30-secondepicsincludingaMini-blockbusterinwhichthe carsavestheplanetfromanalieninvasion.Likeajokeorapun,thecommercial makesanequivalencebetweentwounrelatedculturalphenomenathatitknows theviewerwill‘get’–inthiscasethecurrentnostalgiaforthe1960sembodied intherevampedMiniandthewell-wornHollywoodscenarioofalieninvasion. The advert draws the viewer into an acknowledgement of a shared cultural heritageandthroughthiscosycommonalitytheinsidioussuggestionismade that successful membership of the contemporary cultural scene necessitates the purchase of a new Mini. Where Wegman was careful to avoid narrative closure(theworkcomestoanabruptend),advertisementsliketheMini-Drama series depend on a repeated denouement to re-orient the audiences’ desires towardstherelevantproduct–‘Minisavestheworld.Theend.’(Buythiscar.) By refusing to provide a coherent narrative of consumption, Wegman’s tape exposes the dependency of advertisers on narrative conventions to sell their wares,buthealsodemonstratestheinherentnarrativismoftelevisionitself.9 Commercialbreaksmustconformtotherulesofbroadcaststorytellinginorder tosuturethesyntacticalfissuresthatadvertisementsopenupinthecontinuity ofanevening’sviewing.Thetransitionfromstorytostorymustbeseamless. Itwouldappearthatthemorepotentiallydisruptivethetelevisionmoment, themorestrictlytherulesoftelevisiongrammarareadheredto.Ihavealready mentionedtheself-reflexiveelementsinMoonlightingthatinthe1980sflattered theviewerwithknowingreferencestothesetandstudiowhilstdoingnothing tounderminetheconventionalityofthenarrativegenrestheseriesemployed. In the 1990s, the American series, NYPD Blue started aping deconstructive experimentaltechniquesbyliberatingthecamerafromthetripodandthelens fromthenecessitytomaintainfocus.However,thestorylinesrevertedtotried andtestedformulaereinforcingthesanctityofmarriage,thesuperiorityofthe Americanwayoflife,theprimacyofChristianvaluesetc.Intelevisionhands,the deconstructivetechniquesofartistssoonbecomemannerismsand,asCaldwell pointedout,areusedasvisualandconceptualstimuliina‘ritualofdisplay’to keeptheviewerinterestedinwhatisinvariablyaconventionalnarrative.10
1 0 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
The Canadian artist Stan Douglas demonstrated just how disruptive of audienceexpectationsandtelevisionprioritiesimagescanbeoncestrippedof theirnarrativeinfrastructureandideologicalroots.In1991hemadehisown mini-dramasinshort30–60-secondworks.Monodramas(1991)areaseriesof video vignettes in which image and soundtrack are used to set up narrative expectationsthatarethenabruptlyfrustrated.Likeacrossbetweenadrama andanadvertisementfortheAmericanwayoflife,I’mnotGarysetsthescene inamid-westerntown,thecameraglidingintoisolatetheprotagonist,aman walkingpurposefullyalongthedustystreet.Apasser-bygreetshimwith‘Hi Gary’towhichherepliesflatly,‘I’mnotGary’andgoesonhisway.Douglas himselftellsthestorythatwhenthisnarrativenonsequiturwasbroadcaston Americantelevisionitprovokedviewerstocallinandaskwhethersomething hadgonewrongwiththebroadcastorwhetherthevideowaspartofaquizor candidcamerasurprise,andwasthereaprizeforspottingit.Wheninformed that the source of such a disturbing broadcast was an artist, viewers sighed withreliefandthepoweroftheworkwasquicklydefused. C O R P O R AT E V I D E O The corporate video, whether destined for television or the business world, was no less embroiled in dominant forms of televisual representation and attractedthedeconstructiveattentionsof1980svideoartists.IntheUK,John Butler,workingbetweenartandcommercialvideo,usedtheskillsheobtained inhisdayjobtocreatespoofcorporatevideosfortheindependentvideoart circuit.WorldPeaceThruFreeTrade(1989)isasophisticatedcombinationof videoandgraphicsbasedonthecuttingedgeimagingtechniquesoftheperiod. The activities of ‘Globex’, a fictional multinational company, are described throughfullscreencaptionsintercutwithmalehandsshakingonadeal.These sequences are accompanied by short animations of smooth-edged logos and computergeneratedobjectsassociatedwiththeextensivecommercialactivities ofthecompany.WearetoldthatGlobexbelievesinthefuture,afuturebased on consumerism and expansion into ‘New Worlds, New Markets’. It is no surprisetolearnthatdefenceisoneofGlobex’skeyactivities,specialisingin theproductionofarmsuptoandincludingsmartbombs.Theersatzcompany sees no contradiction in developing arms alongside farming techniques for ‘rapidfireeggproduction’.Butlercleverlyparodiesthestyleandpresentation of 1980s corporate video while exposing the hypocrisy of what he calls the ‘libertarianmythology’thatjustifiesexpansionistcapitalismtothisday. Capitalism,withitsinfrastructureoffactories,officesandshoppingmalls,has providedthebackdroptomanyvideosovertheyears.Theserangefromovert critiquesofthesystemtosatiricalexposésasinJohnButler’swork.Occasionally, theyreinventthecorporatevideoasapoemtotheglassyalienationoftheurban
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 103
16.StanDouglas,I’mnotGary(1991),videotapefromtheseriesMonodramas. Courtesyoftheartist. environment, as in Jeremy Welsh’s White Out (2002). New York’s financial district is depicted as a hall of mirrors in which anonymous individuals drift and dissolve into the building’s reflecting surfaces. Beyond the sheer beauty oftheimagery,Welshpursuesadarkermetaphor,that:‘Noareaofexperience remainsuntouchedbythecapitalistprocessofcommodification,theaccelerated productionandconsumptionofgadgets,entertainmentandlifestyles.’11Welsh’s tape offers an alternative view of the business world as a cold, mechanistic environment.Hecreatesawordless,meditativeaestheticthatwouldbeanathema totheup-beatpromotionalaimsdominatingcorporatevideos. P S E U D O - D O C U M E N TA R I E S Wherecorporatevideosprovedaneasytargetfortheparodicandpoeticskillsof newnarrativistsandtheirsuccessors,televisiondocumentariesappearedtobe moreresistanttosatiricalattack,tradingastheydoonajournalisticadherence totruthandaputativesocialconscience.Inthe1980s,televisiondocumentaries became progressively more sophisticated and the public increasingly dependentonbroadcastingforknowledgeoftheworldoutsidetheirimmediate
1 0 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
environment.Notonlywerefar-flunglocationsand‘exotic’racesnowwithin imaginativereach,buttheseedysideoflifewasalsograduallycomingintoview. Delinquency, teenage pregnancies, drug addiction, unemployment and racial tensionswereallthesubjectofwell-meaningdocumentariesthatnonetheless found it hard to suppress a disapproving tone in the universal middle-class, malevoice-overthattendedtoexemplifywhatTomShermancalleda‘detached stateofinterpretivecontrol’.Audiencesenjoyedthevicariousthrillthatarose whenthehegemonyoftheQueen’sEnglishwasmomentarilyfracturedbythe intrusion of regional dialects. With the majority of viewers still assumed to bemiddleclass,the‘right’peoplecouldwitnessthe‘other’peoplesubmitto everyformofmoralandmaterialdegradationwhilenervouslyawarethat‘there butforthegraceofGodgoI’.Inspiteofanewappetiteforsocialrealismand working-classcultureinUKbroadcasting,manymarginalisedexperienceswere eithermisrepresentedorexcludedaltogetherfromthesmallscreen.Artistswere quicktofillthegapwithalternativeviews,oftenoftheirownlivesnowthat autobiographicalvideowaswellestablishedinafeministandbroadersocialist context.Atthesametime,theywereabletoreflectontheevolvingtelevision documentarytraditionitself. InSickasaDog(1989),IanBourndisownshisproletarianrootsdeclaring thatoneofthechiefreasonshepersistedwithhiseducationwastogetaway fromtheroughcrowdheranwithasakid.Bourn’spseudo-documentarytells thestoryofalikelyladfromtheEastEndofLondonwhoseobsessionwithdog racingprovestobehisdownfall.Unlikemostdocumentariesofthetime,Bourn is the subject of his own social investigation, albeit thinly disguised as the protagonist‘TerryChilds’.Mixingvideosequenceswithtext,super8filmand
17.IanBourn,SickasaDog(1989),videotapedescribedbytheartistas:‘The openingshot(Terrywiththestadiumasbackdrop)andtheshotofTerryathis lowestpoint(i.e.worryingaboutthe“legitimate”lifeofearningmoneyinorder topayitbackintaxes).’Courtesyoftheartist.
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 105
deadpanconfidencestocamera,Bournshareswiththeviewerhisknowledge ofgreyhoundracingincludinghisowntheoriesofhowtochooseawinner.His short-lived‘craptheory’wasbasedontheconvictionthatadogrelievingitself justbeforetheracewillbelighterandthereforerunfaster.Bythesametoken, a constipated dog would be ‘in no condition to race’. This and many other theoriesturnouttobejustthat–craptheories–andChildsdescendsintodebt andalcoholism.Theworkemploysawebofreferences,fromthepaternalistic social documentaries of the BBC, through the reassessments of masculinity that followed feminism, to the arguments among experimental artists about the relative value of film and video. As Nick Houghton has pointed out, the workalsoestablishesaslowandmeditativepacewheremuchcontemporary videowasobsessedwiththenewtechnological‘toysfortheboys’,with‘vivid imagery and editing tricks’.12 However, the dog racing imagery Bourn works withisvisuallyrichandhighlyevocativeofaworking-classmilieusuggesting anambivalenceonthepartoftheartistwho,incharacter,tellsusthatallhe ever wanted to do was get away from this world and ‘better myself’. Where regionalaccentsinspokenEnglishintheUKinstantlyestablishthespeaker’s classposition,itiseasytocollapseChildswithhiscreator.Myownreadingsees Bourncompelledtoreturnperiodicallytohisrootsinordertoretainasenseof identityinhisnewlyelevatedroleasartist. One of television’s chief strategies in the 1970s and 1980s was to create aspirational, mythological figures in the shape of individual celebrities who crystallisethevaluesandreflecttheworld-viewofthestate.Artistscountered the star system by creating anti-heroes like Bourn’s embattled Terry Childs or anticipated reality TV by elevating ‘ordinary’ people into video stars – in the American Ilene Segalove’s case, her own mother. Working in the late 1970s,SegaloverecordedaseriesofinterviewswithMrsSegalove,sometimes developing fictionalised scenarios based on her life. Oscillating between conformityandresistance,themiddle-agedwomancommentsoneverything fromvideoarttotheentertainmentindustrywhileherroleasamotherreasserts itselfwithadvicetoherdaughtertoringcousinBarrybecause‘he’llgiveyou some names.’ Mrs Segalove, in dramatising her own life for her daughter, became a video star, even appearing at the Whitney Museum. (It is worth notingthathadMrsSegalovebeenacandidateforacurrentlypopularcelebrity realityshowonUKTV,shewouldhavebeenexcludedonthegroundsthatshe wasover40.)13 O U T S I D E B ROA D C A S T Sincethe1960s,thestarsystem,populatedbymediacelebritiesenjoyingvarying degrees of success, increasingly contrived to merge glamour with political figures, no more seamlessly than in the iconic image of President Kennedy
1 0 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
andnonemorephysicallythanintheactor-presidentReagan.Withtelevision nowthemajorsourceofinformationfortheviewingpublic,politicianscould nolongerwootheelectoratewithpoliciesalone,buthadtolearntopresent themselves on television. To help construct their media images, television begantobroadcastpubliceventsstagedtoachievemaximumtelevisualimpact. RaymondWilliamsregrettedthedevelopmentofsuchorchestratedsetpieces because,inhisview,‘theycrowdouttherealaccessthattelevisionoffers–the opportunitytoseesomethingofasituationforyourself.’14 Ratherthancounterthehypewithstoriesofunsungheroesoflifeintheslow lane,theAmericangroupAntFarmdecidedtoexperienceforthemselvesone ofthegreatestmediaeventsinhistory–theassassinationofPresidentKennedy in1963.Thispotentialphotoopportunity,tragicallytransformedintorealnews bytheshooting,enshrinedJohnF.Kennedyintheannalsofourever-expanding visual history. Rather than go back to the archives and unearth the truth in whatwaserasedfromofficialaccounts,AntFarmrestagedthemurderwhere ithappenedinDallas.Usingafluiddocumentarystyle,EternalFrame(1975) recordsthebuild-uptotheevent,therehearsals,theactorsgettingintocostume and making up, and the final, nervous journey to Dallas. A series of ironic Presidentialbroadcastslayouttheartists’philosophy.Inastatementthatwould notbeoutofplaceintoday’santi-globalisationmovement,the‘artist-president’ assertsthatAmerica’stroublesdidnotliein‘arandomvisitationoffate’but weretheresultofunduepowerfallingintothehandsofthemilitary,corporate monopolies and the mass media. The ersatz President then declares himself tobemerelyanimage,a‘linkinthechainofpicturesthatmakesupthesum totalofinformationaccessibletousallasAmericans’.Theensuingrepeat-death performanceinDallasisbothtragicandhilarious,withpassers-byalternately interpretingtheeventasatouristattractionandtearfullydeclaringittobea beautifulmemorialtothelatelamentedPresident.Theartistsdemonstratethe dangerousedgetheyaretreadingwhenoneofthemlaughinglyadmitsthatthe workisinverypoortaste.Butthecatharticdiscomfortthatthisbrazenfiction engenders is expressed by a middle-aged man who declares the work to be irresponsible,meaninglessandatwo-dollarrip-off.Clearly,theworkwasboth radicalandproblematicinstarkcontrasttotelevision,whichregularlyreduces historytoairbrushedandnostalgicentertainments.AntFarmwasmakingpublic a distinctive take on a critical moment of American history whose meaning television had already indelibly fixed in the collective imagination. Further, theywerechallengingtherightoftelevisiontoawarditselfwhatJeremyWelsh called‘anopen-endedfranchiseoverglobalreality’.15 Contemporary commentators such as Pat Sweeney saw television as the ultimate postmodern medium, the purveyor of seductive surfaces that have taken the place of history and culture. If postmodernism is understood as Baudrillard’sdeathofmeaningintheproliferationofreplicatingsurfacesand
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 107
simulatedrealitiesreferringonlytootherchainsofrepresentation,thenscratch videomustsurelyhavebeentheultimatepostmodernartform. S C R AT C H WhereAntFarmbroketheduplicitousreflectingsurfacesoftelevisionrealism with parody, scratch video took the next logical step and appropriated the material of television itself. By 1985, 35 per cent of households in the UK ownedavideorecorder.Itwaseasytorecordoff-airmaterialandfractureit intoagloriousexplosionofpostmodernculturalreferences.Throughjudicious editing, it was possible to annihilate the original meaning of the image and replaceitwitharadical,vertiginousincoherenceoranewwebofreferences andpotentialinterpretations. This now familiar deconstructive device was not new, even in the 1970s. Thereworkingoffoundfootagehadbeenemployedbysurrealistfilm-makers intheearlytwentiethcenturyandwasfamouslyusedbyCharlesRidleyforthe Britishpropagandamachinein1941.Ridleypurloinedfootageofgoose-stepping NazisandplayeditbackwardsandforwardstomaketheGermansexecutean absurdmilitarylinedance.Experimentalfilm-makersinthe1950sand1960s alsocreatedmontagesofsilentmoviesintributestotheearlymastersthatwere tingedwithnostalgiaforthebeautyofapurelyvisualfilmiceconomy.Bythe 1970s,P.AdamsSitneyhadidentifiedre-scanning,thatis,re-filmingexisting film, as one of the four criteria by which he defined structural film within theAmericanUnderground.Meanwhile,intheUK,structuralistslikeMalcolm le Grice, intent on relieving film of its narrative responsibilities, used found footageasthebasisofformalexercisesthatinvolvedlooping,colourisationand alterationsofspeed.Asearlyas1966,leGricehadplunderedthegarbagecans ofpost-productionhousesinSoho,andinCastleOneheintercutsamplesof whathefoundwithhisownsequencesofaflashinglightbulbthatechoedareal lightperiodicallybleachingouttheimageduringprojectionofthefilm.Strictly speaking, the Americans Wolf Vostell and Nam June Paik made the earliest appropriationsoftelevisionfootageinthe1960s.AsIshowedinChapter2,they workeddirectlywithlivetelevisionbroadcasts,Vostellmanipulatingtheimage byplayingwiththehorizontalandverticaladjustmentsonthetelevisionset andPaikcreatingstrangeimagedistortionswiththeuseofapowerfulmagnet appliedtothetelevisioncasing. Beyondthesephysicalinterferences,broadcastvideofootagewasinaccessible otherthanbyre-scanning.Thismethodcamecompletewithvisiblescanlines, bleedingcolourandmuffledsound.Thetechniquewaslaterreinventedasa stylisticdeviceinmainstreamfilmssuchasStevenSoderbergh’ssex,lies,and videotape (1989) where it suggested intimacy and in experimental work as a demonstration of the mediation of reality by technology. For the purposes
1 0 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
ofthisaccount,Iwillnotclassifythesedegraded,off-screencopiesasdirect appropriation.Itwasn’tuntil1979thattheAmericanvideoartistDaraBirnbaum wasabletousethefootageinitsoriginalform.Birnbaumgotherselfajobina TVpost-productionunitandbegan‘liberating’footageoftheWinterOlympics aswellasepisodesofKojak,variousAmericansoapoperasandWonderWoman. Fromthesepiratedsequences,shecreatedaseriesoffast-editedvideocollages, oftenaccompaniedbymusicalsoundtracksfromcontemporarycomposerslike Rhys Chatham. The unexpected juxtaposition of skater and soap opera, TV copviolenceandcaradvertisinglaidbaretheartificialityoftheconventions ofbroadcastentertainmentaswellastheinterdependenceofadvertisingand television programming. These juxtapositions were, in fact, part of a normal evening’sviewing,andlikethemodernistvideo-makersbeforeher,Birnbaum left out much of the narrative exposition, increased the pace of editing and madevisiblethejoinsthatTVnarrative,withinitsowntimeframe,carefully smoothesout. Aspartofamuch-trumpeted‘NewWave’ofAmericanvideo,Birnbaum’s workwasfirstseenattheICAinLondonin1983andcoincidedwithanew phenomenon that had crossed the Atlantic from New York and exploded in
18.DaraBirnbaum,Technology/Transformation:WonderWoman(1978–1979), videotape.CourtesyoftheartistandElectronicArtsIntermix(EAI),NewYork.
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 109
London’sdiscothequesandclubs.DJswerebeginningto‘scratch’therecords they played to create stuttering repetitions that were eventually woven into themusicitself,notablyinhip-hopmusicandfamouslyinPaulHardcastle’s song‘19’(1985).Reachingno.1inthecharts,‘19’waslinkedtoapromotional videothatcuttogetherrepeatingVietnamwarfootage,settoadancebeat.The titleoftheworkreflectedtheaverageageofsoldierswhoweresenttofight the red peril in the Far East. Faced with repeating images of explosions and mutilatedbodies,itwashardtoknowwhethertoweeporgetupanddanceto themusic. Many artists also drew inspiration from the endless present of found footagefilmloopsaswellasthetechniquesofmusicalquotationinthework of modern composers from John Cage to Steve Reich. These composers were themselvesinfluencedbytherepetitivestructuresandwhatPhilipGlasscalled the‘intentionlessness’ofnon-westernmusic. Adopting similar techniques of reiteration in Interlude (Homage to Bug’s Bunny) (1983), Chris Meigh-Andrews re-scanned and looped a fragment of aBug’sBunnycartoonsetonaSpanishgalleon.Theanimatedrabbitrushes up and down the stairs and in and out of doors and becomes all the more absurd for the continual repetition of its actions. The artist emphasises the scanningoftheeye,cameraandcathoderaytubebyrepeatedlyzoominginand outofsegmentsoftheimage.Thesecameramovementsbecomethefocusof interestastheappropriatedcartoonisgraduallydrainedofallmeaningbydint ofpointlessreiteration. Pop exponents exemplified by the Art of Noise were already constructing their music entirely out of digitally sampled sounds and, through artists like Meigh-Andrews,JezWelshandPeterSavage,scratchvideomadeitsmarkin art schools and alternative gallery spaces. In spite of the strands of scratch thatdrewinspirationfromexperimentalcomposers,thepredominantinfluence camefromthescratchedreinventionsofpoprecordsdevelopedbyDJslikeSoul SonicForce,DJShadowandGrandMasterFlashwhoworkedinthenon-elitist environment of discotheques and nightclubs on both sides of the Atlantic. While artists drew on the new forms of popular music, the music industry appropriatedvideoasitsprimarypromotionalvehicle.Anewallianceofpop musicandvideowasinitiatedintheearly1980sclosingthegapbetweenartand advertisingthatnarrowedevenfurtherinthe1990s.IntermsoftheUKvideo artsceneinthe1980s,scratchbrieflybecamethecurrentavant-garde.Thenew generationofworking-classidentifiedculturalguerrillashelpedthemselvesto thevisualbooty,oftensimultaneouslyapplyingtheirtalentstotheroleofVJat venuesliketheDanceteriainNewYorkandtheFridgeinBrixton,whereBruno deFlorenceranavideolounge.
1 1 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
COPYRIGHT The fact that scratchists were stealing footage was, to their radical eyes, an addedbonus.Flauntingcopyrightlawswasconsideredtobeapoliticalactand complications only arose when scratch video began to enjoy some art-world recognition.In1985Channel4wantedtobroadcastexamplesofscratchand someworkshadtobeexcludedbecauseitwasimpossibletoobtainclearance from the originators of the footage. The right of quotation in print had long beenenshrinedinlawbut,asRodStonemandiscovered,‘whenartistsenter the public space of broadcasting, they discover that every sound and every imageandeverystorylineisowned.’16Itwouldbereasonabletoassumethat costwasthemaindeterrenttoquotingotherprogrammes,buteventhewellresourced satirical show The Friday Alternative had to fight a legal battle to establishtherighttoscreenextractsfromITNnewsbulletins.Althoughitwas expensivetogetpermissiontousenewsfootage,onlyestablishedbroadcasters or producers were granted access. Programme-makers were afraid that they would be debarred from crucial news conferences and media events if they did not tow the party line and re-use the footage with its original intentions intact. As Jon Dovey concluded, ‘the control of access to news images itself constitutesapowerfulifindirectformofregulation.’17Theownershipofimages was now being contested from within broadcasting, but more critically from outsidebyPrometheanculturalguerrillas.EmboldenedbytheMarxistprinciple that property is theft, and armed with the appropriate technologies, scratch artistsflagrantlybrokethelawandplunderedtheculturalmovingimagebank. Perhapsthefinalironywasthatinthe1980s,scratchdidoccasionallymakeit ontothesmallscreen,butonlywhencommissioningeditorslikeRodStoneman persuaded the broadcasters that this was ‘only art’, and therefore politically harmless. P O L I T I C A L S C R AT C H Forsomescratchartists,culturalresistanceintheshapeofimagepiracywas notenough.Likeearliergenerationsofpoliticalpropagandistsexemplifiedby the graphic artist John Heartfield, they wanted to enrich their montages of appropriatedsequenceswithdirectpoliticalcontent.WhereHeartfieldadded bleedingaxe-bladestothefourpointsofaswastikainaphotomontageand Ridley turned footage of goose-stepping storm troopers into a chorus line, artistslikePeterSavage,theDuvetBrothersandGorillaTapeslearnedtotwist words,distortimagesandforcepublicfigurestosaytheoppositeofwhatthey intended.Sometimesitwasenoughtoreducethemtogibberingmonkeysby speeding up the footage or making nonsense of their platitudes with rapidfirerepeatedits.ButinDeathValleyDays(1984),GorillaTapesre-assembled diverseoff-airclipsofRonaldReaganaddressingpublicmeetingsand,byusing
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 111
19. Gorilla Tapes, The Commander in Chief from Death Valley Days (1984), videotape.CourtesyofJonathanDovey. precisionediting,compelled‘TheCommanderinChief’tocondemnhisown countryasthe‘focusofevilinthemodernworld’.18Theoriginsofthefootage areinstantlyidentifiableandthesatiricalinversiontheartistscontrivedtomake Reaganperformworksallthebetterforknowingwhatheactuallymeanttosay. Inthismordantpoliticalmontage,theauthorityofnewsfootageisdestabilised whilecertainelementsofduplicityandhypocrisyinAmericanforeignpolicy are exposed. Agitational scratch differed from television-generated parody in that it took up a clear political position representing collective opposition to state policies in general and Margaret Thatcher’s and Ronald Reagan’s in particular.Althoughtherighttospeakmightappeartobeaguidingprinciple in current affairs programming, the nature of ‘balanced debate’ ensures that anydissentingvoiceslikethoseofGorillaTapestendedtobedrownedoutby state apologists and other left-of-field views. As Jez Welsh has pointed out, showslikethesatiricalpuppetshowSplittingImageintheUKwereencouraged because they confirmed the illusion that in a western democracy freedom of speechisaninalienableright.19Televisionitselfwasobligedtoremainimpartial
1 1 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
andshowallsidesofanargument.EvenprogrammeslikeSpittingImagehadto lampoonpoliticiansfromallpoliticalpartiesequallyandneveractivelyentered anydebate.20 Somecommentatorssawpoliticalscratchasthepopulistarmofcommunity video.21However,internalcontradictionsarosewhentheglamorousaesthetics of the pop video were too thickly overlaid onto political sentiments. Many artistsaccompaniedtheirvideodécoupageswithpulsatingdiscobeatsthat,like ‘19’,lefttheviewerwonderingwhethersheshouldwritetoherlocalM.P.or throwaparty.However,thebarbedattacksthatworkslikeTheCommanderin Chiefsucceededinlaunchingagainstthecombinedforcesofpartypoliticsand themediaconstitutedevidencethatresistancewaspossibleinthemidstofthe misinformation overload. Gorilla Tapes would appear to confirm McLuhan’s view that the role of the artist is to tackle the medium ‘with impunity’ and, throughacuteawarenessofthemedia’spowertomanipulatethesenses,resist thementalrestructuringforcesoftechnology. O P T I C A L S C R AT C H Likethemodernistsandstructuralistsbeforethem,scratchartistsusedoptically disruptivetechniquestoconfoundthenarrativeintentionsoftheprogrammemakersfromwhomtheystole.Repetitionandabstractiononceagainplayeda roleinavideoartmuchenhancedbythenewpaletteofvisualeffectsdeveloped bySonyandothers.(Therewasalwaysaslightironyinthefactthatvideoartists weredependentonamultinationalcorporationtocritiqueacapitalistsystem.) Withanalogueediting,itwasnowpossibletoseparatesoundfromitspicture source and shuffle audio and video at will. The new Quantel technologies offered effects like keying, colourisation, superimposition and fracturing as well as slow motion and the various tricks of later digital image processing such as picture wrapping and animation. Once again a psychedelic element enteredUKvideoart,amind-expanding,opticalplayoverlaidwithasurrealist delightinvisualillusionsthatwasalsoevidentinNorthAmericaandEurope. Attimesthiswasraisedtothelevelofvisionaryinventivenessasinthework ofGeorgeBarber,TerryFlaxtonandPennyDedmanintheUK,RobertCahenin FranceandPeterCallasinAustralia.Attimesitdescendedintoakindofvideo pattern painting that, in the case of scratch, differed from earlier electronic abstractionsonlyinthatthematerialtobepainted,solarisedandatomisedwas once-familiarmassentertainment. ArtistslikeJohnSandbornintheUSAandJezWelshintheUKachievedaharder brandofabstractionthatquicklysurpassedthevisualdisturbancesthatwereso easytocreateonfilm.UsingthelatesteditingtechniquesinIOD(1984),Welsh createsasensoryoverloadinavortexofspinning,repeatingandflashingvideo clips,offeringavisionofadystopiandigitalfutureinwhichindividualsareatthe
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 113
mercyofatechnologygonemad.Intermsoftheimage,thefreneticloopingdrains theoriginaltelevisionfootageofculturalmeaning,leavinganopticalstructure referringonlytoitselfandinducingthemiseenabimeorcrisisofmeaningthat Foucaultadvocatedtoundermineconventionalformsofknowledge.Thecourting of incoherence and madness in obsessive-compulsive repetitions pushed over theedgeofrationalrepresentationanytelevisionperformerswhogotcaughtin themaelstrom.Intermsofthetelevisualexperience,thereductionofbroadcast contenttovisualandconceptualdeliriummadeitimpossiblefortheviewerto consumethehabitualobjectsofdesireparadeddailyonourtelevisionscreens. Thetheorywasthatindenyingviewerstheirquotidianescapistfix,Welshforced themtoconsidertheirownaddictionsandthepassivityoftheirviewinghabits. ThisisnottosaythatWelshandotherscratchartistsoftheperiodwantedto destroytelevision–principally,theiraimwastoexposeitsartifice.Nevertheless, theyclearlyenjoyedthevisualtrickstheydevisedandrelishedstirringthingsup withtheirnewelectronictoys.Undeterredbydisapprovingfeministslikemyself whomighthavewantedtospoiltheirgames,artistssuchasJohnScarlett-Davis notonlyappropriatedthenarcissisticsubjectsofpostmoderntelevisioninlengthy celebrityinterviews,butunashamedlyexploitedthesuperficialglamourofthestar system.Scarlett-Davis,himselfaprofessionalpromodirector,defiantlyadmitted hispostmodernaffiliations:‘I’masensationalist.Ireflectthesurfaceofpeople wholiveentirelyonthesurfaceofthemselves.’22Ifthesocialcritiqueimpliedin theseworkswassometimescompromisedbytheartists’ownseductionbythe media,thetapeswerenonethelessindicativeoftheextenttowhichtheyounger generationwasbeingformedbythepervasiveimagesofglamourandcelebrity thatwereincreasinglypermeatingboththedomesticandtheurbanenvironment. Theyalsoofferedamodelofculturalresistancethroughthere-appropriationof mediaimageryanditstransformationintonewartisticforms. Kim Flitcroft, Sandra Goldbacher and the Duvet Brothers were among the UK artists who maintained a more critical distance from the material they appropriated whilst still celebrating the new formal possibilities of video découpages. Using only the simplest of means, the Duvet Brothers created Laughing Girls (1984), a short visual poem on the laughter of women. The tapeloopsandrepeatsunidentifiedfootagefromthe1940sfeaturingarowof laughinggirls.Thewaveofconvulsivemirthflowsbackandforththroughthe women,unitingthemintoonegleeful,femininebodyinastateofemotional release.Whatmadethesegirlssohelplesswithlaughterisneverrevealedand questionsastotheobjectoftheirderisioncanbevariouslyinterpreted,while theworkclearlymakesreferencetothefilmsofLauraMulveysuchasThriller (1979)inwhichthetransgressivepowerofwomen’slaughterismademanifest. Theuseofnon-verbalexpressionalsotheoreticallyavoidstheolddilemmaof culturalpositioningwithinlanguageandreturnstheviewertothe‘unmarked’ agencyofthebody.Workingwithhorrormoviefootage,KimFlitcroftandSandra
1 1 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
Goldbacher similarly implicated the power of the body and brought out the dangerousassociationofwomen’ssexualitywithdevilworship.Thesethemes werealreadyinscribedintheoriginalfilmstheartistsplunderedbut,withthe shiftingofemphasisthatscratchcouldachieve,FlitcroftandGoldbacherwere able to reposition the (mostly male) fear of female sexuality as the central themeofthework. P L AY I N G C O U R T J E S T E R T O T H E N E T W O R K S Toalargeextent,artistslikeFlitcroft,GoldbacherandtheDuvetBrotherswent a long way towards avoiding one of the pitfalls of re-appropriation, namely the unintentional corroboration of the ideological messages inscribed in the original footage. These can prove surprisingly tenacious and survive the cutting-up process, particularly where the footage is recent and part of the contemporary visual landscape. This is an old problem of representation in counter-cultural practice and also touched new narrativists like Tom Rubnitz and Ann Magnuson as well as feminists, any one of us. Magnuson’s clever send-upsofTVdivasneededtoconvincinglyreplicatetheoriginalstereotypes andperformancemodestoachievethedesiredcomediceffect.Onceagainwe revisit Lucy Lippard’s ‘subtle abyss’ into which political critiques reiterating the images they are attempting to deconstruct can easily fall. Many scratch artistsmadenoattempttotransformorproblematisethestereotypicalimages of women and ethnic minorities they appropriated. For 1980s feminists, this meant witnessing a resurgence of conventionally eroticised representations of women – representations they had so assiduously avoided before scratch relaunched them, albeit in pieces. This caused a generational rift, with the younger women attempting to break away from the academicism and what theyregardedascensorshipoffemaleimagerybyolderfeministswhointurn sawalltheirhardworkontheproblemsofrepresentationrapidlyunravelling. AsIsuggestedinrelationtoJohnScarlett-Davis,scratchvideo-makers,even whentheytookupanoppositionalstance,oftenbetrayedthesameaffection for the original that underlies much television comedy. This made it easier forconsumerculturetorecuperatecounter-culturalinitiatives.Thespeedand enthusiasmwithwhichscratchwasre-appropriatedbypopvideoandadvertising waspartlyduetoitssuitabilitytoturningaprofit.Scratchtechniquesamazed theeyewheretheproductorbrandsinadvertisementsweresaidtoenchant theear,smell,tasteortouch.SandraGoldbacherobservedthatthemainstream contrivedtosteal‘thespeechofexperimentalism,emptyingitofmeaningand usingitasachicthrowawayandultimatelyexhaustedcliché’.23Asthe1980s gave way to the visually promiscuous postmodern 1990s, it became hard to distinguishscratchfromthenewrelaxedstyleof‘yoof’television.Fromthelate 1980s, television, music videos and advertisements clearly appropriated the
T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R A T C H • 115
visualstylesofartistsandthechargethatscratchhadbeenreducedtopaying playful homage to the master became hard to dispute. With imitation as the sincerestformofflattery,scratch,likenewnarrativetelevisionparodybeforeit, wasrecycledbytheveryinstitutionandattendantideologiesfromwhichithad beenstealing.AsBarthesobserved,‘acodecannotbedestroyed,only“played off”.’24Appropriationhadnowcomefullcircle. Scratch’saddictiontosparringwithbroadcasttelevisionmeantthatacertain conceptualloopingalsocompromiseditspractice.Underlyingearlyscratchvideo laythebeliefthat,inthewesternworld,wearesubjecttoinformationoverload and image pollution aggravated by 24-hour, multi-channel broadcasting. But the scratchists’ efforts to free themselves from the hegemonic influence of televisionwashamperedbythefactthattheyweredoublyboundbytelevision material, first as viewers and then as artists, dependent on the same visual pollutantasbothsourcematerialandcreativeinspiration.Therewasadanger thattheywouldbecomeastiedtowhattheyweredeconstructingasthepassive consumertheyweretryingtore-educatewashookedonthetelly.Aswehave seen,theunderlyingambivalenceofscratchartiststowardstheirmaterialisa featureofanycriticalpracticeinwhichanartistisbothseducedandrepelled by what s/he is critiquing. However, scratch’s love-hate relationship with television does not constitute grounds for dismissing its achievements. The absorptionofimagelayering,repetitionandotherscratchtechniquesintothe mainstreamhasbeensototalthattocontemporaryeyesthevisualfeaststhat theseartistsconcoctedmaylookcrudeandpoliticallyineffectual.However,in the1980s,itwasashocktoseethe‘sacred’imagesoftelevisionsoabusedand thecelebrationoftechnologyimpliedintheirvertiginousediting,fragmentation and transposition techniques was a challenge to an art world still unwilling torenouncethemodernistloveaffairwithtraditionalartmaterials.Scratch’s populistapproachtoimagemakingwasalsoahealthyantidotetotheconceptual acrobaticsofa1970savant-garde,steepedintheory. Ifanything,scratchsignifiesthebeginningsofaparadigmshiftthatbecame moremarkedinthe1990s.Wherethehistoryofartonceprovidedtheprincipal pointofreferenceforcontemporaryart,theiconographyofpopularculture,its techniquesandaestheticsaswellasitsproliferatingviewingcontexts,became increasinglysignificantinthetheoryandpracticeofart.Althoughtheprecursors of scratch are clearly identifiable in both experimental film and the cultural collagesof‘junk’artistslikeKurtSchwittersandJosephCornel,nottomention Heartfield and the Cubists before them, television appropriation reflects the relocationofartisticcreationtothebroaderculturalsphereandanticipatesthe convergenceofartandpopularcultureinthe1990s.
1 1 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
A N O T E O N D E M O C R AC Y A N D D E F Y I N G T H E A R T M A R K E T Thereisanotherargumenttosupporttheradicalcredentialsofscratch,based on its anticipation of the dramatic developments in telecommunications that transformedthe1990s.Writingin1986withnotableprescience,AndyLipman saw scratch as an attempt to create a truly interactive, two-way electronic communication system and envisaged a future ‘network resembling the telephone system, where calls, or programmes, or computer software could bothbemadeandreceivedbyeachindividual’.25Withfreeaccesstothisinternet, everyone could become a video artist, individuals creating works that weretailoredtotheirownneeds.Notonlywouldthispopulistelectronicart breakthemonopolyofbroadcastingbycommandeeringitsoutput,butanew interactiveculturaldemocracywouldalsocallintoquestiontheelevatedstatus oftheartworkaswellastheelitistpositionoftheartist.Thedependenceofthe artmarketonuniqueobjectswouldbeunderminedasvideoartistsingeneral, andscratchartistsinparticular,regularlyproducedunlimitededitionsoftheir workwithlittleornoscarcityvalue.Thisfollowedtheearliercommitmentof conceptualarttothedematerialisationoftheartobjectandthereplacementof artbylifeinperformanceart. Sincetheadventofscratchinthe1980s,theutopianvisionofademocratised medialandscapepeopledbycreativeindividualswieldingdigitalcamerasand desktop-editingsystemshasfadedsomewhat.ItendtosubscribetoJezWelsh’s viewthatimmersionintechnologycaninduceinusers‘acontrolledstateof un-reality’anddeflectthemfrominvolvementinsocialinitiatives.Theimageof theteenagerorevenadultspendinghourslostinaimlessInternetwanderings suggeststhatwhateverfreedomofinformationandaccesstothewiderworld technology offers, it also cuts off the user from social and physical contact withtheimmediateenvironment.Whatevertheconsequencesofimmersionin technology,itisclearthat,forartists,visibilityandexhibitioncontextarekeyto theeffectivenessofscratch-styleculturalinterventions.Aswithcontemporary netartandotherformsofoppositionalpractice,theproblemoffundingand critical visibility is still as pertinent as it was in the 1980s. Artists working within a political framework are faced with the contradictory need to make a living and remain independent of the regimes that they are committed to oppose.Whateveritsinternalcontradictionsandideologicalproblemsaround developingacritiquewhilstmaintainingvisibility,scratchmusttakethecredit for being the last UK video movement that was allied to a collective social andpoliticalconsciousnessbeforethe1990smadethesellingoftheartistthe centralpurposeofart.
7 Video Art on Television
… some people went to galleries, but everyone looked at television. David Hall A L T E R N AT I V E S T O T E L E V I S I O N Videoartists’antipathytowardstelevisiondidnotobviatetheneedtodisseminate theirtapesandwithsocialistzealinformingmuchworkofthe1970sandearly 1980s, artists sought a wide and heterogeneous audience. Where the new narrative and scratch phase of video offered an alternative to the content of television,radicalstrategiesforindependentproductionanddistributionwere nowdevisedtocreateaparallelsystemofaccesstomovingimageart. InbothNorthAmericaandinEurope,artist-runvideocentreswerefounded. ElectronicArtsIntermixinNewYork,MontevideoinHolland,VtapeinToronto, LondonVideoArtsandFantasyFactoryintheUKareexamplesofcollectives that offered cheap equipment hire and post-production facilities. Most also undertookdistributiontofilmandvideofestivals,alternative,artist-runspaces and art schools.1 In the UK, the art schools themselves made a substantial contributiontoearlyvideoculture.Theyallowedartiststouseschoolfacilities at night, offered residencies and employed individuals on a part-time basis to support their practice. Art schools within Reading University, Lanchester PolytechnicandSheffieldPolytechnicranannualfilm,videoandperformance festivals in which students showed alongside practising artists. Over in the USA,artists’workwashostedbyeducationalestablishmentslikeWashington University,theSchooloftheMuseumofFineArtsinBostonwhereCharlotte MoormanmadeworkandSyracuseUniversitywhereBillViolawasastudent. An independent distribution network was set up in the burgeoning world ofcommunityvideo.TheRaindanceCorporationinNewYorkco-ordinateda databankofcommunitytapesandintheUKagroupoffranchisedworkshops
1 1 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
waspartlyfundedbythenewlyformedtelevisionstation,Channel4.2Inthe UK, projects like the Miners’ Tapes (1984) involved artists including Mike Stubbs,RolandDenningandChrisRushtoncollaboratingwithtradeunionists andtheminersthemselvesintheirstruggletohaltthegovernmentprogramme of mine closures. Together, they created a view of the miners’ strike that was absent from the mainstream media, which by and large supported the Thatcheriteviewonthemineclosures.ACTT,thetelevisiontechnicians’union, volunteered to document events and these recordings together with those of artistsformedthebasisoftheMiners’Tapes.Althoughfragmentsappearedon televisionnewsbulletins,theywerenevershownintheirentirety.Instead,they weredisseminatedthroughtheunionsandindependentdistributorsandwere seenbywidesectionsoftheworkingpopulationaswellasbyartaudiences. MikeStubbs,whoseownworktackledpoliticalissues,foundhimselfwitha footinbothcamps:‘Therewasaclear(ifartificial)splitbetweenthoseusing mediatocreatesocialchangeinformedbyideologyandthosewantingtotell storiesorexperimentwiththemedium/ia.’3Thepoliticaleffectivenessofthe Miners’TapeswasperhapslimitedasRolandDenningsuggests:‘Maybethey helpedalittlewithpocketsofsolidarity,butprobablynotmuchintheend.’4 However,theyprovedtheeffectivenessofalternativemethodsofproductionand distributionandcrystallisedtheambitionsofartistslikeStubbstocombineart andpoliticsinthecontextofawidelyavailableanddemocraticvideoart.Unlike the ‘balanced’ view of most television documentaries, Stubbs and Denning were able to take a clear position in relation to the miners’ plight, bringing theirworkclosetothestatusofapoliticalactratherthansimplycarryingouta gatheringofnews.Inaddition,theartistswereabletoexperimentwithvisual stylesthatwerebeyondthepaletteofexistingtelevisionformatsandputthem totheserviceoftheirownpoliticalconvictions. ARTI STS ON (TH E MARGI NS OF) TEL EV I SI ON InEngland,asintheUSA,therewereartistswhosawtelevisionasapotentially democraticmedium,amediumofthemasses.Theyremainedoptimisticthatit wouldbepossibletochangethesystemfromtheinsideifonlytheycouldgain access.Beyondlargeaudiences,televisionofferedotherinducementstoartists. Inthe1970sandearly1980s,videowasstillanexpensivemedium.Formost videoartists,itwasastruggletogainaccesstowhatLaurieAndersoncalled the‘milliondollarpaintbrush’.Beforetheadventofaffordabledigitalcameras, onlytelevisioncoulddeploylargeproductionbudgetsandofferaccesstohighquality, multi-camera facilities. When Channel 4 was founded in 1982, the largestproductiongranttheArtsCouncilofEnglandwasofferingwas£6,000. Thebasic,second-handseries5editsuiteIboughtfiveyearslatercost£5,000. AnACEgrantdidn’tgofar.
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 119
Although many would be quick to deny it, American artists were rather better funded than their British counterparts. They were more successful in gainingaccesstobroadcastingintheUSA,althoughfewconqueredthemajor networks.However,inthe1970s,Americanpublicservicebroadcastersopened theirdoorstoartists,asdidcablenetworks,noneofwhichexistedintheUK atthetime.Sincethesenetworksweresetuptoservethecommunitydirectly, anyqualmsAmericanartistsmayhavehadaboutsellingoutweredispelledby theeducationalanddemocraticprinciplesunderlyingcableandpublicaccess programming.Asearlyas1969,thepublicTVstationKQEDinSanFrancisco created a National Centre for Experiments in Television and WGBH Boston broadcast a programme of artists’ tapes under the title, The Medium is the Medium.Theworkwasdrawnfromanexperimentalworkshopfundedbythe station and included a contribution from Nam June Paik in which he gave instructionsforviewerstoclosetheireyesatcertainmomentsandthentoturn offtheTV.Paikclaimedtobeintimidatedbytelevisionstudios:‘BigTVstudio always scares me. Many layers of “Machine Time” parallely (sic) running, engulfsmyidentity.’5However,atWGBHheovercamehisreticenceandwas givenafreehandtoexperimentbringinginanumberofspeciallydoctoredTV setsthatwouldmodulatetheoutputofthestudiocameras. ConcurrentwithPaik’scollaborationwithWGBH,GerrySchumcreatedhis infamous,butshort-lived,FernsehgalerieGerrySchumonthenetworkWDR,in Cologne.SchumbroadcastworksbyartistsfromGermanyincludingRinkeand WaltheraswellasLandArtbythelikesofRichardLongandBarryFlanagan, buttheworkthatisbestrememberedisBritishartistKeithArnatt’sSelf-Burial (1969).Overthecourseofaweek,Arnattbroadcastaseriesofstillphotographs showing the artist slowly sinking into the ground. These images appeared unannouncedwhilethesoundtrackoftheinterruptedprogrammecontinued. Only the image was substituted. Not only did the artist bury himself in the ground,buthealsosankhisimagesintoafragmentofthebroadcastingstream, transformingit,butnotentirelyobliteratingit.Overthesevendays,Arnattboth mimickedanddisruptedtheconventionalcontinuityofaserialthatattemptsto securetheaudience’sviewingloyaltythroughaslowlyunfoldingnarrative. T E L E V I S I O N A N D A R T I S T S I N T H E U K – A R E L AT I O N S H I P O F MUTUAL SUSPICION Paik’sfreedomtointerveneintheworkingsofatelevisionstudioandtheoutput oftelevisiontransmitterswasnotinitiallysharedbyvideoartistsworkingin the UK. Both the BBC and the independent channels were suspicious of the barbedworksproducedbyearlypractitioners.AsMickHartneypointedout,‘it soonbecameclearthataccesstovideowasnotnecessarilythesameasaccess totelevision.’6Broadcasterswereunwillingtoletartistsintotheirstudiosand
1 2 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
tamper with their finely tuned equipment. As we saw in Chapter 2, artists hadlonginterrogatedthetechnologythroughitsfaults,thosemomentswhen televisualrealismgiveswaytoimagedistortionandambiguity–anightmare for the highly skilled UK television technicians. The engineers’ professional antagonismto‘low-grade’artists’videowasechoedbytheunionswhowere afraidthatcheapartists’productswouldthreatentheirmembers’jobs.When offeredartists’tapesforbroadcast,mostnetworksrefusedonthegroundsthat even when stabilised through a time-base corrector, the image produced on semi-professional equipment was of such poor quality that it would jam the transmitters.BroadcasterswerealsodevelopingananxietyaboutTVratings, arguingthatartists’workwouldattracttoosmallandspecialisedanaudience, andcouldnotjustifythehighcostofstudiotime.MarkKidelhassuggested that the networks, the ‘grammarians of mass communication’, were also beingprotective,fearingthatartistswouldcontaminatethedominantcodesof entertainmenttheyhadcreated.7 Broadcasters’ reluctance to open their doors to radical elements was not improvedbytwoinfamoustelevisionguerrillaactionsin1970.Theself-styled ‘Yippie’ Gerry Rubin, whose Youth International party had organised antiVietnamstreetdemonstrationsinChicago,hijackedtheDavidFrostShowwith a gang of his friends and his own portable recorder. In a separate incident, feministsthrewflourbombsatBobHopeinresponsetohisoffensivejokesas compèreoftheMissWorldcompetitionbeamedliveto25millionviewersfrom theAlbertHall.8Thiswasbeyondthepale.Televisionwasand,inspiteofphoneinsandTVshopping,stillispredicatedonaone-wayflowofinformation.As Baudrillardpointedout,televisionspeaks‘butinsuchawayastoexcludeany response,anywhere’.9Liketheanti-waractivistGerryRubinandthefeminists at the Albert Hall, artists’ television interventions were designed to rupture the impenetrable surface of broadcasting and elicit creative responses in the vieweror,asDavidHallputsit,to‘worrythebordersoftelevisuallanguage and its preconceptions’.10 In the early 1970s, artists wanted to wake up the habituallycomatoseviewersoftelevision.Fortheirpart,thenetworkswerein thebusinessofpacifyingandmaintainingthepublic’sappetiteforconsumer goods.IntheUK,atleast,videoartandtelevisionappearedtobelockedinto irreconcilabledifferences. However,afewintrepidpractitionersdidpenetratethecitadelofbroadcasting. In1969,John‘Hoppy’HopkinsfoundedtheexperimentalvideogroupTVXand initiallyshoweditstapesonastallinPortobelloMarketinLondon.Inspiredby thesuccessofNorthAmericanartistsinexperimentalTVprojectsandGerry Schum’sbroadcastsinCologne,TVXpersuadedBBC2’sLateNightLine-Upto usefootagetheyhadshotofapoliceraidontheofficesoftheartorganisation, NewArtsLab.TVXlaterdevelopedvisualstoaccompanymusictracksforthe BBC2 programme Disco 2 but were silenced by the clean-up-TV campaigner
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 121
MaryWhitehousewhentheyincludeda‘WhitePanther’clenchedfistsalutein oneoftheirbroadcasts. David Hall was the first artist to inject pure moving image art into the monolithicpresenceofUKtelevisionentertainment.In1971,ScottishTelevision commissioned a series of his ‘television interruptions’, short black and white episodes, dropped into the schedule unannounced. In Scotland, Hall enjoyed theperhapsuniqueexperienceofbroadcastinghisworkunseenbyhissponsors. Hall’s7TVPiecesincludedashortworkinwhichatapappearstofilltheTV setwithwater.Thiswittyillusionheightenedawarenessoftheboxasathree dimensionalobjectandonethat,inspiteofitsglassfront,couldeasilyspringa leak.LikeArnatt,Hallbecametheinfiltratorwho,onceembeddedinthelion’s den,questionedthevaluesoftelevision,indirectly,withconceptualjokes.Hall bypassedthetechnicaldrawbacksofearlyvideobyshootinghisinterventionson 16mmfilmandsucceededinpersuadinghisproducerstoairthepieceswithout any contextualising documentary or comment. Like a true guerrilla tactician, heremainedanonymous,refusingacreditattheendoftheprogramme.Ashe commentedrecently,thedoorstotelevisionopenedtohimin1971andpromptly closedtoallartistsforthenexttenyears. CHANNEL 4 AND BBC2 This situation was alleviated by the occasional documentary like the 1976 surveyofartists’videoonBBC2’sArena:ArtandDesignprogramme.Itwas thefirsttobroadcastHall’sclassicThisisaTelevisionReceiver.However,the situationintheUKchangeddramaticallywhentheclosedshopoftelevision was broken by the founding of Channel 4 in 1982 under the directorship of Jeremy Isaacs. With a mandate to provide innovative programming in both formandcontent,thenewchannelcreatedadedicatedartists’filmandvideo department.Itsubsidisedproductionworkshopsacrossthecountry,including theartist-rundistributorLondonVideoArts.JohnWyver,whoworkedclosely with Channel 4, points out that Canal + in France, PBS in Boston and ZDF in Germany also supported artists’ work around that time, but, as Channel 4commissioningeditorRodStonemansays,‘intermsofthelevelofmoney, airtimeandsustainedengagementI’dstandbythewayIputitinMikeO’Pray’s book:thefirstdecadeofChannel4constitutesaconsiderableexperimentwith experiment–thelargestbodyofavant-gardeworkshownonnetworktelevision, encountering its widest audiences, anywhere, ever.’11 Channel 4 was certainly unusual in that it commissioned and broadcast an international body of experimentalworkfrommainlandEuropeandNorthAmericaaswellasfilms andvideosindigenoustotheUK.Artists’inputmayhavebeenmodestinterms oftheirshareofthechannel’stotaloutput,butitwassubstantialwhenseen againsttheobscurityinwhichartists’videohadexisteduntilthen.Becauseof
1 2 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
itsinternationalistpoliciesandtheunprecedentedlevelsofsupportitproffered artists,IwilltakeacloserlookatChannel4’sbriefalliancewiththeforcesof experimentationintheearly1980s. T H E C O N C E P T U A L A P P ROAC H Artistsrespondedtotheopportunitiesofbroadcasttelevisioninanumberof ways. Many, like David Hall, regarded their practice as radical interventions intotheflowoftelevisionculture–andtreatedthatcultureasmaterial,oftenas anobjecttobemanipulatedandreinvented.InTheExtentofThreeBells(1981) SteveHawleytookaquasi-modernistapproachandwavedtwocandlesinfront ofthecamera,creatinglingeringtracesthatsignalledatechnologystillunable totolerate‘hotspot’concentrationsoflight.AsIdiscussedinthelastchapter, scratchartistshijackedthetextoftelevision,choppeditupandreassembledit. Wheninvitedtocontributetotheone-minuteseriesforChannel4,PaulBush extracted60one-secondfragmentsofanevening’sviewingandwovetheminto ahigh-speedmontage.FragmentationanddiscontinuityareinJohnEllis’view fundamental to the grammar of television and match the ‘grazing’ viewer’s ‘discontinuousattention’.12Televisiontreatsalmosteverypieceofinformation withthesameweightanddelivery,nottoolong,nottooshort,standardised andsafelycondensedintothetoytheatredimensionsofthetelevisionscreen. Processedintelevisualtimeandtheblandmodesofrepresentationadoptedby broadcasters,theseunresolved,familiarfragmentsconstitutethehomogenised material flow that is television. When the disparate elements are extracted fromtheirnarrativeframeworkandcondensedintoa60-secondmontage,the normalisingprocessoftelevisionisinterruptedandmadevisible. THE DOMESTIC SCENE When artists make work for television, they address a domestic audience consisting of individuals resting or engaged in household activities in the privacy of their own homes. The television sits in the corner of the room, a familiarobjectilluminatedbylampsandsurroundedbyfurniture,household clutterandfamilymemberscomingandgoing.Thetelevisionsetfitsintothe humanscaleoftheroomandisboundedbyitswalls.Giventheseparameters, televisioncannotreproducetheimmersivespectacleofcinemawithitscaptive viewersswallowedupindarknessunderavastflickeringscreen.Atthissize, thecinematicimagecancarrymuchofthemeaningofafilm.Thetelevision setwithitssmall-scale,impoverishedimagereliesonnarrative,onthevoice,to holdtheviewerwhomaynotactuallybelookingatthescreen.Televisionoffers amoredistantandatoncemoreintimateexperience,actingasakindofextra family member, a maiden aunt (Auntie Beeb) whose job it is to inform and
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 123
entertainus,whilefilteringoutanyrealnastiness.AsPeggyGalehasobserved, thetelevisionormonitor‘projectsitsmessagefromwithin,aswouldaperson whoisinteractingdirectlywithus’.13TheanthropomorphismoftheTV/monitor isathemewewillreturntowhendiscussinginstallationandindeeditcouldbe arguedthateverytelevisionbroadcastispartofadomesticinstallation.Forthe moment,Iamconcernedwithtelevisioninitssocialrole. Television adopts the one-to-one address of daily human intercourse and extends it to what Ellis calls a ‘community of address’. Presenters, compères andnewsreaderslookdirectlyatthecamera,asiftheycanseeus,andspeak tousasiftheyknowus,collectivelyandindividually.Theyinvitevoyeuristic engagement, but there is a reciprocal arrangement whereby we enter their world – the ersatz lounge of the chat show hosts – while admitting them to ours. Here, we abdicate to them the direction of our gaze and attention in exchange for feelings of familiarity and safety. In experimental film, this direct address has been used to ‘castrate the gaze’ and subvert voyeurism. However,ontelevision,asimulatedeye-to-eyecontactensuresengagementin anunstable,grazingviewerwhilesimultaneouslyholdingthematarm’slength bytheviewingdistancefromtheobject/setandbyconstantlyreiteratingtheir spectatorship: ‘and for our viewers at home’. As a result, the viewer never completelyoccupiesthedeterminingpositionoftheI/eyewhilesimultaneously beinginvitedtoshareitsvisionandideologicalposition.Viewersareheldin what Ellis calls a fictional ‘co-presence’ with television, their lives running parallel to an airbrushed world populated by unctuous presenters whom we acceptasoneofthefamily. The Barthian ‘photo-effect’ of television, conjuring images of individuals whoareapparentlypresent,butactuallyabsent,producesanambiguousTV presenter.ItisthisproblematicfigurethatwasthesubjectofKevinAtherton’s interventionsintotheexperimentalChannel4seriesVideo1,2and3(1984). Worksbyotherartistswerebook-endedbyAthertongloweringatthepublic fromthetelevisionscreen,beratingthemfortheirhubristicassumptionsthat they might represent discerning viewers. The mild and reassuring tones of AuntieBeebwerereplacedbyabelligerent‘Manx’artistwhotoldustoanswer hisbloodyquestionsaboutourviewinghabits.14Wehavebecomeaccustomed topresentersinsultingthecontestantsingameshows,butnottheaudienceat home.Itwouldbreakthecosyconspiracythatunitepresenterandviewerina voyeuristic‘us’againstwhich‘they’canbeviewedasaberrant,reprehensible or absurd. Atherton broke that alliance and made the viewers the subject of theirownvoyeurismwhilstrefusingtobeniceandsubmittobeinginterviewed bytheprogramme-makers.
1 2 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
T H E S C U L P T U R A L A P P ROAC H A number of artists broadcast works that emphasised the object-ness of the televisionset,itsphysicaldimensionsechoedorsubvertedintheillusoryspace suggested by the image. Where David Hall turned the television set into a watertank,theGermanartistKlausBlumecreatedaseriesofsurfaceswithin the screen-frame, equivalent to the internal walls of the television set, but subjecttoanillogicalperspective.InTouchscreen(1987)thearrangementof planes in the image is reiterated by the repetitive, syncopated slapping of a hand on each surface culminating in a hefty blow to the screen itself. For a second we take the impact to be real and wonder if the artist is about to breakthroughtheglassintooursittingrooms.Thisreferencetotelevision’s glass partition, transparent and opaque, illusory and real has been revisited in subsequent video works and was eventually adopted by television itself asadeviceinprogrammelinksandadvertisements.InthecurrentEsurecar insurancecommercialonUKtelevision,anactortapsonthescreenasiftotell usheknowswearethereandunderinsured. HallandBlumearerareexamplesofvideoartistswhohaveaddressedthe physicality, the ontological presence, of the television set in broadcast work. Perhapsoneofthemostpotentvideosofthisnaturewasaseven-minutepiece, made for the TV Sculptures series on Channel 4 in 1996 by Anish Kapoor. Wounds and Other Absent Objects transforms the television set into a box containingpurecolour.Ashimmeringsuninthemiddleofthescreenslowly metamorphosesfromblacktoorangetobluetakingonvaryingdegreesofthreedimensionalityandemphasisingthesculpturalpresenceofthesetitself.Where televisionmeaningiscarriedprincipallyonthesoundtrack,Kapooreradicates anynarrativeelementsandmakesabstractsoundastangibleasthecolour,returningustoourownphysicalandemotionalresponsetobothelements.Inhis TVSculpture,Kapoorattemptedtochangethegrazingviewerintoameditative participant in a quasi-spiritual communion with the solid presence of both colourandthetelevisioncubethatcontainedit.Inaninterview,headvisedthe viewerto‘switchoffthelights,turnupthevolume,sitbackandwatch.’ The interview formed part of a mini-documentary prefacing the work. Kapoor was seen in his natural habitat, the sculpture studio. The heavy contextualisation of the work was no doubt deemed necessary for an essentiallyabstractwork.Fewpurelyabstractvideosevermadeitontothe small screen other than in specialist programmes on animation or abstract cinema.Abstractionandnarrativedisruptionsintroduceelementsofambiguity thatarefundamentallyantitheticaltotelevisionrealism.Aswesawinthelast chapter,inordertoholdtheviewer,televisionmustfixmeaningsoastoavoid ambiguity and counter what Roland Barthes called the ‘terror of uncertain signs’.Artistswereneverallowedtooverstrainthenarrativeexpectationsof theviewingpopulation.
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 125
S U R FAC E D I S T U R B A N C E S In spite of the contextualising preamble, Kapoor attempted to lure viewers onto a higher plane of colour and space perception. Other artists who made workfortelevisionwerecommittedtoexperimentingwiththesurfaceofthe televisualimage,treatingitlikeacanvasontowhichever-moreelaboratevisual effectscouldbedeployed.GeorgeSnow’sMuybridgeRevisited(1988)combined animationtechniquesandcolourenhancementtocreateanexuberanthomage to the pioneering photographer. David Larcher’s Granny’s Is (1990) built up multiple layers of images to suggest the psychological complexities of his relationship with his grandmother. Perhaps the most accomplished formal experimentontelevisionwastheAmericanDanReeves’ ObsessiveBecoming (1995), a family odyssey that exploited the recently developed morphing techniquestofusegenerationsofhisrelatives’physiognomiesintoonegenus ofReeve. Toagreaterorlesserdegree,alltheseworkscreatedsurfacedisturbancesto thescreenimage.Beforeinterludesofflyinggraphicsbecamestandardbetween televisionprogrammes,theseartistsinsistedonthetwodimensionalityofthe screen.Bycontrast,televisionencouragesustosuspenddisbeliefandperceivea three-dimensionalworldstretchingoutbehinditsdisplayframewhilstignoring theimpossibilityofsuchaspaceexistinginsideasmallbox.Giventhescale of the television set in the context of the average lounge, a busy, patterned screen would perhaps return the viewer to the space in which s/he exists, the lively abstraction confirming the set’s physical status as a more or less attractiveaspectofthedecor.Infact,itisnowpossibletopurchasetapesof fireinthedisplacedhearth,orfishinabowlthatcanbeplayedcontinuously to integrate the television more effectively into the domestic environment. Althoughtheywereofteninnovatoryandpleasingtotheeyeintheiroptical acrobatics,likescratchbeforethem,theseeffects-richartists’videoscameclose totheircommercialcounterpartsthatwerethemselvesbeginningtoexperiment withvisualeffects.Poppromoswerefragmenting,loopingandcolourisingand commercialsliketheSmirnoffadwerebendingrealitywiththesamemorphing techniquesthatReevesemployed. LANDSCAPE Bythe1980s,UKtelevisionhadabsorbedtheimageoftheEnglishlandscape intoitsvocabularyasareferencetoaRomantictraditionthatwasunderthreat fromtheadventofpunkandyouthculturesthathadlittleusefortheirparents’ pastoral nostalgia. In 1990, Channel 4 screened The Art of Landscape every morningforahundreddays.Between9a.m.and1.30p.m.,itwaspossibleto seeruralridesthroughtheWestCountryandwordlessbird’seyeflightsover theLakeDistrict.TheArtofLandscapequicklymovedtocableand,overall,
1 2 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
landscapeimageryontelevisionbecamecontainedwithinwildlifedocumentaries andtravelshowsorprovidedbackdropsforfilmsanddramassetinruralor exotic locations. When the landscape occasionally formed the subject of a programme,itwasalwaysaccompaniedbyover-interpretativecommentaries, leading the viewer to fixed readings of the natural or man-made landscapes depicted.Forfearoflosingtheerraticattentionoftheviewer,alandscapewas rarelyallowedtopresentitselftotheeyeofthebeholderunchaperoned. Sincetheearlydaysofvideoart,landscapehasbeenasignificantthemein themediaartists’portfolioasithadbeeninthatofthepainter.Somevideomakers,includingMaryLucierandBillViolaintheUSA,turnedthecameraonto thelandscapeinthespiritof1960senvironmentalismandusedtechnologyto revealthedestructionforwhichtechnologicaladvancewaslargelyresponsible. Others,likeChrisMeigh-AndrewsintheUK,createdvideolandscapesinthe gallery, drawing out analogies between the flow of natural energies and the flowofelectricitythroughthevideoapparatus.Theseworkslamentedanurban lifestylethatTomShermanfound‘furtherremovedfromadirectrelationship with the non-human aspect of the natural world every single day’.15 Later, artistsliketheCanadianStanDouglasconfiguredthelandscapeasarepository ofhumanhistorywithcolonialismasitsmostshamefulepisode.Inthe1980s, a number of women video artists, including Mary Lucier, Zoe Redman and HelendeWitt,pioneeredwhattheycalleda‘psychogeographical’approachto landscape.16 Their intention was to discover means of expression for women thatavoidedthetaintedrealmoferoticisedbodyimagery.Landscapewas,by andlarge,genderneutral.Bythetwenty-firstcentury,nomadismhadbecomea wayoflifeandnotionsofpersonalandnationalidentitycouldbeinterrogated bywayofthelandscapepeopletravelled.Thevideojourneyforthewesterner becameameansofdiscoveringunfamiliarlandscapes,whilerecentandsecond generation migrants retraced ancient and more recent escape routes from troubledthirdworldcountries.Withitsabilitytorecordcontinuouslyforup toanhour,videoofferedatemporalcongruencewiththeextendeddurationof thesepilgrimagesandodysseys.Littleofsuchworkreachedthesmallscreen intheearlydaysalthoughoneofthefirstartists’videobroadcastbyChannel 4wasRobertAshley’soperaPerfectLives(PrivateParts)(1983–1984),directed by the Americans John Sandborn and Mary Perillo. This elegiac road movie satcomfortablywithinthetraditionofthegreatAmericanopen-roadnarrative, butusedthegamutofvideoeffectsavailableatthetimetocreateavisualfeast withtravelogue. Channel 4 went on to broadcast a video that diverged substantially from conventional representations of landscapes within televisual narrative structures.TheReflectingPool(1980)remainsoneofBillViola’smostpotent landscapeworksandwasscreenedaspartofthe1985/88Illuminationsseries, Ghosts in the Machine. Television now habitually adopts a roving camera
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 127
20.BillViola,TheReflectingPool(1980),videotape.Courtesyoftheartist. to hold attention and accentuate the voyeuristic pleasures of eavesdropping on others’ lives. By contrast, Viola locks the camera into a single position, reflectingthepictorialtraditionsoflandscapepaintingthatemployeddeep-space perspectiveanchoredtoamonocularviewingposition.Theviewherevealsis ofawoodlandlandscapewithinwhichaman-madepoolsitsimpassively.Like Kapoor, Viola eschews the ever-present narrative hook of television and the audiotrackcarriesonlytheambientsoundsofthenaturalenvironment.Viola deployssilenceasasubstantialelementinthework,revisitingthe‘deadair’of broadcastingthatnolongerexistsinanerainwhichtelevisionneversleeps.In thisquietlybreathing,verdanttableau,amoderndayAdamslowlyapproaches the pool. In his primal nakedness he stands resolutely at the edge for what seemsaneternitybeforetakingagiantleap.Theleaperisthenarrestedinmid air, frozen in the landscape and slowly, very slowly dissolves back into the foliagefromwhichheemerged.Thepoolitselfnowtakesonamagicallifeof itsown,attimesreflectingthevanishingman,attimesadarksky,whilstthe surrounding pool remains well lit by a midday sun. The slight interferences, the keying of one condition of the landscape into another, the compression
1 2 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
and combination of different time frames, all acknowledge the mediation of both the artist’s subjectivity and the apparatus that he uses to bring us this illusoryruralview.Thefigure-groundrelationshipoftraditionalrepresentations of space is disturbed by the ripples from the impact with the water that we neversee–thereisnocausalbodytomakesenseofthepatternsanimatingthe surfaceofthepool.Inthespiritofthepastoraltraditionoflandscapepainting, theworkseemstosuggestaharmonious,evenspiritualrelationshipbetween humanity and nature. Both are subject to the same cycle of dissolution and renewal,aconnectionwehavelostthroughurbanliving.Itmightalsopointto theindifferenceofnaturetohumanity’spresenceanditsabilitytooutliveour sophisticatedyetever-destructivevanities. The sense of nature’s revenge was more apparent in another landscape workfromtheUSA,broadcastbyChannel4andIlluminations.Thedryand unforgivinglandscapeofthePyreneeswasthesettingforDanReeves’lyrical SombraySombra(1988).Derelictbuildings,discardedshoesandtoysareall that remain of a remote community in the foothills of the Pyrenees. Ghostly apparitionswaftinandout,whilenaturereclaimsthepatchesofgroundfrom whichmenandwomenonceattemptedtoscratchaliving.Incommonwith standard television practice, Reeves reverts to a floating camera to explore theexpandingspaceofthelandscapeandavoice-overtodirectthereadings of his drifting images. The heavy tones of the poet Vallejo proclaim ‘a point throughwhichamanpassedisneverempty’andhegoesontorepopulatethe inhospitablelandscapewiththestoriesandmemoriesofthepeoplewhoonce livedthere.Andyet,weknowthatsoonenoughalltracesofhumanitywillhave beenerasedbytimeandtheactionofwind,rainandsun.Nothingwillremain otherthanthepoet’sabilitytoremember. Although aspects of these works may have seemed familiar to television audiences,theyshiftedthelandscapefromasecondarypositionasabackdrop to dramas and travelogues into the key expressive element of a work. This enabled artists to reveal something of the way in which the moving image representsandinterpretslandscapewhilstextendingthescopeofitssignifying powers. Within the inversion of background and foreground, these works invitedustospeculate,asIhavedone,onthemultiplemeaningsarisingfrom thelandscape. D E P I C T I O N S O F T H E S E L F, S T O R I E S F RO M T H E O T H E R S I D E Ealier,Imadetheargumentthattelevision’smodeofaddressisoneoffamiliarity, of an artificial one-to-one co-presence with the audience as exemplified by the conspiratorial to-camera confidences of presenters. It is clear that this intimacyisbasedonafictionsoconvincingattimesthatviewershavebeen knowntotakepresentersattheirword.Theconsequencesofthisdelusionare
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 129
occasionallytragicasinthecaseofJillDando,aUKtelevisionpresenterwho waskilledbyacrazedfan.Theremightappeartoexistacoincidencebetween the intimate mode of address employed by broadcasting and certain aspects ofvideoartthat,inthe1980s,heldbythefeministdictumthatthepersonal ispolitical.17However,therewerefundamentaldifferences.Feministslocated theirindividualexperienceswithinacritiqueofPatriarchy.Ontheotherhand, television presenters, newsreaders and chat show hosts never referred to the social or political dimensions of their work. Even now, presenters reveal of themselvesonlythatwhichisconsistentwiththeirconstructedpublicimage, sanctioned by the broadcasters. The personality of a TV presenter remains a fictionandthepersonaeofparticipants,bothprofessionalandamateur,areno lessboundedbythecodesoftelevisionbehaviour.18AsPeterConradpointed out, ‘talk shows are theatres of behaviour, not dialogues.’19 Presenters and, increasingly,layparticipantsarerequiredtoreflectcurrentidealsofbeautyand wisdomandtheirspeechmustremainclear,unhesitantandlogicalor,inthe caseofagonychatshows,eventuallycontaintheiroutburstsbysubmittingto thelogicandadviceofferedbypresentersandtheir‘experts’.Apartfromaglove puppetcalledEmuwhofamouslyattackedtheBritishchatshowhostMichael ParkinsonandartistTraceyEminwhomadeadrunkenexitonNewsnightReview, themosteffectivedisruptiontothefixedsmileofthetelevisionpresenterwas theAmericanartistCharlemagnePalestinewho,in1982,shoutedunintelligible gibberishonChannel4’sGhostsintheMachine.Thepresenter,supportedbythe containingstructureofthechatshoworgameshowrules,ensuresthatnotruly disruptiveelementreachestheviewerandthattheprogrammeremainswithin what Tom Sherman called the ‘acceptable levels of Raw Personal Material’. However,presenterssometimesinadvertentlyallow‘excesses’whicharefalse and carefully staged, including the controlled outbursts that add a frisson of dangertorealityshowslikeJerrySpringer.20 Documentariesmustalsoholdthedangerousambiguitiesofrealityatbay andmaintainadistancebetweentheviewerandthoseattemptingtotelltheir stories.Herethe‘Formica-bland’21presenterisonceagainpressedintoserviceor replacedbyanattractiveexpertinthefieldwhoeitherleadsthecamerafromkey sitetokeywitnessorinterpretsthefootageasapervasivevoice-over.Further,it isthepresenter’sroletodeflecttheidentityoftherealmediatingagentsbehind thecamera:thedirectors,producersandtheirpaymasters.Althoughtherehave been many groundbreaking documentaries on UK television in recent years, thereisatendencytodefusethepowerofwitnessbyroutinelyatomisingthe testamentsofindividuals.Nooneindividualisallowedtospeakformorethan a few seconds. Narrative fragments from a number of individuals are mixed upandregurgitatedaspalatableentertainmentsthatexpresstheworld-viewof theprogramme-makersandreducetheon-screenwitnessestolittlemorethan likeable scientific specimens. As a result of the fragmentation of testaments,
1 3 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
it is often hard to remember any one individual at the end of a television documentary.Frequently,anopportunityforempatheticcommunicationislost whileanauthorisedviewofhistoryisreinforced. In contrast, artists’ mediation of either their own testaments or those of their subjects is declared through their authorship. Although traditions of avant-garde art and the context of an evening’s broadcast inevitably impress pre-set meanings on a work, artists’ videos that addressed identity and selfrepresentationsufferednofurthermediationontheirwaytothesmallscreen at the height of the Channel 4’s experimental phase. There was variation in theextenttowhichtheseworkssucceededinbridgingthegapbetweenartist andviewerandnegotiatingthehiddencensorshipofbroadcasters,butafew examplesfromChannel4areusefulinconsideringthesequestions. ZoeRedman’sPassionRation(1984)wasshownaspartofChannel4’sVideo 1, 2 and 3 series. The piece was introduced by the artist herself, explaining howvideomightofferwomenartistsalessover-determinedmediuminwhich tofindavoice.Theworkthatfollowedwaspartpoem,partlamentabouta one-sided love affair. Redman’s voice, ironic and vulnerable, dominates the soundtrack and is accompanied by spare visuals – half glimpsed images of afair-hairedwomandressinginshaftsoflightthatpenetratethegloomofa darkenedroom.Weneverdiscoverheridentitynorwhetherthestoryofalover’s indifferenceishersortheartist’s.Perhapswearelookingattheheartlesslover inquestion.Thesubtleambiguitiesoftheworkgoagainstthegrainofnarrative expectationsgoverningbroadcasttelevision.Thereisnoresolution,explanation orpromiseoffurtherepisodestoresolvetheaffair.Nordoestheworkconform tothelanguageofacommercialbreak.Nothingisbeingsold,otherthanthe ambitionoftheartisttocommunicateherexperience.Hersubjectivityfindsa modeofexpressionthatisstilltentative,apropositionratherthanacategorical statement.Althoughunattributed,thestoryshetellsremainswhole,hervoice isuninterruptedbyotherpointsofvieworcontextualisedbyanauthoritative voice-over.Itisanexperiencethatismediatedonlybythecreativeimagination oftheartistandthelimitationsofanaudiencewhoseownvisionismarkedby whattheUSartistBillViolacalled‘aseven-channelchildhood’,andwhich,in theUK,wouldhavebeenathree-channelequivalent. A different approach was taken by Vivienne Dick, whose video New York Conversations(1990)wasscreenedbyChannel4aspartoftheDazzlingImage series.ShotinthestreetsandapartmentsofNewYork,theconversationsshift fromindividualtoindividualwithnoapparentconnectionbetweenthemother thanthefactthattheyallliveandworkinthecity.NanGoldindiscussesher drug rehabilitation, a pregnant lab worker describes the process of artificial inseminationandagaymanwisheshecouldcomeouttohisUkrainianfamily. Theartistoffersnooverallthesis,nopersonalopiniononwhatwemighttake tobeherfriends’lives.Theysimplyspeakforthemselves.Weareconfronted
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 131
withwhatJohnElliscalledthe‘bruteforceofwitness’elicitinganemotional ratherthanintellectualresponse.22 Thenervousnessofthechannelinrelationtotheseunmediated,disjointed vignetteswasevidentintheirdecisiontofronttheDazzlingImageserieswith personalitieslikeDrAnthonyClareandFayWeldon.Clarewentalongwayto underminingtheworkwhenheannouncedthatLouiseForshaw’sElevenYears (1990) ‘almost renders words redundant’ and then proceeded eloquently to diagnosetheartist’sexperienceofrape,andsubsequenteleven-yearambiguities towards her body, thereby directing us to normalised interpretations of her imagery. His final insult was to quote the artist herself, removing her words fromthecontextinwhichshehadsocarefullyplacedthem.Theensuingtape, fullofproblematicimagesofForshaw’snakedbody,struggledtomaintainits power,partofwhichderivedfromasenseofthecomplicityofourgaze,almost as invasive as the men who attacked her. By telling us what to think, Clare easedtheanxietyandconfusionwefeltlookingatthefragilityofthefleshwe vicariouslyconsumedandothershadviolated. Some artists showcased on Channel 4 managed to present a personal or politicalrealitybyusingaconventionaldocumentaryformat.Thehopehere,as withmuchcommunityandwhatwasthentermed‘agit-prop’video,wastouse accessiblenarrativeconventionsasastrategyofpersuasion.Thewomen’scamp atGreenhamproducedanumberofworksincludingTinaKeane’sInOurHands, Greenham(1984),apoeticvideodiaryshemadewhilepicketingtheAmerican nuclearbase.However,itwasKidronandRichardson’sCarryGreenhamHome (1984)thatfirstreachedourscreens.Thisslow-movingdocumentaryseemed to strain at the limits of television’s tolerance of duration and offered no determiningvoice-overorinterviewertoexplainawaythewomen’sprotest.In fact,theonlyinterviewerwhoappearedwasFrancesCoverdalewhowasthen workingfortheBBCandwasattemptingtofilmareportwhiletheGreenham womendancedandchantedaroundher,drowningoutherreportage.AsRod Stonemanpointedout,televisionwasslowerinthosedays,butCarryGreenham Homeoccupiedsomethingoveranhourofairtime,andallowedthewomenof Greenham,sooftenportrayedaseccentricsorhysterics,tostatetheircase.We canbelieveStonemanwhenhetellsusthatmostofthepoliticalworkthatwas broadcastbyChannel4wasnotathreattothestatusquo.Ashesaid,‘ifpower wasreallychallengedthenquiteformidableproblemscouldbeencountered.’23 Itisalsopossiblethatdissentingvoicesweremutedbythesamebalancingof views between artists’ tapes that current affairs were obliged to implement; in the case of early Channel 4, the balance operated across the schedule as opposedtowithinindividualprogrammes.However,inthosefewyearsinthe 1980s when Channel 4 was open to what Stoneman describes as ‘strongly enunciatedperspectives’,anastonishinglyrichbodyofcounter-culturalwork reachedanationalaudience.Foratime,StuartMarshallfoundBritishtelevision
1 3 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
soamenabletopoliticallymotivatedprogrammingthatheabandonedhisrole as an artist and devoted his later years to making documentaries around gay politics.Marshall,incommonwithotherartistslikeIsaacJulien,IvanUnwinand MaureenBlackwoodandlaterKeithPiper,combinedthenarrativeconventionsof televisiondrama-documentarywithvisualexperimentationandtookadvantage ofaradical,ifshort-lived,momentofaccessibilityinUKtelevisionhistory. A L L E G O R I C A L N A R R AT I V E S, W O R D L E S S D R A M A RedmanandForshawattemptedadirectexpositionoftheirsubjectiveexperience andpoliticalartistsembracedtheconventionsoftelevisionnarrativeinorder to raise the consciousness of a national audience. Other artists responded to findingthemselvesembeddedinaword-dominatedmediumbyjoiningKapoor andViolainfallingsilentorbyscramblingnarrativeconventions.Othersagain introducedfantasyandallegory.Strategiesrangedfromthevirtualstasisand visualpoeticsoftheformerYugoslavianartistsBredaBebanandHrvojeHorvatic tothewhimsicallysadisticsoapoperasoftheAmericanCeciliaConduit;tales ofmalestalkingandfemaleviolenceinthesuburbs. A less threatening scenario was played out in the dreamlike domestic landscapesoftheUKartistGrahamYoung.Intheearly1980s,hemadeAccidents intheHome,aseriesoftapesofwhichno.17:GasFires(1984)wasbroadcast by Channel 4. The work concentrates on a man sitting silently in his sitting room gazing into the gas fire while the rousing chords of Bavarian popular musicfillthesoundtrack.Nothingmuchhappens.Weseehiselectricfan,the TV in the corner, a house plant and a small wind-up aeroplane that he sets offintotheroom.ThepieceendswithaclashofTeutoniccymbalscoinciding withthesmallplanefreezinginmidflightinfrontofthefire.Thetimingin thisworkisnearperfect,themeaningasdeeporaswideastheviewercaresto makeit.TheoverallimpressionYoungcreatesisofabroodingsilencefractured byexplosivemusicaljollityemanatingfromhisimagination,arecordplayer,a Bavarianfolkfestivaltakingplaceunderhiswindow–weneverdiscoverwhere thatotherplaceis.TheroominwhichwesitisreplicatedbyYoung’slounge, his solitary dreaming akin to our own. We are thrown back to the essential isolationofthetelevisionspectator,perhapsnotsomuchintheguiseofpassive couchpotato,butnonethelesscutofffromsocialengagement,deprivedofthe potentialtotakeaction,removedfromlifeitself. A group of European video artists in the 1980s also found a wider public throughChannel4inworkthatintroducedachargedsenseofrelationshipinto thesilentdramaexemplifiedbyYoung.RobertCahen’smagicalJusteleTemps (1983) recreates the Hollywood scenario of strangers on a train. A beautiful youngwomanislostinareverieasshetravelsthroughtheFrenchcountryside in the dying light of a late summer’s day. A man in a dark trench coat and
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 133
21.GrahamYoung,AccidentsintheHomeno.17:GasFires(1984).Courtesy oftheartistandLUX,London. hatfindshiswaytohercompartmentandthesceneisset.Thepaceisslow, thecoloursaturationisenhancedandthelandscapeseenthroughthecarriage window dissolves into layers of smoky abstractions. The scene develops no further, no narrative interrupts the dreamlike quality of the journey and no destinationisreached.Timepassesandwetravelthesametime-spaceasthe characters on-screen. The Belgian artist André Colinet suggested a narrative ofsortsbetweenhischaracters,butagainwithnodialoguetosupportaclear readingofmotiveandoutcome.InAKisstoBuildaDreamOn(1987)three characters,awomanandtwomen,aretrappedinadomesticsettinginakind ofloopedeternaltrianglewherebyeachtriestomakelovingadvancestothe other,butisrejectedonlytoreject,inturn,thenextpartner’sovertures.These works reflect the more performative and literary tradition of European video in the 1980s and, as Anne Marie Duguet pointed out, in Colinet’s work we see a ‘reworking of the central codes of theatre… and theatricality.24 In the contextofBritishtelevision,AKisstoBuildaDreamOnmakesreferencetothe traditionofthekitchensinkdrama,wellestablishedintheUKsincethe1960s.
1 3 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
InColinet’shands,thedramaiscircular,unresolved,everythingsuggested,but nothingstated.Thisrepetitivenesswasalsoafeatureoftelevisionsoapopera, butColinetcutitdowntoitsbarebones,exposingtheessentialcircularityof televisiondramawithoutthenarrativeembellishmentsthatkeepuswatching. Channel 4 also broadcast Why do things get in a muddle? (1984) by the American video artist Gary Hill. Here, language was reintroduced, but back to front. Hill devised the much-copied technique of training actors to speak backwardsandthenreversingthefootagesothatthewordsbecomeintelligible ifcuriouslystilted.Inthephilosophicaldiscussionthattakesplacebetweenan Alicefigureandabeardedmentoreverythingmagicallydefiesgravity–cigar smokebillowsupwardsandinwards,hairfallsbackwardsanddisplacedobjects returntotheirplaceunaided.TheUKartistStevePartridgesimilarlysubverted normalspeechandthefamiliarcontinuityoftelevisiontimeinThissentence isn’tworking(1990).Awomanspeaks,thewordsliterallyfloatingoutofher mouth,oftencaughtinuncomfortableclose-up.‘Therightwordisonthetipof mytongue’isoneofthefewsentencesthatremaincoherentwhiletheletters they form spin around her face. Most of the tape is given over to speeding up,slowingdownandloopingthesentencesasachallengetotherationalism that underlies television realism and a demonstration of the dependence of verisimilitudeonthecorrectspeedandsynchronisationofsoundandimage. Perhaps the ultimate master of temporal play and allegory was the Polish artistZbigniewRybczynskiwhoseworkwaswellrepresentedonChannel4in the1980s.LikeYoung’sGasFires,Rybczynski’saward-winningTango(1983) recreatesthetelevisualviewingspacewitharepresentationofaregulardomestic interior.Wheretheenvironmentinhabitedbytheviewerisstable,Rybczynski fillshiswithlayeredencountersbetweenindividualsofallagesinalooping tapestryoflife,sexanddeath.Usingsophisticatedkeyingtechniques,theartist buildsupthelayers,newcharactersappearingandaddingtheirdramatothose alreadyonthe‘stage’.25Astheirnumbersbuild,theplayersintheseindividual scenariossomehowmanagetoavoidcollisionandthesheerimpossibilityofthe sceneisthesourceofitsenchantment.LikeCahenandColinet,Rybczynskiwas creatinganewrealitywithvideotechnologythatwouldnototherwiseexist,in lifeorontelevision. Channel 4 inspired other broadcasters to make tentative gestures towards experimentation, such as the one-minute commissions BBC2 showed late at night in 1990. Sadly, these were well padded by other arts reportage and trivialised by a supercilious presenter. By 1987 this fleeting boom time for artistshadbeenbroughttoaclosebyMichaelGrade,JeremyIsaac’ssuccessor atChannel4.Itnowremainsforustoconsiderthewaysinwhichbroadcasting, artistsandtheiraudiencesintheUKwereaffectedbythebriefliaisonofvideo andtelevisioninthe1980s.
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 135
AU D I E N C E S A N D PAC K A G I N G The impact of televised artists’ works on audiences will always be open to speculation. Neither Channel 4 nor BBC2 appear to have carried out any substantial research into audience response and only casually reviewed the viewingfigures.AsRodStonemanhastoldme,hisdepartment’sbriefwasto fulfil the experimental remit of Channel 4, not to boost the viewing figures. David Hall always calculated that his guerrilla tactics would take the viewer by surprise. He argued that whereas a gallery delivers a set of assumptions andarthistoricalprecedentspre-emptourreadingsofthework,videoarton televisioncomestousdisguisedintheneutralityofentertainment.Ashesays, ‘whenaTVisoninthehomeyoudon’texpectittobeintrusive,itispartof themouldoftheplace.’26 Someartistsbelievedthatlatenight‘art’television couldcreateaspaceinwhichviewerswouldshifttheirmodeofspectatorship fromthatofthegrazingviewertothelevelofengagementtheywouldcommit inagallery.Undoubtedly,aproportionofbroadcastingartists,myselfincluded, failedtoconsidertheproblematall.DavidLoxtonidentifiedasimilarapathy intheStates:‘Theydon’tseetheirproductinthecontextofwhatcomesbefore orafterit,andtheyhavenotconsideredhowanindividualwatchingathome mightrespondtotheirwork.’27 PerhapsthisisnotsurprisingintheUK.Withtheexceptionofworkbyartists likeDavidHall,KevinAthertonandAnishKapoor,manyofthetapesIhave discussedwereboughtinbyChannel4andwerenotoriginallyintendedfora broadcastmedium.Theyweredestinedforalternativepublicspaces,festivals, galleries or movie theatres. This does not mean that they failed to open the mindsofviewers,buttheydidsopartlythroughtheaccidentaleffectsofresitingcounter-culturalworkontelevisionratherthanbyaconsideredstrategy forthenewbroadcastingcontext. T H E PAC K A G I N G AnneMarieDuguetpointedoutthedangerofartists’workbeingsqueezedin between antipathetic commercials and programmes. Such positioning would undothemoreradicalintentionsoftheartist–theworkwouldgetlostinthe overwhelmingcurrentoftheentertainmentflow.Thiscouldwellhavehappened inthescreeningofVideo1onChannel4wheninterviewswithZoeRedman and myself, in which we stated our intentions to challenge representations ofwomenontelevision,wereimmediatelyfollowedbyanadforaslimming product.Perhapsmoreseriouslyunderminingisthepackagingofvideoartby well-intentioned programmers as I discussed in relation to Louise Forshaw’s work.Thenormalisingeffectofanexplanatoryintroductioncaneasilydefuse theimpactofartists’work.
1 3 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
THE FUNDERS The tendency to cushion artists’ video with talking heads stems from what broadcasters assume audiences can tolerate. Many commentators, like Anna Ridley and Anne Marie Duguet, have observed that broadcasters regularly underestimated their audiences’ intelligence. Viewers were quite capable of understanding‘difficult’work,theysaid.Inspiteoftheradicalprogramming thatheachievedinhistimeatChannel4,RodStonemanmaintainsthatthe ‘distractionculture’couldnotacceptexplicitsex,explicitpoliticsorambiguity. He added that it rarely accepted durational work, which is central to many artists’practice.WhenIwasamemberoftheArtsCouncilofEngland(ACE) panel convened to select ACE/Channel 4 co-funded commissions in the mid 1980s, I witnessed certain pieces being dismissed as ‘unbroadcastable’. They were mostly durational films and videos, but occasionally included works that were considered too radical. Chris Meigh-Andrews wanted to publish instructionsforahomeinstallationintheRadioTimes.Viewerswouldbetold todimthelightsandplaceawineglassatagivenheightanddistancefromthe screen.Whentheimageofthenakedartistswimmingbackandforthacross thescreenwasbroadcast,theviewerwouldlookthroughthewineglassand seehimcapturedtherelikeanaquaticTomThumb.Anotherartistwantedto persuadeallfourchannelsacrosstheBBCandtheindependents,tobroadcast different views of an event simultaneously so that the viewer could visionmixfromtheirhomeremotecontrols.Boththeseintriguingideasweredeemed ‘unrealistic’andturneddown. ItisclearthatalthoughBritishtelevisionbrieflyopeneditsdoorstoartistsin the1980s,theworkwascensoredandnotjustbythebroadcastersandco-funders. DavidCurtishasobservedthatmanyartistsappearedtobeself-censoringtheir workandwithunprecedentedinjectionsofcash,tendedtouptheproduction values of their tapes in response to what they imagined the broadcasters expected.Thisresultedin‘acertainblandness’inthecommissionedwork.28 FrommypositiononthefundingpanelatACE,Iobservedaparalleltendency for artists to anticipate broadcasters’ preferences by submitting conventional shootingscriptsthatproposedmildlyexperimentalnarrativeworksinvolving plenty of foreign travel. At a practical level, for those of us who were lucky enoughtoreceivetelevisionfunding,itmeantthedifferencebetweencreating a handful of self-financed works every few years and a regular output with access to adequate facilities. The relatively modest sum of money I received fromChannel4in1984supportedmyworkforthreeyears. T H E C O M M E RC I A L I N T E R E S T S Televisionsponsorshipofafewartists’practiceswasclearlybeneficialtothose individuals. It is in its formal influences that television has had the greatest
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 137
impactonartists’video.Almosteveryoneabsorbedboththestyleandcontent of broadcasting, either positively or negatively and, in the case of scratch, televisionprovidedartistswiththeirrawmaterial.Thelanguageoftelevision pre-existed video art and would always be the touchstone against which all artists’effortswouldberead.Inthe1990s,popularculturewastobecomean importantreferentforartpracticeingeneralbut,inthe1980s,whenaclear philosophicaldivideexistedbetweenvideoartandtelevision,workingalliances werealreadybeingforged. There are examples of commercial organisations courting artists who first cametotheirnoticeonChannel4.Incommonwithmanyscratchartists,certain video-makersworetwohatsandputtheirinnovativeideastomorelucrativeuse bymakingcommercials.Rybczynski’sTangowasmimickedbyanAristonad, andthefilm-makersTonyHillandTimMacmillan,bothresponsiblefordevising ingeniousvisualtechniques,eitherworkeddirectlywithadvertisersorhadtheir ideas appropriated by them.29 Both in-house television graphics departments andsoftwaremanufacturersregularlyemployedartschoolgraduatesandwere undoubtedlyawareofwhatartistsweredoingwithvideo.30 V I D E O A R T ’ S I M PAC T O N T E L E V I S I O N During and after the brief marriage of Channel 4 and experimentation, the language of television clearly evolved in a direction that incorporated many ofthelinguisticinnovationsdevisedbyartistsaswellasthosethatwereselfgenerated.MickHartneyhaspointedoutthatcommercialtelevisioninthe1950s wasitselfinnovative.RadicalwritersanddirectorslikeDennisPotter,Harold Pinter,KenRussellandKenLoachweregivenlicensetoexperiment.AsIhave argued,scratchvideomayhaveinspiredcommercialsandtitlesequencestofreely collageandlayerfoundfootageandprocessitwithincreasinglysophisticated electroniceffects.Stationidentsareoftenmasterpiecesofwordlessconceptual conceits that also draw on the imaginative flights of surrealism. The current Wildlife on 2 introductory sequence features a kingfisher diving through a landscapeandintowaterinwhichatelevisionsits,displayingthesamestretch ofriver.Thekingfisherappearstodiverightintothesetandoutagain–like thebestconceptualtrickster.Thenewtendencytoliberatethecamerafromthe tripodandtheuseofafracturedandrepetitivestyleofstorytellingintelevision dramaowesmuchtotheexperimentalworkofnewnarrativists.Irecentlyheard theformerscratchsupremo,GeorgeBarber,observehowoftencommercialsand televisionidentsuseaflowingorspinningimagedesignthatwassoirresistible toscratchists.Inbroadcastingithastheeffectofhypnotisingtheviewerintoa pleasurableacceptanceofcontinuitydisruptionandthedisturbingcontentof newsprogrammes.JohnEllishasobservedthattelevisionemploystheentire repertoire of graphic supplements to harness the unruly ‘raw data’ of news,
1 3 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
sportandotherliveeventsandtransformitintoacoherentaccountofsocial reality: ‘Wars become maps, the economy becomes graphs, crimes become diagrams,politicalargumentsbecomegraphicalconflictandgovernmentpress releasesbecomeelegantlypresentedbulletpoints.’31Icouldaddthat,likethe Paintbox experiments of scratch and other video colourists, television has discoveredthepsychologicaleffectsofsaturatedcolour.Manyprogrammelinks employrichredsandgreenstodistracttheviewerswith‘televisuality’,optical effectsduringthesyntacticalgapsintheTVschedule.Thesedays,commercials and TV idents look so like ‘video art’ intervals in the programming that the BBChasfeltcompelledtokeepupandmimicthestyleandrepetitivefamiliarity of commercial breaks. They endlessly preview future programming, the new digital radio channels and the various learning opportunities offered by BBC WorldwideandtheOpenUniversity.Itmaybeoverstatingthecasetoclaimthat theaccelerationinimageturnoverontelevisionisduetotherapid-fireediting thatscratchartistsinitiated–thefranticcompetitionforviewerswasprobably agreaterspurtoupthepaceofvisualpleasuresontelevision.Itwasperhaps artistslikeGeorgeBarber,whoseopticalpacewasslower,whosedelightinthe technologyandthepatternshecouldcreatemoreovert,thatmostinfluenced thebroadcasters. Here,Iamconvincedbymyownarguments,buttherearestilldisagreements surroundingthedegreeofinfluenceartists’videowieldedovertheformand direction of mainstream broadcasting. John Wyver has acknowledged that, ‘certaindesignelementsoftelevisiontookelementsofscratchandsomeother artists’work’,butaddedthat,intermsofimpact,‘thiswasverymarginal.’32Wyver wouldascribethestylisticshiftsinbroadcastingtothebroaderinventivenessof televisioninthe1980s,whichwasthen‘arichandstimulatingenvironment’. Rod Stoneman is more willing to attribute a significant role to artists whose inputcreatedwhathecalled‘ahomeopathiceffect’.Overtime,asmalldoseof arthasmadeaproportionallylargerimpactontelevisualgrammar.However, asIhaverehearsedseveraltimesinthisbook,televisionappropriatedonlythe surface impressions of video. Conceptual jokes, video-graphics and fractured storylines no longer have the power to disrupt conventional perceptions once they are tied to television narratives or the commercial imperatives of advertisementsandmusicvideos.AsRobPeréeremindsus,inthesecontexts experimentationisdrivenbymarketinggoals,whichare‘inkeepingwiththe commercialprinciplesoftelevision’.33Theyaremorelikelytoservethepurpose ofprovidinginstant‘product’identificationofprogrammeorchannelforEllis’ ‘grazingviewer’thantosubverttelevisualconventionsandtheirconcomitant ideologies.Perhapsitwasnaïveofartiststoimaginethatformalstrategieson theirownwouldrevolutionisetelevision.RodStonemanputsitsuccinctlywhen hesays,‘itisclearthatyoucandoanythingwithcamerasandwithsoundand stillhaveitaspartofadistracting,consumable,distantspectacle.’34
V I D E O A R T O N T E L E V I S I O N • 139
Broadcasters appropriated not only the optical tricks that video artists devised, but also the insistence on the personal voice of the artist, which it reinventedasrealityTV.Unlikethesociallygroundeddiaristicworkofartists, realityTVdivorcesindividualsfromthehistorical,socialandpoliticalrealities that may have created the predicaments they are encouraged to confess. Subjectsareguidedtoidentifycausesinthemselvesandfindsolutionsbyan effortofwillratherthanthroughconjoinedpoliticalactivismwithothersinthe samesituation.Framedbythecultureofself-improvement,thepersonalisno longerpolitical,butsimplypersonal,unconnectedtothesocialdomainandthe sufferingofothers.Theresponsibilityoftheindividualisparamountandthe roleofthestateindeterminingtheindividual’slotinlifeisobscured. Thepromotionofindividualismunderlieseventhemostexplicitbroadcasts ontheUK’sChannel5wheredisplayingpeoplewholiketohavesexwearing teddybearoutfitsseemstohavebecomethenorm.Sensationalismandathirst forsurfacenoveltyisnotthesamethingasradicaltelevision.Itdoesnothing tochangethespectatorpositionnordoesitopenupatwo-wayexchangeof information. In fact, it conceals a deep-rooted conservatism, the notorious ‘dumbingdown’thatnowsuffocatesthecontentofcontemporarybroadcasting. Aslongasviewersarekeptfixatedtothesurfaceofeccentricbehaviour,they willnotaskthedeeperquestions. Where the personal has undergone a process of re-domestication in the confines of reality TV and sensationalism in late night sexposés, video art’s appropriativestrategieshavebeentransformedintotelevision’sownnostalgia. Withconstantre-runs,makings-of,andotherprogrammesaboutprogrammes, television has emerged as the epitome of postmodern reflexivity. As David Curtispointedout,‘televisionhasbecomejustwhatDavidHallalwayssaidit was,anobject,butnowitisahistoricobjectfirmlystuckinthepastasmuch asthesteamengineis.’35 Theprocessofre-appropriationandcommodificationIhavedescribedhas takenplacegraduallyovertheyears.Itisclearthatthetelevisionexperimentalism represented by the early years of Channel 4 was indeed a golden age and is now long gone. Instead, we have a proliferation of channels, video game interfaces,cableanddigitalstationsand,ofcourse,theInternet.AsJohnWyver pointedout,theterrestrialchannelshaverespondedtothenewchallengeof competitionby‘retreatingaggressivelytoamiddle-ground’.Asaresult,‘their engagementwithinnovation(groundedinasocialorculturalpractice)hasall butdisappeared.’36Televisionisnolongeropentotheworkofvideoartists.As earlyas1994,RickLanderwaslamentingthat,‘anyTom,DickorHarrycan get their 15 minutes of exposure these days, the only people who can’t get intotelevisionareartists.’37Experimentalworkstilloccasionallyappearsonthe smallscreen,butasJohnWyverobserved,‘evenifthefragileflowersof“art” canpushtheirwayintotheschedule,andtheydoinAlt.TV,onoccasion,orin
1 4 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
otherspotsonBBC4,theyaresomarginalisednotonlybyschedulingbutalso bylackof“buzz”,thattheyarealmostirrelevant.’38 Itwouldseemthattelevision,inaconstantstateofnarcissisticrewindand superficial search for novelty, has annexed the stylistic innovations of artists andneutralisedtheformalandpoliticalquestioningimpliedintheirwork.As itexcludedartistsfromtheschedule,televisionremovedthoseculturalirritants or, as Lyotard puts it, those who aim to create in the viewer ‘a feeling of disturbance,inthehopethatthisdisturbancewillbefollowedbyreflection’.39 Once the dream of transforming the domestic living room into a reflective spacehadreceded,artistswhohadenthusiasticallyparticipatedinthelimited opportunities of broadcasting returned to the traditional locus of meditation: thegallery.Althoughmanyartistshadshowninmarginalspacesallalong,in the1990sthecommercialgalleriesandmuseumsbegantoopentheirdoorsto video and the form this work took was what David Hall would argue it had alwaysbeen–sculpture.
8 Video Sculpture
Video was too much a point in the space. Remember, the convention of the time was monitor and not video projection. Video was too much SCULPTURE. Vito Acconci TH E P U B L I C/D OMESTI C CONV ERGENCE In 1959, Nam June Paik and Wolf Vostell incorporated modified and partly demolishedtelevisionsetsintotheir‘happenings’,thusbeginningthetransition of television from home entertainment and information display system to galleryartefact.Thesignaltransmittedtothe‘box’,howeverdistortedbythe artist,wasgeneratedbythebroadcastingcorporations.Itwasn’tuntilthemid 1960sthatthemonitorwasborn,anadaptedtelevisionsetthatcouldexhibit anexternalsignalfromavideoplayerorcamera.Theartistcouldnowusethe flickering ‘fourth wall’ as a sculptural object as well as a monitor to artistic activityandcreativeimagination. Althoughthemonitorhadbecomeaconduitofartisticexpression,itremained inherentlyassociatedwithbroadcastingandthereceptionoftelevisualmaterial inthedomesticenvironment.Thesupplementaryauraofdomesticityorwhat DavidHallcalledthe‘inevitablepresence’oftelevisionpersistsaslongasvideo isshownonamonitor.SteveHawleyattributesthelowstatusofearlymonitorbasedvideoarttoitsdomesticassociations:‘Whenpeoplesawthosescreens inthegallery,theyjustthoughtaboutthedomestic,theythoughtabouthaving their tea.’1 The intersection of public art and the private realm was not new andhadbeenwellestablishedbythetimeartistsbegantorelocateTVsetsto galleries.Earlyinthetwentiethcentury,Duchamps’infamousurinaltriggered anentireindustryofartbasedonfoundobjects.Bythe1970s,feministshad introducedpersonalexperienceintothepublicspaceofartand,inSemiotics
1 4 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
of the Kitchen (1975), Martha Rosler made the link between the domestic as it is portrayed on television and the experience of real women trapped in domesticity.2Asawhole,videoartmadeathree-wayconnectionfromartistic expression,totheprivatesphereandontotelevisualcultureintheshapeof entertainment,withmarketingandcurrentaffairsconstantlyflowingthrough thepermeableboundariesofthehome. Many artists emphasised the monitor’s domestic origins by recreating homeinteriorsinthegallery.In1974,NamJunePaikplacedasmallBuddha in front of a monitor that was connected to a camera relaying the image of theBuddhabacktoitself.TVBuddhaironicallycombinedeasternmeditation with America’s growing addiction to the television set and made a sideways referencetowesternnarcissismandthecommodityculture.Thedomesticin theartandtheartofthedomesticwasextendedtosocialcommentaryinWhat DoYouThinkHappenedtoLiz?(1980),bytheUKartistAlexMeigh.Hervideo ofteenagegirlsstrugglingwithadultsexualitywasshowninanersatzsitting roomthattheartistcreated,completewithwallpaper,carpets,couchandtelly. In1994,theAmerican,TonyOursleralsomadeobservationsofayoungwoman inadomesticsetting.Hemountedasmallmonitoronatablefacingaprettily upholstereddressingtableandchair.WithJudyasitstitle,theworksuggested theanxiousmomentofcomparisonthatagirlliveseverydaywhenshelooksin themirrorandcompareswhatsheseeswiththeidealimagesofbeautyparaded dailyacrosshertelevisionscreen. Thedomesticityofthetelevisionsetwasmostcleverlyreiteratedatthedawn ofvideoart,whentheimageofafirewasusedinabroadcastbytheDutch artistJanDibbets.InTVasaFireplace(1969),heturnedthehometelevision setbackintothedomestichearthithaddisplaced,anideathatwastakenup later in the work of Susan Hiller among others and, as we have seen, was alsoexploitedcommercially.Ihavedescribedafewexamplesofthedomestic environment explored in monitor-based video sculpture. The compulsion to turnthegalleryintoahomeisalsoevidentintheconceptofthevideolounge. Thenowobligatoryadjuncttoanymediafestivaloffersvisitorsacomfortable chairfacingtheirownsetwheretheycanbrowsethroughartthewaytheyhop thechannelsathome.Inthevideoloungeartisthoroughlydomesticated. TH E CONV ERGENCE OF V I EWI NG COND I TI ONS Onceinthegalleryspace,themonitorreproducesaspectsofthedomesticviewing condition whilst introducing those of conventional art gallery spectatorship, often including the discomfort of viewing lengthy works with little or no seating. As we saw in the last chapter, television spectatorship is based on intimacy, a sense of co-presence of the image and an idle spectator, dipping inandoutofprogrammesandoccasionallybecomingabsorbed.Watchingthe
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 143
boxisfrequentlyafamilyaffairinterruptedbydiscussions,telephonecallsand theusualcomingsandgoingsoffamilymembers.Inthegallery,thegrazingis stillafeatureofthespectatorship,butthechurch-likedevotionalattentionthat wouldnormallybeaccordedsculpturediscouragesvocalcommentandhuman interaction. The social dimension is lost as the television or monitor, now elevatedtothestatusofartandstrippedofitsusualentourageofnick-knacks anddomesticlights,takesontheaestheticpretensionsofsculpture.Itnolonger invitesintimacy,butengendersreverenceandamoredistantappreciationof concept and form. Early works by Paik and Hall used televisions tuned to differentstationsasawayofindicatingtheextenttowhichthehome–and art–areinfiltratedbypopularcultureanditsattendantideologies.Oncecast asvideosculpture,themassentertainmentoftheoriginalisnowoverlaidby thepainterlypatternsitcreatesandthehighculturalaspirationsofthegallery. Thesetwomodesofspeechremainintension,butthedomesticheritageofthe boxisrarelyeradicatedbyitsnewroleasartobject. A N T H RO P O M O R P H I S M , T H E H U M A N S C A L E Video is a face-to-face space. Vito Acconci The familiarity of the monitor is of course dependent on its domestic scale existinginrelationtothephysicaldimensionsoftheviewer.Anencounterwith the box triggers a fundamental perceptual process that is activated when an individualcomesacrossanobjectoranotherhumanbeing.Withinafraction ofasecond,theviewermakesacomparisonbetweenselfandtheobjectand establisheswhetheritisbiggerorsmaller,and,inthecaseofanotherhuman being, weaker, stronger or potentially desirable. In this respect, the object of thevideomonitoralwaysimplicatesthebodyofthespectator.Thetechnology itselfcontainsahumanattribute.BillViolahasobservedthatunlikefilm,video recordstheimageonthesamestripoftapeasthesoundtracktherebymaintaining perfectsynchronisationofsoundandimage.Likehumanperception,invideo ‘wedon’tgetimageswithoutsound’.3 Peggy Gale relates the anthropomorphism of the monitor to its ability to emitlightandembodytheimageratherthanprojectitontoadistantsurface asinthecaseoffilm.Thissenseofembodimentisheightenedontelevisionby theone-to-one,directaddressofnewsreadersandchatshowhosts.Thestatus ofthetelevisionsetasanotheroneofus,asakindofelectronictransitional object in our own image became the central theme for a number of artists, the best known being Nam June Paik with his Family of Robot (1986). Each ‘robot’ismadefromearlytelevisionsetsofdifferentsizes,cladinarangeof
1 4 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
22.NamJunePaik,FamilyofRobot:MotherandFather(1986),videosculpture, 80x61.5x21inches.Photographer:CalKowal.CourtesyoftheartistandCarl SolwayGallery,Cincinnati,Ohio. woodveneers.Big,medium-sizedandchild-sizedrobotsarearrangedinironic family groupings, their screens animated by different television programmes currently on air. With the cellist Charlotte Morman, Paik took the bodily referencetoaliteralandsomewhatuncomfortableconclusionbycoveringthe performer’s naked breasts with small monitors while she played the cello in the performance, TV Bra for Living Sculpture (1969). Although Paik’s stated aimwasthehumanisingoftechnology,Mormonfoundherselfconfinedbythe commodificationofhersexuality-as-medium,abadvideojokethatmilitated againstherdemonstrableskillasamusician.Occasionally,thetelevisionset itself has been constituted as an anthropomorphic, inhabited prison. I have alreadydiscussedMickHartney’sStateofDivision(1979),whichdepictsthe artistintheclassicheadandshouldersshot,swinginginandoutoftheframe likeanewsreaderthatisneverallowedtogohome.Hartneyconfidestocamera hisfeelingsofentrapmentprecipitatedbytheexpectationsheprojectsontothe audience he can’t see. Hartney’s head is perfectly equivalent in scale to our ownandproportionaltotheboxthatcontainsit.Trappedinelectronicspace,
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 145
theartistasanillusionalludestoourspectatorship,tothephysicaldimensions ofthemonitorandspeaksdirectlyofthesocialpressuresthatdemandinhim rigidpatternsofbehaviour. Otherartistshavedeployedthebodyacrossanumberofmonitors,sometimes reiteratingthecruciformconfigurationusedbyPaik.InthecaseofFragments of an Archetype (1980), Catherine Ikam adopts a formation that replicates Leonardo da Vinci’s famous Vitruvian Man. However, the figure in Ikam’s installationdoesnotentirelyfitthemonitors.Partsaremissing.Theresulting fragmentationofbodyimageryrecursdownthegenerations.IntheUK,MartySt. JamesandAnneWilsoncreatedPortraitofShobanaJeyasingh(1991).Thebody ofthedancerisfracturedacrossfourteenmonitorsinanotherloosecruciform arrangement. The various body parts travel around the installation, ranging fromextremeclose-upstowideshotsthatrevealJeyasingh’smovementsintheir entirety.AsSeanCubittobserved,theworkinterrogates‘theideaoftelevision everfurnishingatotal,complete,coherentworld’.4Neitheristelevisioncapable ofrepresentingaunifiedindividual.Thedancer’sbodyinPortraitofShobana Jeyasingh shatters into a kaleidoscopic play of corporeal surfaces, disjointed andcontingentlikevisionitself.Theviewerisreturnedtotheworkingsand limitationsofthehumanperceptualsystem.Tryingtoputtheshattereddancer backtogetheragaincreatesawarenessoftheextenttowhichperceptionisa functionoftheimagination. Inagalleryspace,asathome,thebodyoftheviewerisalsoimplicatedbythe optimumviewingdistanceandpositiondemandedbythetelevisionset.Even whenforcedtolieonone’sbacktoviewaceilingfulofPaik’smonitors,the viewer-setrelationshipisfixedanddelineatesouropticalrange.Toofaraway andthetelevisionimagebecomesaflickeringlight;toocloseanditbreaksup intoscanlines.ArtistsincludingStanDouglasandAtomEgoyanhavedisrupted thisruleofengagementandforcedtheviewertooclosetotheimageor,likeJoan Jonas,isolatedthesetbeyondtheopticalrangeoftheviewer.Forallbuttoday’s widescreenTVs,theidealviewingdistanceforamonitorroughlyapproximates thedistancebetweentwohumanbeingsintheactofconversation. L I G H T B OX Likealamp,thetelevisionboxemitslightinthehomeandsimilarlyilluminates thegalleryspace,whereitisoftentheonlysourceoflight.TheEnglishcomposer Brian Eno used a number of concealed monitors showing only plain colour signals to cast tinted lights onto a minimalist wooden construction. In both herperformancesandhervideowork,LaurieAndersonhasturnedherhead into a metaphorical television set by putting into her mouth a red light that illuminatesboththeinsideandoutsideofherbodyasshespeaks.IntheUK, MelanieSmithandEdwardStewarttooktheideaonestepfurtherintheirsingle
1 4 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
monitorwork,InCamera(1999).Bymeansofthesimpledeviceofsituatingthe camerainsideamouth,thegalleryspaceisonlyilluminatedwhenthemouth opens and registers light. The picture plunges back into darkness when the mouthclosesagain.Thetotalblacknessthatengulfsthegalleryisanalogous totheblackscreenandinertblackboxtowhichthemonitorrevertsoncethe signaliscut.Thesenseoflossthatalwaysfollowsswitchingoffthetelevision maytapintomoreprofoundanxietiesaboutannihilationanddeathorindeed theapocalypticimplicationsofnosignalbeingbroadcastfromtheBBC. BUILDING BLOCKS IwouldbeinclinedtoagreewithDavidHall’scontentionthatavideodisplayed onamonitorisalreadyandalwaysasculpture.Clearlytheobject-nessofthe monitor can be emphasised or de-emphasised depending on the treatment or condition of the casing, its location and the lighting conditions. With the suspensionofdisbeliefandthedrawoftheflickeringimage,theboxisquickly forgottenifitisunremarkable.However,avideoinstallationremainssculptural and maintains a tension between the ontological dimensions of the work and the illusory spaces suggested by the video image. With the technology formingaprominentpartofthedisplay,themeansofproductionoftelevisual illusionismarealwaysvisibleandactasaBrechtiandistantiationtechniqueor adeclarationofart’sownconstructednature.Atthesametime,monitor-based installations invoke all the traditional concerns of sculpture and activate the inheritedaestheticappreciationofformandmass,surfaceanddepth,symmetry andgrandeur. From the beginning, the box of the monitor formed the basic unit of video sculpture. It provided a building block that could be used singly or multipliedasintheworkofPaikandSt.JamesandWilson.Theinstallations then became not only sculptural but also monumental as in the case of Paik who deployed 384 upturned monitors in his 1982 Tricolour Video. It was, by all accounts, an impressive display, but maintained the irony of beingconstructedfromdomesticobjectsstrayingintoartfromtheworldof entertainment.AsIhavementioned,manyofPaik’sinstallationsemphasised theirthree-dimensionalitybyreducingthevideoimagetoacollageofoff-air material that, once multiplied, quickly receded into abstract patterning. In theUK,DavidHallwentastepfurtherbydenyingtheviewereventheironic displayofscratchedpoliticalbroadcastsandturnedthemonitorstothewall. InTheSituationEnvisaged:TheRiteII(1989),amonolithicpartitionoffifteen televisions,allturnedaway,closedoffacornerofthegallery.EachTVwas tunedtoadifferentoff-airchannel,creatingapolyphonicmedleyoftelevisual discourses.Itwaspossibletohearthetelevisionsandseethelighttheycast onto the wall, but their images were not in view. Between each stack of
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 147
televisions,anarrowcrackallowedthespectatorstoseeafragmentofavideo imageplayingonasinglemonitorfacingoutwards.Thedenialoftelevisual pleasure and the revelation of those blunt parts of the technology that we usuallyignore,gaveanobjectlessonindeconstruction.Inaddition,thework usedtheimpositionofsculpturalscaletoalludetothemagnitudeoftelevisual culturalinfluenceoncontemporarylife. WhereHallconstructedsolidwallsofmonitorsemphasisingtheirweightand strength,UKcompatriotTinaKeanecontrivedtorendermonitorsweightless. Poised high above the spectator, A Bouquet (1984) consisted of a bunched arrangement of monitors, their wires gathered like the strings of balloons, trailingdownontothegalleryfloor.ImagesoftheGreenhamCommonPeace Camp drifted across the monitor screens, turning the video bouquet into a tributetothe‘WomenattheWire’whilstemphasisingthephysicalpresenceof themonitorsbydefyinggravity. V I D E O WA L L Hall’snotionalvideowallssoonbecamearealitywhenVideowalltechnology made it possible to spread a single image across a bank of monitors. This technology was already being used in shopping malls, trade fairs and sports events,butin1989theUKartistSteveLittmaninstalledaVideowallattheVideo PositivefestivalinLiverpool.Notonlywasitnowpossibletocreateanoversized monitorbutalsotoprogrammethecomputerthatcontrolledtheVideowalland route certain images to prescribed blocks of monitors. The images could be repeatedandenlargedorsectionscouldbeaugmentedbyasmuchasx200. MostoftheUKartistswhomadeworkforthewallcreatedlandscapes.Kate Meynellusedimagesofthemoonandthesea,JudithGoddardtheshimmering surfaces of the river Thames while Stephen Partridge created a vertiginous work based on footage of flying over a Scottish landscape in a light aircraft. Theeffectofthemagnificationbroughtvideoclosetotheimmersiveexperience offilmandyettheconstantshiftingofimagesacrossmonitors,therepetitions andalterationsinscalecreatedaself-reflexivityconsistentwithvideoart’sown conceptual precepts. The Videowall also produced a hypnotic and seductive sensoryexperience.AsLittmanobserved,theviewersneverforgotthegridof monitors or ‘the dynamics of the camera and Videowall technology’ but the worksalso‘createdasenseofflowandcounterflow’.5 In 1989, Dara Birnbaum used the same technology to create an equally transportingworkfortheRioShoppingComplexinAtlanta,Georgia.Theflows sheportrayedwereasmuchafunctionofthetechnologyasoftheoscillations between past and present, live and pre-recorded in the video footage. She exploited the Videowall’s ability to combine off-air broadcast material and herownpre-recordedfootageofthelandscapethatonceflourishedwherethe
1 4 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
shopping centre now stands. She added another element, a live camera that froze silhouettes of passers-by into templates that then became the key into whichthe‘natural’landscapeimagerywasinsertedamongthenewsflashes.6 Videowallsprovedtobeanexpensivedisplayplatformforartistsandalthough theyremainafamiliarsightinshoppingmalls,thetechnologyhasbeenlargely superseded by video projection. However, I would agree with Steve Littman thatthetechnologyofferedinterestingopportunitiesnotleastforitsabilityto combinethetechnologicalandsculpturalspecificityofthevideomonitorwith thephenomenological,opticalstrengthsoffilm. MIND THE GAP WhereHallandPaikstackedtelevisionmonitorsintosolidwalls,andLittman andBirnbaumclosedthegapsbetweenthemtocreateaunifiedfieldofpulsating videoimagery,otherartistsbecamemoreinterestedinthegapsthatcouldopen upbetweenmonitorstocreatebothaphysicalandconceptualspacethrough which the viewer could wander. In Video Ping Pong (1974) Ernst Caramelle settwomonitorsateitherendofaping-pongtable.Theimagesshowedtwo playersbattingaballbackandforthinperfectsynch.Thetrajectorybetween oneandtheotherwasleftfortheviewertoextrapolatefromthegapbetween the monitors. In so doing, spectators became aware of their own powers of deduction and imagination. In the UK, Kevin Atherton similarly charged the space between two monitors by co-ordinating two sequences of the artist arguing with himself, one combatant in each monitor. Chris Meigh-Andrews created streams and fountains in which the water appeared to flow between andthroughstackedmonitors.Incommonwithmuchcontemporarysculpture, theseworksoperatedinthenegativespacesurroundingobjectswhilstactivating theinternalspaceoftheimaginationandcreatingawarenessoftheprocesses wherebyviewersfillinthegaps. H I D I N G A N D B A L A N C I N G T H E B OX Although artists like Meigh-Andrews and Caramelle revealed the sculptural propertiesofmonitors,manyotherstookgreatpainstoconcealtheboxthat supportedthemagicalsurfacetheywantedtoexploit.MaryLuciersetmonitors intowalls,TonyOurslerconcealedoneinanoildrumandIburiedboththe monitorandplayeratthebottomofawell.Althoughtheseworksmightbeseen tobere-enforcingtheillusionismoftelevision,thedimensionsofthemonitor determined the structures into which they were partially concealed and the gameofpretendingthattheyweren’tvideoscreens,butwindows(Birnbaum), water (Elwes) or other-worldly presences (Oursler) was so transparent as to reassertthephysicalpresenceofthatwhichwashidden.
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 149
23.ChrisMeigh-Andrews,Eaud’Artifice(1991),videoinstallation.Courtesyof theartist. Evenwhenthetelevisionormonitorisonfulldisplay,itisnotalwayscentre stageandisfrequentlybalancedordominatedbyotherobjectsintroducedinto theinstallation.InCanada,VeraFrenkel’sTransitBar(1994)featuredmigrating individualswhospokefrommonitorssetaroundafullyfunctioningbarwith the artist herself frequently present to serve drinks. Working between the NetherlandsandtheUK,StansfieldandHooykaascreatedvideoinstallations that included photography, metal, stones and layers of sand in actual and metaphoricalmeditationsonlightasitilluminatesmatterandthelandscapes ofmindandmemory.Manyotherartistssetmonitorsintoespeciallyadapted architecturalfeatures–columns,archesandstairways.ItwasperhapsDieter Roths’installationTableRuinatDocumenta7thatdemonstratedthegreatest determinationtoputthetelevisionbackinitsplace.Asmallblackandwhite monitorwastheonlycoherentelementinthechaosofthecolourfuljunkroomcum-museum to which he added throughout his life. Perhaps this no longer qualifiesasavideoinstallationbecausetheTVoccupiesinthegalleryasimilar
1 5 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
statustothatwhichitenjoysinthehome–justoneoftheitemsofeverydaylife. Ifoundthattheinitialimpactoftheoverallsculpturalconstructionwasquickly absorbed and attention soon migrated to the blinking screen in the midst of inertmaterials.Thespectreofbroadcastculture,itselfawebofpoliticaland commercialtexts,isalwaysinplay. VIDEO PERFORMANCE Asamaterialobjectandaculturalphenomenon,videointheearly1960swas quicklytakenupbyperformanceartistsandfeaturedintheexplosionofinterdisciplinary collaborations that transformed the landscape of fine art. Many workedwithclosed-circuitvideosystemsasanadjuncttothelivepresenceof theartist,offeringamediatedrepresentationasacontrasttowhatwasbefore oureyes.Somedecriedandotherscelebratedthenewtechnologicalage.AsI havealreadymentioned,SteinaVasulkasuggestedadeepermaterialfusionof flesh,electricityand‘cold’hardwareinelaboratesoundandvideosystemsthat integratedherownactionswiththebehaviourofthetechnology. InworksbyBruceNauman,LesLevineandDavidHall,theliveelementof theworkwasextendedtoincludethevisitorstoagallery.Thiswasachieved throughlive-relayvideosystemswithabuilt-intimelag.Imagesofindividuals appearedonmonitorsafewsecondsaftertheyhadpassedthecamera,orwith acamerasituatedbehindtheirheads,theysawonlytheirbackviewasthey approached the monitor. Through transmission and more extensive cabling, gallery visitors were able to communicate with others in far-flung parts of the building. The viewer was now literally part of the picture and with the extension of time and the contraction of space, these closed-circuit works anticipatedvideophonesandtheInternet.Lookingforwardtothe1990s,artists likeSusanCollinsdevelopedlong-distanceartworksoccurringsimultaneouslyin differentpartsoftheUK,linkedviatheInternet.Perhapsheretheconnections being suggested come closer to the use of video in surveillance than in the home.Aslongastheimagereceivedwasdisplayedonamonitor,itsphysical dimensionsandtelevisualaffiliationsalwaysframedtheinitialresponseofthose whoencounteredtheworkwithindiscoursesoffineartsculpture. B R E A K I N G O U T O F T H E B OX Itwasperhapsinevitablethatwiththemodernistheritageinformingearlyvideo, artistswouldfindithardtoresistdismantlingtheboxitself.Thisrepresented the first step in what has been termed the flight from the monitor, often characterised as the image and the video artist escaping the confines of the monitortogreaterexpressivefreedom.ArtistslikeGaryHillstrippedmonitors of the casing that had once disguised them as furniture and revealed their
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 151
nakedelectronicinnards.Theseanatomicalmonitorsreflectedthefragmented bodiesthatweredisplayedonthescreens,themselvesdenudedofthecultural indicators of clothes. Further technological vandalism was committed by the performancegroupAntFarmwhoranacarthroughawalloftelevisionsets. Othersshotat,dropped,orburnedtelevisionsingesturesofdefianceagainst the hegemony of broadcasting. Finally, the monitor was discarded when the technologymovedontowardstheendofthe1980sandvideoprojectionbecame aviableexhibitionformat.Thevideomonitorthathadsooftenstoodinforthe humanheadwaseffectivelydecapitatedandlostitsanthropomorphismasits ‘face’wasscaled-upandreconfiguredasacinemascreen.Thecriticaldistance weacquiredwiththethree-dimensionalityoftheboxwaslostandreplacedby thespectacular,immersiveexperienceofthecinema,sometimesenhancedby comfortableseating. Theontologicalexperienceoftheboxmayhavevanished,butitwasreplaced bythephysicaldimensionsoftheprojectedbeamoflight.Thiswasalreadyan objectoffascinationforexperimentalfilmartistslikeMalcolmleGrice,Steve FarrerandNickyHamlynwhoplayed‘onthecontrastbetweenthesculptural/ mechanicalpresenceoftheprojection,thefilmstripandtheprojectedimage itself’.7ThemostfamoussculpturalfilmwasAnthonyMcCall’sLineDescribing a Cone (1972). The film itself consists of a point of light drawing a circle, butthebeamthatcarriestheimageismadeconcretebysmoke,incenseand particlesofdustcatchingthelightastheyswirlthroughthespace.Together,the circularprojectionhittingthewallanditsphysicaltrajectoryacrossthespace, createtheconeofthetitle. Inthedayswhensmokingwasallowedincinemas,theprojectionbeamwas madesolidasthesmokepassedthroughit.Itactedasoneofthehapticmarkers, thephysicalfixingpointsthatmilitateagainstthelossofbodyconsciousness thatweexperiencewhenwegiveourselvesuptothespectacleoffilm.Inmore recent times, Tony Oursler has used the momentary substance of smoke to rendertheairtangible,describespaceandactasacarrierofaprojectedimage. StagedatnightinLondon’sSohoSquare,TheInfluenceMachine(2000)consisted of video-projected apparitions materialising and dematerialising in clouds of ‘smoke’ generated by dry ice machines. The faces and voices of inventors associatedwiththesurroundingarealoomedupthroughthebillowingsmoke andmeltedawayasthesyntheticcloudsdispersed.Thesefragileimpressions evoked the spirit of human endeavour and simultaneously reminded us of the mutability of consciousness, the transient nature of life itself. In 2002, a variationonthethemeappearedattheBeck’sFuturesexhibitionattheInstitute ofContemporaryArtinLondon.UsingasimilartechniquetoOursler’s,David Cotterell projected into dry ice footage of Magritte’s famous painting Time Transfixed (1938) in which a steam engine appears to be emerging from a fireplace. Cotterell’s cloud-born engine rushes towards the viewer, becoming
1 5 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
progressivelylargerasboththefilmimageandtheapproachingcloudamplify theimage.Itisanalarmingexperience.Anunfoundedsenseofsuffocationby smokeiscombinedwiththeeerieimpressionthatthetrain,loudintheears and pressing on the eye is about to run everyone over. This is the reported experienceofprimitivepeoples’firstencounterwiththelegerdemainoffilm. AlsointheUK,MattCollishawexploredthetricksoftheeyebyprojectingvideo onto the swirling mass of a snowstorm souvenir and Charlie Murphy made liquidsolidbybeamingtheimagedownontoagleamingpoolofwhatlooked likemilk. In all these works, the projection is treated as a three-dimensional entity thatcarriestheimage,definestheviewers’bodiesand,infindingaterminal surface on which to rest, delineates the dimensions of the space in which it iscontained.Thefragilityoftheimageandthesenseofaghostlypresencein OurslerandCotterell’sworkhasanelementoftheséance,asthoughmaking connections to the spirit world that we will ourselves inhabit all too soon. Thereachingacrosstimetoencountertheshadowsofwhatisnolongerthere becomesaparadigmforthetechnologyitself–theabilityofvideotoconnect twosimultaneouslypresentrealitiesvialive-relay. T H E AC T I V E V I E W E R , I N T E R AC T I V I T Y A N D O T H E R M Y T H S Theemergenceofthevideoimagefromitscuboidcontainerwashailedasa newbeginning.Itcoincidedwitharapidincreaseinresolutionoftheprojected imageand,inthe1990s,adeepeninginvolvementofcommercialgalleriesin movingimageart.Atthesametimetheconceptoftheengagedviewercameto dominateculturaltheoryandwasassumedtoinformmostinstallationworks whethertheyinvolvedvideoornot.Barthes’activeviewer,busilycreatingthe meaningofamovingimagework,wasofteninvokedonthegroundsthatitwas nowpossibletowalkaroundobjectsorinterruptprojectionswithourbodies. When video installation was monitor-based, viewers were indeed free to walkaroundandamongthesetsorcouldobservethemfromaboveorbelow. However,theprivilegeofmultiplepointsofviewwashardlynew.Ithadbeen afundamentalprincipleofsculpturesincetimeimmemorial.Itwasperfectly possible to enjoy multiple views of, say, a fascist sculpture from the Third Reichinthesamewayonemightaradical,late-twentieth-century,intertextual assemblage. It isn’t the walking that makes a viewer active. The notion of interactivity was supported by the rapid development of computer-operated deliverysystems.Galleryaudiencescouldnowpressbuttonstomakeimages appearanddisappear.Theycouldturnpages,triggersoundsandswitchlights on and off, just as they can at the Launchpad in London’s Science Museum where interactivity exists for purely didactic purposes. Artists like Gary Hill andSimonBiggsusedsensorstoallowtheviewertoactivateprojectedvideo
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 153
images.InHill’sTallShips(1992),ghostlyindividualshoveredinadarkened spaceand,oncesetinmotionbyaspectator,appearedtoapproachandsimply stare.Thesenseofparticipationinthisuncannyworkwassoondilutedbythe arrivalofotherspectatorsanditbecameimpossibletoknowwhohadtriggered what. A plethora of such works was made in the 1990s, few as arresting as Tall Ships. Ian Hunt was perhaps a little harsh when, in 1996, he observed thatafascinationwiththetricksofinteractivitycan‘getatakindofcredulity and stupidity in the viewer that is even more stupid than that of the filmgoer’.8However,itistruethatmanyinteractiveartistswerecontenttocreate fairgroundattractionsorscaled-upvideogamesthatturnedtheviewerintoa performingmonkeyanddidlittletoengagetheimagination. In the course of the 1990s, film-makers invented their own brand of interactivityandmademuchofthefactthatvideoorfilmtransferredtovideo andprojectedontoagallerywallnotonlyliberatedtheimagefromthemonitor, but also freed the spectator from a fixed position in the cinema. The gallery was now transformed into a newly radicalised ‘cinematic’ space. As I have pointedout,theoptiontoperambulatealreadyexistedintraditionalsculpture andmonitor-basedvideoinstallation.Itiscertainlytruethatanobjectchanges dependingonthepointofview.However,theprojectedimageremainsmore or less constant when cast onto the wall of an empty gallery. The viewer learnslittlebymovingafewinchesorevenacoupleoffeetineitherdirection. Once the viewer has played with her own shadow in the beam of light and goneupclosetodissolvetheimageintoabstraction,s/heusuallysettlesinto the ideal viewing position equivalent to where s/he would have sat in the cinema.Thepointofviewoftheoriginalcamera/artistdoesnotchangeasthe viewer moves around the gallery space. Euclidian perspective is maintained. Video-film,projecteddirectlyontoagallerywall,hasalsobeencreditedwith aparadigmshiftbasedonthenotionthatadematerialisationoftheartobject, adowngradingoftheartefactfromthreetotwodimensionsharksbacktothe radicaledgeof1970sconceptualism.9Inmyviewthetelevisionset,byvirtue ofitscombineddomesticandpopularculturalstatus,willalwaysstruggleto occupy a stable position as ‘high’ artefact, as sculpture. When it comes to a TV, there is little to be downgraded. In fact, dispensing with the television and replacing it with pure cinemascope illusionism elevates video and film toakindofelectronicmuralpaintinginthegrandmanner,envelopedinthe silenceoftherarefiedquasi-cathedralsofartthatbothcommercialandpublic galleries have turned into. The ritualised, communal, proletarian experience –theeating,drinking,smokingandneckingthataccompaniedthetheatrical displayofcinema–isalsolost. Furtherclaimstoradicalspectatorshiphavebeenmadeinrelationtoartists like Sam Taylor-Wood who have multiplied projection screens across several walls. In such work, the viewer has been recast as a walking vision mixer,
1 5 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
activenowbecauses/hecanchoosewhichscreentofocuson.Butagain,autoeditingalreadyexistedinart.AroomattheRoyalAcademySummerShowis crammedfullofstillpictures,thedisplayacompositeofoftendivergentpoints of view and, refreshingly, not all by the same artist. Here, the visitor to the exhibitionenjoysexactlythesameeditorialcontrols/hehasataSamTaylorWood video show. The real difference is perhaps between cinema and the multiple,wrap-aroundvideoimagesthatmakeitimpossibletograspthework asawhole.Amovieatthetheatreisapprehendedasatemporal,flatobject, commonlyexperiencedatonesitting,frombeginningtoend.Inamulti-screen installation,asinlife,oneisalwaysleftwiththefeelingthatsomethingmore interestingishappeningbehindorjustaroundthecorner,onanotherscreen. Thepredicamentofchoicefatigueisacontemporaryphenomenonandleads tomilddistressandapermanentsenseofunfulfilleddesirethatisexploitedby theconsumerculture. RaymondBellourhasarguedthatmultiplescreensusedbyartistslikeTaylorWoodreplicatethephysicalarrangementofcamerasandsetsinastudioaswell asthefracturednarrativesofHollywood.Althoughthesepreviousincarnations oftheimagingprocessarealwaysimplicatedinfilm,theyarealsodeliberately concealedinfavourofcinematicrealismonwhichmuchofthisprojectedwork stilldepends.AccordingtoTomSherman,theprojectedvideoisremovedfrom itsarchitecturalrootswhenitisexcisedfromtheboxofthemonitor.Itbecomes whathecalls‘videowithoutedges’,framelessandweightless.10 PerhapsBellour’sparallelismworksbetterwhenartistscreatecorrespondences ordissonancesbetweenthegeographyofadepictedspaceandtheactualspace of the gallery. The Wilson twins in the UK have used drifting mirror-image sequences of interiors to create discordance between what we understand to be the space we occupy and the optical impressions created by the video projections. The perceptual discrepancy causes nausea and a disruption of balanceandweareleftwithasensethatwhatwetooktobesolidwallsare drifting,unstablesurfaces.Spectatorshipadrift,perceptionàladérive. OtherartistslikeMichaelSnow,StanDouglasandBillViolahaveconcretised theimagebyprojectingitontoafree-standingorfloatingscreen,sometimes, asinthecaseofDouglas,projectingontobothsidessimultaneously.InViola’s Slowly Turning Narrative (1992) a revolving screen fills the space animated by images of a fairground carousel projected from one end of the space and aman’sfaceprojectedfromtheother.Thescreenturnslikeahugerevolving doorandsinceonesideismirrored,viewersareperiodicallyconfrontedwith theirownimagetryingtokeepupsoasnottogetknockedover.Onceagain, thephysicalstructureoftheprojectionspaceisdisruptedandtheprojection itselftakesonsculpturaldimensionswhilstitissimultaneouslydistortedand fracturedbythelightbouncingaroundthegalleryspace.Ireadthisworkas a chilling allusion to the separation of reality from the image that occurs in
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 155
moderncomputer-guidedbombingtechniques.Justastherevolvingscreenwill hittheviewerifs/hebecomestooabsorbedinvirtual,screenreality,someone onthegroundisgoingtodieasthegunnerplayshislethalvideogames. RETURN TO THE MONITOR AND THE OPTIMAL VIEWING POSITION AsIhaveargued,atelevisionormonitor,likeascreen,establishesanoptimal viewingpositionbyvirtueoftherealistimageplayingacrossitsscreen.This isanalogoustotraditionalsculpturethatsimilarlyaimstofocusattentionand ‘diminishtheendlessperceptualfield’.11AsDavidHallhasremarked,theideal viewingpositionforaGiacomettisculpturereturnsustowheretheartistonce stoodinrelationtohismodel,which,inGiacometti’scase,wassaidtohave been a fixed distance. If we move away from his circular route around the model,weallowtheenvironmenttodistorthisvisionandthedirectconnection withtheartistisbroken.Theworkbecomespartofaninstallationandsubject to its placing in relation to other objects and the lighting conditions in the immediateenvironment. TheCanadianartistStanDouglasdevisedamultiplevideoprojectionthat both re-established and disrupted the optimal viewing position by the clever useofsound.Evening(1994)consistsofthreelargevideoprojectionsdepicting newsreaders all speaking at once. In front of each newsreader hangs a glass dome that concentrates the sound. If the viewer stands under a dome, the sound of the corresponding newsreader becomes decipherable. Although the speakerisnowcomprehensible,themonumentalimageofthenewscasteristoo closeanditsconstituentscanlinesbecomevisible,producingadiscontinuity inthenarrativeandaruptureofthesoundandimagesynchronisation.Outside thedomes,thecacophonyofvoicesassumesapalpablepresencepunctuated by the points of coherence under the domes. The viewer’s physical location withinthespacethusbecomescriticaltothereadingoftheworkincontrast withmuchprojectedwork,whichfailstoproblematisethespectatorposition. Anapparentreturntothethreedimensionsofthemonitorwithitsattendant implicationsofdomesticityandmasscommunicationisevidentinthemany contemporary works that regularly incorporate monitors. It might be that the low status of early monitor-bound video has been rescued by galleries embracingmovingimageasthedefaultmediumofthenewcentury.Video’s standing as high art assured, it is now safe for the monitor to re-enter the gallery.AtLondon’sHaywardGallery,Ann-SofiSiden’sexhibitionWarteMal! (2002)includedtheobligatoryprojections,butcombinedthemwithadirect, existential confrontation with the object of a monitor. A row of transparent booths contained individual seats and monitors from which former eastern blocprostitutesdescribedtheirlives.Thetraditionalmediumofself-exposure
1 5 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
24. Ann-Sofi Siden, Warte Mal! (2002). Courtesyoftheartist and the Hayward Gallery,London.
wasaptlycombinedwithapseudo-confessionalarrangementofmonitors,once again producing a sense of television’s anthropomorphism. The implicated viewer,visibletoothersintheactofvoyeuristicconsumption,hadtheillusion thatthetelevision/confessionalcontainedthepersonofthespeakerandenjoyed theapparentco-presenceofattractive,tragicgirls. Theanthropomorphismofthemonitorwasperhapsnotpowerfulenoughfor TonyOursler.Workingsmall,hehasreturnedtoaratherdisturbingdomesticity of the video image. In common with Paik, he has used video technology to recreate the contours of the body and simulate a human presence. Where Paik built up monitor-colossi, Oursler projects grimacing or weeping faces ontodollsorsmoothobjects.Byreducinganddistortingthehumanscalehe generatesbizarre,malformedcreatures,closertothehomunculiofnightmares thanreassuringimagesofanotherbeing,justlikeus.Otherartists,likeMark Wallinger and Chantal Ackerman, have returned the image to the monitor,
V I D E O S C U L P T U R E • 157
creatingamoredistantexperienceoftheimageanditssimulations.Wallinger reproducesthephysicalandclassremotenessofroyaltyinrepeatedsequences oftheQueen’scoachdrivingdowntheMallwhileAckermanarrangesmonitors inrowsinsuchawaythattheviewermovesalonginparallelwiththetracking shots depicted on the screen. For Ackerman the anthropomorphism of video existsintheviewer’smimicryofthecameraandcameraoperator’sjourney. Anyuseofthemonitoringalleriesisinevitablytingedwithnostalgiaasyet anothertechnologyheadsforobsolescence.Withtheadventofplasmascreens, artists like Bill Viola have collapsed the box and returned the image to two dimensions.Inhisslow-movingplasma-portraits,Violaislessconcernedwith revivingthecinematicthanwithannexingthepictorialtraditionsofRenaissance painting.Wheretheplaybetweenthetwoandthreedimensionsofmonitors (surfaceversusdepth)wouldappeartobelost,thedomesticscreenremains‘a siteofexchange,acreatorofillusion,achannelofinformation’.12Themonitor/ televisioninitsconditionasatemporarilyilluminatedbox,whethercuboidor virtuallyflat,maintainsitslinkstoitsdomesticoriginsandcontinuallyworries thesemioticedgeofpopularculture.Themonitor’smongrelidentitydrawson apotentthoughsometimesneglectedareaofinquiryforcontemporaryartists whohavebeentemptedawaybythetechnologicaladvancesofthe1990sand thedemandforspectacleinanexpandingartindustry.
9 The 1990s and the New Millennium
To refuse to fix meaning is, in the end, to refuse God and his hypostases – reason, science, law. Roland Barthes The path from marginal to central is, more often than not, merely a matter of moving work from one context to another. Julian Stallabrass B AC K G RO U N D Throughout the 1970s and 1980s, the slow attrition of ‘Master Narratives’ such as capitalism, religion and scientific progress caused a loss of faith in traditionalbeliefsystemsincludingcommunism,whichRybczynskicalled‘the lastbigidea’.Politicaltheorists,culturalcommentatorsandartistsattackedthe ideological and ethical standards by which westerners had lived their lives. They showed them to be both corruptible and a product of social, political andculturalinstitutionsaswellastherelationshipsofpowertheyenshrined. Inthespiritualgapthatopenedup,‘advanced’democracieswereofferedthe balmofconsumerismandthedreamofwealthinacultureofprofit,statusand celebrity. As western imperialism grew and the power of the multinationals deepened,oldpointsofreferencebecameincreasinglyunstable,includingthe church,thefamilyandparliamentarydemocracy.Evenstate-runtelevisionlost itsmonopolisticauthoritywiththeproliferationofchannelsandcommunication systems.Thenewideologyofconsumerismcontinuedtobolsteroldfavourites like the nuclear family and heterosexuality, but now also canonised home ownership, the market economy, money, youth, beauty, and the pursuit of
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 159
instantgratification.Bytheendofthe1980s,anyresidualbeliefintheagency oftheindividualandthepowerofcollectiveactionwentthesamewayasthe old faiths and oppositional practices in video diminished. Collectives broke up, economic necessity forcing many into commercial fields while a few successfullymaintainedtheirpractice,butshedtheiroldpoliticalallegiances. Inspiteofvaliantpocketsofresistance,politicalengagementwasreplacedby Thatcher-Reaganiteindividualismandthelureofcommercialsuccess. T H E C O M M E RC I A L A L L I A N C E A N D T H E Y B A S Where any view of money exists, art cannot be carried on. Blake Towards the end of the 1980s, the intersection of art and commerce became morecomplex.Increasingnumbersofartistsworkedacrossbothfieldsandart students demanded a business-oriented education to equip them for careers in the rapidly expanding fields of media and advertising, promotional video, fashionandpopularmusic.1Forthosewhocontinuedtoexplorevideoinafine art arena, a steady stream of artist-run spaces came and went. Those statefundedgalleriesthatshowedvideoinstallationintheearly1980smaintained their patronage and international film and video festivals like Video Positive in Liverpool and the Worldwide Video Festival in Amsterdam continued to flourish.AsIhavementioned,televisionintheUKeffectivelycloseditsdoors toartistsafteraflurryofinterestandexpandeditsprogrammingofrealityTV, gameshowsandotherformsoflightentertainment. However,everythingchangedwhenashort-livedeconomicboomenriched thelate1980sandthe‘youngBritishartist’phenomenonhittheUKartworld. A younger generation of street-wise artists exploded onto the scene with a sharp instinct for self-promotion and, this time, with a strong representation ofwomen.GillianWearing,SamTaylor-Wood,DouglasGordon,TraceyEmin et al staged their own exhibitions and found their entrepreneurial ambitions rewardedwhentheadvertisingtycoonCharlesSaatchibegantoinvestheavily in their work. Other commercial galleries followed suit and the large public institutionsthathadpreviouslyactedasarbitersoftaste,nowendorsedwhat commercialinvestorswerepromoting. Itisnotaltogetherclearwhycommercialgalleriessuddenlyembracedwhat theyhadgenerallysteeredclearof–videobeingephemeralinform,infinitely reproducibleandeffectivelyuncollectible.DavidHallholdstheviewthatthe improvementinpicturequalityandtheabilitytoprojecttocinematicproportions satisfiedAmericanneedsinparticularforvideoart‘writlarge’.Itmightbethat the1990spropensitytorecyclepopularculturemadeitmoreaccessibletoa wider,non-specialistaudience.Itcouldsimplyhavebeenthat,inthefaceof
1 6 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
recession,videoartwascheap.JezWelshtakesanotherviewandpointstothe physicaldimensionsofvideoinitsinstallationform.Introducingasculptural elementmeansthat‘theartistpullsoffthetrickofencasingtheimmaterialin material form.’2 The dematerialised object of art was now reconstituted and couldbeboughtandsoldlikeanyothercommodity.Itispossiblethatgalleries eventually conceded that video as the medium of choice for the younger generationwasintheascendantandasaresultvideobeganwinningTurner prizesintheUK.Withvideoasthenewmaterialofart,galleriesboughtastake inthebusiness,astheyhavesubsequentlybeenobligedtodowithInternetart. Notonlydidtheartobjectregainitsstatusastheartmarketpickedup,butthe artist,himorherself,alsobecameamarketablecommodity.FigureslikeTracey Emin and Damien Hirst joined the celebrity culture and became household nameswhiletheirgallerieseffectivelycontrolledtheiroutput.3Artpatronage ofvideowasnotnew–overtheyears,PaikandViolahavebeensupportedby bothpublicandprivatefunds.However,intheUK,videohadoperatedoften deliberatelyoutsidethegallerysystemmakingthisnewphaseofprominence and commercial success a break from the more socialist affiliations of early videoartists. Videonowplayedacentralroleintheexpandingartworldofthe1990s.The yBageneration,raisedontelevision,usedvideonaturallyandunselfconsciously –anduncritically.VideohadalwaysbeenamarginalisedpracticeandtheyBas legitimised the medium as part of their portfolio of talents while showing scant interest in its intrinsic properties. Within a postmodern aesthetic, they playedwithitsconventionswithlittleinclinationtocritiqueitsideologicalties tothemassmedia.Popularcultureasitismanifestontelevisionandinthe music industry was no longer seen as the enemy, but as an integral part of the creative imagination. The loss of the oppositional relationship with the mainstreampermittedtheintrojectionoficonicmediaimagesthatwerethen madeavailabletoartisticreformulation.However,italsodefinedthelimitsof individualidentityandtiedartiststowhatKathleenPirrieAdamscharacterised as‘wrestlingwiththeicon,continually:andwiththeirfullbodyweight’.4This couldbeafull-timeoccupation. Thephysicalandpsychicalengagementwiththeidealsofpopularculture meantthatfilm,television,fashionandpopularmusicbecamemoresignificant totheyBagenerationthanthehistoryofartingeneralandvideoartinparticular, for which most professed an apparent ignorance. YBas displayed what Phil Hayward called a ‘sublime indifference’ to the debates and achievements of videohistoryeitherintheUKorinternationally.Whenvideohistorywascited in any discussion of their work, it was usually restricted to references to a few prominent male American artists, namely Bill Viola and Gary Hill, with abriefnodtoNamJunePaik.Perhapsthisisnotsurprisingbecausethenew promotersofartandvideointheUKweregovernedbycommercialinterests
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 161
anditisn’teasytomarketsomethingthatisnotnew.AsBrianO’Dohertysaid in1986,‘visualartdoesnotprogressbyhavingagoodmemory.’YBavideoart showedhoweasyitistorecordoverthepast. Withoutanyoppositionalstress,thecommercialisationofvideoartinthe 1990s led to what Peter Kardia called a ‘collectivisation of consciousness’, which, he noted, was also a feature of fascist art. This was by no means a blanket phenomenon, but where video drew heavily on uniform popular cultural images there was a danger of blandly reflecting the status quo – a danger that had dogged earlier scratch video and television parody. This is particularly evident in contemporary work by artists like Candice Breitz or Douglas Gordon in which appropriated footage from film and television is apparentlydeconstructedthroughrepetition,butfailstotransformtheoriginal whileuncriticallyreiteratingitsideologicalmessages.Asvideowaspromoted toanexpandingandincreasinglycommercialisedmainstream,itlostmuchof its conceptual bite, but gained in aesthetic impact with an increase in scale and picture resolution. Video art as a counter-cultural practice was tamed firstbytelevisioninthere-appropriationofitsformsandsubsequentlybythe transformation of one of its contexts, the art gallery, into an ever-expanding businessempirethatnominatedvideoastheidealmediumonwhichtodisplay itswares. T H E C U L T U R A L T H E O RY Paradoxically,thenewcelebrityofindividualvideoartistssuchasSamTaylorWoodandGillianWearingcoincidedwithahardeningphilosophicalconstruction oftheselfasbothculturallymediatedandfragmented.Whilescientistswere increasingly emphasising the role of genes in human development, Jacques Derrida’s post-structuralist theories once again placed the self firmly in the grip of language. As a vehicle of communication and a carrier of meaning, languagewasnowcharacterisedasunstableandpermeable.Theself,itwas said,couldonlybeunderstoodthroughlanguageandsobecame‘unknowable’ inanydefinitivesense.Therelationshipoftheimagetorealitybecameyetmore tenuousastheothergreatFrenchtheoristJeanBaudrillardextendedDerrida’s understandingoflanguagetothemediaandspectacle.Mediatisedimagesof apparent reality are in fact simulations whose primary raison d’être is their relationshiptootherrepresentationsintheimage-chain,whichisitselfsubject tothetwinobjectivesofprofitandstatus.Inthe1990sthesignanditsplace inthesemioticconstellationsreplacedtheoldrelationshipbetweenimageand reality.Thesignnowtookprecedenceoverthelivedexperienceitfeignedto represent.AsRosettaBrookesputit,‘whentheeventinitsreproducedform becomessociallymoreimportantthanitsoriginalform,thentheoriginalhasto directitselftoitsreproduction.’5Manyartistsillustratedthispost-structuralist
1 6 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
vision of web-like linguistic forms by creating labyrinthine, ‘rhizomatic’ artworks,oftenwiththehelpofcomputers. If an artistic image is merely a simulation in a network of simulations of aneventstagedforeffect,ithasnobasisinrealityandneednotbeboundby theethicsandlawsgoverningdirectactionandotherformsofrepresentation. Thistypeofreasoningledmanyartiststograntthemselvesalicencetorecycle the most sensationalist images already in circulation. One example of this processisevidentinJohanGrimonperez’sDialH-I-S-T-O-R-Y(1997)inwhich hesetsnewsfootageofairplanehijackingstopopularsongs.ChrisDarkehas interpreted this work as revealing the ‘murderous reciprocity of the media/ terroristrelationship’.6Thismaywellbeso,butmyownunderstandingofthe tapefromascreeningIattendedinCanadaisthattheartistboughtintothe mythology of the terrorist as hero – or, in the case of Leila Khaled, as folk heroine.Whateverincisivereflectiononthemediamayberepresentedbythe work,italsoinsultstherealityofthewomanwhosesonlaydyinginherarms followingaterroristattackonanairport.Shedidn’thavewhatSusanSontag recentlydescribedas‘theluxuryofpatronisingreality’.7Thesamecouldbesaid fortheparticipantsinSantiagoSierra’sphotographicworksthatdocumenthis employmentofmigrantworkersandEasternEuropeanprostitutesinpointless activities.Theartistmaybesignallingtheirplightfromthesafetyofagallery andaninternationalreputation,butfortheindividualsheexploitedtomakehis pointorindeedthemotherwhosegriefGrimonperezissohappytorecycle,the imagesrepresentarealitythatwilllivewiththemtherestoftheirdays. The cynical postmodern play of signs in the 1990s was underpinned by a kind of nihilistic pessimism, what Jake Chapman called a ‘degenerate sublime’thatwasusedtomocktheestablishmentforitsarchaicconventions and discredited notions of progress. Although burnished to commercial art perfection,theimageitselfhadbecomesodevaluedasapoliticalagentthat any notion of oppositional practice was dismissed as ‘anthropological’ and unsustainable. How could one offer a critique of society based on reports of individualexperiencesormarginalisedsubjectivitieswhentheverynotionof authenticity, so long enshrined in video recording, was called into question? AmeliaJonesattackedearlierfeminists,includingme,forournaïveassumption that it was possible to explore femininity outside the mediations of culture andlanguageastheyplayoutacrosstheimageofwoman,eitherliveorprerecorded. Peggy Phelan argued that a kind of radical invisibility was more effective than the precarious business of negotiating an irretrievably marked bodyorwhatshecalled‘theideologyofthevisible’.Betweenpostmodernist permissivenessandarecycledMarxistfeministattackontheimage,videoas deconstructive critique, revelatory or counter-cultural practice was no longer seentobelegitimate.Videowasnowimpotentasacatalystforchange.
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 163
TELLING IT LIKE IT ISN’T The video portrait admits defeat: the human escapes. Sean Cubitt Discredited as the medium of truth, video in the 1990s was more often discussed for what it couldn’t do than for what it actually achieved. Sam Taylor-Wood’s video Killing Time (1994) was interpreted by Mike O’Pray as a work that ‘subverts portraiture as a mode of revelation’.8 The installation is based on four of Taylor-Wood’s friends miming casually to the soaring arias of Richard Strauss’ Electra. The mimers make no pretence to any real orimaginedrelationshipwiththemusicandwhennotmouthingthelibretto, theyintermittentlyfidget,smoke,bitetheirnailsorlookarounddisconsolately. Thebanalityoftheirperformanceandtheunlikelihoodthattheseindividuals couldaspiretotheheightsofgrandoperahavetheeffectofmakingtragictheir adolescenttorporaswellasrenderingabsurdtheexcessesofoperaticshrieking. SomewhatinfluencedbyRichardAvedonandPeggyPhelan,O’Prayarguesthat allself-revelationisakindofperformanceandactsasameansofconcealment asmuchasofexposition.Taylor-Woodwouldappeartobeinterestedinwhat O’Praycallstheleakages,theflawsintheperformancethatoffercluestothe truefeelingsoftheperformer.So,Taylor-Woodispursuing‘truth’afterall.She assumes that the non-performances will reveal something of the performers’ subjectivitiesandcreatesavideoportraitofsorts,howevermediated. UnlikeMarshallandthenewnarrativistsbeforeher,Taylor-Wooddoesnot believethattransformationmightresultfromtheinterrogationofcultureand how the individual came to be formed. As she says, ‘why offer hope when in many instances there isn’t any hope. I’m showing things how they are.’9 Taylor-Woodisundoubtedlyrighttosuggestthatvideoartisunlikelytohelp people trapped in inner-city poverty, for instance, even when it is made by someone as prominent as herself. However, underlying her comment there appearstobeanapathyorsenseofresignationtotheinevitablealienationof theindividualwithinwesternculturedominatedbytheomnipresenceoflensbasedreproductivemedia. AsabalancetoTaylor-Wood’ssenseofpoliticalimpotenceinthe1990s,the notion of performativity arose in both photography and video, positing selfrevelationandgesture–anactingoutacrossthesurfaceofthebody–asdynamic formsofself-definition.Thecreationofmeaninginartnowshiftedfromthe ‘active’viewerbacktothesubjectoftheworkwhowasseentoformtheimage withthecomplicityoftheimage-maker,frequentlyoneandthesameperson, asinthecaseofCindySherman.Shecouldplayanypart,inhabitanypersona, noonebeingmoreauthenticthananyother.Hertrueidentity,iftherewasone, wasmadeupofahybridised,shiftingamalgamofthemall.Theperformative
1 6 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
withitsimplicationsofself-inventionseemstosuggestacoreequalitythatis not,infact,upheldbysocialorphysicalreality.Povertycannotturntowealth bypretendingandmuttoncanonlyveryimperfectlyimpersonatelamb.Peter Gidalremindsushownotionsofdifferenceoncejustifiedsocialinequalityand now, he says, sameness is fulfilling the same role. ‘The “performative”,’ he writes, ‘gives one – and everyone equally – an identity that isn’t oppressed becauseit’salljustamasqueradeanyway.Samenessasaconcepttosellusyet againthelieofdemocracyinsocialandpersonal-psychologicalterms.’10 Unable or unwilling to declare a subjectivity or a social position separate fromthecatalogueofpre-existingrepresentations,individualsnowexperienced themselvesasanamorphousclusterofaspirationalinfluencesandconsumer desires. It is this internal fragmentation and almost symbiotic relationship withpopularculturethathasmaintainedastrongparodicstraininvideointo the1990s.Inspiteofthetheoreticiansdeclaringtheprojectdoomedfromthe outset,theyBagenerationwereascommittedtodescribingthechainsthatbind asweretheirantecedents.Perhapstheywerebetrayinganunconscioushope inheritedfromthepreviousgenerationthatnamingthetyrantisthefirststep towardslooseningitsgrip. PA RO DY, A G A I N – W R E S T L I N G W I T H T H E I C O N S In common with 1980s feminists, a need to externalise the internal struggle withculturalidealsmanifestswidelyinwomen’svideointhe1990sbothinside andoutsidetheyBagroup.Suchworkoftenincorporatedtheaestheticofthe popsongandadopteditasthebasictemporalunit,thetapelastingprecisely aslongasthemusic.InI’mNotTheGirlWhoMissesMuch,(1996),Pipilotti RistcoverstheJohnLennonsongandineptly,butprovocatively,performsitto cameraaddinganotherlayerofinterferenceintheoriginalbyfast-forwarding andrewindingthefootage.Theimagebreaksup,abstractsthenreformsina playfuldigitaltimegame.ThedistanceinyearsbetweenherselfandLennon,the gapbetweenherflawedperformanceandtheoriginal,theparodicperformance of a 1960s go-go dancer and the technological collapse of video realism all pointtotheimperfectabsorptionofculturebytheindividual.Thisimperfection suggests a kernel of resistance that puts paid to the arguments of semiotic essentialistswhoseenothingbuttheworkingsoflanguageandcultureinthe make-upoftheindividual. Ristisunusualinherwillingnesstotamperwiththerealismoftheimage andI’mNotTheGirlWhoMissesMuchisreminiscentofDavidHall’sclassic ThisisaTelevisionReceiver(1976)thatsimilarlydeconstructedaniconicmedia image. No such optical interference exists in Gillian Wearing’s Dancing in Peckham(1995)inwhichtheartistbopsawayinashoppingcentremuchtothe bemusement of passers-by. Her dance is balanced precariously between self-
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 165
25. Pipilotti Rist, I’m Not The Girl Who Misses Much (1996), still of single channelvideotape,5’.Courtesyoftheartist,Hauser&Wirth,Zurich,London andLuhringAugustine,NewYork. expressionandtheTVshowTopofthePops,aspacethatRussellFergusonhas identifiedasexisting‘betweentheparametersthatdefineoursocialnormality andthenotionalpointofunmediatedexpression’.11Theambiguityofthework may contain the crisis of contemporary subjectivity but, without the critical context,ithasatendencytodefaulttothemodelofone-dimensionalsexual displaythathasbeenestablishedbyTopofthePopsandelevatedtothelevel ofsoftpornographyinmusicvideos.Inthelate1990s,theAmericanperformer AnnMcGuiremadeaseriesofblackandwhitetapesthatdigalittledeeper. Theworkscentreontheartistsingingversionsofsentimentalsongs,spot-lit onalonelystage.Althoughtrue,hersingingconstantlyveersawayfromthe establishedformulaandseemstoskirttheedgesofhysteria,drugaddictionand madnessthatwerealwayssimmeringundertheperformancesoficonicfigures like Judy Garland and Billie Holiday. The struggle for self-expression within themimeticconfinesofthemusicalvernaculariswhatgivestheseworkstheir tension.Whereearlierfeministsworethemasqueradelikeacostume,withan essentialselfbeneathwaitingtobeliberated,womeninthe1990sexternalised whatwasalreadypartofthem,namelythoseelementsoftheculturethathave cometoembodytheiraspirationsbutwhichrubupagainstunnamedenergies anddesiresthatcallfromoutsidetheperimeterfenceofthemonoculture.
1 6 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
The illusion of mastery that dressing up and impersonation have always promisedgirlsisperfectlyencapsulatedbythevideosofJaneandLouiseWilson, aUKduowhohavereplicatedtheeditingandperformancestyleofthe1970sTV series,TheAvengers.InNormopaths(1995)thegirlsareseencrashingthrough doorsandleapingupstairwaysinpursuitofsomeimaginarylaw-breaker.The work is all ironic performance and no narrative and, once transposed to the galleryorfineartcontext,revisitstheformaldevicesthatwould,initsoriginal broadcastformat,actinasupportingroletothestoryline.IntheWilsonsisters’ case,thisstrippingawayofthenarrativetorevealthegesturalinfrastructure of the series could be read in the context of celebratory feminism, a kind of updatedmirrorphaseprojectingadesiretoendorseandaspiretothepowerof thecrime-bustingEmmaPeel.However,thereisacertainmannerisminvolved intherecyclingofapopularculturalicon,itselfaformofdramatichyperbole. As David Hall commented, work based on circular, postmodern reiterations are ‘critical in their content, but they are not really critical of display’.12 The internalplayofimageryinanotherwisesecuredeploymentofrealismsuggests thesamereverencefortheoriginalthatscratchistsbetrayedandcaststhe1990s artistlessasanoppositionalculturalirritantthanasanunproblematicproduct ofsociety,albeitacreativeone.Themutemimicryofafemaleheroinealsohas atendencytorefutethepoweroffemalespeech–inthatitomitsthosesharp commentsDianaRiggdeliveredwithsuchprecision.Insteadsheisre-presented primarilyasaneroticisedbody,whereassexyathleticswereonlypartofthe repertoireofRigg’soriginalperformances. In the 1990s, the postmodern parody knowingly recycled the ever-present imagesofpopularcultureandalso,sometimesunconsciously,thoseofearlier performance art and even the traditions of painting and sculpture. In Cheryl Donegan’s Make Dream (1993), the artist mimics the films that were made of Jackson Pollock at work and executes her own action paintings. As she paints, her movements evoke the energetic gyrations of the modern music videoperformer,combiningthephallicmythologyofPollockwiththesexual provocationofthego-godancer.YaelFeldman’sJereviensbientot(1995)once againrevisitsthepopularsong,thistimeasacounterpointtotheimageofa womansportingableedingnose,drippingpaintfromherbody.CeciliaParsberg extended the painterly theme by spitting colour at the camera, while Cheryl Donegan drank ravenously from a punctured milk container and Stephanie Smithkissedredlipstickalloverawoman’sbody.MichaelCurranalsofavoured a soundtrack dominated by a popular song, this time the ballad Sentimental Journey (his version, 1995) and juxtaposed it with his own image. Sporting a black eye from the night before, the artist is seen calmly shaving in the mirrorwhilethebeatgoeson.Thesecorporealvideosalludedtotherepetitive performances of early conceptual video-makers and performance artists like WilliamWegman,VitoAcconci,GinaPaneandBruceNaumanwhilstembracing
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 167
26.HarrisonandWood,SixBoxes(1997),videotape.Courtesyoftheartistsand theUK/CanadianFilmandVideoExchange. theabjectandthevisceral,aswellastheprimitivistaspectsofactionpainting. In the UK, Harrison and Wood produced a series of cleverly choreographed physicalperformancestocamerathatmanagedtoparodyslapstickcomedyas wellas1970sperformanceartexemplifiedbytheexaggeratedposturingofthe performance groups Nice Style and Station House Opera not to mention the coollinesofmodernistsculpturebestachievedbyDonaldJudd.Inworkslike DeviceandCross-Over(IMissYou)(1996),minimalistboxes,stairsandwalls areafoiltotheabsurdphysicalendeavoursthatsometimescreateanillusion ofweightlessnessorentrapmentandatothertimescontrivetotransformthe artistsintoungainlypuppetsinaslowsculpturaldance.HarrisonandWood’s sculpturalreferencesarerareincontemporaryworkandthemaincontribution ofartistsemerginginthe1990swastheirboldreworkingsofpopularculture, musicvideosparticularly,withperformanceconventionsthatwerebecoming suchapotentinfluenceonteenagestyle,behaviourandambition.Doneganin theUSAandSmithintheUKalsotookontherhetoricofpornographywithits relativegenderpositioningthatinvolvedonesellingandtheother‘buyingintoa
1 6 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
womanfakingit’.13Likeotherparodicphasesofvideo,theseworksweremixed intheirabilitytosubverttheoriginaland,likethepromosandadvertisements fromwhichtheydrew,manyofthemhadundeservedlyshortshelflives. F I L M I N T H E G A L L E RY Withtelevisionhavingrevertedtoaclosedshop,manyofthesesatiricalvideo artistsdependedontheoldavant-gardedistributionnetworkstodisseminate theirworkandonlyafew,liketheWilsontwins,managedtoforgeallianceswith mainstreamgalleries.Oncethegalleriesopenedup,practitionerswhosecentral commitmentwastofilmwerefirstthroughthedoor.Theyquicklyrealisedthat withtraditionalsourcesoffundingdryingupandcommercialfilmsincreasingly difficulttogetofftheground,galleriesofferedanewformofalternativecinema. Atthesametime,theArtsCouncilofEnglandandotherpublicfundershad budgetstospendonexperimentalmovingimage.Establishedartist-film-makers likeIsaacJulienandMarkLucas,yBanewcomerslikeSamTaylor-Woodand Gillian Wearing and artists like Matthew Barney and Kutlug Ataman, whose natural home was in the commercial sector, all took advantage of the new willingnessofgalleriestoembracethemovingimage. Galleries may have regarded their involvement with film as a radical departure,butmanyartistsandtheoristsproclaimedthedeathofcinemaand recastthegalleryasakindofcinematictomb,a‘repositoryforthesplintersand debrisofcinema’.14Thedemiseandghostlyresurrectionoffilmseemstohave beentriggeredbytheproliferationofmovingimagedeliverysystems–digital games, video, surveillance, multiple television channels and the Internet. Although people still go to the movies, film theorists have now consigned ‘Cinema’toapre-digitalpast.Thedigitalnowmarksathresholdbeforewhich wearelikelytobewatchingacastofdeadpeople,spectralHollywoodicons magically preserved and reanimated on celluloid. This association with the past, with death itself, is not yet a feature of video. With a shorter history, video only acts as an embalmer of our youthful faces. And yet, it is video technologythathasallowedfilmtobearchived,stilled,andanalysedframeby-frameasinDouglasGordon’s24HourPsycho(1995).Transferredtovideo, Hitchcock’smasterpieceisslowedto24hours,tovirtualstasis,thecondition from which it started – the stillness of the individual celluloid frame being whatLauraMulveyhascalled,‘film’sbestkeptsecret’.15Gordonclaimsthat the suspended animation of Psycho reveals the ‘unconscious’ of the film, a level of meaning of which Hitchcock was unaware. This might correspond to Barthes’ notion of the ‘obtuse’ or supplementary meaning of a film that has no narrative propulsion, seeks no closures, but elicits a more visceral, emotionalresponseintheviewer.Thiscanbethecurveofabrow,timbreof avoice,subtletyofagesture,abeautifuloruglyfacethat,togetherwiththe
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 169
intendedmeaningoftheimage,createsapolysemousreading.Sometimesthese meanings are contradictory and co-exist ‘saying the opposite without giving upthecontrary’.16Myownviewhasalwaysbeenthatin24HourPsycho,the obtuse‘unconscious’meaningwassimplyHitchcock’sownskillsrevealed.As heworkedcloselywithhiseditorframebyframe,hewouldhaveknownexactly whatsubtextswereseepingoutofthemiseenscène.Gordon’scontributionis tohaveallowedusmoretimetoappreciatethefilm’ssubtleinterrelationship ofnarrativeandimageinthecontextofourcollectiveknowledgeofPsycho’s nowmythicstoryline. 24HourPsychoisanexampleofacontemporaryfetishisationofHollywood in general and Hitchcock in particular.17 Aided by new digital technologies, otherfilmartistsarenowre-stagingemblematicfilmsorkeysequencesfrom Hollywood movies. Mark Lewis, a Canadian artist currently working in the UK,hasrecreatedMichaelPowell’scontroversialfilm,PeepingTom(2000).The originalPeepingTom(1960)toldthestoryofayoungcameraassistantwho,in hissparetime,murderedwomenwithacamerariggedwithalethalspike.This allowedhimtofilmtheterrorandgruesomedeathsofhisvictims.Inhisversion, MarkLewisusesactorstorestagesequencesthatwewitnessedbeingshotbythe protagonistintheprimaryfilm,butthatweneversaw.Lewis’‘part-cinema’isa
27.MarkLewis,PeepingTom(2000),35mmfilm(looped),transferredtoDVD. Courtesyoftheartist.
1 7 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
truncatedversionoftheoriginal.Itisbothellipticalandcircularanddependson itsvisualrichnesstoachievethetensionandmenaceforwhichPowelllargely reliedonnarrative.TheresultsinbothLewis’andGordon’sworkareoftenas magicalandunsettlingasanythingcreatedbyHollywood.Unsettlingbecause the narrative closure of mainstream cinema is denied whilst our scopophilic fascinationwiththeimageisindulged.Althoughthereissomeinvestigationof formalconventionsfollowingtheabstractionofthenarrativeframework,the attachmenttotheoriginalhasmeantthattheimageisrarelydefacedaswould havebeenthepracticewithearlierexperimentalfilm-makerswhoscratched, paintedandcolourisedfoundfootage.Thedeconstruction,wherethereisone, isatthelevelofcinematicgrammar,butnotfilmicillusionism.AsChrisDarke contends,theworksappealtoviewers’recollectionsoftheprimaryfilmand so constitute a kind of historicism. This differs from the contemporaneity of scratchvideointhe1980s,whichdealtmainlywithbroadcastimagerythatwas currentlyincirculation. Cinematic pastiches in the mid to late 1990s reveal the extent to which the creative imagination is colonised by the phantasms of Hollywood film. They are also a form of retreat from the real, a re-immersion in the escapist enchantmentsofacelluloiddreamland.Itisalwayseasiertorecycleanelegant, glamorousandillusivepastratherthanfacetheuncomfortablerealitiesofthe newmillennium.Assuch,theworkofartistslikeGordonandLewishavean anthropological or social dimension in that their fascination with Hollywood reflects the preoccupations of an increasingly mediatised and politically disillusionedgenerationwhoalsonostalgicallyrecyclethesoundsandimages ofthe1950s,1960s,1970sandnoweventhe1980s. Otherfilmartistsinthe1990susedthecinematicidiomintheirwork,but went beyond the now clichéd ‘message’ that western identity is formed as muchbythesilverscreenasbyfamilyandthestate.MichaelMaziere,working intheUK,shiftstheemphasisbacktothepowerofindividualvisionandhas evolvedalyricalfusionofblackandwhitefilmclipsandoriginalfootage.He practiseswhathecalls‘cine-video’,amultilayered,intertextualfusionofthe personal and the cultural that is also evident in the work of other secondgeneration experimental film-makers like Nina Danino, John Maybury and Nicky Hamlyn. Filmic references abound in the American Matthew Barney’s epic Cremaster Cycle (1994–2002) in which staged set pieces evade narrative closure whilst over-compensating with the allure of pure spectacle. Barney rejoices in a kind of baroque mannerism, but like Maziere and Danino, he worksprincipallywithhisownfootage.Theseartistsprovethatitispossibleto createanewsynthesisbetweenthelanguageandworld-viewofHollywoodand theaestheticresistanceoftheindividualimaginationthatisbroughttobearon whatcontinuallybombardsitundertheguiseofentertainment. Ratherthanconsigningtheossifiedremainsofcinematothegallery,artists
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 171
suchasMatthewBarneyandSteveMcQueenareseeingthevalueoftheirwork beingshownundercinematicconditions,somethingexperimentalfilm-makers have known all along. The difficulties of holding the attention of visitors to a gallery are partly solved by putting the viewer back in a cinema seat and plungingtheauditoriumintodarkness.Thevisualfieldisreduced,distancecues aredisabledandconcentrationontheprojectedimageisvirtuallyguaranteed. Art has always found a place in the cinema, from the days of surrealist film onwards, but early video art was also frequently shown in darkened spaces, groupedintoprogrammed,monitor–basedscreeningswithmanyoftheartists presenttoenterintolivedebateswiththeaudienceattheend.Itwasnoteasy to walk out halfway through especially when subjected to durational works byone’stutors.TheUKartistSteveHawleyisallinfavourofreinventingthe immersiveexperiencesofcinema.Contrarytotheviewsofstructuralistsinthe 1970s,henowregardsthecinemaasaplaceofactivespectatorshipinwhichthe criticalfacultiesremainalive,judginggoodandbadperformances,specialeffects andstorylinesbasedonaccumulatedknowledgeofthecinema.Thecinemaisa socialspace,oneinwhichafilmisexperiencedsimultaneouslywithothers.Itis alsoatraditionalsiteofsubsidiaryhumanactivities.AsHawleysays,weusedto gotothecinemato‘eat,drink,smoke,havesexualexperiencesandfantasise’.18 Hawleywantstoreinstatewhathecalls‘non-stopcinema’inwhichaudiences could drop in at any time and settle comfortably with their popcorn while a cyclingprogrammeofvideo-filmsrepeatsthroughtheafternoon.Althoughthere wouldbenocoercioninvolved,non-stopcinemahasthepotentialtore-enchant thecinematicexperiencesufficientlytoenticeviewerstowhileawayadayat thecinema,justaswedidinthe1960suntilallgoodcitizenswereinstructedto gohomebytheplayingofthenationalanthem. THE CONSEQUENCES FOR VIDEO The incursion of film into the gallery across the 1990s has compounded the displacement of video history that the yBa generation began in the UK. Critics’ insistence on film history as the primary conceptual framework for gallery-basedmovingimagearthasmeantthatthelinksbetween,forinstance, Mark Lewis and the 1980s video-maker Mark Willcox are not discussed and theoriginsofvideoasagallery,broadcastandagitationalpracticehavebeen suppressed.Theknowledgethatcinematiclanguageprovidedthefoundation ofallmovingimageartshouldnotmaskthefactthatacritiqueofthelinguistic andspectatorialspecificitiesoftelevisionwasagenerativeimpetusforvideo inthegallery,especiallyintheUK.Filmhasitsowngalleryhistory,intheUK throughtheinstallationsofartistslikeChrisWelsby,MalcolmleGriceandJill Eatherley.Theyemphasisedtheontology,apparatusandspaceoffilmandin ‘ExpandedCinema’introducedacrucialelementofliveperformance.Thecrisis
1 7 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
of the image that film-makers have been experiencing recently seems not to haveaffectedestablishedandrecentvideo-makers.Forthem,theproliferation ofcommunicationsformatsonlyenrichesthefieldofpotentialplatformsand strategiesofintervention,culminatinginNetartwheretheMarxist-drivendesire to bypass a capitalist art market still survives.19 However antithetical to the participationofartists,televisioninallitsguisesremainsaspowerfulareferent ascinemahistoryinthenewgallery-basedartofthemovingimage.Outsidethe UK,CandiceBreitzhasmadeworksnostalgicallybasedaroundpopular1980s TVshowsandayoungbreedof‘recombinant’Canadianartistshavereinvented scratch video, lifting material directly from current broadcasting. Since more peoplewatchtelevisionthanvisitthemovies,theseworksshouldbeatleast asinterestingtotheoristsandcommentatorsasthosethatrelateprimarilyto Hollywoodfilm. TH E CONV ERGENCE OF FI L M AND V I D EO Attheturnofthetwenty-firstcentury,thedistinctionbetweenvideoandfilm hasvirtuallydisappearednowthatatechnologicalconvergencehastakenplace inthewidespreadadoptionofdigitalimagingtechniques.Asartists,wearenow labouringinwhatMichaelRushcallsapost-mediumworld.Whateverformats anartistshootson,theworkisinvariablyediteddigitallyonacomputerand displayedbyavideoprojectorormonitor.Itisjustasfrequentlyflattenedinto plasma screens achieving the resolution of hyper-realist paintings. There are exceptions. In the UK, Tacida Dean deliberately shoots, edits and projects in thegallerywithfilmtechnology.Theapparatusoftheprojectorisacriticalif rather museological element in the display of the work. The quality of both therecordingandprojectionofvideohasimprovedtosuchanextentthatitis becomingdifficulttodistinguishitfromfilm.Artiststalkaboutfilmwhenthey areshootingonvideoandmakewhattheycallvideoswithfilmicproportions and intent. Some, like Gordon, Maziere and Lewis, choose to explore the movingimageinrelationtoitscinematicheritage;othersmaintainthecritical andformallinkswithearlyvideo,castingadeconstructiveeyeovertelevisual practices,surveillance,videogamesand,latterly,theInternet.Asvideoartis itself consigned to cultural history and becomes vulnerable to the nostalgia of commentators like me, I shall end my account by discussing a selection of contemporary works that appear to revisit and in many cases extend the ideologiesandformalconcernsofthehistoryIhaveexpounded. POLITICAL ENGAGEMENT In the last few years there has been a discernible re-awakening of political awareness in video art. This might be attributed to a humanitarian sense of
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 173
horror at the ongoing conflicts in the Middle East, on the borders of India and Pakistan, and in the Sudan. Perhaps we will retrospectively identify a turningpointinthewake-upcallofthescenesofdevastationinNewYorkof September11th,2001andthesubsequent,bewilderingAmericaninterventions in Afghanistan. It could well be that the cynical manipulation of UK and US opinion leading up to the GW2 has also rekindled the flame of protest inyoungerheartsandmindsforwhomuncensored,divergentinformationis now readily available on the Internet. Perhaps the energetic protests of the anti-globalisationmovementhaveshownthatdissentingvoicesstillcan,with determination,makethemselvesheard. Thereturnofsociallymarkedcontentcouldalsobeamanifestationofthe economic cycles of art. The fine art industry, in line with the wider market forces governing fashion, music and entertainment, trades on the new and is subject to cyclical changes that depend on a certain cultural amnesia as wellasthecirculationandconstantrenewalofconsumerdesire.Astimehas threatenedtheyBaphenomenonwithobsolescence,itbecomesclearthatthe culture industry needs to be fed with something new. The young invariably desecratewhatwassacredtotheold.Wherethe1990swerelargelydedicated tolifestyletribalism,aestheticcynicismandcommercialsuccess,sowemight expectthenewkidsontheblocktoembraceawidersenseofcommunityand culturaldiversityandalsorejecttheprofit-drivenstructuresoftheartmarket.I maybewrongbut,ironically,marketforcescouldwellthrustsociallyconnected artistsintotheculturallimelight. Thenewpoliticalsensibilityinartquitelogicallyenlistsvideoasawitnessing medium. Video permits the recording of extended testaments and suits the urgencyofspeechthatwascharacteristicofagit-propvideointhe1960s.As ImentionedinChapter8,Ann-SofiSidenprimarilyusedvideoinherLondon exhibitionWarteMal!ProstitutionaftertheVelvetRevolution(2002).Inessence, theworkisasocialdocumentthatrecordsthelivesofwomenforwhomthe VelvetRevolutionhasbroughtpovertyandthepainfuloptionofcross-border prostitutionintownslikeDubiinCzechoslovakia.In2003,KutlugAtamanalso showed a series of extended video interviews with marginalised individuals fromhisnativeTurkey,includinganelderlytheatrediva,aterrorist,apolitical refugee and a transvestite prostitute. My own work in recent years has been basedonextensiveinterviewswithbothFrenchandEnglishmembersofthe wartimeSASinanattempttounravelthestoryofmyfather’swar. Where video was the primary medium of witness for these works, the Croatian artist Sanja Ivekovic´, employed video as one among many tools in aninvestigativeprocess.SearchingformyMother’sNumber(2002)catalogues theartist’ssearchforinformationinanattempttopiecetogetherthestoryof hermother’sincarcerationinAuschwitz.Aswellasvideo,theworkincludes referencebooks,periodphotographsandotherinformationlaidoutontables
1 7 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
asinamuseumorlibrary.UnlikeAtamanandSiden,Ivekovic´worksfroma declared position, in this case that of a daughter searching out her mother’s history.AsituatedpointofviewalsoinformsAmarKanwar’sASeasonOutside (1997–2002).ShotalongthebordersofIndiaandPakistan,Kanwar’sfilmisa beautifullyobserveddocumentaryandapersonalodyssey.Theartist’svoiceoverdescribeshissearchforunderstandingofthehistoricalconflictbetween thetwocountriesthatforcedhisfamilytoflee.Helamentsthefailureofreason topreventviolencebetweenanestablishednationand‘acommunityforcedto takeuparmsindefenceofitsidentity’. It is legitimate to ask how these works differ from British television documentaries that have, at different times, interrogated similar issues, sometimestogreateffect.Ofcourse,amoreinsidioustypeofsensationalist‘freak show’documentaryfillsourscreensonanalmostnightlybasis,chroniclingthe careers of mass-murderers, Nazi henchmen as well as prurient and intrusive investigations into the lives of sex workers. Leaving aside the question of sensationalism,whichcanbeatemptationtousall,thefirstdifferenceisthat unlikeatelevisionprogrammethatisconsumedinprivate,videoslikethose of Ataman and Siden, expose viewers to public scrutiny. In Warte Mal!, for instance,spectatorsarewatchedwatchingthegirlsbytheirfellowgallery-goers. Forme,itwasnotalwaysacomfortableexperience. Iwouldarguethatwhenaworkpivotsonadeclaredpositioninwhichthe artistenterstheframewithhisorhermotivesimplicatedinthework,akind ofnarrativeequityisestablishedthatavoidstheobjectificationofthesubjects under observation. In the case of Ann-Sofi Siden, and perhaps Ivekovic´, we might apply Griselda Pollock’s argument that a woman artist setting up a dialoguewithotherwomenconstitutesa‘momentoffeminism’transcending thebarriersofclassandprivilege.20Withasubjectsuchasprostitution,defined byfixedpowerrelationsandchargedwithsexualdesire,itishardtoundermine the recuperative powers of the consuming gaze and the egalitarian ‘moment of feminism’ might well get lost. But these extended individual testaments stillconstituteaverydifferentapproachtoanequivalentworkontelevision. As I have argued, television documentaries’ tendency to atomise witnesses’ narrativesresultsinalossoftheiridentityandwestruggletorememberanyone individualwithwhomtodevelopanempatheticrelationship.Allthatremains at the end of the programme is the undeclared world-view of the producers andtheirbosses.Overall,artistsallowtheirsubjectstospeakuninterrupted, sometimes,asinthecaseofAtaman,forseveralhours.Theproblemthatarises inagallerycontextisthatthereisnoobligationtocommittotheduration.The free-roaming viewer whose spectatorship is to a large extent determined by theshortattentionspanproducedbyaculturaldietofmultipleTVchannels, unwittinglyreplicatesthefracturingofindividualidentitiesbycruisingbetween images,samplingthejuicybitsandeditingoutwhatmaybetoodemanding.
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 175
However, the work does create the opportunity to stay with an on-screen subjectandwhenthesubjectisalsotheartist,thenthespectatorisofferedwhat TomShermancalls‘apointofviewclosertotheground,morelikeone’sown perception’.Fromhere,DanReeves’memoriesofVietnamandAmarKanwar’s experiencesofpartitioninIndia,bothfamiliartousintheformoftelevision news,canbe‘revisited,orkeptalive,ormeasuredforchange’.Shermanalso makesthepointthatartists’workcanshowuptheinconsistenciesanddistortions inthenewsandinsanctionedtelevisiondocumentaries.21Onceengagedwith thework,theviewercanestablishacriticaldistancefromideologicallymarked accountsoratleastconsideranalternative.JulianStallabrasshassuggestedthat thepresenceoftheartist’ssubjectivity,thephysicalspacetheworkoccupies andthecommitmenttheviewermakesinwanderingitsgeographyallhelpto makethemessagemoretangible,morereal.Incontrasttothehomogenising effectofinformationgleanedataglancefromtelevision,visitorstoagallery mayfindthemselves‘graspingasituationimaginativelythatbeforetheyhad onlyunderstoodintellectually’.22 It is the speculative nature of contemporary social video and its apparent ideological neutrality that distinguishes it from earlier political video. Many of the issues we saw in the earlier tapes, at least in the UK, were made in the context of national campaigns addressing employment, health, including abortion, housing, gay and women’s rights and discriminatory practices of every kind. Now, the majority of artists work independently of any social initiative, any organised campaign. They nonetheless address the issues of theageandoftenacknowledgetheinherentcontradictionsofpoliticalwork. Whatever their strategy, the video-films of these artists turn away from the culturalintrospectionandlatentnarcissismofpostmodernismandonceagain attempttoconfrontthereal. A S E N S E O F P L AC E , O F H I S T O RY A N D P E R S O N A L V I S I O N Politicalawarenessinmovingimagehasbeentransformedfromaclearvoice ofprotestsupportingspecifiedcampaignstoaspeculativesenseofplaceand historywithindividualsconstitutedasmigratingidentities,constantlymoving outwardandawayfromtheirpointsoforigin.EdwardSaidhassuggestedthat ‘modern culture is in the large part the work of exiles, émigrés, refugees.’23 These displaced individuals are frequently drawn back to their countries of origin,seekingouttheborderstheyfirstcrossed,whicharenowemblematic sitesofdiasporicexperienceaswellassymbolsofthetensionandconflictthat theyleftbehind.Armedwiththetechnology,skillsandoftentheideologiesof anotherculture,theytrytoconstructaviableidentitybetweenthesometimes conflicting point of origin and the ultimate destination. As Mark Nash has suggested,therehasbeenacomplex‘reworking(of)thecolonialarchive’.24Many
1 7 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
artistsseekevidenceofpasteventsandtransmitthemwithinthewitnessing modeofdocumentarywhileotherstakealessdidacticapproach,reinvesting a landscape or place with the force of aesthetic vision forged between two culturesandchargedbyindividualexperience. ShirinNeshathasturnedthemovingimageintoanalmostritualisticexperience withhermesmericblackandwhiteinstallationsbasedonthesongs,ritualsand socialtraditionsoftheIslamiccultureintowhichshewasborn.Tooba(2002)isa simpletwo-screenprojectioninwhichanoldwomanisseenstanding,barefaced andimpassive,withherbacktoalargetreeisolatedinawalledenclosure.On the opposite screen, groups of men chant in a circle, then emerge from the desiccated landscape and converge on the enclosure like ants. The fate of the womanremainsunclearasthemenandthenotherwomenandchildrenbegin to climb over the wall. The allegorical roots of the work remain obscure, but the tension between woman and man, between Islamic censure and western freedomsaswellasthemoreancientpowersofIslamicpoetry,writtenmostlyby women,havebeenrecurringthemesinNeshat’sworkandinfusethiscompelling
28.ShirinNeshat,Tooba(2002).CourtesyoftheartistandBarbaraGladstone Gallery,NewYork.
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 177
installation.25 Tabea Metzel, writing in the Documenta 11 catalogue, suggests that the double screen format can symbolise the duality of the work and ‘the emotionalconditionofawomancaughtbetweentwoworlds’.Asimilarsenseof culturalhybridityisevidentinTheWhiteStation(1999),asingle-screenworkby theIranianSeifollahSamadian.ShotinTehran,WhiteStationisaspare,virtually blackandwhitefilmthatobservesafemalefiguredressedintheregulationblack chadorwaitingatabusstopbyaprison-likebuilding,enfoldedinableakwinter landscape.LikeasmallLowryfigure,thewomanwalkstoandfro,buffetedby the swirling snow. Very little happens. An occasional vehicle passes, another darkfigureapproachesandwalksawayandacrowfidgetsonthebarebranch ofatree.Thewoman,huddledunderherumbrella,waitsforabusthatnever comes.Thesenseofconfinementwithinthedesignatedroleoffemininityunder thepost-revolutionaryregimeisreinforcedbythecruelextremesoftheelements penetrating her winter clothes. Her waiting is the hiatus of women who have beenforcedtoreturntotheoppressionofanearlierage.Sheisnotjustwaiting forabus–sheiswaitingforchange. Areturntothesiteofpoliticaleventsoraplacerepresentingtheongoing oppressionofaraceorconflictbetweenraceswasalreadywellestablishedin the1990sinthevideoinstallationsoftheIrishartistWillieDoherty.Thecities and lanes of rural Northern Ireland form the backdrop to journeys that are tense with the anticipation of violence. A suspicious shape by the roadside, an obstacle across the track, night-time surveillance of the city all leave the viewerunsureastothenatureofthesubjectpositionbeingdepicted–victim oraggressor,socialcommentatororpoetofcitylightsandtheCelticlandscape. Theworkridesoncommonknowledgeofthe‘troubles’inNorthernIreland, butitalsoopensuplevelsofprojectionandimaginativeunderstandingwhich drynewsreportsfailtoilluminate. UKartistSteveMcQueenusesasimilarblendofaestheticisationandsocial observation in his single-screen projection Western Deep (2002). The work isasmuchanexplorationofthetexturalqualityofmagnifiedandprocessed imageryasitisanexposéoftheappallingworkingconditionsSouthAfrican gold miners endure. Unlike the 1970s coal miners’ tapes in the UK, Western Deepincludesnofactsorfigures,nointerviewsornewsreelfootage.Viewer, minerandartistarelinkedbyacommonphysicalexperienceoftimeenveloped in a claustrophobic darkness and the oppressive bombardment of amplified sounds from drills, lifts and the infernal machinery of underground mines. SoundisalsoanimportantfeatureofZarinaBhimji’ssingle-screenworkOut ofBlue(2002).ThesublimelandscapeofUgandacomesalivetothesoundsof animalandinsectlifeinterspersedwiththeisolatedvoicesoftheinhabitants andsnatchesofradiobroadcastsannouncingtheexpulsionofUgandanAsians in1971.Lingeringshotsofderelictbuildingshintattheviolencethaterupted intherecentpast.AsinDoherty’sIreland,theAfricanlandscapebecomesa
1 7 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
repositoryofmemoryandapossiblesettingforfurtherconflict.Forthepresent itisseeninrepose,asifsurprisedinamomentofcontemplationofitsown naturalbeauty.Castadriftinanother’svisionaryuniversetheviewerquestions both the thematics of the work and the certainties by which we habitually attempttoconstructboundedidentitiesintheshiftingterritoriesofwhathas beentermedapost-colonialworld.26 Thenon-westernworkthathasmostmovedmeinrecentyearshasincluded theseriesoftapesmadebytheInuitartistZachariasKunukincollaborationwith video-makerNormanCohn.Workingthroughoutthe1990s,Kunukrecorded13 ‘dramas’inwhichtheInuitpeoplere-enacttheirownhistoryandtraditional wayoflife.Kunukfoundvideothenaturalmediumfortheseperformedrecords
29.ZachariasKunuk,Nunavut(OurLand)(1994–1995),videotape.©Igloolik IsumaProductions.
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 179
because his people ‘never made books… we kept records in our heads. The history has been saved through our songs.’27 Video’s ability to run parallel withrealInuittimewasalsousefulwhenitcametorecordingthepatienceit takestocatchasealbyabreathinghole,thecomplexityoffamilyinteractions successfullydefusingconflictandthedurationoflongsledgeridesthroughthe arcticlandscapeinsearchofgoodhunting.Morethanany,theseworkspropose an alternative aesthetic and cultural model to what Kunuk describes as ‘the Shakespeariandramaofconflict’thatstilldominatestheworkofmanywestern video-film-makers. Far from attempting an escape from what Nadja Rottner calls a mono-perspectival approach to image-making, through ‘a degree zero thathasnoapparentmeaning,syntaxornarration’,28Kunuksituateshiswork inanexplicitculture,historyandlandscape.Heallowsthesubjectsofhiswork todeterminethestorytheytellwithinakindofradicalspecificityand,through duration, evades being constituted as ‘other’ to the western monoculture Rottnerdecries. Politicallyconnectedvideo,thenasnow,walksamoralmaze.Nowadaysitis, inpart,compromisedbyitsnewlyfoundfameintheelitistenvironmentofart emporiaandartfairsacrossthewesternworld.Itisalwaysplaguedbyproblems ofexoticismandspecialpleadingandrisksbeingcomplicitinthecontainment anddiffusionofdifference.Attimes,ithasbeenaccusedofre-exploitingthe miseryofothersforpersonalsuccessinaninternationalartmarket.AsIhave argued,sociallyconsciousvideointheWesthaslostitsconnectionstopolitical activism,toactualsocialmovementswhoseaimsitsharedinthe1960sand 1970s.Itcannolongerfollowtheadmonishmentsof‘ThirdCinema’toavoid simply‘illustrating,documentingorpassivelyestablishingasituation’.Itwould be hard now to attempt the alternative, ‘to intervene in the situation as an elementprovidingthrustandrectification’.29Newpoliticalvideooperatesina differentway.Itevokesratherthanpreaches,emotesratherthanshocksand acknowledgesthecomplexitiesandconflictsofmulticulturalidentitiesinthe modernworld.Ithasintroducedaestheticsensibilitiesandformsthatenrich thecanonand,finally,ithasdevisedwaysofrevivingacontingenthumanism asanantidotetotheimpasseofpostmoderncynicism. AU T H E N T I C I T Y AT T H E E X T R E M E S When viewed from a structuralist position, doubt could still be cast on the validityofpoliticalworkevenwhenitisbasedonstoriesfromtheThirdWorld. As we have seen, the reliability of lived experience as a guide to reality has been under attack by theorists since the 1960s. One solution to the loss of authenticityhasbeentheexplorationofextremeexperience,aplacetowhich themediatingagencyofculturesupposedlycannotfollow.Muchinfluencedby thewritingsofGeorgesBatailleanddrivenbyadesiretocastofftheshacklesof
1 8 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
acculturation,artistshaveexploredthelimitsofendurance,painandsexuality aswellas‘mindexpanding’drugs.Bataillewouldhaveitthatinsuchmoments ofabjectionorbliss,acommonhumanityisexperiencedthatgoesbeyondthe confinesoftheindividualboundedbysocialconvention.Here,onewouldhope toexperienceBarthes’notionofjouissance,thatecstaticslippingandsliding acrossmeaningthatprecipitatesashatteringofculturalidentityandthelossof ego.The‘Aktionist’performanceartistsof1960sViennawerethefirsttoharness theabjectandusedshocktactics,ritualisedhumiliation,self-mutilationandan orgyofbodilyfluidstoinduceacatharticdisruptionofbourgeoisconditioning intheaudience.ManyoftheseperformanceswererecordedinthefilmsofKurt Kren and influenced the next two generations of live artists, including Gina PaneintheUSA,MarinaAbramovic´informerYugoslavia,StuartBrisleyinthe UKandNigelRolfeinIreland–allofwhoseperformanceswererecordedon videotape. Video artists realised that the image itself could induce a similar emotionaldisruptionintheviewerand,inthe1990s,JulieKuzminskacreated vertiginous visual acrobatics and rock-laden soundtracks to complement the extreme performances of the French circus performers, Archaos. Kuzminska foundinArchaosabeauty,aviolenceandwhatshecalleda‘spiritualchaos’ thatofferedfreedominitsacknowledgementoftheessentialfutilityofhuman existence.InDeadMother(1995)theperformanceartistFrancoBaddedfear andloathingtothesenihilistictendencies.Imagesofself-lacerationandbloodspitting combine with a harsh electronic soundtrack and sequences of the artist’slipssewntogethertosuggestadeeplyconflictedrelationshipwithhis mother,nottomentionhisownpsyche.Theadditionofdigitaleffectstothis self-inflicted physical abuse created a decorative dimension and, curiously, recastFrancoB’sactionsasthehelplessrageofchildhooddressedupinanact ofadultpurificationthroughhorror. Self-mutilationwastakentoanextremebytheFrenchperformanceandvideo artist Orlan who, in the 1990s, underwent a succession of operations under localanaesthetic.Theimageoftheartistwasbeamedlivefromtheoperating theatrewhileshekeptuparunningcommentary.Meanwhile,thesurgeonwent abouttransformingherintoidealimagesoffemininebeautyenshrinedinthe historyofart.Likemanyperformanceartists,Orlanregardsherbody,notasa temple,butasanartobject,amaterialtobemouldedandmarkedlikewoodor bronze.Orlanhasstatedthatwherewomen’sbodiesareinscribedbyculture, she creates her own language of the flesh through her actions and thereby stimulatesdebateinthewidercommunity.Theintentionofher‘carnalart’isto ‘demonstratethevanityandmadnessoftryingtoadheretocertainstandardsof beauty’.30However,shealsocelebratesadvancesinmedicinethathaveopened upthebodytothehumangazeandoverturnedcenturiesofpainandsuffering. AsOrlanfrequentlyproclaims,‘VivelaMorphine!’Theartistbelievesthereare certainextremeimagesthatrendervideotechnologytransparent.Theybypass
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 181
thedistancingeffectsofvideo’simperfectionsandshort-circuitthemediating force of language and acculturation. Eyes are turned into ‘black holes’ that swallowuptheimagesandcannotpreventthemfromhittingwhereithurts, below the belt of representation. Marina Abramovic´ has expressed a similar desiretocircumventthelimitationsoflanguagethroughanexplorationofthe body in extremis: ‘I want to lead people to a point where rational thinking fails,’shedeclares,‘wherethebrainhastogiveup.’31ForAbramovic´,itisonly throughthebodythatwecanexperienceauthenticexperience:‘Itisreal,Ican feelit,Icantouchit,Icancutit.’ IfOrlanandAbramovic´arerightandopeningthebodyisoneoftheimages thatissoinassimilabletotherationalmindthatweinstinctivelycloseoureyes, thenMonaHatoumhasleftusgapinginfascinatedhorrorbyexposingtheinside ofherbodytothecamera.32However,itisAnnieSprinklewhotranscendsthe olderfeministstruggleswiththebodypoliticbybreakingthefinaltabooand allowingotherstoviolatetheboundariesofherbody,enteringherwiththeir own.InSlutsandGoddesses(1994)Sprinkle’stopicissex.Beinganestablished sex worker, she knows the subject well. Hers is not the elliptical gesturing towardssexualactsthatweconsideredinDonegan’stapes–Sprinkledealswith therealthing.Thedepictionofsexinartists’movingimageisnothingnew. Back in 1964, Carolee Schneemann’s magnificent film Fuses established the desiringfemalesubjectbyshowingtheartisthappily,Hippilycopulatingunder the dispassionate gaze of her cat. Annie Sprinkle does something different. SlutsandGoddessescomesacrosslikeanafternoonTVshowfromthe1950s, fullofgoodadvicetothoseofuswhoare‘homemakers’.Insteadofrecipesfor applepie,Sprinkle’scosycounseladdressestheproblemsofwomen’spleasure illustrated by explicit sexual material of a masturbatory and Sapphic nature culminatinginSprinkle’simpressivefive-minutemultiple-orgasm.Incontrast tolate-nightChannel5eroticismintheUK,Sprinkleexplodesacceptedcodes of ‘tasteful’ heterosexual eroticism in her tour de force of female pleasuring. Whethersheandtheotherartistsachieveamomentofauthenticityisdebatable, butSlutsandGoddessescertainlyevadescapturebylanguage.Tomymind,it isunclassifiable. THE NEW FORMALISTS Nowthatwehavesettledintoournewcentury,therearesignsthat,aswellasa certainpoliticalsensibility,abstractionandaspareminimalismarere-entering the plastic arts. Although narrative is fundamental to the moving image, a more formal strain of video was maintained throughout the 1990s by artists liketheIrishvideo-makerNickStewartwhose1996FamiliarImageconsistsof measuredsequencesrecyclingstatic,foundphotographicportraitsforwhichhe offersnobiographicaldetails.Inlaterwork,employingslowmotion,Stewart recordedindividualsmovingtrance-likethroughthefilmsofsprayunderNiagara
1 8 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
30.PortraitofAnnieSprinkle, from the cover of Sluts and Goddesses, Video Workshop (1994). Art Director: Leslie Barany. Photographer: Amy Ardrey. Courtesy of Annie Sprinkle.
Falls. Like Bill Viola, Stewart harnessed naturally occurring features of the landscape,suchasheatandrain,todistortandveilevidenceofhumanlife.The technologythatbothrevealsandconcealsisalwaysimplicatedintheseworks aswellasthefugitivenatureofhumanexistence.Theimpulsemetaphorically to smear the lens and defuse the image is evident in the recent work of UK artist Dryden Goodwin. He displays the old interest in the characteristics of the medium whether he is working in film, video or drawing. Reviving the rapid-editing techniques of scratch in his videotape Hold (1996), Goodwin constructsascratchedversionofwhatheseeswhenhewandersthemetropolis, surreptitiously observing its inhabitants. Working on the edge of perception, Holddevisesafebrilevideoimpressionisminwhichindividualsflickerbriefly into life before being extinguished by the next in line. The resulting optical effectiscuriouslyimmersivehowevermuchweareawareofthetechnological tricksthatcreatedthisformal,digitaltapestryofghostlyurbandwellers.
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 183
ThelostyouthoftheinnercityhaslongheldafascinationfortheUSartist, LarryKing.LikeGoodwin,hesubjectswhatwouldotherwisebedocumentary footage of teenage boys to the abstracting effect of video manipulation, but thistimebygoingbacktotheoldtechniqueofre-scanningandzoomingintoa sectionofatelevisionscreen.InNate,G-StreetLive(1992),anindividualboyis pickedoutfromagroupappearingonaNewYorkpublicaccessTVprogramme. His adolescent awkwardness and fragile sense of identity are accentuated as hisimagestrugglestotakeformthroughthefracturedsurfaceofthedegraded videoimage.TheCanadianStanDouglashasalsorevivedamodernistinterest inthetechnologybyslowlypullingapartthetwoelectronicfieldsofaprojected image. In Pursuit, Fear, Catastrophe: Ruskin, B.C. (1993), an image of the dramatic Vancouver coastline splits into its two constituent (odd- and evenlined)fields.Likedriftingdoublevision,theimagedivideswhilevoicesfrom differentpartsoftheinstallationurgentlywhisperstoriesofCanada’scolonial past.IncommonwithMaryLucier’ssunvideo-drawing,theworkexploitsan electronic fault line to reflect on the nature of technology, the fractured and incompletehistoryofthelocationwhilstpayingtributetothegrandeurofthe Canadianlandscape. With the advent of digital technologies, editing has become much faster and more accurate than it was in the days of scratch. Christian Marclay has developed ‘Plunderphonics’, a form of sampling that creates musical compositions entirely made up of existing material. In Germany, artistic duo KurtHentschlägerandUlfLangheinrichhavecreatedwhattheycall‘Granular Synthesis’.Thisisamethodofcombining‘grains’ofappropriatedsoundswith imagesofindividualsandreconstitutingthemasunholyabstractionsinwhich peoplearemadetobehavemorelikemachinesthanhumanbeings.American artists such as Jennifer and Kevin McCoy have reinvented Dara Birnbaum’s television appropriations by restaging and abstracting well-known tele-filmic genres. As I have mentioned, Candice Breitz has revived the UK scratch aesthetic in her repeat-edited fragments of Dallas and other iconic TV series fromthe1980s.Breitzalsoisolateskeymomentsin‘women’sfilms’juxtaposed withsequencesoftheartistmimingtothesamesoundtrack.Breitzseesherself as an active consumer, simultaneously ‘pop-guzzler’ and ‘pop hacker’ who once again attempts to harness the power of the mainstream. Earlier, I have referredtoayoungergenerationofCanadianartistswhopurloinimageryfrom televisionandtheInternetandmoulditintowhatTomShermanhasdubbed a‘recombinant’art.Theyregardtheirversionofscratchandappropriationas a way of displacing the tired identity politics of their elders. Scrambled and scratched into virtuoso techno-Pollocks, the works of Tasman Richardson, Jubal Brown and Leslie Peters refuse the established narrative traditions of Canadian video. Not only that, but they also dismiss the older generation’s preoccupation with theory. ‘I don’t care to know about postmodern theory,
1 8 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
the juxtaposition of images or the social underpinnings of cultural symbols,’ writes Richardson in a statement issued by Vtape in Toronto. These young ‘recombinants’ play with the technology, and, like the earlier conceptualists, mess with its functions. For Woody Vasulka, technological interference was part of a search for enlightenment and, as he says, it was ‘the deficiency of thesystemthattoldyousomething’.However,therecombinantsjustifytheir visceral optical de-compositions with a throwaway anarchist philosophy that ‘celebratesthebeautyandpurityoftheon-goingnatureoftruerevolution’.33 WhateverBrownprofessesandwhethertherevolutionistakingplaceinthe image or in his own activities, he and his colleagues are also accomplished formalists.Theyarecontemporaryvideopainterswhomanipulatemassmedia imageryanddigitaltechnologywithgreatskill.Theyuseoff-airmateriallike anyothercolourintheirpaletteofelectronicabstraction. Beyondthepurecomputerexperimentsofvideographics,itisrarenowadays tofindartistsinvestigatingtheworkingsofthetechnologyitself.TheVasulkas, nowlivingintheUSA,continuetheirresearchintotheelectronicsignal,‘the organising principle of the image’, in the optimistic hope of finding a code that ‘is not contaminated by human ideas and ideologies and psychology’.34 Chris Meigh-Andrews in the UK takes a more pragmatic view, believing that ‘howeverfarintothewiresandcomponentsyougo’the‘technologyembodies theintentionofthedesignerandtheculturethatthemachinerycomesoutof isbuiltintothetechnology’.35Throughoutthe1990s,hisworkdemonstrated a similar fascination with the technology, but the social and psychological dimensionswereneverlostandwereunderscoredbyacertainvisualpoetryand agentleirony.InhisinstallationPerpetualMotion(1994),amonitorispowered byawindgenerator,itselfactivatedbyalargestandingfan,inturnpowered bythemains.Theimageonthemonitorisofakiteapparentlybuffetedbythe windfromthefan.Theimpossibilityofthematerialrelationshipbetweenfan and kite indicates the cultural dimension of televisual illusionism whilst the causalcirclethattheinstallationsetsupisanalogoustotheflowofenergiesin nature.Theworkalsoconjuresuptheflowofideasandinformationtraversing the media and passing through and between individuals. Finally, in spite of its ‘cheat’ of using the mains to generate wind power, it makes a plea for renewable sources of energy and a more harmonious relationship with the naturalworld. LANGUAGE AND THE SELF In the last decade, artists have used video to represent a positive view of technology as an integral part of the natural world (Meigh-Andrews), as an escapeintoa‘utopiandisengagement’fromculture(Vasulka),aspureimage (Stewart) or as rampant anarchy (Brown). On the other hand, many would
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 185
agreewithSteveHawleywhobelievesthat‘video’smainattributeisitsability to dramatise dialogue, disseminate information and act out debates.’36 In the 1990s, Hawley developed his earlier investigations into language and its relationshiptoidentity,throughdialogicvideos,notablyinLanguageLessons (1994) made in collaboration with Tony Steyger. As I described in Chapter 4, the work takes the form of a documentary about invented languages like Esperantoand,inthecaseofVolapuk,asystemofcommunicationadoptedby onlyahandfulofpeopleworldwide.Thealienatingexperienceofbeingsubject tothepowersofalanguagethatisnotone’sownmakesabriefappearancein amemorablesequenceinJohnMaybury’sRemembranceofThingsFast(1996). HehasTildaSwintondeliveradigitallyfragmentedmonologuebasedonthe memoryofbeinginhospitalandundergoingbraininvestigations.There,sheis subjecttotheobfuscatinglanguageandalienatinginstitutionalpracticesofthe medicalprofession.Aswellasimplicitlycritiquingthemedicalisationofhuman life,Mayburyindicatesthephysiologicaldimension,thedelicaterelationshipof greymattertotheproperfunctioningoflanguage.Maybury’stapespeaksofthe fragilityofourmortalcoilandthatpartofitwhichsupportslanguagewhereas Hawleylinkslanguagetothedemocraticaspirationsofthosewhobelievethe worldwouldfindharmonyifweallspokewithonetongue. Displaced or disrupted speech is the basis of Gillian Wearing’s 2 into 1 (1997). In a kind of video ventriloquism, a mother mouths the pre-recorded wordsofhertwosons,whilsttheymimetoherowndescriptionsofwhatitis liketobringuptwoforcefulboys.The‘speakingintongues’ortranspositionof wordsiscomicalatfirst,butitsoonbringsintosharpreliefthedysfunctional relationship between the mother and her offspring. The sharp observation of these miniature machos lording it over their mother makes this work a naturalinheritoroffeministtraditionsinvideo.Liketheworkofartistssuchas MarthaRoslerandMonaHatoum,2into1witnessestheseepageofpatriarchal ideologies into the domestic realm and family relationships, to the extent that sons can oppress their own mothers without compunction. The legacy offeminismisevidenthereandissaidtooperateatanunconsciouslevelin manywomen’svideosfromthe1990s.However,thetranspositionofvoicesin 2into1implicatesthemotheraswellasthesons.Wheredotheseboyslearn theirattitudes?FromtheevidenceofWearing’stape,atleastinpart,fromtheir mother’sinabilitytoassertherselfinthehome,whichthenbegsthequestion, howdidshelearntobeadoormat?Andsoon.Whereearlierfeministwork mighthavecastthemanasthenaturalenemy,StephanieSmithandEdward Stewart suggest a delicately balanced interdependence underscored by the mutualthreatofviolence.InMouthtoMouth(1996)Stewartisseensubmerged inabathwhileSmithkneelsbesidehim,periodicallyplungingherheadinto giveherpartneramouth-to-mouthsupplyofair.Thedecisiontokeephimalive ratherthanlethimdrownisnotpresentedasacertainoutcome.Thisworkis
1 8 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
31.GillianWearing,2into1(1997),videobroadcastonChannel4.Courtesyof InterimArt,London. partofacontinuinginvestigationofmasculineandfeminineinteractionthrough thefilteroftheartists’ownrelationship.ItisadirectdescendentofBreathing in,Breathingout(1977),averysimilarvideobyAbramovic´andUlayinwhich theartistsarelockedintoacontinuouskissoflife,breathingintoeachother withtheresultingdepletionofoxygenbeingathreattothemboth.According to Abramovic´, they saw their union as total, ‘creating something not myself or his-self but THAT-SELF’.37 Unlike Abramovic´ and Ulay, Smith and Stewart arenolongerworkingwithinthecontextofavisiblefeministmovementthat mighthavecastthemalongthelinesofastrictpatriarchalpowerrelation,an imbalancethatAbramovic´wasactivelyseekingtorectify.Wearing,Smithand Stewartbelongtoapostmodernerainwhichtheoldoppositionsarenolonger felttobesustainableintheoryorinlife. CHANCE IS A FINE THING Inthe1990s,Wearingscrambledvoicesandidentities,SmithandStewartrecast thewarofthesexesonmoreequaltermsandnarrativeitselfwasonceagain subverted,thistimebyanothertechnologicaladvance.ArtistslikeStanDouglas
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 187
and Adam Chodzko began to use computers to introduce random elements to abstruse narratives, a chance technique that was already well established inavant-gardemusicfromJohnCageonwards.Douglashasproducedhighly theatricalscenesthatareshuffledtocreateendlessnarrativepermutations.In the UK, Steve Hawley is also randomising image, sound and subtitle for his forthcomingseriesof‘non-stopcinema’works.Notwovisitorstothegallery ormovietheatreseethesamework.Thearbitrarynatureoflanguageandits tenuous hold over meaning constitute the overriding themes of such works. Theirrefusaloflinearityinthedeploymentofnarrativethemespromotesaless goal-oriented,secureconceptualframeworkandintroducesamoremaze-like, aleatoryandnon-hierarchicalapproachtostorytelling.Chanceinart,asinlife, throwsuptherealchallengesandsurprises. H I G H - G L O S S A N D S OA P S Theinfluenceofdominantformsofcinematicandtelevisualnarrativepersists, evenwhenlyrical,fancifulorchanceelementsareintroduced.Theexperience of life as an extended soap opera is reflected both in the choice of narrative idiom and in the increasing adoption by artists of Hollywood’s high-gloss production values. Video-makers like Eija-Lisa Ahtila create pseudo-soaps in whichactorsperformsignificantordifficultmomentsinlife,drawnfromstories toldtotheartistbyrealpeople.InTheHouse(2002)ayoungwomanisolates herself in a woodland cabin and, like Lilian Gish in The Wind or Catherine DeneuveinRepulsion,shebeginstoimaginefromexternalsoundsthatpeople and objects are about to burst through the walls. Unaccountably, the girl transformsherselfintoaversionofPeterPan’sWendyandtakesflightthrough thewoods.Theescapeintofantasymightbeinterpretedasthelastresortina worldofmanipulateddesires.Forhispart,theCanadianartistMikeHoolboom describeshisworkinthe1990sas‘documentariesoftheimaginary’.Nolonger attemptingtopursuerealityinthemediumoftruth,histapesare‘morefaithful
32.StephanieSmithandEdwardStewart,MouthtoMouth(1996),videotape. Courtesyoftheartists.
1 8 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
renderingsofhowIdream,orimaginetheworldtobe,orimaginemyplace init’.38 Ifthenewtaskofmovingimageistotransmitthemagicofdreams,then thespectacleofvideoisnowasimportantasitsabilitytoconveyinformation. EvenBillViolaispolishinghisact.Embracingthenewhighresolutionofdigital videoandplasmascreens,helinksvideotoanearlierpurveyorofdreams,tothe HighRenaissance.Appropriatingthethemesofreligiouspainting,hehasbeen producingaseriesofvideosthatdeliberatelyaspiretotheconditionofpainting in their hyperrealist crispness. Cinema and fresco painting combine in video onceagaintoastonishandcaptivatethejadedeyeofthecontemporarymedia junky.Spectacleisthebindingagent,aroleonceplayedbytheChristianbeliefs evokedbyViola’swork.Gradually,throughthe1990s,artistshaveplayeddown video’straditionalroleasamediumofwitnessandconcentratedonitspower toconjureupanatmosphere,suggestastateofmindandstirtheemotions.The individualsubjectivityoftheartists,theirtelevisualdreamsandhallucinations are given a Hollywood makeover with the high resolution of plasma screens andlarge-scaledigitalprojections.Inthisrespect,videoartclearlyshareswith mainstreamfilmandvideothedesiretotransportandenchantitsaudiences.In thispost-mesmericage,itsvisualculturesaturatedwithextremeimagery,itis notaneasytasktoenthralanaudience. R E A L I T Y V I D E O, R E A L I T Y T V A N D T H E I N T E R N E T When you are bending down looking at somebody’s anus, someone else is looking at yours. Senegalese saying, quoted in Trinh Minh-ha’s Naked Spaces: Living is Round (1985) Thereturntoarthistory,lostfaithsandtheimaginarymayhavebeenpartly promptedbythecolonisationof‘thepersonal’byrealityTV.However,many video artists have continued to use social documentary formats based on empirical research among individual members of society. We saw how AnnSofiSidenworkedwithEuropeanprostitutes,KutlugAtamanwithtransvestites andageingdivas,andmyselfwithveteransoftheSecondWorldWar.Forher part, Eija-Lisa Ahtila has focused on teenage girls, Georgina Starr on people shehasnevermet,whileGillianWearingtookassubjectsalcoholicvagrants andanyonewhorespondedtoheradvertforindividualswillingtoconfessall ontape.Thosewho‘confessed’sharedthesamecompulsionthatrealityshow subjectshavetoexposethemselvestothenation.Theyknowthattheymust satisfybroadcasters’insatiableappetiteforthesalaciousandthegrotesqueand so construct identities and one-dimensional ‘life crises’ that will bring them theirfifteenminutesoffame.39Viewersrevelinthepleasuresofschadenfreude
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 189
or,asJohnStallabrasscallsit,‘holidayinginotherpeople’smisery’.AsIargued in Chapter 7, the subjectivities represented in reality TV are removed from any social or political context. Although a large degree of self-reflexivity is maintained,downtothecameraoperatorsperiodicallybeingdrawnintothe fray,whatiskepthiddenistheprogramming,funding,commercialandpolitical pressuresthatgovernthestyleandcontentofbroadcasting.Televisionasan institutionisstillveiledinsecrecy.Manyyearsago,RosalindKraussaccused videoartistsofretreatingintoanarcissistic,hermeticallysealedworlddelimited by the closed-circuit, corralling artist, on-screen image and camera. There is littledoubtthatrealityTVdoesmuchthesamework,butthistimemanagesto separatethemassofindividualcouchpotatoesnotonlyfromtheirownlives but,intheone-dimensionalityoftherepresentationstheyseeonthescreen, fromanydeeperunderstandingofcontemporarylife. Videoartembracingthepersonalcanjustaseasilysharetelevision’sdubious obsessionwith‘freakshow’documentariesandthenarcissisticexhibitionism thatisasendemicinartasintelevisionland.TraceyEminunashamedlyspills her guts in her art as she did famously on a BBC Newsnight Review debate in which she drunkenly staggered off the set whilst giving her co-panellists the benefit of her colourful views on art in general and the Turner Prize in particular. Unlike feminists’ careful linking of their experiences to a critique of a patriarchal political system, Emin deals in individualised acts of excess. Asshehappilydeclaredtoatelevisioninterviewer,‘Iwasn’tconfessing,Iwas throwingup.’The1990sdidnotinventnarcissism.Even1980sfeministscould indulge in introspective confessionals, much encouraged by the unblinking stareofthevideocameraanditsabilitytorecordoverlongperiodsoftime. Onemightthinkthatanywoman’sexperienceairedinpublicisbyextensiona politicalact,especiallyattimeswhenwomenhavenotbeenabletospeakout. Backinthe1980s,MarthaRoslerheldtheviewthatthepersonalisnotpolitical when ‘the attention narrows to the privileged tinkering with, or attention to one’s solely private sphere, divorced from any collective struggle or publicly conjoinedactandsimplynamesthepersonalpracticeaspolitical.Forartthis canmeandoingworkthatlookslikearthasalwayslooked,thatchallengeslittle, butaboutwhichoneassertsthatitisvalidbecauseitwasdonebyawoman.’40 Contemporaryrealitytelevisionandtheindividualismofartintheearly1990s contributedtothegushingofpurelytherapeuticconfessionalsthroughoutthe cultureanddidlittletochangetheconditionsunderwhichpeoplelived. The Internet has now become a major repository for these liturgies of neuroticinteriority.Individualssetupwebcamerasintheirhomes,sometimes oneineachroom,sothattheworldcantunein,24hoursaday,tothebanality oftheirlives.41ChrisDarkeasksperceptively,‘whatisvideovoyeurismafter all,butakindofintimatesurveillance?’Contrarytovideo’straditionalclaim toofferanencounterwithreality,thistwo-waygaze,thismutualsuper-vision
1 9 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
constitutes a flight from reality. Both viewer and viewed suffer a ‘deflection of consciousness away from the social towards a twilight zone of interactive wakingdreams’.42Itiselectroniccontactwiththosespectralpresencesonthe Internet that became the subject of recent work by the Canadian video and performance artist, Tom Sherman. SUB/EXTROS and HALF/LIVES (2001) are constructedfromdownloadedfootageofunnamedwebcambroadcasters.Men and women of all ages and physical types sit, apparently transfixed by their monitors,theirfaceslitbyanunearthlygreenishcastemanatingfromthescreen. Shermanaddstotheslow-scanningimageshisownsoundtracksconsistingofa combinedmonologueandmusictrackcomposedincollaborationwithBernhard Loibner.Althoughintentonlong-distancecommunication,these‘webcamers’ seempainfullyalone,addictivelypluggedintoaninteraction,notsomuchwith anotherpersonaswithasystemofcommunicationthatallowstheillusionof contactwhileavoidingtherisksofface-to-facehumanintercourse. TheFrenchartistPatrickBernieractualisesthedesireofwebcasterstoopen theintimatespacesoftheirhomestoothers.InHébergement/Hostings(2001) heapproachesindividualsofferingalinktotheirwebsitefromhisexhibition inexchangeforlodgings.Inthisway,Bernieris‘runningthroughthetwo-way mirror’oftheInternetandphysicallyinvadingtheirhomes.‘Alreadyavoyeur,I makemyselfvisible’,hedeclares.43Havingreachedtheinnersanctum,Bernier
33. Tom Sherman, SUB/EXTROS (2001), videotape, 5 min. 30 sec. Music: BernhardLoibner.Courtesyoftheartist.
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 191
theartist-interloperrevealsthosepartsofthehousethattherestricted,keyhole rangeofthewebcamcannotreach.ArtistsintheUK,liketheWadesandFran Cottell,arealsofrustratedbythelackofrealcontactontheInternetandhave openedtheirhomestothepublic.Inthelate1990sandearly2000s,therehas beenaspateof‘relational’artthatinvolvesthepublicinparticipatoryactivities likeeating,telephoningorkickingafootballaroundthegallery.Itakethisas further evidence that artists are combating the fear of actual human contact fuelledbyvirtualreality,cybersexandotherinventionsofthecommunication age. Back in 1988, another French artist, Pierrick Sorin, made the definitive parodyofartists’andwebcasters’compulsiveexhibitionism.C’estmignontout ça(1988)revealstheartistadmiringhisownanalcaressesbymeansofaclosedcircuitvideosystemwhilstdressedinwomen’sblackunderwear.Thewidespread navel- or anal-gazing that the work satirises confirms the dissatisfaction and lackofcompletenessthatShermanandBernier’sInternetsubjectsalsobetray. Itwouldappearthatwiththehelpofvideocameras,manyofusareslipping intoanexclusiverelationshipwithourownnetherregions.Thequestionthen arises:howcanthetwenty-first-centuryvideoartistcombatboththeinsidious narcissismofwesterncultureandtheundifferentiatedinformationoverloadto whichweareallsubjected? I N P ROV I S I O N A L C O N C L U S I O N Video began life as a counter-cultural force worrying the edges of both fine artandbroadcasttelevisionwithwhichitsharedacommontechnology.Over thepastfortyyears,videohasmovedsteadilyfromamarginalpracticetothe default medium of twenty-first-century gallery art. Here, the convergence of formatsprecipitatedbytheadventofdigitaltechnologyhasbrokeredamerger between the parallel practices of artists’ film and video. With television, fashion, advertising and the pop industry no longer regarded as the enemy, manyartistsnowdrawfreelyfromexistingculturalgenreswithoutfeelingthe need to develop a critical stance either towards their content or the position theyoccupyinthemarketingstructuresofaconsumerculture.Movingimage artistsnotonlyplunderpopularculturalsourcesfortheirart,buttheyalsoapply theircreativitytocommercialfieldswithmanyactingasabridgebetweenthe two.Withtheexponentialexpansionoftheartworldinthelastdecadeand institutionsliketheTateModerninLondondrawinginunprecedentednumbers of visitors, awareness of artists’ moving image is now widespread. I doubt thatthereexistsanadvertisingortelevisionexecutivewhohasn’theardofBill Viola.Videohascomealongwayfromthedayswhenadozenaficionadosof themediumgatheredafterhoursforascreeningof‘difficult’workatasmokefilledAirGalleryinLondon.
1 9 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
Manyofthebeliefsystemsandcounter-culturalambitionsoftheearlyavantgarde have dissolved into postmodern webs of signification and individual expression.Theoretically,withinapluralandpseudo-egalitarianvisualculture, noonerepresentationisgivenmoreweightthananyother,althoughtheactual visibility of artists ranges from rock-star status to virtual obscurity. A freefloatingintertextualityhasheldswayforthelastdecadeagainstabackgroundof anever-diminishing,butubiquitous,monoculture.Promiscuouslyquotingthe canonofpopularcultureandhighart,contemporaryimage-makersappropriate the original while often reducing the act to stylistic gesturing that is only as goodasitsnoveltyvalue.Withinaculturedefinedbyashortattentionspan andaninsatiabledesirefortheacquisitionofpropertyandconsumergoods,art strugglestodefenditstraditionalrighttoaddressthecomplexandunfathomable questionsofhumanexistence.Seducedbytherewardsofventurecapitalism orasimpledesiretomakealiving,videoartistshaveboughtintothemarket place represented by the commercial gallery system, whilst simultaneously attemptingtocreateintheirworkanoasisofcalminwhatChrisDarkecalls thecontemporary‘imagestorm’. The gallery as well as civic spaces have been turned into moving image installationswhereanaestheticofspectacleadaptedfromHollywoodfilmhas beengraftedontodeconstructivemethodologiesleftoverfromanearlierage. Althoughmanyoftheradicalformalandconceptualinnovationsofearlyvideo arthavebeenabsorbedbythemainstreamorbeenlostunderthemassamnesia ofacommercialisedartworld,manyoftheirmethodologieshavesurvivedand arereinventedagainstachangedsocial,politicalandtechnologicallandscape. Someartistsaredisillusionedwithwhattheyseeasthecreativebankruptcyof popularentertainment.InthecaseoffigureslikeBillViolaandDanielReeves, theyareadoptinganewasceticism,acontemplativestillnessthatbothcounters the‘contemporaryexcessofmeaningandevents’44andturnsthegalleryinto a modern cathedral of art. People now go to galleries as a refuge from the ‘imagestorm’andforspiritualnourishmentonSundayswhentheyusedtogo tochurch. Asweturnedintothetwenty-firstcentury,arevivalofsociallyengagedart, ofa‘relational’artwithaglobalreach,lookedtoshatterthepostmodernennui oftheyBageneration.Thisnewpoliticalawarenesswasonlyoccasionallythe productofculturaltouristsenteringanexoticlandandbringingbackcuriosities for the amusement of a superior nation. To my mind, the most interesting workemerginginourso-calledpost-colonialworldhasbeenthemobilisation of indigenous creative energies whose vision, though inevitably marked by westerninfluences,cannotbutchangetheconceptualframeworkand,indeed, the form that art will take in the future. In the films and videos of artists like Shirin Neshat and Zacharias Kunuk, political awareness is not seen as an alternative to aesthetic considerations, but as intrinsic to the business of
T H E 1 9 9 0 S A N D T H E N E W M I L L E N N I U M • 193
speakingout.Beautyandhorrorco-existinthereportstheysendbackoftheir experiencesinwhatGermaineGreerhascalledthe‘unsynthesisedmanifold’,in themessytrenchesofreality. Wheretraditionsofvideoartpersist,movingimagewillalwaysbedeployed asthefactualmedium,whetherasevidenceofhistoricandpoliticaleventsoras apersonalarchive.TomShermanwarnsagainsttheuseofvideoasacatalogue of memory binding together ‘the loose ends of our imperfect memories’.45 Therealismofvideohasatendencytomakeusforgethoweasilyitisedited and reworked just as our memories are constructed and reconstructed over time.ForthoseofusintheWest,themovingimageartistwillalwaysbeup againsttheeditingofrealityinpre-existingformsoftelevision.Videoartwill, of necessity, maintain a dialogue with video games, picture messaging, the proliferatinglinguisticpracticesoftheInternetandwhatevercommunication systems the new century throws up. In this context, artists will constantly reflect their times, but they can still act as the ‘ghost in the machine’, the irritant that questions the power structures and entrenched practices of the image-brokers. In their constant search for innovative imaging techniques, theywillextendtheboundariesofwhatispossiblewithnewtechnologiesand communicationsystems.TomShermanhasproposedthatintheinformation age,artistscouldactas‘intelligentagents’,guidesorcipherssteeringviewers through the morass of undigested information that bombards us every day. Artists are endowed with the skill of repositioning the viewer’s perceptions anddrawingmeaningoutoftheclamourofanincreasinglymediatisedworld. Theywillalwaysilluminatethe‘other’pointofview,theblindside,thatwhich ishiddenunderthemanipulationsofvestedinterestsdominatingthepolitical, industrialandimperialWest. Byvirtueoftheirmedium,movingimageartistswillalwaysbeinthebusiness of enchantment and wonder. They will systematically pursue beauty even though,inthepast,fewhaveadmittedtothisquest.Theaestheticdimension of moving image has been harnessed as a conductor of meaning from the beginning and its ability to move the emotions will continue to play a part in whatever project artists undertake. Given my background in oppositional video,Iwouldliketothinkthatartistswouldsetasidetheirdisillusionment withpartypoliticsandonceagaincontributetocollectiveendeavourslikethe anti-capitalist movement, environmental conservation and the international condemnationofAmericanexpansionism.Howeverdirectlyorindirectlythey addresscontemporaryissues,artistsmustalwaysaskthedifficult,unfashionable andprescientquestions.Thereisadegreeofclairvoyanceinvolved,aleapof faithandamobilisationofthatoldenemyofpostmoderncynicism,theunruly artisticimagination.
Notes
C H A P T E R 1 : I N T RO D U C T I O N – F RO M T H E M A R G I N S T O T H E MAINSTREAM 1.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Throughout this book, I use the term ‘televisual’ in the sense that it was first employed in the 1970s by Stuart Marshall, namely to denote the language and representational conventions of realism in broadcast television with the implied receptivity,ifnotpassivityoftheviewer.IdistinguishthetermfromJohnThornton Caldwell’s later use of the noun ‘televisuality’, referring to visually arresting materialontelevisiondesignedtoharnesstheaestheticsensibilitiesoftheviewer. See Caldwell, Televisuality: Style, Crisis, and Authority in American Television, RutgersUniversityPress,1995. The Sony Portapak was a bulky portable video recorder that was powered by large,rechargeablebatteriesandlinkedtoacamerabyapowercable.Ittookvideo cassettesthatallowedtwentyminutesofcontinuousrecordingtime. Paikiswidelyacceptedasapioneerinthefieldalthoughantecedentsandparallel developments have been identified elsewhere. See for example Edith DeckerPhillips,PaikVideo,BarrytownLtd.,1998. RolandBarthes,Image,Music,Text,Fontana/Collins,1977. PeterKardia,‘MakingaSpectacle’,ArtMonthly,no.193,1996. Itcouldbearguedthatartist-runspacesstillexistandthatcontemporaryarton theInternetsuccessfullysidestepsthegallerysystem.Afulldiscussionofthisissue isoutsidethescopeofthisbook,butIwillreturntootherdemoticinitiativesin chapter7. ItisonlyrecentlythatAmericanperformancetapeshavefoundtheirwayintothe prestigiousKramlichcollection. See Amelia Jones, ‘Presence in Absentia, Experiencing Performance as Documentation’,ArtJournal,Winter1997. Postcard(1984),AirGallery,London. DouglasCrimp,‘ThePhotographicActivityinPostmodernism’,PerformanceTexts andDocuments,Parachute,1980. BrunoBettleheim,TheUsesofEnchantment,PeregrineBooks,1976.
N O T E S • 195 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
NamJunePaik,‘Input-TimeandOutput-Time’,inIraSchneiderandBerylKorot (eds.),VideoArt:AnAnthology,HarcourtBraceJovanovich,1976. Dan Reeves in conversation with Chris Meigh-Andrews, www.meigh-andrews. com. AllquotesbyMartySt.Jamestakenfrom‘VideoTelepathies’,Filmwaves,No.15, 2001. FrankPoperquotingHervéFisherinArtoftheElectronicAge,ThamesandHudson, 1993. SeeDanReevesinconversationwithChrisMeigh-Andrews,op.cit.
C H A P T E R 2 : T H E M O D E R N I S T I N H E R I TA N C E 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Stuart Marshall, ‘Institutions/Conjunctures/Practice’, in Recent British Video catalogue,1983. Foracomprehensiveaccountofthedeconstructivetechniquesofstructuralfilmmakingbyartists,seeA.L.Rees,AHistoryofExperimentalFilmandVideo,BFI Publishing,1999. ForafullerdiscussionofPaik’srelationshiptoJohnCage,seeEdithDecker-Phillips inPaikVideo,BarrytownLtd,1998. QuotedbyEdithDecker-Phillips,ibid. PierreThébergeonMichaelSnow,inSchneiderandKorot(eds.),VideoArt:An Anthology,HarcourtBraceJovanovich,1976. RichardSerra,inSchneiderandKorot(eds.),VideoArt:AnAnthology. SeeMickHartney,AnIncompleteandHighlyContentiousSummaryoftheEarly ChronologyofVideoArt(1959–1976),LondonVideoArtscatalogue,1984. IwillconsidersomeexceptionsinmydiscussionofUKscratchvideointhe1980s anditsreinventionincontemporaryCanadianvideo.Seechapter6. EdithDecker-Phillips,op.cit.
C H A P T E R 3 : D I S RU P T I N G T H E C O N T E N T 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
DavidRoss,‘ThePersonalAttitude’,inSchneiderandKorot(eds.),VideoArt:An Anthology,op.cit. Sally Potter, ‘On shows’, in the catalogue of About Time, Performance and Installationby21WomenArtists,ICApublications,1980(unpaginated). Dara Gellman, catalogue entry in UK/Canadian Video Exchange 2000, London, Toronto. Rozsika Parker and Griselda Pollock, Old Mistresses, Women, Art and Ideology, Routledge&KeganPaul,1981. ThisviewheldswayformanyyearspartlyasaresultofLauraMulvey’sinfluential article‘VisualPleasureandNarrativeCinema’,Screen,Vol.16,1975,pp.6–18. EricCameron,‘StructuralVideoinCanada’,StudioInternational,1972. LucyLippard,‘ThePleasuresandPainsofRebirth–EuropeanWomen’sArt’,in FeministEssaysonWomen’sArt,DuttonPress,1976.
1 9 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R 8. 9. 10.
11. 12.
13.
JayneParker,TheUndercutReader,WallflowerPress,2002,p.118. SeePeggyPhelan,Unmarked:ThePoliticsofPerformance,Routledge,1993. SeeJeanFisher,‘ReflectionsonEcho–SoundbywomenartistsinBritain’,inChrissie Iles(ed.),SignsoftheTimescatalogue,OxfordMuseumofModernArt,1990,pp. 60–7. VeraFrenkel’sowndescriptionoftheworkinacorrespondencewiththeauthor. VeraFrenkel,fromthescriptfor‘TheLastScreeningRoom’,inPeggyGaleandLisa Steele(eds.),Videore/View:The(Best)SourceforCriticalWritingsonCanadian Artists’Video,ArtMetropoleandVtape,1996. TamaraKrikorianquotedinJuliaKnight(ed.),DiversePractices:ACriticalReader onBritishVideoArt,LutonPress/ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996,p.77.
CHAPTER 4: MASCULINITIES 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
In1977,IwasaccusedofasimilarlyreductiveapproachtomasculinitywhenAnnie WrightandIspentsometimedisguisedasmen.AndrevanNiekerkreproached meformyconceptionofwhatitmeanstobeamanwiththisscathingcomment: ‘Man? Perhaps we should substitute that word for dirty, oily and thoroughly unwholesome,depravedperson.’ MarilynFryequotedbyPeggyPhelaninUnmarked:ThePoliticsofPerformance, Routledge,1993,p.101. PeggyPhelan,Unmarked,op.cit. BruceW.Ferguson,‘ColinCampbell:OtherwiseWorldly’,inGaleandSteele(eds.), Videore/View,op.cit. Ibid. Stuart Marshall quoted by Rebecca Dobbs in David Curtis (ed.), A Directory of BritishFilm&VideoArtists,ArtsCouncilofEnglandpublication,1996. John Greyson, ‘Double Agents: Video Art addressing AIDS’, in Gale and Steele (eds.),Videore/View,op.cit. NegativecapabilitywasthecharacteristicfirstattributedtomalepoetslikeKeats whowereseentohaveflexibleegoboundariesenablingthemtotakeondifferent identitiesandsensibilities.Itwasalsoaqualitythatwasattributedtowomen’sart inthe1980s. VitoAcconciinconversationwithKlausBiesenbach,VideoActs:SingleChannel WorksfromtheCollectionsofPamelaandRichardKramlichandtheNewArtTrust catalogue,P.S.1NewYork,ICALondon,2003. TomRyan,‘RootsofMasculinity’,inAndyMetcalfandMartinHumphreys(eds.), TheSexualityofMen,PlutoPress,1985. Ibid. SeeLindaNochlin,‘WhyHaveThereBeenNoGreatWomenArtists?’,inT.B.Hess andE.Baker(eds.),ArtandSexualPolitics,CollierMacmillan,1973. Rozsika Parker and Griselda Pollock, Old Mistresses: Women, Art & Ideology, Routledge&KeganPaul,1981. Seechapter6foranaccountofBourn’swork.
N O T E S • 197
CHAPTER 5: LANGUAGE 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
11. 12.
13. 14. 15.
16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
21.
Abigal Child, ‘Being a Witness’, in Steve Reinke and Tom Taylor (eds.), Lux, a DecadeofArtists’FilmandVideo,YYZBooks,2000. PeggyPhelan,Unmarked:ThePoliticsofPerformance,Routledge,1993. SeeSusanBlackmore,TheMemeMachine,OxfordUniversityPress,1999. Terry Eagleton put it like this: ‘Each sign in the chain of meaning is somehow scoredoverortracedthroughwithallothers…andtothisextentnosignisever “pure”orfullymeaningful.’SeeLiteraryTheory:AnIntroduction,MinnesotaPress, 1996. SeeDaleSpender,ManMadeLanguage,Routledge&KeganPaul,1980. Hélène Cixous, ‘The Laugh of the Medusa’, in Elaine Marks and Isabelle de Courtivron(eds.),NewFrenchFeminisms,TheHarvesterPress,1981. For a comprehensive account of experimental film in the UK, see A.L. Rees, A HistoryofExperimentalFilm&Video,BFIPublishing,1999. PeterGidal,‘Thereisnoother’,Filmwaves,No.14,2001. A.L.Rees,AHistoryofExperimentalFilm&Video,op.cit. Steven Heath, ‘Repetition Time – notes around ‘structural/materialist film’, in Michael O’Pray (ed.), The British Avant-Garde Film, 1926–1995, University of LutonPress/ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996. RodStoneman,‘IncursionsandInclusions:TheAvant-GardeonChannel4,1983– 93’,inO’Pray(ed.),TheBritishAvant-GardeFilm,op.cit. See Nina Danino and others for a comprehensive account of the second wave ofindependentfilminTheUndercutReader:CriticalWritingsonArtists’Film& Video,WallflowerPress,2003. See Laura Mulvey, ‘Film, Feminism and the Avant-Garde’, in O’Pray (ed.), The BritishAvant-GardeFilm,op.cit. See E. Deidre Pribram (ed.), Female Spectators: Looking at Film and Television, Verso,1988. Performativity in this context refers to qualities of the live encounter between individuals in which language and other forms of interaction offer active participationforallthoseinvolved.Italsosuggeststhepossibilityofexpression eventhroughconventionalrepresentations. Stuart Marshall, ‘Institutions/Conjectures/Practices’, Recent British Video catalogue,BritishCouncilpublication,1983. Ibid. MaggieWarwick,fromanunattributedpublication. SteveHawleyquotedbyRodStonemaninCurtis(ed.),ADirectoryofBritishFilm &VideoArtists,LutonPress,1996. ‘[T]here’snoideaoffreewill–that’sridiculous.Thisideaofhumanism,whichwas initiallyaboutknowledgegivingyoupowerandgivingyouaccesstofreedom.’Gillian Wearing,quotedbyJulianStallabrassinHighArtLite:BritishArtinthe1990s,Verso, 1999. Consequences is a traditional English game in which a series of narratives are devisedbyanumberofparticipants.Eachepisodeiswrittenbyadifferentperson
1 9 8 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.
28.
29.
30. 31. 32.
onpiecesofpaper,foldedastheyarepassedroundsothatthepreviousplayer’s contributionsarehidden.Theresultingnonsensestoriescreatemuchhilarity. JoanKey,‘Neuter,onKikiSmithandSusanSolano’,Make,No.76,1997. LeiCox,LondonElectronicArtscatalogue,1997. SeanCubitt,Videography:VideoMediaasArtandCulture,Macmillan,1993. Ibid. Ibid. Baudrillard,incommonwithIrigaray,Batailleandotherculturaltheorists,believed that it is in the marginal areas of madness, carnival, ecstasy and pain that the individualcanexistandoperateoutsidetheconfinesofcultureandsociety. VitoAcconciinconversationwithKlausBiesenbach,inVideoActs:SingleChannel WorksfromtheCollectionsofPamelaandRichardKramlichandtheNewArtTrust catalogue,P.S.1NewYork,ICALondon,2003. Stuart Marshall, ‘Video: from art to independence. A short history of a new technology’, in Julia Knight (ed.), Diverse Practices, a Critical Reader on British VideoArt,LutonPress/ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996. ForamoredetailedaccountofWithChild,seeCatherineElwes,VideoLoupe,KT Press,2000. MarkWilcox,de-construc’tionbroadsheetfor‘SubvertingTelevision:athree-part programmeofBritishvideoart’,ArtsCouncilofEngland,1984. Ibid.
C H A P T E R 6 : T E L E V I S I O N S P O O F S A N D S C R AT C H 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
The device was recently revised in London and New York by Sean Foley and HamishMcCollintheirstageshow,ThePlayWhatIWrote,inwhichadifferent surpriseguesttrodtheboardseachnight. SeeSigmundFreud,JokesandTheirRelationtotheUnconscious,Penguin,1976. JohnEllis,SeeingThings:TelevisionintheAgeofUncertainty,I.B.Tauris,2000. AndyLipman,programmenotesinaChannel4leafletaccompanyingTheEleventh Hourseries,1986. In1938,OrsonWellesbroadcastanadaptationofH.G.Wells’WaroftheWorlds inthestyleofanewsreport.Accordingtopopularlegend,hisperformancewas soconvincingtotheAmericanpopulacethatpanicbrokeoutamongstthosewho missedtheprogrammeannouncement. Breakwell’stapewasinfactbroadcast,verylateatnight,onChannel4’sseriesThe EleventhHourin1984. MarshallMcLuhan,UnderstandingMedia:TheExtensionsofMan,McGraw-Hill, 1964. Ibid. DeodorantCommercialwaslatershownonChannel4intheUK. See Caldwell’s Televisuality: Style, Crisis, and Authority in American Television, RutgersUniversityPress,1995. Andreas Kroksnes quoted in UK/Canadian Film & Video Exchange catalogue,
N O T E S • 199 12. 13. 14. 15.
16. 17.
18.
19.
20.
21. 22. 23. 24. 25.
London/Toronto,2003. NickHoughtononIanBourninCurtis(ed.),ADirectoryofBritishFilm&Video Artists,ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996. ItwasannouncedintheUKon5May2003thattheITVrealityprogrammeI’ma Celebrity,GetmeoutofHerewouldnolongerconsidercandidatesover40. RaymondWilliamsquotedbyAndyLipman,inVideo:TheStateoftheArt,Channel 4/Comedia,London,1985. JeremyWelsh,‘OneNationUnderaWill(ofIron),or:TheShinyToysofThatcher’s Children’,inJuliaKnight(ed.),DiversePractices:ACriticalReaderonBritishVideo Art,LutonPress/ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996. Rod Stoneman, commissioning editor at Channel 4 quoted in The Guardian, 16 September1985. ForanaccountofDovey’sattemptstoclearGorillaTapes’workforbroadcast,see JonDovey,‘CopyrightasCensorship:NotesonDeathValleyDays’,inKnight(ed.), DiversePractices,op.cit. AsimilartechniquewasusedrecentlyinaclipcirculatingontheInternetbyJohan Söderberg.OriginallymadeforKobra,aSwedishTelevisionProgramme,Endless LovesynchronizesthewordsoftheLionelRitchieandDianaRosssongtothelip movementsofTonyBlairandGeorgeBush.Thetwoleaders’politicalallianceis giventhesaccharinetreatmentastheysingtoeachotheroftheirmutual,endless love. Back in the 1980s, Gorilla Tapes created a similarly touching love scene betweenMargaretThatcherandRonaldReagan. Beforethe2003Iraqwar,TonyBlairwasaddressingatelevisedgatheringandwhen astudentactivistloudlyexpressedhisoppositiontothewar,Blairsmuglypointed outhowthiskindofinterventionwouldneverhavebeenallowedinIraqjustas thestudentwasunceremoniouslydraggedoutofthehallanddulysilenced. A contemporary exception might be the UK show Bremner, Bird and Fortune, whosequestioningofthelegitimacyoftheIraqwarwasconsistentbeforeandafter the conflict, but it was unfortunate that, once hostilities began, the comedians disappearedfromourscreens. SeeJeremyWelsh,‘OneNationUnderaWill(ofIron)’,op.cit. JohnScarlett-Davis,quotedbyAndyLipmaninaChannel4leafletaccompanying TheEleventhHourseries,1986. SandraGoldbacherquotedbyAndyLipman,ibid. RolandBarthes,Image,Music,Text,Fontana/Collins,1977edition. AndyLipman,op.cit.
CHAPTER 7: VIDEO ART ON TELEVISION 1.
2.
For an eight-year period in the late 1970s, the Arts Council of England funded Film&VideoArtistsonTour,aschemeinwhichartistspresentedtheirworkinart schoolsacrossthecountry. ForaclearaccountofcommunityvideointheUSA,seeDeirdreBoyle,‘ABrief HistoryofAmericanDocumentaryVideo’,inDougHallandSallyJoFifer(eds.),
2 0 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10. 11.
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
19. 20.
21. 22. 23. 24. 25.
Illuminating Video: An Essential Guide to Video Art, Aperture/Bay Area Video Coalition,1990. ThisbriefaccountoftheMiners’TapesisdrawnfromMikeStubbs’unpublished essay,ObjectsofHate–Miners’Strike,2003. RolandDenningincorrespondencewithMikeStubbs,July2003. NamJunePaik,‘VideoSynthesizerPlus’,inRadicalSoftware,No.2,1970. Mick Hartney, An Incomplete and Highly Contentious Summary of the Early ChronologyofVideoArt(1959–1976),LVAcatalogue,1984. MarkKidel,‘VideoArtandBritishTV’,StudioInternational,May1976. Foracomprehensiveaccountoftelevisionandearlyexperimentalvideo,seeMick Hartney,‘InT/Ventions:SomeInstancesofConfrontationwithBritishBroadcasting’, inKnight(ed.),DiversePractices,LutonPress/ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996.Also, MarkKidel,‘VideoArtandBritishTV’inthesamevolume. JeanBaudrillard,‘RequiemfortheMedia’,inJohnHanhardt(ed.),VideoCulture: ACriticalInvestigation,NewYork,1987. DavidHall,inconversationwiththeauthor. RodStonemanconfirminghisviewstotheauthorinanemail,September2003. ThebookheisreferringtoisMichaelO’Pray(ed.),Avant-GardeFilm,LutonPress/ ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996. JohnEllis,SeeingThings,op.cit. PeggyGale,‘VideoHasCapturedourImagination’,inGaleandSteele(eds.),Video re/View,ArtMetropoleandVtapeToronto,1995. ‘Manx’describesanindividualfromtheIsleofMan,offthewestcoastofEngland. Tom Sherman, Before and after the I-Bomb: An Artist in the Information Environment,TheBanffCentrePress,2002. SeeHelendeWitt,‘Trans-nationaltraffic–TheRoadMovieandshiftingEuropean identities’,Filmwaves,No.16,2001. Seechapter3forafullerdiscussionoffeministtheoriesofthepersonal. Anex-studentofmineoncetoldmethathisfriendDominicAllen,whoforgeda career as an intrepid television explorer, was unrecognisable on screen to those whoknewhimasaquietindividual. PeterConrad,Television:theMediumanditsManners,Routledge&KeganPaul, 1982. In1999,StuartSmithconnedaChannel4documentaryfilmcrewintobelieving that he was a millionaire with a stormy relationship with his daughter, in fact his girlfriend. Their ‘reality’ ended with a staged fight between ‘father’ and ‘daughter’. CharlieBrooker’sbonmot,GuardianGuide,19July2003. JohnEllis,SeeingThings,op.cit. RodStonemaninconversationwiththeauthor,April2002. AnneMarieDuguetinterviewedonTheEleventhHour,Channel4,1987. Keying is the now familiar technique for combining two image sources. The weathergirlstandsinfrontofabluescreenandthegraphicchartsofthecountry sheisreferringtoareelectronicallygraftedintotheblue.
N O T E S • 201 26.
27. 28. 29.
30.
31. 32.
33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.
SeeDavidHallinterviewedbyChrisMeigh-Andrews,www.meigh-andrews.com. Obviously, Hall was aware that television itself coloured the way his work was received,butitwaspreciselythepreconceptionsoftelevisionspectatorshipthat hisworkwasaddressing. DavidLoxtonofWNET,NY,quotedbyRobPerrée,IntoVideoArt:TheCharacteristics ofaMedium,ComRumore,1988. DavidCurtisinconversationwiththeauthor,July2003. To my knowledge, only Gillian Wearing has ever sued an advertising company forplagiarism.Inthiscase,overherdeviceofaskingsubjectstoholdplacardson whichtheyhavewrittentheirthoughts–anideathat,infact,originatedwithBob Dylan. In the 1980s, I used a post-production house in Soho for a video I was making forChannel4.Accordingtomyeditor,commercialdirectorswouldaskforsneak previewsofwhatIandotherChannel4commissionedartistshadbeendoing. JohnEllis,SeeingThings,op.cit. JohnWyverinalettertotheauthor.WyverwasandisthedirectorofIlluminations, a production company that collaborated with Channel 4 to bring international programmesofartists’worktothesmallscreenintheearly1980sandbeyond. RobPerrée,IntoVideoArt,op.cit. RodStoneman,inconversationwiththeauthor. DavidCurtisinconversationwiththeauthor. JohnWyver,lettertotheauthor. Rick Lander, contributing to NFT seminar, Artists and Broadcast, 13 December 1994. JohnWyver,lettertotheauthor. Jean-FrançoisLyotard,‘BriefReflectionsonPopularCulture’,inLisaAppignanesi (ed.),Postmodernism,ICADocuments4,ICALondon,1986.
CHAPTER 8: VIDEO SCULPTURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
7. 8.
SteveHawleyinconversationwiththeauthor,September2003. Seechapter3forafullerdescriptionofRosler’stape. BillViola,quotedbyChrisDarke,LightReadings,FilmCriticismandScreenArts, WallflowerPress,2000. SeanCubitt,‘FalsePerspectivesinVirtualSpace’,Variant,Spring1992. For a full description of the Videowall project in Liverpool, see Steve Littman, ‘TheVideowallSystem:anunexploredmedium’,inKnight(ed.),DiversePractices: ACriticalReaderonBritishVideoArt,UniversityofLutonPress/ArtsCouncilof England,1996. Forafulldescriptionoftheproject,seeDaraBirnbaum,‘TheRioExperience’,in DougHallandSallyJoFifer(eds.),IlluminatingVideo,AnEssentialGuidetoVideo Art,Aperture/BAVC,1990. NickyHamlyn,‘Film,Video,TV’,COIL,9/10,2000. IanHunt,‘VideVideo’,ArtMonthly,May1996.
2 0 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R 9. 10. 11. 12.
SeeChrissieIles,‘LuminousStructures’,COIL:JournalofMovingImage,No.3, 1996. See Tom Sherman, Before and After the I-Bomb: An Artist in the Information Environment,TheBanffCentrePress,2002. DavidHallinconversationwiththeauthor. JeremyWelsh,VideoPositivecatalogue,TateGalleryLiverpool,Moviola,1991.
CHAPTER 9: THE 1990S AND THE NEW MILLENNIUM 1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
18. 19.
In Canada, an entire generation of video-makers was ‘lost’ to the world of commerce.LisaSteeleatVtapeinTorontohasworkedhardinthelastfewyears toinvolveyoungerartistsinVtape’sactivitiesandpreventafurthertalent-drainto thecommercialsector. JeremyWelsh,‘OneNationUnderaWill(ofIron)’,op.cit. TraceyEminonceconfidedtoatelevisioninterviewerthatsheneverlaunchedinto anewcreativedirectionwithoutfirstconsultinghergalleristbecause‘afterall,he hastosellthework.’ KathleenPirrieAdams,‘LadyintheLake:fluidformsofselfinperformancevideo’, Promisecatalogue,YYZ,Toronto,1999. RosettaBrookes,quotedbyRobPerréeinIntoVideoArt:TheCharacteristicsofa Medium,ComRumore,Amsterdam,1988. Chris Darke, Light Readings: Film Criticism and Screen Arts, Wallflower Press, 2000. SusanSontag,‘TheTellingShot’,TheGuardian,1February2003. MichaelO’Pray,‘TheImpossibilityofDoingAwaywithVideoArt’,inKnight(ed.), DiversePractices,op.cit. SamTaylor-WoodquotedinJulianStallabrass,HighArtLite:BritishArtinthe‘90s, Verso,1999. PeterGidal,‘Thereisnoother’,Filmwaves,January2001. Russell Ferguson, ‘Show your Emotions’, in Gillian Wearing, Phaidon Press, 1999. David Hall in conversation with Chris Meigh-Andrews, www.meigh-andrews. com. CollierSchorr,‘Openings:CherylDonegan’,Artforum,Summer1993. RaymondBellourquotedbyChrisDarke,LightReadings,op.cit. Laura Mulvey, ‘Death 24 times a second: the tension between movement and stillnessinthecinema’,COIL,October2000. RolandBarthes,Image,Music,Text,Fontana/Collins,1977. Notorious – Alfred Hitchcock and Contemporary Art (1999) was an exhibition, stagedattheMuseumofModernArtinOxfordthatwasdevotedtoartistswho reinterpretorrecreateHitchcock’sfilms. SteveHawleyinconversationwiththeauthor,September2003. AdiscussionofmovingimageontheInternetisbeyondthescopeofthepresent volume.Foragoodaccountofartistsworkingwiththematerialandstructuresofthe
N O T E S • 203
20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37.
38. 39.
40.
Internet,seeNoahWardrip-FruinandNickMontford(eds.),TheNewMediaReader, MITPress,2003. GriseldaPollock,speakinginapublicdiscussionofWarteMal!attheHayward galleryin2002. TomShermanquotesallfromalettertotheauthor,2003. JulianStallabrass,HighArtLite:BritishArtinthe1990s,Verso,1999. EdwardW.Said,ReflectionsonExile,HarvardUniversityPress,2000. MarkNash,‘ArtandCinema:somecriticalreflections’,inDocumenta11catalogue, 2002. SeeessaysbySeleneWendtandNeeryMelkonianinthecatalogueShirinNeshat, publishedbyHenieOnstadKunstsenterinassociationwithRiksutstillinger,2000. WithBritishandAmericantroopscontrollingthegatesofBasraandBaghdad,the notionofpost-colonialism,takenliterally,seemsratherabsurd.Perhaps,‘secondcolonialage’wouldbebetterdependingonhowfarbackintohistoryonewantsto go. ZachariasKunukquotedbyNancyBealeintheOttowaCitizen,25May1994. NadjaRottnerwritingonMichaelAshking,Documenta11catalogue,2002. Foranaccountofpoliticallyengaged‘ThirdCinema’see,FernandoSolanasand OctavioGetino,‘Isyourfilmmakingrevolutionary?’,Filmwaves,February2001. Orlan,‘IDoNotWantToLookLike…’,inWomen’sArt,May/June1995. MarinaAbramovic´inconversationwithDorisvonDrathen,inFriedrichMeschede (ed.),MarinaAbramovic´,EditionCantz,1993. ForanaccountofMonaHatoum’sbodyexplorations,seechapter3. JubalBrown,UK/CanadianVideoExchange2000catalogue,TorontoandLondon. Woody and Steina Vasulka in conversation with Christopher Meigh-Andrews, www.meigh-andrews.com/writing. Ibid. Steve Hawley quoted by Andy Lipman in Video State of the Art, Channel 4/ Comedia,London,1985. MarinaAbramovic´interviewedbyKlausBiesenbachinVideoActs:SingleChannel WorksfromtheCollectionsofPamelaandRichardKramlichandtheNewArtTrust, P.S.1publication,2003. Mike Hoolboom interviewed by Cameron Bailey in NOW, Toronto 14 August 1998. Many,ofcourse,simplyfakeitandprogrammesandpresenters,includingKilroyin theUK,havebeenhoodwinked.Whenbonefideparticipantshavedemonstrated contradictoryimpulsesorcomplexities,thebroadcastershaveironedthemoutas theinhabitantsoftheBigBrotherhousediscoveredwhentheywatchedprogrammes thatborelittleresemblancetowhattheyhadexperiencedintheHouse.See‘Stars andGripes’,SundayTimesmagazine,1April2001. MarthaRoslerspeakingatthedebate‘IsthePersonalPolitical’attheICA,London in1980,theyearinwhichthegallerystagedthreemajorexhibitionsofwomen’s art.Foranaccountoftheevents,seeSarahKentandJacquelineMorreau(eds.), Women’sImagesofMen,WritersandReaders,1985.
2 0 4 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R 41.
42. 43. 44. 45.
AftersevenyearsofbeingcontinuallymonitoredontheInternet,thepioneering ‘webcamer’,Jennicamhasbeencloseddownbythepaymentcompanybecause shehasbeenseennaked. JeremyWelsh,‘OneNationUnderaWill(ofIron)’,op.cit. PatrickBernierwritinginTranz-TechFestivalcatalogue,Vtape,2001. NadjaRottnerwritingintheDocumenta11catalogue,2002. TomShermanBeforeandAftertheI-Bomb,op.cit.
Bibliography
Abramovic´,MarinainconversationwithDorisvonDrathen,inFriedrichMeschede(ed.), MarinaAbramovic´,EditionCantz,1993 Adams, Kathleen Pirrie, ‘Lady in the Lake: Fluid forms of self in performance video’, Promisecatalogue,YYZ,Toronto,1999 Appignanesi,Lisa(ed.),Postmodernism,ICADocuments4,ICALondon,1986 Barthes,Roland,Image,Music,Text,Fontana/Collins,1977 Bernier,Patrick,Tranz-TechFestivalcatalogue,Vtape,Toronto2001 Bettleheim,Bruno,TheUsesofEnchantment,PeregrineBooks,1976 Blackmore,Susan,TheMemeMachine,OxfordUniversityPress,1999 Caldwell,JohnThornton,Televisuality:Style,Crisis,andAuthorityinAmericanTelevision, RutgersUniversityPress,1995 Cameron,Eric,‘StructuralVideoinCanada’,StudioInternational,1972 Conrad,Peter,Television,TheMediumanditsManners,Routledge&KeganPaul,1982 Cubitt,Sean,Videography,VideoMediaasArtandCulture,Macmillan,1993 Cubitt,Sean,‘FalsePerspectivesinVirtualSpace’,VariantMagazine,Spring1992 Curtis,David(ed.),ADirectoryofBritishFilm&VideoArtists,ArtsCouncilofEngland Publications,1996 Crimp,Douglas,‘ThePhotographicActivityinPostmodernism’,PerformanceTextsand Documents,Parachute,1980 Darke,Chris,LightReadings,FilmCriticismandScreenArts,WallflowerPress,2000 Danino,NinaandMichaelMaziere(eds.),TheUndercutReader,WallflowerPress,2002 Decker-Phillips,Edith,PaikVideo,BarrytownLtd.,1998 deWitt,Helen,Trans-NationalTraffic–TheRoadMovieandShiftingEuropeanIdentities, Filmwaves16,2001 Eagleton,Terry,LiteraryTheory:AnIntroduction,MinnesotaPress,1996 Ellis,John,SeeingThings:TelevisionintheAgeofUncertainty,I.B.Tauris,2000 Elwes,Catherine,VideoLoupe,KTPress,2000 Ferguson,Russell,‘ShowyourEmotions’,inGillianWearing,PhaidonPress,1999
2 0 6 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R Fisher,Jean,‘ReflectionsonEcho–SoundbywomenartistsinBritain’,inChrissieIles (ed.),SignsoftheTimescatalogue,OxfordMuseumofModernArt,1990 Freud,Sigmund,JokesandTheirRelationtotheUnconscious,Penguin,1976 Gale,PeggyandLisaSteele(eds.),Videore/View:the(best)sourceforcriticalwritingson CanadianArtists’Video,ArtMetropoleandVtape,Toronto,1996 Gellman,Dara,catalogueentryinUK/CanadianVideoExchange2000,London,Toronto Gidal,Peter,‘Thereisnoother’,Filmwaves,issue14,2001 Hall,DougandSallyJoFifer(eds.),IlluminatingVideo,anEssentialGuidetoVideoArt, Aperture/BayAreaVideoCoalition,1990 Hamlyn,Nicky,‘Film,Video,TV’,Coil,9October2000 Hartney,Mick,AnIncompleteandHighlyContentiousSummaryoftheEarlyChronology ofVideoArt(1959–1976),LondonVideoArtscatalogue,1984 Hanhardt,John(ed.),VideoCulture:ACriticalInvestigation,NewYork,1987 Hess,T.B.andE.Baker(eds.),ArtandSexualPolitics,CollierMacmillan,NewYork,1973 Hunt,Ian,‘VideVideo’,ArtMonthly,May1996 Iles,Chrissie,‘LuminousStructures’,Coil:JournalofMovingImage,Issue3,1996 Jones,Amelia,‘PresenceInAbsentia,ExperiencingPerformanceasDocumentation’,Art Journal,winter1997 Kardia,Peter,‘MakingaSpectacle’,ArtMonthly,No.193,1996 Kent, Sarah, and Jacqueline Morreau (eds.), Women’s Images of Men, Writers and Readers,1985 Key,Joan,‘Neuter,onKikiSmithandSusanSolano’,Make,No.76,1997 Kidel,Mark,‘VideoArtandBritishTV’,StudioInternational,May1976 Knight,Julia(ed.),DiversePractices,aCriticalReaderonBritishVideoArt,LutonPress/ ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996 Lipman, Andy, programme notes in a Channel 4 leaflet accompanying the series The EleventhHour,1986 Lipman,Andy,inVideo:TheStateoftheArt,Channel4/Comedia,London,1985 Lippard,Lucy,‘ThePleasuresandPainsofRebirth–EuropeanWomen’sArt,’Feminist EssaysonWomen’sArt,DuttonPress,NewYork,1976 Marshall,Stuart,‘Institutions/Conjunctures/Practice’inRecentBritishVideocatalogue, 1983 McLuhan,Marshall,UnderstandingMedia:TheExtensionsofMan,McGraw-Hill,1964 Meigh-Andrews,Chris,conversationswithDanReeves,CatherineElwes,TheVasulkas andDavidHall,www.meigh-andrews.com Marks,Elaine,andIsabelledeCourtivron(eds.),NewFrenchFeminisms,TheHarvester Press,1981 MetcalfAndyandMartinHumphreys(eds.),TheSexualityofMen,PlutoPress,1985 Mulvey,Laura,‘VisualPleasureandNarrativeCinema’,Screen,Vol.16,1975 Mulvey,Laura,Death24timesasecond:thetensionbetweenmovementandstillnessin thecinema,COIL,October2000 Nash,Mark,ArtandCinema:Somecriticalreflections,inDocumenta11catalogue O’Pray, Michael (ed.), The British Avant-Garde Film, 1926–1995, University of Luton Press/ArtsCouncilofEngland,1996
B I B L I O G R A P H Y • 207 Orlan,‘IDoNotWantToLookLike…’,inWomen’sArt,May/June1995 Paik,NamJune,‘VideoSynthesizerPlus’,inRadicalSoftware,No.21970 Parker,RozsikaandGriseldaPollock,OldMistresses,Women,ArtandIdeology,Routledge &KeganPaul,1981 Perrée,Rob,IntoVideoArt:TheCharacteristicsofaMedium,ComRumore,Amsterdam, 1988 Phelan,Peggy,Unmarked:ThePoliticsofPerformance,Routledge,1993 Poper,Frank,ArtoftheElectronicAge,ThamesandHudson,1993 Potter,Sally,‘Onshows’,inthecatalogueofAboutTime,PerformanceandInstallation by21WomenArtists,ICApublications,1980 Pribram,E.Deidre(ed.),FemaleSpectators:LookingatFilmandTelevision,Verso,1988 Rees,A.L.,AHistoryofExperimentalFilmandVideo,B.F.IPublishing,1999 Reinke, Steve, and Tom Taylor (eds.), Lux: A Decade of Artists’ Film and Video, YYZ Books,Toronto,2000 Said,EdwardW.,ReflectionsonExile,HarvardUniversityPress,2000 Schneider, Ira and Beryl Korot (eds.), Video Art: An Anthology, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich,1976 Schorr,Collier,‘Openings:CherylDonegan’,Artforum,summer1993 Sherman,Tom,BeforeandaftertheI-Bomb:AnArtistintheInformationEnvironment, TheBanffCentrePress,2002 Solanas,FernandoandOctavioGetino,‘IsyourFilmmakingRevolutionary?’,Filmwaves, February2001 Sontag,Susan,‘TheTellingShot’,TheGuardian,1February2003 Spender,Dale,ManMadeLanguage,Routledge&KeganPaul,1980 Stallabrass,Julian,HighArtLite:BritishArtinthe1990s,Verso,1999 St.James,Marty,‘VideoTelepathies’,Filmwaves,No.15,2001 VideoActs:SingleChannelWorksfromtheCollectionsofPamelaandRichardKramlich andtheNewArtTrustcatalogue,P.S.1NewYork,ICALondon,2003 Welsh,Jeremy,VideoPositivecatalogue,TateGalleryLiverpool,Moviola,1991 Wendt, Selene and Neery Melkonian, Shirin Neshat, Henie Onstad Kunstsenter in associationwithRiksutstillinger,2000 Wilcox, Mark, de-construc’tion, broadsheet for ‘Subverting Television: A three-part programmeofBritishvideoart’,ArtsCouncilofEngland,1984
Index and Videography
A 2into1(1997,GillianWearing), 185–6 2ndand3rdIdentity(1977, MarcelineMori),88 7TVPieces(1971,DavidHall),121 24HourPsycho(1995,Douglas Gordon),168–9 AAA-AAA(1978,Abramovic´and Ulay),11 Abramovic´andUlay,10,11,186 Abramovic´,Marina,180–1 AccidentsintheHome(1984, GrahamYoung),132 Acconci,Vito,10,16,17,69,74, 91,141,143 Ackerman,Chantal,156–7 Ahtila,Eija-Lisa,187 AlmostOut(1984,JayneParker), 50 Almy,Max,44,87–8 Amamisevuoi(1994,Michael Curran),67–8 AmericanMedley(1988,John Carson),84 Amsterdam(1988,JohnGreyson), 67 Anderson,Laurie,43–4,118,145 AntFarm,106,151 anthropomorphism,143–5 Antin,Eleanor,9,44 Arnatt,Keith,119 Ashley,Robert,126 Ataman,Kutlug,87,173 Atherton,Kevin,123,148
B B,Franco,180 Baker,Bobby,42 Baker,Richard,31 BalladofDanPeoples,The(1976, LisaSteele),43 Barber,George,112,137,138 Barney,Matthew,20,69,170–1 Barthes,Roland,8,115,124,158, 168–9,180 Bataille,Georges,179–80 Baudrillard,Jean,106,120,161 Baxter,Ian,9 Bear(1993,SteveMcQueen),61 Beck,Steven,33 Bellour,Raymond,154 Benjamin,Walter,12,36 Benning,Sadie,20,47 Bernier,Patrick,190–1 Bettleheim,Bruno,13 Bhimji,Zarina,177–8 Biggs,Simon152 Billingham,Richard,20 Birnbaum,Dara,90,108,147–8 Blue(1993,DerekJarman),66 Blume,Claus,90,124 Boomerang(1974,RichardSerra), 29 Bouquet,A(1984,TinaKeane),147 Bourn,Ian,74,104–5 Branson,LloydandLauder,Jack, 12 Breakwell,Ian,97–8 Breathingin,Breathingout(1997, Abramovic´andUlay),186 Brecht,Bertolt,82 Breitz,Candice,161,172,183
Brisley,Stuart,10,180 Brooks,Rosetta,161 Brown,Jubal,183 Brush,Basil,13 Bush,Paul,122 Butler,John,102 C Cage,John,25,26,36,109 Cahen,Robert,112,132–3 Caldwell,JohnThornton,101 Callas,Peter,112 CallingtheShots(1984,Mark Wilcox),93–4 Cameron,Eric,51,81 Campbell,Colin,64–5 Campus,Peter,9 Caramelle,Ernst,148 Carson,John,74,84 CarryGreenhamHome(1984, KidronandRichardson), 131 CastleOne(1966,Malcolmle Grice),107 C’estmignontoutça(1988, PierrickSorin),191 CelestialLight/MonstrousRaces (1985,JudithGoddard),88 César,24 chance,186–7 Channel4,121–40 Chapman,Jake,162 Child,Abigail,76 Cixous,Hélène,45,77 ClaimExcerpts(1971,Vito Acconci),16 Clause28,62
I N D E X • 209 class,73–5 Class(1990,AndrewStones),74 Colinet,André,133–4 Collins,Susan,150 Collishaw,Matt,152 Conrad,Peter,129 Contortions(1983,MikeStubbs), 74 Cottell,Fran,191 Course,Anne,37 CorpsEtranger(1994,Mona Hatoum),49 Corrections(1970,VitoAcconci), 17 Cotterell,David,151–2 Cough(1986),TerryDibble,11 CoverUp,The(1986,Pictorial Heroes),74 Cox,Lei,88 CremasterCycle(1994–2002, MatthewBarney),170–1 Crisps(1980,SteveLittman),90 Cross-Over(IMissYou)(1996, HarrisonandWood),167 Cubitt,Sean,89,145,163 Curtis,David,136,139 Curran,Michael,67–8,166 Cuthand,Thirza,47 D DancinginPeckham(1995,Gillian Wearing),164 Danino,Nina,80,170 Darke,Chris,162,170,189–90,192 DaveinAmerica(1981,David Critchley),84 Davis,Douglas,27 DawnBurn(1975,MaryLucier), 27 DeadMother(1995,FrancoB),180 Dean,Tacida,172 DeathValleyDays(1984,Gorilla Tapes),110 Decker-Phillips,Edith,36 DeLa(1971,MichaelSnow),28 Denning,Roland,118 DeodorantCommercial(1972, WilliamWegman),100–1 Derrida,Jacques,76,82,161 DialH-I-S-T-O-R-Y(1997,Johan Grimonperez),162 Dibbets,Jan,142 Dibble,Terry,11 Dick,Vivienne,42,130–1 Doherty,Willie,177 DomesticLandscapes(1992–1994,
ChrisMeigh-Andrews),73 Donebauer,Peter,33–4 Donegan,Cheryl,166 Douglas,Stan,102,155,183 Dovey,Jon,110 Duet(1972,JoanJonas),53 Duguet,AnneMarie,133,135 DuvetBrothers,113 DynamicFieldSeriesPart1(1971, PeterCampus),10 E Eatherley,Jill,171 Eaud’Artifice(1991,ChrisMeighAndrews),148–9 ElevenYears(1990,Louise Forshaw),131 Ellis,John,97,122–3,137 Elwes,Catherine,46–7,49,86–7, 93,173 Emin,Tracey,189 Eno,Brian,145 EternalFrame(1975,AntFarm), 106 ethnicity,59–61 Evening(1994,StanDouglas),155 Etra,BillandLouise,28 ExtentofThreeBells,The(1981, SteveHawley),122 F FamiliarImage(1996,Nick Stewart),181–2 FamilyofRobot(1986,NamJune Paik),143–4 Farrer,Steve,151 Feldman,Yael,166 femaleimpersonation,63–5 feminism,38–58;andthebody, 47–51;andthefamily, 42–7;andlanguage,77–8; ThePersonalisPolitical, 39–41,189 Ferguson,BruceW.,64,69 Ferguson,Russell,165 film:conventions,91;expanded cinema,171–2;in thegallery,168–72; structuralist,78–81 Finn-Kelcey,Rose,10 Fisher,Hérve,18 Fisher,Jean,53 Flaxton,Terry,andDedman, Penny,112 Flitcroft,Kim,113–14 FlyingTime(1982,ElsaStansfield
andMadeleineHooykaas), 57 formalists,new,181–4 Forshaw,Louise,43,50,55,131 Foucault,Michel,23,113 Fox,Terry,9 FragmentsofanArchetype(1980, CatherineIkam),145 Frenkel,Vera,56,149 Freud,Sigmund,97 Froeser,Dieter,87 Frye,Marilyn,64 Fuses(1964,CaroleeSchneemann), 181 G Gale,Peggy,123,143 Gellman,Dara,47 Gerz,Jochen,27 Gidal,Peter,78–9,164 Gilbert,Gerry,10 GilbertandGeorge,10 Glass,Philip,109 Goddard,Judith,88,147 Goldbacher,Sandra,113–14 Goodwin,Dryden,182 Gordon,Douglas,161,168–9 GorillaTapes,110 Granny’sIs(1990,DavidLarcher), 125 GranularSynthesis,183 Greer,Germaine,193 Greyson,John,67 leGrice,Malcolm,107,151,171 Grimonperez,Johan,162 Gunning,Lucy,53–4 Gusella,Ernest,29 H Hall,David,31–2,98,117,120–1, 135,140,141,146–7,155, 159,166 HammerandKnife(1987,Louise Forshaw),43,50 Hamlyn,Nicky,151,170 Hannah’sSong(1986,Katharine Meynell),45–6 HarrisonandWood,167 Hartney,Mick,1,33,69–70,119, 137,144–5 Hatoum,Mona,38,49,55,181 Hawley,Steve,70–1,82–4,122, 141,171,185 Hayward,Phil,160 Heath,Steve,79 Heaven(2000,LloydBransonand
2 1 0 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R JackLauder),12 Hébergement/Hostings(2001, PatrickBernier),190 HentschlägerandLangheinrich, 183 L’HeureAutosexuelle(1994, MichaelCurran),67 Hill,Gary,30,134,150–1,152–3 Hill,Tony,137 Hold(1996,DrydenGoodwin),182 Holiday,Amanda,60 Holt,Nancy,29 homosexuality,61–9 Hoolboom,Mike,66,187–8 Hoover,Nan,49 Hooykaas,Madeleine,57,149 Hopkins,John‘Hoppy’,120 Horses(1994,LucyGunning),53–4 Houghton,Nick,105 House,The(2002,Eija-Lisa, Ahtila),187 Hunt,Ian,153 I Ikam,Catherine,145 Immemorial(1989,JeremyWelsh), 72–3 InCamera(1999,Smithand Stewart),146 InfluenceMachine,The(2000, TonyOursler),151 InOurHandsGreenham(1984, TinaKeane),131 interactivity,152–5 Interlude(HomagetoBug’sBunny) (1983,ChrisMeighAndrews),109 Irigaray,Luce,77 ILoveYou(1983,MaxAlmy),87–8 I’mNotTheGirlWhoMissesMuch (1996,PipilottiRist),164–5 IOD(1984,JeremyWelsh),112–13 It’s3a.m.(1991,BBCTelevision, VivienneDick),42 Ivekovic´,Sanja,173–4 J Jarman,Derek,59,61,66 Jereviensbientot(1995,Yael Feldman),166 Jonas,Joan,10,30,53 Jones,Amelia,10,162 AJournalofthePlagueYears (1984,StuartMarshall),66 Judy(1990,TonyOursler),142 Julien,Isaac,61–2
JusteleTemps(1983,Robert Cahen),132–3 K Kanwar,Amar,174 Kapoor,Anish,124 Kardia,Peter,8,161 Keane,Tina,10,45,131,147 KensingtonGore(1981,Catherine Elwes),86–7 Kidel,Mark,120 KidronandRichardson,131 KillingTime(1994,SamTaylorWood),163 KimWildeAuditions(1996,Cerith WynEvans),62–3 King,Larry,183 KisstoBuildaDreamOn,A(1987, AndréColinet),133–4 Knox,Sonia,10 Krauss,Rosalind,189 Krikorian,Tamara,57 Kunuk,Zacharias,178–9 Kuzminska,Julie,180 L Lacan,Jacques,46,89 Lander,Rick,139 landscape,125–8 Landscape(1983,NanHoover),49 LanguageLessons(1994,Steve HawleywithTony Steyger),83,185 Laposky,Ben,26 Larcher,David,125 LastScreeningRoom:AValentine, The(1984,VeraFrenkel), 56 Latham,William,33 LaughingGirls(1984,Duvet Brothers),113 Levine,Les,150 Lewis,Mark,169–70 LineDescribingaCone(1972, AnthonyMcCall),151 Lippard,Lucy,52,114 LipSynch(1969,BruceNauman), 30 Lipman,Andy,97,116 Littman,Steve,90,147 LondonVideoArts,117,121 TheLongRoadtoMatalan(1999, IsaacJulien),61–2 Loxton,David,135 Lucier,Mary,27,126,148 Lyotard,Jean-François,140
M Macmillan,Tim,137 MadeforTV(1984,Ann Magnuson,withTom Rubnitz),52–3,99 MagnetTV(1965,NamJune Paik),18 Magnuson,Ann,52–3,99,114 MakeDream(1993,Cheryl Donegan),166 ManaoTupapau(1990,Amanda Holiday),60 Marclay,Christian,183 Marshall,Stuart,22,23,62,66,76, 81,92,96,131 masculinities,59–75;AIDS,65–8; heterosexuality,69–73;the malebody,62–5 Maybury,John,185 Maziere,Mike,170 MeasuresofDistance(1988,Mona Hatoum),38 McCall,Anthony,151 McCoy,JenniferandKevin,183 McGuire,Ann,165 McLuhan,Marshall,5,99,112 McQueen,Steve,61,177 Meigh,Alex,142 Meigh-Andrews,Chris,73,109, 126,136,148–9,184 Memetheory,18,77 Metzel,Tabea,177 Meynell,Katharine,45–6,147 Millar,Jeremy,7 Miners’Tapes(1984,Stubbs, DenningandRushton),118 Mitchell’sDeath(1976,Linda Montano),45 Monitor1(1974,StevePartridge),28 Monodramas(1991,StanDouglas), 102 Montano,Linda,9,45 MoonistheOldestTV(1965,Nam JunePaik),26 Mori,Marceline,88 Morman,Charlotte,144 MouthtoMouth(1996,Smithand Stewart),185–7 Murphy,Charlie,152 Mulvey,Laura,58,78,80,113,168 MuybridgeRevisited(1988,George Snow),125 N NantesTriptych(1992,BillViola), 72
I N D E X • 211 Nash,Mark,175 Nate,G-StreetLive(1992,Larry King),183 Nation’sFinest,The(1990,Keith Piper),60 Nauman,Bruce,11,30,87 Neshat,Shirin,176–7 News,The(1980,IanBreakwell), 97–8 NewYorkConversations(1990, VivienneDick),130 Nochlin,Linda,70 Normopaths(1995,Janeand LouiseWilson),166 Nunavut(OurLand)(1994–1995, ZachariasKunuk),178–9 O O’Doherty,Brian,161 O’Pray,Mike,163 ObsessiveBecoming(1995,Dan Reeves),88,125 Ono,Yoko,14 Oursler,Tony,142,148,151,156 Orlan,180–1 OutofBlue(2002,Zarina,Bhimji), 177–8 OverOurDeadBodies(1991,Stuart Marshall),66 P Palestine,Charlemagne,129 Paik,NamJune,4–5,15,21,25–7, 33,35–6,107,119,142, 143–4,146 Pane,Gina,180 Parker,Jayne,50–1,52,55 Parker,Rozsika,48,72 Parmar,Pratibha,43,59 Parsberg,Cecilia,166 Partridge,Stephen,28,134,147 PassionRation(1984,Zoe Redman),130 Pedagogue(1988,StuartMarshall, withNeilBartlett),62 PeepingTom(2000,MarkLewis), 169–70 Perée,Rob,138 PerfectLives(PrivateParts)(1983– 1984,RobertAshley),126 performanceart,6,8;atthe extremes,179–81; VienneseAktionists,180 PerpetualMotion(1994,Chris Meigh-Andrews),184 Peters,Leslie,183
Phelan,Peggy,48,49,52,53, 64,162 PictorialHeroes,74 PiecesINeverDid(1979,David Critchley),84 Piper,Keith,59–60 PirrieAdams,Kathleen,160 Plunderphonics,183 PointofLight(1963,NamJune Paik),26 Pollock,Griselda,48,52,72,174 PortraitofShobanaJeyasingh (1991,MartySt.Jamesand AnneWilson),145 Positiv(1997,MikeHoolboom),66 Potter,Sally,39 Prometheus.GreekPieceno.3 (1975,JochenGerz),27 PropositionisaPicture,A(1992, SteveHawley),84 Pryings(1971,VitoAcconci),74 pseudo-soaps,187–8 Pursuit,Fear,Catastrophe:Ruskin, B.C.(1993,StanDouglas), 183 R Raban,William,79 Redman,Zoe,130,135 Reeves,Dan,16,19,38,88,125,128 ReflectingPool,The(1980,Bill Viola),126 relationalart,191,192 RemembranceofThingsFast(1996, JohnMaybury),185 Richardson,Tasman,183–4 Ridley,Anna,136 Rist,Pipilotti,164–5 RobertMarshall(1991,Stuart Marshall),66 Robertshaw,Simon,74 Rolfe,Nigel,180 RoomFilm(1973,PeterGidal),79 Rosenbach,Ulrike,10 Rosler,Martha,42,50,142,189 Ross,David,39,41 Roth,Dieter,149 Rottner,Nadia,179 Rush,Michael,172 Rushton,Chris,118 Ryan,Tom,69 Rybczynski,Zbigniew,134,137, 158 S Said,Edward,175
Samadian,Seifollah,177 SandbornandFitzgerald,91,112; andPerillo,126 SariRed(1988,PratibhaParmar), 43,59 Savage,Peter,110 Scarlet-Davis,John,113 Schneemann,Carolee,48,181 Schneider,Ira,15 Schum,Gerry,119 SearchingformyMother’sNumber (2002,SanjaIvekovic´), 173–4 SeasonOutside,A(1997–2002, AmarKanwar),174 Segalove,Ilene,105 Self-Burial(1969,KeithArnatt), 119 SemioticsoftheKitchen(1975, MarthaRosler),42,142 SentimentalJourney(1995, MichaelCurran),166 Serra,Richard,2,99 Sherman,Cindy,163 Sherman,Tom,104,126,129,154, 175,190,193 Siegel,Eric,33 SickasaDog(1989,IanBourn), 104–5 Siden,Ann-Sofi,155,173 Sierra,Santiago,162 SituationEnvisaged:TheRiteII,The (1989,DavidHall),146 SkyTV(1966,YokoOno),14 SlowlyTurningNarrative(1992, BillViola),154 Smith,Stephanie,166 SmithandStewart,145–6,185–6 SmotheringDreams(1981,Dan Reeves),38 Snow,George,125 Snow,Michael,10,28,78–9 SombraySombra(1988,Dan Reeves),128 Sontag,Susan,162 SonyPortapak,3,4,19 SonySeries5editsuite,90,118 Sorin,Pierrick,191 Spender,Dale,77 SlutsandGoddesses(1994,Annie Sprinkle),181–2 Spero,Lawrence,15 Sprinkle,Annie,181–2 Stallabrass,Julian,158,175,189 StampingtheStudio(1968,Bruce Nauman),30
2 1 2 • V I D E O A R T, A G U I D E D T O U R Stansfield,Elsa,57,149 Starr,Georgina,188 StateofDivision(1979,Mick Hartney),69–70,144–5 Steele,Lisa,43 Stewart,Nick,181–2 St.James,Marty,16,99,145 Stoneman,Rod,79,110,121,131, 136,138 Stones,Andrew,74 Stubbs,Mike,18,73,74,118 SUB/EXTROSandHALF/LIVES (2001,TomSherman),190 Sufferance,The(1993,LeiCox),88 Sweatlodge(1991,MikeStubbs, withManAct),73
TradeWinds(1992,KeithPiper),59 TransitBar(1994,VeraFrenkel), 149 TricolourVideo(1982,NamJune Paik),146 TroutDescendingaStaircase(1987, SteveHawley),83 TVasaFireplace(1969,Jan Dibbets),142 TVBraforLivingSculpture(1969, NamJunePaikand CharlotteMorman),144 TVBuddha(1974,NamJune Paik),142 TVDecollages,(1960s,Wolf Vostell),25
T TableRuin(2002,DieterRoth),147 TallShips(1992,GaryHill),152–3 Tango(1983,Zbigniew Rybczynski),134,137 Tatti,Ben,28 Taylor-Wood,Sam,11,20,153,163 Technology/Transformation: WonderWoman(1978– 1979,DaraBirnbaum),108 television:andartists’video, 119–40;commercials, 100–1;consumerism, 99;conventions,91,98; deconstruction,93–116; documentary,103–4;and domesticity,122–3;outside broadcast,105–7;reality, 98,188–9 TelevisionDeliversPeople(1973, RichardSerra),99 Théberge,Pierre,28 ThereisaMyth(1984,Catherine Elwes),46–7,49 ThisisaTelevisionReceiver (1971–1976,DavidHall), 31–2,98,121 Thissentenceisn’tworking(1990, StevenPartridge),134 Thriller(1979,LauraMulvey),113 Tickner,Lisa,52 TimeZone(1980,IraSchneider), 15 Tooba(2002,ShirinNeshat),176 Touchscreen(1987,ClausBlume), 124
U UnassembledInformation(1977, TamaraKrikorian),57 unifiedsubject,76–7 V Vasulka,WoodyandSteina,14, 34–5,150,184 VerticalRoll(1972,JoanJonas),30 video:andtheartmarket,116; castratingthegaze,92–3; distribution,117–18;asa documentofperformance 9–12;feedback,16–17, 28;andtheInternet, 189–91;liverelay,14;new narrative,81–95;‘New Wave’,108;portraiture, 163–4;recombinant,172, 183–4;scratch,73,107–15; sculpture,124,142–57; andsociety3–5;specificity ofthemedium,23–36;on television,117–40;time frame,14–16;voice-over, 54–7 videoperformance,150 VideoPingPong(1974,Ernst Caramelle),148 videowall,147–8 Viola,Bill,11,20,71–2,126–8, 130,143,154,157,188 ViolinPower:ThePerformance (1992topresent,Steina Vasulka),34 Vostell,Wolf,24,107
VitalStatisticsoftheAverage CitizenSimplyObtained (1977,MarthaRosler),50 W Wades,The,191 Wall-FloorPositions(1968,Bruce Nauman),11 Wallinger,Mark,156–7 war,37–9 WarteMal!(2002,Ann-SofiSiden), 155–6,173 Warwick,Maggie,82 Wearing,Gillian,87,164,185,188 Wegman,William,100–1 WehavefunDrawingConclusions (1981,SteveHawley),70–1 Welsby,Chris,79,171 Welsh,Jeremy,72–3,91,103,106, 111,112–13,116,160 WesternDeep(2002,Steve McQueen),177 WhatDoYouThinkHappenedto Liz?(1980,AlexMeigh), 142 WhiteOut(2002,JeremyWelsh),103 WhiteStation,The(1999,Seifollah, Samadian),177 Whydothingsgetinamuddle? (1984,GaryHill),30,134 Wilcox,Mark,93–4,97 Williams,Raymond,106 Wilson,Anne,99,145 Wilson,JaneandLouise,166 WithChild(1983,Catherine Elwes),93 deWitt,Helen,126 WomanfromMalibu(1976,Colin Campbell),64–5 WorldPeaceThruFreeTrade(1989, JohnButler),102 WoundsandOtherAbsentObjects (1996,AnishKapoor),124 WynEvans,Cerith,62–3 Wyver,John,121,138,139 Y yBas,159–61 Young,Graham,132–3 Z ZenforTV(1963,NamJune Paik),25